JP7476047B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to create an advantageous state for the player.

Some conventional gaming machines are capable of displaying a specific display (a reserved display or an active display) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the game ball entering the starting area) on a display means, and of executing a look-ahead prediction that suggests that a variable display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition will be controlled to an advantageous state before the variable display starts, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Furthermore, some conventional gaming machines are capable of executing a look-ahead prediction (specific light-emitting effect) by illuminating a light-emitting means provided in the gaming machine (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-105941 A

However, in Patent Document 1, depending on the timing when the display of the specific display starts and the timing when the specific light-emitting effect starts, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect. Furthermore, in Patent Document 1, for example, there is a risk that the specific light-emitting effect cannot be ended normally due to the generation of static electricity, which may cause a sense of discomfort.

The present invention has been made in response to such problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that makes it easier for players to recognize the specific display that is the target of a specific light-emitting effect, and that reduces the sense of discomfort that may be felt when the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect does not end normally.

(A) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means;
A display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
A performance execution means is provided for executing a specific display performance for displaying the specific display and a specific light emission performance for causing the light emission means to emit light based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The light emission control means
When the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for moving the movable body;
When an error occurs, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for errors;
When an error occurs while controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for errors, and time data set in the luminance data table for moving the movable body is updated;
the effect execution means causes the light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect before the display of the specific display is completed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition;
The rate at which the specific light-emitting performance is controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting performance is executed than when the specific light-emitting performance is not executed,
The specific light-emitting performance is a performance in which, during a first period from when the specific light-emitting performance is started to a predetermined timing, the light-emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that is a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance, and during a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of a variable display that is a target of the specific light-emitting performance, the light-emitting means emits light in a specific manner that is less emphasized than the predetermined manner,
The specific timing is a timing prior to a timing at which a variable display result in the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is derived.
It is characterized by the following.
Furthermore, (1) a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
In a first epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be performed in the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be performed to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
an average time from when one piece of luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until when it is switched to the next piece of luminance data is set shorter than an average time from when one piece of luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until when it is switched to the next piece of luminance data;
The introduction part includes a first introduction part and a second introduction part different from the first introduction part,
moreover,
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., a hold display and an active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific display presentation (e.g., a portion that displays a reserved display or an active display in one of display patterns α to γ) that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., the occurrence of a start winning), and a specific light emission presentation (e.g., a flash presentation at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that the light emitted by the light-emitting means is recognizable to the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Figs. 283-28, 283-29(A) to 283-32(H), and 283-49(A) to 283-50(D), a portion that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F before the display of the pending display is completed),
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting effect is executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g., a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The first light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during a first period from the start of the specific light-emitting performance to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the early-stage winning flash performance to the end timing of the early-stage winning flash performance) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance (for example, a period from the start of the late-stage winning flash performance to the start timing of the reach performance of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance) (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early-stage winning flash performance, and flashes with brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the late-stage winning flash performance).
The second light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flash with brightness C2 and cycle T0 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the notification effect can be executed with suitable brightness control, which enhances interest. Furthermore, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, and since the specific light emitting effect can be made more prominent by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period of the specific light emitting effect, the player can more easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect.

In addition, the form for implementing the invention described below includes an invention relating to the following means (A). As shown in JP 2016-105941 A, there have been gaming machines that, when a predetermined condition (entry of the gaming ball into the starting area) is met, display a specific display (a reserved display or an active display) based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition on a display means, and can also execute a look-ahead prediction that suggests that the variable display based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition will be controlled to an advantageous state even before the variable display starts, as a target. Furthermore, there are gaming machines that can execute a look-ahead prediction (specific light-emitting effect) by illuminating a light-emitting means provided in the gaming machine.

However, depending on the timing when the display of the specific display starts and the timing when the specific light-emitting effect starts, it may become difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect.

This invention was made with an eye on these problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that makes it easier for players to recognize the specific display that is the target of a specific light-emitting effect.

The gaming machine of the means (A) comprises:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., a hold display and an active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific display presentation (e.g., a portion that displays a reserved display or an active display in one of display patterns α to γ) that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., the occurrence of a start winning), and a specific light emission presentation (e.g., a flash presentation at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that the light emitted by the light-emitting means is recognizable to the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Figs. 283-28, 283-29(A) to 283-32(H), and 283-49(A) to 283-50(D), a portion that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F before the display of the pending display is completed),
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting effect is executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g., a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The first light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during a first period from the start of the specific light-emitting performance to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the early-stage winning flash performance to the end timing of the early-stage winning flash performance) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance (for example, a period from the start of the late-stage winning flash performance to the start timing of the reach performance of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance) (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early-stage winning flash performance, and flashes with brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the late-stage winning flash performance).
The second light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flash with brightness C2 and cycle T0 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light-emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, making it easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect, and during the first period of the specific light-emitting effect, not only the first light-emitting means but also the second light-emitting means are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect, making the specific light-emitting effect stand out more, making it even easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a rear perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a frame lamp. A diagram to explain the special pattern LED board, the fourth pattern unit, and the relationship between the fourth pattern unit and the game effect lamp. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device. A diagram to explain the various boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. A diagram to explain the types of wins. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining each random number. A diagram to explain the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a performance control command. A diagram to explain an example of a front fluctuation pattern on the main side. A figure to explain an example of a subsequent fluctuation pattern on the main side. A diagram to explain the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table when a miss occurs. This is a diagram to explain the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. 13 is a diagram for explaining the previous fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. A diagram to explain an example of a total fluctuation pattern on the main side. A figure for explaining an example of lottery for effect patterns on the sub side. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during a jackpot opening. A flowchart showing an example of processing after a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of presentations. This is a diagram to explain the relationship before and after the decision on whether or not to win, the SP first half reach A jackpot, and the SP final reach jackpot. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the starting part. This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenarios of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocation part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the reel operation part (late development of SP). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocation part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the teasing part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the teasing part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and the losing epilogue part (SP final reach). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a relief part. A diagram to explain the scenario of the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the re-selection part (deriving an odd number pattern after a button is operated) and the fanfare part. This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the re-selection part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation) and the fanfare part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism for outputting to an LED driver. 13 is a diagram for explaining the lighting mode of a game effect lamp. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the lighting mode of a game effect lamp. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the reel operation part (when the SP develops in the latter half). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP final reach). 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the rescue hit part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the rescue hit part. FIG. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving an odd number pattern after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving an odd number pattern after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving an odd number pattern after button operation). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the fanfare part. A figure to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation). A figure to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation). A figure to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the fanfare part. A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b11) to (b13). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a volume level. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a volume level. A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (r24) to (r27). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (r28) to (r31). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (r32) to (r35). A detailed explanatory diagram of the role movements in (b18) to (i1). A detailed explanatory diagram of the role movements in (b18) to (i1). A detailed explanation of the reel action in (r54) to (s4). A detailed explanation of the reel action in (r54) to (s4). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. FIG. 2 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (A1) to (A23). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (A24) to (A46). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b4) to (b6) and a comparison diagram during the jackpot round. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transparency of subtitles for dialogue and sound output. FIG. 13 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) and a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitles. FIG. 11 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (B4) to (B11). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the pattern display. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of re-drawing. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of re-drawing. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of re-drawing. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of re-drawing. FIG. FIG. 2 is a detailed explanatory diagram of a blackout. 13A to 13C are detailed explanatory diagrams of the game effect lamp when a miss occurs and diagrams for explaining modified examples when a miss occurs. FIG. 13 is a detailed explanatory diagram of part (r48). 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used for a start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the start part. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of SP Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of the SP Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of SP Reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of the SP Reach B. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the reel operation part during the latter half of a SP development. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach A. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of SP Reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the promotion part of the SP final reach. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP final reach. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP final reach. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the missed epilogue part of the SP final reach. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a part per relief; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used in the re-lottery part. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (before operation promotion). FIG. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-drawing part (pattern promotion after operation promotion). A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-drawing part (maintaining the pattern after operation promotion). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the fanfare part. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for a role lamp and a grandchild table for a left panel lamp in a smooth rainbow brightness data table. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for an Attacka lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the reel operation red flashing brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a white blinking (white flash) brightness data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a feature lamp in a common red cut-in brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a board left lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a feature lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a non-operation prompting tilt brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table and the operation promotion brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the shutter luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the miss luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table per repair; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table per repair; 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a hit-determined brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a hit-determined brightness data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the re-drawing performance brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the re-drawing performance brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a background luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a comparison of lamp control when a win occurs and when a miss occurs. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a comparison of lamp control when a win occurs and when a miss occurs. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a comparison of lamp control when a win occurs and when a miss occurs. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the swinging pattern of the pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-selection presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-selection presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-selection presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table; FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko game machine. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control data retention area. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a data holding area for performance control, (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer received at the time of start winning, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of an active display buffer. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. This figure shows whether or not a pending display preview is executed as a preview, and the decision ratio of the display pattern. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a specific display start performance execution process. A figure showing the presentation mode of specific display start presentation A. A figure showing the presentation mode of specific display start presentation B. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a flash effect execution process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a flash effect execution process when a prize is won. An explanatory diagram showing the presentation modes of the flash presentation when an early prize is won and the flash presentation when an late prize is won. A diagram showing the execution rate of flash effects when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. (A) is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp turned off. This is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp lit at a low brightness (C2), and a front view of a pachinko gaming machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp when the game effect lamp is lit at a low brightness. This is a timing chart showing the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound when a start winning occurs that is the subject of the winning flash effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp and the start port lamp, and the display of the effect image and silhouette image. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This is a timing chart showing the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound when a start winning occurs that is the subject of the winning flash effect in the modified example, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the starting port lamp, and the display of the effect image and silhouette image. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of lighting of the winning flash lamp, game effect lamp and starting gate lamp, display of the effect image and silhouette image, and operation of the movable body in the modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of displaying the winning flash lamp and silhouette image in the modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of operation of the winning flash lamp and the movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing the determination ratio of the timing at which the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp changes. FIG. A diagram showing the display modes of the pending display and active display in the modified example, the suggested contents of each display mode, and the selection ratio when deciding to execute the slash performance when a winning combination is won. A figure showing the presentation patterns for pending display and active display when a flash presentation is executed when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation patterns for pending display and active display when a flash presentation is executed when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation patterns for pending display and active display when a flash presentation is executed when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example.

<Composition of pachinko machines, etc.>
Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. Fig. 1 shows the layout of the main components of a pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine. The pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the game is played by displaying special symbols in a variable manner. The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. The variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

In addition, two types of special symbols are provided as special symbols that are variably displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also called the "first special symbol" or "first special symbol," and the other special symbol is also called the "second special symbol" or "second special symbol." In addition, a special symbol game using the first special symbol is also called the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also called the "second special symbol game."

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character called Yume Yume-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is depicted. Yume Yume-chan is the main character who appears in the content used by the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, on the game board 2 on the lower right of the image display device 5, a character called Jam-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is depicted. Jam-chan is a character who appears in the content used by the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole (electric chute) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 6). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, equipped with an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 6), and the large winning opening door forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a regular large winning opening) as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A has a large prize opening door in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 2) located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and this large prize opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front sides of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the path for the game ball to the normal large prize opening. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large prize opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large prize opening, and the game ball cannot enter (pass) through the normal large prize opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the large prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large prize opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the regular large prize opening, it is detected by the count switch 23 as it passes through an area provided inside the regular large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 6), a number of game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When a game ball enters the regular large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10. When the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches an upper limit (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the regular large prize opening is controlled to a closed state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V-variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V-variable winning ball device 7B has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 6), and forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a V-large winning opening) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B has a large winning port door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large winning port door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the path for the game ball to the V large winning port. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the off state, the large winning port door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V large winning port, preventing the game ball from entering (passing through) the V large winning port. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the on state, the large winning port door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the V large winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the V large winning port.

The game ball that enters the V large prize opening is detected by the V prize opening switch 24 (see FIG. 6) as it passes through a specific area (also called the V prize opening area) provided inside the V large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the V prize opening switch 24, the game state is controlled to a high probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V prize occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V large prize opening during a round of the high probability game state, and the game state is controlled to a high probability state. The normal high probability prize opening and the V large prize opening are collectively referred to as high probability prize openings. The high probability prize opening is also referred to as an attacca.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

In the pachinko game machine 1, normal symbols are variably displayed as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 to play and output sound effects, etc.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1). The movable body 32 is configured with the character string "POWERFUL II". "POWERFUL II" may be the model name of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be a name representing the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the title of an anime or the name of a singer). The characters attached to the movable body 32 may also represent the name of a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, "Yume Yume" representing the main character Yume Yume-chan). In this embodiment, the model name of the pachinko game machine 1 (Powerful II) is shown on the movable body 32.

In this embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 and a position where it covers (overlaps) the front of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 1. Specifically, the movable body 32 stops at a position where it covers (overlaps) the front of the image display device 5 by causing the letters "POWER II" to fall diagonally (so that the "P" falls downward and the "II" falls upward). The movable body 32 is also referred to as a role-playing object.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area as a control stick that the player can hold and tilt (in the forward, backward, left and right directions, or by pulling it towards the player). Inside the main body of the stick controller 31A, a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 6) is provided that detects the tilting of the control stick. The stick controller 31A also has a built-in vibrator motor (not shown) for vibrating the stick controller 31A. The stick controller 31A is also called a "trigger" because it can be pulled towards the player.

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined command operation by pressing it. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 6).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special symbol LED board 20 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special symbol LED board 20 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. In the special symbol LED board 20, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the type of the special symbol (second special symbol) in the second special symbol game are represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21, for example, as shown in FIG. 4(a) described later, in the special symbol LED board 20, the type of the first special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22, and the type of the second special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22. In this embodiment, the term "lighting mode" is used as a concept that includes lighting, blinking, and extinguishing for various lamps, such as the frame lamp described below.

The pachinko game machine 1 further includes a fourth symbol unit 50 at the bottom left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 50 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies the change in the special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the right-hit display, and the like by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. In the fourth symbol unit 50, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the type of the special symbol (second special symbol) in the second special symbol game are represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by the multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 53, for example, as shown in FIG. 4(b) described later, in the fourth symbol unit 50, the type of the first special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by the multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 54, and the type of the second special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by the multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 54.

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a plurality of lamps (also referred to as game effect lamps) on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a role lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, an attacca lamp 9E provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B, a V attacca lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A, a V lamp 9G that notifies the player that a round of a jackpot game state in which a V big winning hole is open and a V winning can occur, or that a V winning has occurred, an electric chute lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, a stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A, a push button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B, a frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the game machine frame 3, and a frame right lamp 9R provided on the right side of the game machine frame 3. The V lamp may be used to indicate that a jackpot has occurred.

The reel lamp 9A is composed of multiple lamps, namely reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, a component labeled "POWER II" and included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, with reel lamp 9A1 located behind the "P" and "O" parts, reel lamp 9A2 located behind the "W" and "E" parts, reel lamp 9A3 located behind the "R" and "F" parts, and reel lamp 9A4 located behind the "U" and "L" parts. As a result, when reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 light up (emit light) behind the component labeled "POWER II", "POWER II" lights up (emits light).

The left board lamp 9B is made up of multiple lamps, such as left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5. A main character (for example, "Yume Yume", which refers to the main character Yume Yume-chan) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 is depicted on the left side of the game board 2, and the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are each positioned behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted. As a result, when the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (emit light) behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted, the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted lights up (emits light).

The attacca lamp 9E is located on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, when the attacca lamp 9E lights up (emits light) on the back side of the game board 2, it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7B. In addition, the V attacca lamp 9F is located on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, when the V attacca lamp 9F lights up (emits light) on the back side of the game board 2, it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7A.

The V lamp 9G is located behind the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V". As a result, when the V lamp 9G lights up (emits light) behind the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V", the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V" lights up (emits light). The electric chute lamp 9H is located near the variable winning ball device 6B, and when it lights up (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7B.

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when lit (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the stick controller 31A. The push button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and when lit (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the push button 31B.

The left frame lamp 9L is composed of multiple lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp is turned on (lights up), the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on (lights up). The right frame lamp 9R is composed of multiple lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp is turned on (lights up), the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on (lights up). The left frame lamp 9L and the right frame lamp 9R are collectively referred to as frame lamps. The role lamp 9A, the left board lamp 9B, the attacca lamp 9E, the V attacca lamp 9F, the V lamp 9G, the electric chute lamp 9H, the stick controller lamp 9J, the push button lamp 9K, the left frame lamp 9L, and the right frame lamp 9R are collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment. The main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 (see Figure 6).

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 6) is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the gaming board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

Figure 3 is a diagram for explaining the frame lamps. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps, frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12, arranged counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L lights up or blinks each of the multiple lamps (12 lamps in this example), causing the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 to glow. Meanwhile, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of 11 lamps, frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12, arranged clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R lights up or blinks each of the multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example), causing the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to glow.

4 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol LED board 20 and the fourth symbol unit 50. As shown in FIG. 4(a), the special symbol LED board 20 includes a special symbol 1 variable display section 21 showing the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 22 showing the variable display of the second special symbol, a special symbol 1 memory display section 23 showing the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 24 showing the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a regular symbol memory display section 25 showing the regular symbol reserved memory number, a regular symbol display section 26 showing the variable display of the regular symbol, a right-hit display section 30 encouraging the player to hit right, a probability-change display section 28 showing the presence or absence of a probability-change state, a time-saving display section 29 showing the presence or absence of a time-saving state, and a round display section 27 showing the number of rounds of the jackpot. Each display unit can inform the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special or normal symbols, the results, the current game status, the number of reserved symbols, etc., by lighting or blinking with a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

Furthermore, the special chart LED board 20 can prompt the player to make a right hit by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 30. In this embodiment, when the player is prompted to make a right hit, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 30 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to make a right hit, that is, when the player is prompted to make a left hit, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 30 turns off. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right hit display lighting designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns on the right hit display unit 30, and after the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, it transmits a right hit display turning off designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right hit display unit 30. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right-hit display unit 30 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right-hit display unit 30.

Here, right-hand hit refers to operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the second flow-down path, which is one of the first and second flow-down paths through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. The first flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the left area of the game area, and beyond which there is a first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, but there is no second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. The second flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the right area of the game area, and beyond which there are a second start winning hole and a large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows toward the first start winning hole through the first flow-down path. When a player shoots a game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path and flows toward the second start winning hole or the big winning hole (normal big winning hole, V big winning hole).

In this embodiment, in the jackpot game after the occurrence of a jackpot, and in the game state after the jackpot game (time-saving state or probability variable state), the player hits the right to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole or the large winning hole provided on the right side of the game area, and during that time, the right-hit display unit 30 urges the player to hit the right. By hitting the right while the display urging the player to hit the right is being displayed, the player can make the game ball enter the second start winning hole and a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and can obtain the right to play the second special game, or can make the game ball enter the normal large winning hole and a predetermined number (for example, ten) of prize balls are paid out. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, during the round of the probability variable jackpot, the V large winning hole is opened, but the player can also hit the right while the display urging the player to hit the right is being displayed to make the game ball enter the V large winning hole and obtain the right to be controlled in the probability variable state. Therefore, by hitting to the right while a display is being displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right, the player may gain an overall advantage. Note that, unlike hitting to the right, operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the first flow path (hitting style) is also called hitting to the left.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), the fourth symbol unit 50 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 51 that indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 52 that indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a special symbol 1 variable display section 53 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 54 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a right hit display section 55 that encourages the player to hit to the right. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of a special symbol, the reserved number, and a right hit instruction by lighting/blinking/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 53 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 54 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

In the following, the display of the change in the stopped pattern of the first special pattern by lighting means such as LEDs in the special pattern 1 variable display unit 21 and the special pattern 1 variable display unit 53 is also referred to as the change display (variable display) of the first special pattern. Also, the display of the change in the stopped pattern of the second special pattern by lighting means such as LEDs in the special pattern 2 variable display unit 22 and the special pattern 2 variable display unit 54 is also referred to as the change display (variable display) of the second special pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 55 is turned off. The performance control CPU 120 turns on the right hit display unit 55 based on receiving a right hit display lighting command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined, and turns off the right hit display unit 55 based on receiving a right hit display turning off command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to the high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right hit display unit 55 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right-hit display unit 55 based on receiving a jackpot end command from the CPU 103.

Figure 4 (c) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fourth symbol unit and the game effect lamp. In the pachinko game machine 1, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a front fluctuation pattern command and a rear fluctuation pattern command, or a symbol determination command, among the performance control commands, the fourth symbol unit 50 and the game effect lamp are made to differ in whether or not they switch their lighting state, such as on/blinking/off. The front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are commands output from the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, which will be described later, to the performance control CPU 120 of the performance control board 12, and the front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are output from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120 as a set. Hereinafter, the front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are collectively referred to as fluctuation pattern commands.

Specifically, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command from the CPU 103, it changes the lighting state of the LEDs (the special symbol 1 variable display 53 and the special symbol 2 variable display 54) in the fourth symbol unit 50. For example, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol game from the CPU 103, it switches the lighting state of the special symbol 1 variable display 53 from off, which indicates that the first special symbol has stopped, to blinking, which indicates that the first special symbol is varying, based on the received variation pattern command. Also, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol game from the CPU 103, it switches the lighting state of the special symbol 2 variable display 54 from off, which indicates that the second special symbol has stopped, to blinking, which indicates that the second special symbol is varying, based on the received variation pattern command.

On the other hand, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command from the CPU 103, it does not change the lighting state of the LEDs (frame lamps, etc.) in the game effect lamp, but maintains the lighting state before receiving the variation pattern command.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103, it changes the lighting state of the LEDs (the special pattern 1 variable display 53 and the special pattern 2 variable display 54) in the fourth pattern unit 50. For example, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103 that specifies the end of the pattern variation in the first special pattern game, it switches the lighting state of the special pattern 1 variable display 53 from blinking, which indicates the variation of the first special pattern, to off, which indicates the stop of the first special pattern, based on the received pattern determination command. In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103 that specifies the end of the pattern variation in the second special pattern game, it switches the lighting state of the special pattern 2 variable display 54 from blinking, which indicates the variation of the second special pattern, to off, which indicates the stop of the second special pattern, based on the received pattern determination command.

On the other hand, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103, it does not change the lighting state of the LEDs (frame lamps, etc.) in the game effect lamp, but maintains the lighting state before the pattern determination command was received.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the state of the lamp (LED) in the fourth pattern unit 50 changes in response to receiving a variation pattern command or a pattern determination command. In contrast, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the state of the lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is maintained before and after receiving the command, regardless of whether the variation pattern command or the pattern determination command has been received. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the state of the game effect lamp 9 in response to receiving a variation pattern command. For example, when the game state changes from the normal state to the time-saving state after a jackpot, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the state of the game effect lamp 9 from the lighting state of the normal state to the lighting state of the time-saving state in response to receiving a variation pattern command that starts the time-saving state.

Figure 5 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen in the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 is used to display images such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a first pending memory display area 5D capable of displaying the first pending memory number by the number of circular pending displays, a second pending memory display area 5U capable of displaying the second pending memory number by the number of circular pending displays, and an active display area 5A for displaying the pending display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as the active display.

A fourth pattern 5J is displayed at the top right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, indicating that the special pattern is being displayed variably. Below the fourth pattern 5J, numbers are displayed indicating the first and second reserved memory numbers. The numbers indicating the reserved numbers indicate the first and second reserved memory numbers on the left and right, respectively. Below the display indicating the reserved numbers, small patterns 5M, which are smaller than each decorative pattern, are displayed. The small patterns correspond to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and are arranged horizontally. The small patterns 5M are also the patterns that are not hidden during the variable display and are always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 5, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is arranged at the right end of the screen of the image display device 5 in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the screen of the image display device 5 is rectangular or nearly rectangular, but the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edges of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, part of the screen of the image display device 5 (especially the edges) cannot be seen or is difficult to see because of the game board 2.

<Board configuration>
6 is a diagram for explaining various boards mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. The various control boards are a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source of 100V AC, such as a commercial power source, can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12, via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 20, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23, V winning switch 24) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81, solenoid 82, or solenoid 83.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image, and supplies brightness data (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the LED driver in order to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The performance control CPU 120 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

As will be described in more detail later, each game effect lamp has a game effect lamp LED board equipped with an LED (lamp) and an LED driver that supplies current to the LED. The LED driver adjusts the current to each LED (lamp) included in the game effect lamp 9 based on brightness data from the performance control CPU 120, thereby turning the game effect lamp 9 on/blinking/extinct. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the turning on/blinking/extinction of the game effect lamp 9.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, and luminance data signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12 and the sound control board 13, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

The fourth pattern unit 50 is connected to the performance control board 12, and each display section can be lit (blinked) under the control of the performance control CPU 120.

<Outline of game progress>
In the pachinko game machine 1 having the above-mentioned configuration, the game proceeds as follows. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started by the special game 1 variable display unit 21 of the special game LED board 20.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special game is started by the special game 2 variable display unit 22 of the special game LED board 20.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (if a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, a "jackpot" occurs when the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 of the special symbol LED board 20 corresponds to a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol, the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot described below). The lighting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) in the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 of the special symbol LED board 20 is also referred to as a "specific display result." In addition, a "loss" occurs when the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 of the special symbol LED board 20 corresponds to a special symbol (loss symbol) different from the jackpot symbol. In addition, the lighting state of the combination of the lighting states of the multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 of the special symbol LED board 20 that corresponds to a special symbol (losing symbol) that is different from the winning symbol is also referred to as the "losing display result."

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot", the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player. It may also be controlled to a small jackpot game state as an advantageous state. A small jackpot is a win in which the number of times the large prize opening is allowed to open is smaller than that of a jackpot. It should be noted that when the small jackpot game state ends, the game state does not change. In other words, there is no transition from a special jackpot state to a normal state or from a normal state to a special jackpot state before or after the small jackpot game state. Also, like the jackpot types, a small jackpot type may be set for a "small jackpot".

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined upper limit number of times (10 times or 7 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, a reach performance is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach state being reached during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko game machine 1, a plurality of types of reach performances are executed in which the rate at which the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) becomes a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) differs according to the performance state. Reach performances include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach that has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach. In addition, the super reach includes the first half of the super reach that ends with the first half of the super reach, the second half of the super reach that develops from the first half of the super reach, and the final reach that develops from the first half of the super reach. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the normal reach. In addition, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. Furthermore, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the final reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach. Note that, below, "Super Reach" is also referred to as "SP Reach," "the first half of the Super Reach" as "SP first half (SP first half reach)," "the second half of the Super Reach" as "SP second half (SP second half reach)," and "the final reach" as "SP final (SP final reach)."

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "jackpot" (the specific display result described above), a confirmed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, the odd numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and the even numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with a non-probability jackpot symbol, a promotion effect that finally results in a "probability jackpot" may be executed. As a promotion effect, for example, a re-lottery effect may be executed to incite whether or not to promote to a probability jackpot symbol after a non-probability jackpot symbol (normal symbol) is temporarily stopped as a jackpot display result. Also, a round promotion effect may be executed during the jackpot game state to promote from a non-probability jackpot to a probability jackpot.

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "miss" (the miss display result described above), the state of the variable display of the decorative patterns does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss", after the state of the variable display of the decorative patterns becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, other effects, such as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect may be executed that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

<Various tables related to jackpots>
Various tables relating to big wins will be described with reference to Figures 7 and 8.

[Winning Type]
7 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning. As shown in FIG. 7, the winning type table shows the probability of winning after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot for each type (kind) of winning in the jackpot.

Specifically, there are three types of jackpots: normal jackpot 1 and 2, and special jackpot 1 to 9. In the following, each round may be indicated with the letter "R." For example, the first round is also called the 1st round, and the second round is also called the 2nd round.

Normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of a 3-round jackpot game state. In normal jackpot 1, this low probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

Normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of three rounds. In normal jackpot 2, this low probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of three rounds of jackpot play. In variable jackpot 1, this high probability, high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot 6 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the probability of a jackpot 6, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of 7 rounds. In the probability of a jackpot 7, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot being 8 or 9 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In the probability of a jackpot being 8 or 9, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Random numbers]
Fig. 8 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in Fig. 8, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random 1 is a random counter for determining whether or not a jackpot has been reached. Random 1 is, for example, incremented by one from 1 until it reaches its upper limit of 65536, after which it is incremented again from 1. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of jackpot) that determines the type of jackpot.

Random 3 and Random 4 are random counters (for determining the later fluctuation pattern) that determine the fluctuation pattern (hereafter referred to as the later fluctuation pattern) (fluctuation time) that corresponds to the later fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern. Later fluctuation refers to the latter part of the fluctuation of the special pattern. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the later fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a miss, and for example, is updated by 1, and is incremented from 1 to its upper limit of 65519, and then is incremented again from 1. Random 4 is a random counter that determines the later fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a win, and for example, is incremented by 1, and is incremented from 1 to its upper limit of 239, and then is incremented again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining a previous fluctuation pattern) that determines the fluctuation pattern (hereafter referred to as a previous fluctuation pattern) (fluctuation time) that corresponds to the previous fluctuation among the fluctuation patterns. A previous fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the special pattern fluctuation. For example, Random 5 is incremented by one from 1 up to its upper limit of 251, and then incremented again from 1. Random 6 is a random counter (for determining a normal pattern hit) that determines whether or not a hit based on a normal pattern will occur. For example, Random 6 is incremented by one from 1 up to its upper limit of 201, and then incremented again from 1.

In this embodiment, whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot determination (Random 1). Then, which of the multiple types of jackpots will be the jackpot is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot type determination (Random 2). At this time, the jackpot pattern can also be determined based on the value of Random 2.

First, the random number for determining the subsequent fluctuation pattern (Random 3, 4) is used to determine the subsequent fluctuation pattern depending on whether the result is a hit or a miss, and then the random number for determining the previous fluctuation pattern (Random 5) is used to determine the previous fluctuation pattern. In this way, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

[Big hit determination table, big hit type determination table]
9 is a diagram for explaining the big win determination table and the big win type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 9 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value that is compared with Random 1 is set. There are two types of jackpot determination tables: a normal (non-high probability) jackpot determination table used in the normal state (a game state that is not in the high probability state, i.e., a non-high probability state), and a high probability jackpot determination table used in the high probability state.

The normal jackpot determination table has jackpot determination values set for the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 9(a), and the special jackpot determination table has jackpot determination values set for the number of determination values listed in the lower column of FIG. 9(a). The special jackpot determination table has a greater number of jackpot determination values than the normal jackpot determination table, as it is a combination of the jackpot determination values common to the normal jackpot determination table and the jackpot determination values specific to the special jackpot state. This means that in the special jackpot state, a jackpot determination is made with a higher probability than in the normal state.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number (Random 1) for determining a jackpot. If the random number value for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 9(a), it decides to determine a jackpot (normal jackpot or special jackpot) for the special symbol. Note that FIG. 9(a) shows the probability (percentage) of a jackpot or the probability (percentage) of a miss.

Figures 9(b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams showing jackpot type determination tables. Figure 9(b) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the first special pattern. Figure 9(c) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the second special pattern.

The first special chart jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(b) is a numerical value to be compared with the Random 2 value for jackpot type determination, and the determination values are set for the number of determination values corresponding to each of normal jackpots 1 and 2 and special jackpots 1 to 4. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(b), for the first special chart, normal jackpot 1 is assigned 25 Random 2 values out of 100, normal jackpot 2 is assigned 25 Random 2 values out of 100, special jackpot 1 is assigned 5 Random 2 values out of 100, special jackpot 2 is assigned 37 Random 2 values out of 100, special jackpot 3 is assigned 4 Random 2 values out of 100, and special jackpot 4 is assigned 4 Random 2 values out of 100.

In the second special symbol jackpot type judgment table in FIG. 9(c), judgment values are set as many as the judgment value numbers corresponding to each of the special jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(c), for the second special symbol, special jackpot 5 is assigned 10 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 6 is assigned 5 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 7 is assigned 5 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 8 is assigned 70 of 100 Random 2 values, and special jackpot 9 is assigned 10 of 100 Random 2 values.

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 2 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 2 matches. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type.

<Performance control command>
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a presentation control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the main control board, transmits various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The presentation control command is, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command form shown in FIG. 10 is an example, and other command forms may be used. Note that, in the following, "(H)" indicates hexadecimal, but may be omitted in this specification.

Command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern (previous variation pattern) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern (XX corresponds to the number of the previous variation pattern). The previous variation on the sub side refers to the variation of the first half of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. When a unique number is assigned to each of the multiple types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command that corresponds to each of the previous variation patterns identified by that number.

Command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern (XX corresponds to the number of the post-variation pattern). The post-variation on the sub side refers to the latter half of the variation of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. When a unique number is assigned to each of the multiple types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command that corresponds to each of the post-variation patterns identified by that number.

The front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command are sent as a set from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 cannot identify the variation pattern by receiving only one of the front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command, but can identify the variation pattern by receiving both the front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special symbol. When the performance control CPU 101 receives command 8101 (H) or command 8102 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (miss designation command) indicating that a miss has been determined. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that a normal jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that a normal jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 3 has been determined. Command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 4 has been determined. Command 8C08(H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that probability jackpot 5 has been determined. Command 8C09(H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that probability jackpot 6 has been determined. Command 8C10(H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that probability jackpot 7 has been determined. Command 8C11(H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that probability jackpot 8 has been determined. Command 8C12(H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that probability jackpot 9 has been determined. Each of the miss designation command, normal jackpot 1, 2 designation command, and probability jackpot 1 to 9 designation commands, or these collectively, is also referred to as an 8C series command.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first pattern change designation command that indicates the start of variable display of the first special pattern. Command 8D02 (H) is a second pattern change designation command that indicates the start of variable display of the second special pattern. The first pattern change designation command and the second pattern change designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a pattern confirmation designation command that specifies the end of the variation of the first special pattern and/or the second special pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization command that specifies initialization (specifies that the initial screen at power on is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery command that specifies power outage recovery (specifies that the power outage recovery screen is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state specification command that specifies the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state specification command that specifies the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a special-variable state specification command that specifies the background of the special-variable state. The normal state specification command, time-saving state specification command, and special-variable state specification command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 95 series commands or background specification commands.

Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command that designates a transition to a customer waiting demonstration display. The performance control CPU 120 determines that there is no currently reserved ball due to the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command. Then, 30 seconds after the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a video for demonstration on the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a lamp mode for demonstration 30 seconds after the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 for demonstration is more lively (high brightness, more flashing modes, rainbow lighting, etc.) than the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 in the normal state. This allows the appeal of the pachinko game machine 1 to be shown to the player. In the customer waiting demonstration display, the background in the normal state (hereinafter also referred to as the normal background) is displayed, and the decorative patterns are displayed stopped in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R. In addition, during the demonstration display while waiting for customers, the title of the gaming machine 1 (for example, "POWER II") may be displayed, or an introductory image (still image or video) of part of the presentation may be displayed.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 1. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 2. Command A003 (H) is a special jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 1. Command A004 (H) is a special jackpot start 4 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 2. Command A005 (H) is a special jackpot start 5 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 3. Command A006 (H) is a special jackpot start 6 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 4. Command A007 (H) is a special jackpot start 7 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 5. Command A008 (H) is a special jackpot start 8 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 6. Command A009 (H) is a special jackpot start 9 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 7. Command A010 (H) is a special jackpot start 10 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 8. Command A011 (H) is a special jackpot start 11 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start 1-11 commands, or all of them collectively, are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying when the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A1 series command. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying after the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is closed for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying after the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that specifies the end of normal jackpot 1. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that specifies the end of normal jackpot 2. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 1. Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 2. Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 4. Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 5. Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 6. Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 7. Command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 8. Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1-11 commands, or all of them collectively, are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command that specifies that a V win has occurred. The high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V large winning port enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

Command B100(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command B200(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved memory number designation command that designates that the first reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second reserved memory designation command that designates that the second reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C2 series command.

Commands C4XX(H) and C6XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, a jackpot type judgment, and a variation pattern type judgment, when a starting winning is made at the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port. Of these, command C4XX(H) is a design designation command that indicates the winning judgment results, such as whether or not a winning will occur and the type of jackpot.

C7XX(H) is a special prize opening entry designation command that indicates the passage of the game ball through the special prize opening on the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-hit display off command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned off. A command in which MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT data is 1 is a right-hit display on command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned on. In this embodiment, the right-hit display on command is also referred to as an FD command.

At the time of start winning, the game control microcomputer 100 judges whether or not a jackpot will be reached, the type of jackpot, and the range of judgment values for the value of the random number for judging the type of fluctuation pattern. Then, a value specifying a jackpot and a value specifying the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the designation command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The game control microcomputer 100 also sets a value specifying the range of judgment values as the judgment result of the type of fluctuation pattern in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the designation command, and can recognize the type of fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type command.

<Fluctuation pattern>
The contents of the fluctuation patterns and how the fluctuation patterns are determined will be described with reference to Figures 11 to 17.

In this embodiment, multiple types of variation patterns are set by the main game control microcomputer 100. Each variation pattern is managed by a main variation number and is composed of a combination of a front variation pattern that is a variation pattern corresponding to a front variation and a back variation pattern that is a variation pattern corresponding to a back variation, and each combination contains different contents. The front variation pattern corresponds to the front variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described using FIG. 10, and the back variation pattern corresponds to the back variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described using FIG. 10.

[Main side front fluctuation pattern]
11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a previous fluctuation pattern on the main side. Among the multiple types of previous fluctuation patterns each assigned with a previous fluctuation number, previous fluctuation number 1 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 13 seconds). Previous fluctuation number 2 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8001 (H)) that specifies a shortened fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 7 seconds). Previous fluctuation number 3 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8002 (H)) that specifies a super shortened fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 3 seconds).

Previous change number 4 is a previous change pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (normal or SP first half) (a reach that ends in a normal reach or SP first half reach after entering a reach state). Previous change number 5 is a previous change pattern command (8004 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (SP second half development) (a reach that develops into an SP second half reach after entering a reach state). Previous change number 6 is a previous change pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (a reach that develops into a final reach after entering a reach state).

Previous variation number 7 is a previous variation pattern command (8006(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (normal or SP first half) is executed after one pseudo variation. A pseudo variation is a variable display (variable display) in which the variable display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and then resumed from the start of the variable display (variable display) until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. Such a performance in which pseudo variations are repeated is also called a pseudo consecutive. By executing a pseudo consecutive, a variable display based on one reserved memory can be made to look like multiple variable displays to the player in a pseudo manner. Note that a variable display that is temporarily stopped and then resumed is also called a "re-variable display". Previous variation number 8 is a previous variation pattern command (8007(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (SP second half development) is executed after one pseudo variation. Previous variation number 9 is a previous variation pattern command (8008(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo variation.

Previous change number 10 is a previous change pattern command (8009(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (normal or first half of SP) is to be executed after two pseudo changes. Previous change number 11 is a previous change pattern command (800A(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (second half of SP development) is to be executed after two pseudo changes. Previous change number 12 is a previous change pattern command (800B(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) after two pseudo changes.

A change time is specified for each previous change pattern, and an animation (video) is displayed on the image display device 5 for each change time. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (called a frame) that makes up the video. For example, for patterns with previous change numbers 7 to 9, the change time is set to 41,500 msec, and the number of frames is about 1,246. For patterns with previous change numbers 10 to 12, the change time is set to 62,000 msec, and the number of frames is about 1,861.

[Main side rear fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-fluctuation pattern on the main side. Among the multiple types of post-fluctuation patterns each assigned with a post-fluctuation number, post-fluctuation number 1 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8400(H)) that specifies a 13-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 2 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8401(H)) that specifies a 7-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 3 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8402(H)) that specifies a 3-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 4 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8403(H)) that specifies the execution of a pseudo consecutive fake. A pseudo consecutive fake is a performance that appears to execute a pseudo consecutive but does not execute the pseudo consecutive after all.

Later change number 5 is a later change pattern command (8404(H)) that specifies a normal reach (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that becomes a reach state but does not develop into an SP reach and becomes a miss state). Later change number 6 is a later change pattern command (8405(H)) that specifies the first half of the SP (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into an SP reach but becomes a miss state in the first half of the SP reach). Later change number 7 is a later change pattern command (8406(H)) that specifies the second half of the SP (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into the second half of the SP reach but becomes a miss state in the second half of the SP reach). Later change number 8 is a later change pattern command (8407(H)) that specifies a final reach (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into a final reach but becomes a miss state in the final reach).

Later change number 9 is a later change pattern command (8408(H)) that specifies a normal reach (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that becomes a reach state and then a hit state). Later change number 10 is a later change pattern command (8409(H)) that specifies the first half of the SP (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into an SP reach and then becomes a hit state in the first half of the SP reach). Later change number 11 is a later change pattern command (840A(H)) that specifies the second half of the SP (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into the second half of the SP reach and then becomes a hit state in the second half of the SP reach). Later change number 12 is a later change pattern command (840B(H)) that specifies a final reach (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into a final reach and then becomes a hit state in the final reach).

[Determination of Later Fluctuation Pattern]
The after-variation pattern is determined by using different random counters depending on whether the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot or a miss in the jackpot determination. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the after-variation pattern determination table in the case of a miss. As shown in FIG. 13, when the jackpot is determined to be a miss in the jackpot determination, the after-variation pattern is determined by using the random 3 described in FIG. 8. Furthermore, when the jackpot is determined to be a miss in the jackpot determination, the after-variation pattern is determined by using different judgment value numbers according to the number of reserved memories after consumption, and the after-variation number determined is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13(a), when the number of reserved memories after consumption is 0, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 1, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. Note that the probability of determining one of the post-change numbers 6 to 8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When there is only one reserved memory after consumption, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 1, 4, and 5-8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability that one of the post-change numbers 6-8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of post-change numbers 6-8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of reserved memories after consumption is two, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 2, 4, and 5-8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability that one of the post-change numbers 6-8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of post-change numbers 6-8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of reserved memories after consumption is three, one of the following change patterns is determined from the following change numbers 3, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is set for each following change pattern. The probability that one of the following change numbers 6 to 8 that develops into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of following change numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

In this way, the subsequent variation pattern is determined using a different judgment value number depending on the number of reserved memories after consumption, and further, the subsequent variation number is determined using a different judgment value number depending on the number of reserved memories after consumption, so the type of variation pattern changes depending on the number of remaining reserved memories, which adds variety to the game and increases the interest of the game.

Figure 14 is a diagram for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. As shown in Figure 14, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using Random 4 described in Figure 8. Furthermore, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using different determination value numbers depending on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(a), when a normal jackpot 1 or 2 or a special jackpot 1, 2, or 5 to 8 is determined, a post-change pattern is determined from post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability of determining one of post-change numbers 10 to 12, which develops into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

If either the guaranteed jackpot 3 or 9 is determined, one of the post-change patterns is determined from the post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value number is set for each of the post-change patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-change numbers 10 to 12 that develop into the SP reach or final reach (selection rate of the post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

If the probability of winning jackpot 4 is reached, one of the post-change patterns is selected from the post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value is set for each of the post-change patterns. The probability of being selected as one of the post-change numbers 10 to 12, which develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

In this way, the subsequent fluctuation pattern is determined using different judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, so the type of fluctuation pattern changes depending on the type of jackpot, which adds variety to the game and makes it more interesting.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, the probability of being determined to be one of the variable numbers 6 to 8 after developing into the SP Reach or Final Reach is approximately 1/102 when there is a miss, but is higher at approximately 1/1.1 when there is a jackpot, so that if there is a development into the SP Reach or Final Reach, the player can be made to expect a jackpot to occur.

[Determination of previous fluctuation pattern]
15 is a diagram for explaining the previous fluctuation pattern determination table. The previous fluctuation pattern is determined by using the number of random 5 determination values that differ according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that is determined first. Furthermore, the previous fluctuation number that is determined also differs according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that is determined first.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(c), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 3 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(d), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 4 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(e), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 5 or 9 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 4 or 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(f), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 6 or 10 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 4, 7, or 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(g), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 7 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 5, 8, or 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(h), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 11 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 5, 8, or 11. As shown in FIG. 15(i), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 8 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 6, 9, or 12. As shown in FIG. 15(j), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 12 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 6, 9, or 12.

[Total variation pattern]
Fig. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total fluctuation pattern on the main side. When the rear fluctuation pattern and the front fluctuation pattern are determined as described in Figs. 13 to 15, the fluctuation pattern becomes one of the main fluctuation patterns 1 to 26 as shown in Fig. 16.

Figure 17 is a diagram for explaining an example of the lottery of a presentation pattern on the sub side. As shown in Figure 17, the presentation control CPU 120 on the sub side determines the presentation pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103 on the main side.

For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 7 to 9 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP first half reach A miss pattern performance described below, or the SP first half reach B miss pattern performance. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 18 to 20 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP first half reach A hit pattern performance described below, or the SP first half reach B hit pattern performance.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 10 to 12 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP second half reach A miss pattern performance described below, or the SP second half reach B miss pattern performance. When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 21 to 23 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP second half reach A hit pattern performance described below, or the SP second half reach B hit pattern performance.

<Operation>
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

[Major operations of main board 11]
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern processing)
18 is a flow chart showing an example of a game control main process. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started up, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 judges whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it is sufficient to judge in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is sufficient to check or inspect the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors, and to judge whether the recovery condition can be satisfied.

When the restoration condition is met (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes a restoration process (step S4) and then executes a setting confirmation process (step S5). The restoration process in step S4 causes the CPU 103 to set a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process (step S6) and then executes a setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by the operation of the ball hitting operation handle 30, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc., are stopped, and control may be performed such that a missing symbol or the like is frozen and a display corresponding to a game stop state other than a missing symbol is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when the power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102, and turns off the display monitor 29. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting confirmation state. When the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or if the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). The CPU 103 then sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

(Game control timer interrupt processing)
Fig. 19 is a flow chart showing an example of a game control timer interrupt process. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flow chart of Fig. 19. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 19 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main side error process to perform an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output process to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots that have occurred), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the special state has been entered) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display unit 26, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting up the normal symbol memory display unit 25.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. The special symbol process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 19. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 19.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (such as whether or not there is a reach), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (such as the type of reach presentation), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process of making settings to change the special pattern in the special pattern 1 variable display section 21 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 22, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes a process for stopping the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22, and setting the special symbol to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability of winning is controlled and the end of the number of times is reached, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The gameplay may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the gameplay state after the jackpot game ends is controlled to a probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V probability of the jackpot type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot is 1/320, and the gameplay state is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called type 1/2 mixed type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but a setting may be set in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the gameplay is changed according to the setting value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a performance switch (a switch for executing a predetermined performance each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability variable state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the start winning judgment process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning judgment process in S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. 20. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (step S51). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step S52). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit not shown, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in step S52 (N in step S52), the storage value of a start port buffer provided in a game control buffer setting section (not shown), for example, is set to "1" (step S53).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step S52 (Y in step S52), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step S54). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit not shown. If the number of reserved second special charts is not the upper limit in step S55 (N in step S55), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (step S56).

After executing either step S53 or step S56, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step S57). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. Also, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory count is also updated to add 1 (step S58). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM 1 for determining a jackpot, the random number value RANDOM 2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number values RANDOM 3 and RANDOM 4 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown) (step S59). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM 1 to RANDOM 4 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit (not shown), while when the start port buffer value is "2", numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM 1 to RANDOM 4 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM1 for determining a jackpot and the random number value RANDOM2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the result of the variable display of the special and decorative patterns is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the result of the variable display is a "jackpot". The random number values RANDOM3 and RANDOM4 for determining the variable pattern are used to determine the variable pattern including the variable display time of the special and decorative patterns. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special and decorative patterns.

Following the processing of step S59, the start port winning designation command is set to be sent according to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is made to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is made to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of step S60, the CPU 103 stores a random number value in a storage area corresponding to the reserved memory (step S61). After that, the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the start winning determination processing. This ensures that even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start winning of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal special symbol processing. As shown in FIG. 22, in the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 judges whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the second special symbol) (step S1001). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (N in step S1001), it judges whether a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (step S1002). If the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step S1002), the normal special symbol processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step S1003), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing is executed after the next timer interruption after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag is set, so that the customer waiting demo designation command is not transmitted again. Such a customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag is reset when the next variable display of the special symbol is started.

When there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines whether the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (step S1004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating "second" (i.e., data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (a flag indicating whether the special pattern process is being performed on the first special pattern or the second special pattern) (step S1005). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special pattern pointer (step S1006).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern and the display of the second special pattern are performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the second special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

By the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the display of the second special symbol changes based on the data in the second reserved memory is executed in priority over the display of the first special symbol changes based on the data in the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command indicated by the special pattern pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (step S1009). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (step S1010), reads out Random R (random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot) from the reserved memory buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot that was extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 8) with the random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot, and if they match, determines that there is a jackpot. In other words, it is a program that executes the process of determining whether or not there is a jackpot.

In the process of determining a jackpot, when the game state is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the game state is in a non-probability variable state (normal game state and time-saving state). Specifically, a probability variable jackpot determination table (table in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 9(a) are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and a normal time jackpot determination table (table in which the numbers in the upper column of FIG. 9(a) are set) in which a smaller number of jackpot determination values are set than in the probability variable jackpot determination table are provided. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the game state is in a probability variable state, and when the game state is in a probability variable state, performs the process of determining a jackpot using the probability variable jackpot determination table, and when the game state is in a normal state or time-saving state, performs the process of determining a jackpot using the normal time jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for determining a jackpot (RANDOM 1) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 9(a), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it determines that a jackpot has occurred (Y in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012. Note that determining whether or not to determine whether or not to determine a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also means determining whether or not to determine whether or not the stopped symbol in the special symbol is a jackpot symbol.

Whether the current game state is in a high probability state is confirmed by checking whether the high probability state flag is set. The high probability state flag is set when the game state transitions to a high probability state, and is reset when the high probability state ends. Specifically, the high probability state flag is set in the process of ending a jackpot game, and is then reset at the timing when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stopped pattern is displayed stationary when either the variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the next jackpot has been determined, whichever occurs first, is met.

If the value of the random number (Random 1) for determining a jackpot does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S1011), proceed to step S1015 described below.

If the value of the random number (RANDOM 1) for determining a jackpot in step S1011 matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step S1012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table to be used to determine the jackpot type as one of the multiple types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(c) are selected. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(b). Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining the type of jackpot extracted during the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and uses the selected jackpot type determination table to determine the type of jackpot and the jackpot pattern that correspond to the value that matches the value of the random number for determining the type of jackpot (Random 2) stored in the reserved memory buffer (step S1013).

The CPU 103 also sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol to be stopped (step S1015). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, the special symbol is set to a "-" symbol, which is a losing symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the special symbol is set to the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 sends a display result designation command (step S1016) and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 23, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on Random 3 and Random 4 according to the number of reserved memories and the presence or absence of a jackpot (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a miss, the CPU 103 selects the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 according to the number of reserved memories, and determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on the selected subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of Random 3. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the CPU 103 selects the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 according to the type of jackpot, and determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on the selected subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of Random 4.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the front fluctuation pattern based on the random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects a front fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15 according to the front fluctuation pattern determined in S1102, and determines the front fluctuation pattern based on the selected front fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of the random 5.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a change pattern command corresponding to the determined change pattern (front change pattern and rear change pattern) to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern in the change time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send a pattern change designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern change process (step S112) (step S1106).

(Special pattern variation processing)
Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in Fig. 24, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step S1203). When the variation time timer does not time out (N in step S1202), the processing ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets an end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and performs control to derive and display the stop symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 or the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 (step S1301). If the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 is ended, and if the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 is ended. In addition, a symbol determination designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol determination designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 judges whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability bonus flag and the time-saving flag (step S1304). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start command and a right-hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1305).

Also, by referring to the opening pattern data stored in ROM 101, data indicating the opening mode of the normal large prize winning port and the V large prize winning port, such as the number of times to open (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval time between rounds (for example, 0.5 seconds), are set in a predetermined memory area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a normal jackpot of 3R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in all of 1 to 3R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. In the case of a jackpot of 5R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in 1 to 3R and 5R, and the V large prize winning port is opened in 4R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a jackpot of 10R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in 1 to 8R and 10R, and the V large prize winning port is opened in 9R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. The data on the number of times it was opened (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening counter to count the number of times it was opened.

The large prize opening control timer is also set to a value equivalent to the fanfare time, which is the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) (step S1307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the large prize opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the large prize opening is opened and the round begins. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the game is in a time-saving state is set (step S1309). If the time-saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the CPU 103 proceeds to the processing of step S1316. If the time-saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the time-saving count counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time-saving state (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (step S1311). If the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (Y in step S1311), the CPU 103 determines that the duration of the time-saving state has ended and resets the time-saving flag (step S1312). As a result, when a fluctuation display that results in a miss display is performed a specific number of times (100 times) in the time-saving state, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. In step S1311, if the time-saving counter value is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not a high probability flag indicating a high probability state is set (step S1313). If the high probability flag is set (Y in step S1313), the high probability flag is reset (step S1314). Next, in response to the game state transitioning from the time-saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1315) and proceeds to step S1316. If the high probability flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process of step S1314 is not performed and the process proceeds to step S1315. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process ends.

(Pre-opening process for big win)
Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening pre-processing. As shown in Fig. 26, in the big win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big win opening control timer by -1 (subtract update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big win opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the big win opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process is terminated.

If the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a command to specify that the large prize opening is open is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the regular large prize opening (step S1404). As a result, the regular large prize opening is opened in the first round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the large prize opening control timer to a large prize opening opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) corresponding to the maximum time that the large prize opening can be opened (large prize opening opening time) based on the opening pattern data (e.g., data stored in RAM 102 by step S1306) (step S1405). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the large prize opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and ends the process.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
27 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening process. As shown in FIG. 27, in the big win opening process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the big win opening control timer (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (step S1502). If the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. If the value of the large prize opening control timer has not reached 0 (N in step S1502), the process determines whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is currently open (step S1503). Whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is currently open can be determined from the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V prize switch 24 is on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is on (Y in step S1504), the prize number counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the high probability determination flag is set (step S1506). The high probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the machine will be controlled to the high probability state when a V win occurs. If the high probability determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the high probability determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step S1507), the high probability determination flag is set (step S1508), a high probability determination device pass command is sent (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning number counter has not reached the predetermined number (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 performs either control to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large prize opening, or control to drive the solenoid 83 to close the V large prize opening (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates (step S1513) the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the post-large prize opening process (step S116), and ends the process.

(Post-opening processing)
28 is a flow chart showing an example of a big win release post-processing. As shown in Fig. 28, in the big win release post-processing, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the opening number counter is 0 or not (step S1601).

If the value of the opening count counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1602), a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (the time at which the jackpot game is notified, for example, on the image display device 5 that the jackpot game has ended) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (step S1603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604), and the process ends.

In step S1601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a command to specify when the large prize opening is to be opened is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the large prize opening control timer is set to a value equivalent to the interval time from the end of a round to the start of the next round (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is before the round in which the V large prize opening is opened (also called the V opening round), i.e., whether or not the next round is a V opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal large prize opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 to open the V large prize opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify whether the jackpot opening is in progress (step S1610). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 29, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer in which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the jackpot control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the jackpot flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the high probability flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the high probability flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. If the high probability flag is set in step S1704 (Y in step S1704), the high probability flag indicating that the game is in a high probability state is set (step S1707). Next, a high probability state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1708), the high probability flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time-saving flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is active (step S1710), and the time-saving count counter is set to 100 (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, if the probability of a bonus has not been set in step S1704 (N in step S1704), then in step S1705, a time-saving flag is set indicating that the game is in a time-saving state (step S1705), the time-saving counter is set to 100 (step S1706), and the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time-saving state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 is able to recognize whether the game is in a special, time-saving, or normal state based on the special state designation command sent from the CPU 103.

[Major operations of the performance control board 12]
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described.

(Performance control main processing)
When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance control main process. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 30 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to emit an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L, 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

(Performance control process)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance control process. The performance control process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 30. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 31, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a judgment, decision, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice performance is performed based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the reserved display is executed based on the reserved memory number specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (lamp control data) to the LED driver, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in Fig. 32, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the result of the variable display is determined to be a miss (step S7101). If it is determined to be a miss, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a command corresponding to a non-reach variable pattern has been received as a variable pattern command (step S7103).

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a command corresponding to a non-reach fluctuation pattern, it uses the data table for determining a losing symbol to determine the display result of a losing symbol that does not result in a reach as the final stop of the performance symbol (step S7105), and proceeds to step S7106.

If the process of step S7103 determines that the pattern is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern (if the pattern is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern), the stopping patterns of the performance patterns that make up the reach pattern combination are determined (step S7104), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Also, if the processing in step S7101 does not determine a miss (if a jackpot is determined), the CPU 101 for controlling the presentation determines the stopping patterns of the presentation patterns that make up the combination of jackpot patterns according to the type of jackpot (step S7102), and proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing the effect setting process (step S7106) for performing processing for setting various effects in the variable display, the process proceeds to step S7107. For example, in the effect setting process of step S7106, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute an effect suggesting a jackpot (inciting whether or not it is a jackpot). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect shown in FIG. 128 (r41) described later as an effect suggesting a jackpot (inciting whether or not it is a jackpot). In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 specifies whether or not it will develop into a final reach based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command, and if it develops into a final reach, specifies whether or not it is a jackpot based on the fluctuation pattern, and determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect based on the result of whether or not it is a jackpot, and if so, the type of cut-in effect (red cut-in effect, green cut-in effect) if executed. When executing a cut-in effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets information for executing the cut-in effect in the effect setting process.

In step S7107, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of multiple types of performance control patterns. In step S7107, depending on the various performance control (performance operation) patterns specified by the variation pattern command and the performance control pattern of the performance determined in the processing of step S7106, one of the multiple types of pattern variation control patterns stored in the pattern variation control pattern table that corresponds to the various specified performance operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

The control pattern table stored in ROM 121 stores multiple types of pattern change control patterns that indicate the control contents of various performance operations, such as the display operation of the changing performance pattern in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from when the change in the performance pattern begins to when the final performance pattern, which is the final stopping pattern, is stopped and displayed, the display operation in a reach performance, the display operation due to a pseudo consecutive performance, and the display operation in a preview performance.

In addition, each pattern change control pattern includes control data for controlling various performance operations according to the display change of the performance pattern, such as a performance control process timer setting value, a performance control process timer judgment value, performance display control data, audio control data, brightness data, and an end code, and the contents of various performance controls and the switching timing of the performance controls are set in chronological order.

Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the processing of step S7109, control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) is started (step S7110) according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, brightness data, sound number data). For example, a command is output to cause the image display device 5 to display an image (including a performance pattern) corresponding to the variable pattern according to the display control execution data. Also, a control signal (lamp control data) is output to the LED driver to control the turning on/off of light-emitting elements such as various LEDs. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step S7112), and the variable display start setting processing ends.

<Details of game progress>
In the pachinko game machine 1 configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the ball from the left to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left side of the game area. When the launched game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started. When the first special symbol game results in the display mode of the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 showing the big win symbol, a big win occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the first special symbol game are normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probability jackpots 1 to 4. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hit promotion effect is executed to encourage the player to make a right hit. The right-hit promotion effect is executed by displaying text (for example, "right hit") and a graphic image (for example, an arrow pointing in the right direction, which is the direction of the second flow path) on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage a right hit, and also by lighting up the right-hit display unit 30 of the special symbol LED board 20 and the right-hit display unit 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 with lighting means such as LEDs to encourage a right hit. This will encourage the player to make a right hit from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot opening is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, three times for a 3R regular jackpot, and ten times for a 10R special jackpot). The jackpot opening is continued until a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), whichever comes first.

When the ending performance following the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times). Furthermore, if a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is controlled to a high probability state for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) of fluctuations while being controlled to the time-saving state.

Even in the special probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round, the right-hit promotion effect continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 30, and the right-hit display unit 55. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also called the first hit) occurs, the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion effect, even in the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the time-saving state, control is performed to shorten the average special chart change time (period during which the special chart changes) compared to the normal state, and control is performed to shorten the average regular chart change time (period during which the regular chart changes) compared to the normal state, and further control is performed to increase the probability of a "regular chart hit" in the regular chart game compared to the normal state. Also, in the time-saving state, electric chute support control may be performed to increase the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B that forms the second start winning port is opened, thereby increasing the frequency at which the game ball enters the second start winning port, making it easier to win in the second start winning port (high entry, high frequency).

In the time-saving state after the jackpot round, the released game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, starting the second special game. If the result of the second special game is that the special game 2 variable display section 22 shows a jackpot pattern, a jackpot (also called a consecutive win) occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the second special game include guaranteed jackpots 5 to 9. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 30, and right-hit display unit 55 continues from the first jackpot.

During a round in which a jackpot game is in progress, the jackpot opening is opened a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times). Each opening of the jackpot opening continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first.

Then, when the ending presentation after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state and the probability variable state (high probability, high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) in the same way as the first hit. Even in the probability variable state after the jackpot round in a consecutive hit, the right-hit promotion presentation continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 30, and the right-hit display unit 55. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, consecutive hits occur in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends, and the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion presentation, even in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends in the consecutive hit.

When the probability variable state or time-saving state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the probability variable state or time-saving state after the first jackpot round ends, or the probability variable state or time-saving state after the consecutive jackpot round ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 30, and right-hit display unit 55 also ends. As a result, the player will again use the left hit to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left area of the game area.

<Flow of the production>
Next, the flow of a series of effects executed in the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of effects. In the pachinko game machine 1, a notification effect is executed from when the variable display starts until the variable display stops. The notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether the variation of the special chart and the decorative pattern stops in a manner indicating a jackpot, that is, whether the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. The notification effect is formed of a plurality of parts of effects, and in this embodiment, includes a start part, an instigation part, a winning epilogue part, a losing epilogue part, a role operation part, a relief winning part, a re-lottery part, and a fanfare part. After the re-lottery part, a fanfare part is executed until the game state transitions to a jackpot game state. The instigation part is also called an introduction part. The winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part are also collectively called an epilogue part.

[Start part]
The start part is a part where the performance corresponding to the previous variation pattern is executed. The start part is also a part that indicates the period from when the variation starts to when the pseudo consecutive or normal reach is executed until the SP reach starts. The start part also includes variations that are not reach misses.

[Inciting part (introduction part)]
The teasing part (introduction part) includes the start of the SP reach (also called super reach) (the start timing of the SP reach title display) to the timing of the branching to a big hit or a miss. The teasing part is a part that teases whether it will be a big hit or a miss depending on the performance that is executed. The teasing part includes a part corresponding to the SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B that is executed after the start part, and a part corresponding to any of the SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach that develop from the SP first half reach. Note that the SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B are sometimes collectively referred to as the SP first half, and the SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach are sometimes collectively referred to as the SP second half.

[Epilogue part]
The epilogue part includes a winning epilogue part which notifies the player that a jackpot display result will be obtained after each promotion part, and a losing epilogue part which notifies the player that a losing display result will be obtained. In the winning epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, a performance is executed based on a story development such that the player is notified that the changing symbols will be a jackpot display result and the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. In the losing epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, a performance is executed based on a story development such that the player is notified that the changing symbols will be a losing display result and the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in the epilogue part, the notification of the jackpot display result may be made by moving the role when the win/loss notification is made after the introduction part, as in the final reach described later, or by the development of a story on the liquid crystal (image display device 5) without using the role, as in the SP reach other than the final reach. Among the epilogue parts, the winning epilogue part that notifies by moving the role is also called the win/loss notification part. Specifically, in the SP first half reach A, B and the SP second half reach A, B, in the epilogue part executed after the introduction part, if a jackpot occurs, the winning epilogue part as described above notifies that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal, and if a jackpot does not occur, the losing epilogue part notifies that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal. The initial story development in the story presentation may suggest whether or not there is a win. On the other hand, in the final reach, in the epilogue part executed after the introduction part, first there is a branch as to whether or not the jackpot game state will be controlled by the operation of the jackpot by the hit/miss notification part (device operation part), and then, if a jackpot occurs, the hit epilogue part as described above notifies that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal, and if a jackpot does not occur, the miss epilogue part notifies that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal. In this way, the hit epilogue part in the final reach includes a hit/miss notification part and a hit epilogue part or a miss epilogue part that comes afterwards.

In addition, in response to SP first half reach A, the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A and the missing epilogue part of SP first half reach A are executed. In response to SP first half reach B, the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B and the missing epilogue part of SP first half reach B are executed. In response to SP second half reach A, the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A and the missing epilogue part of SP second half reach A are executed. In response to SP second half reach B, the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B and the missing epilogue part of SP second half reach B are executed. In response to SP final reach, the winning epilogue part of SP final reach and the missing epilogue part of SP final reach are executed.

[Role actor movement part]
The reel operation part is a part corresponding to the period during which the performance indicating the progression from the first half of the SP to the second half of the SP is executed by operating the movable body 32. The reel operation part is executed after the provocation part of the SP first half reach A or the provocation part of the SP first half reach B. After the reel operation part, either the provocation part of the SP second half reach A, the provocation part of the SP second half reach B, or the provocation part of the SP final reach is executed.

[Relief part]
The rescue hit part is a part where a rescue hit performance is executed that initially appears to be a miss and then suggests a big hit. The rescue hit part may develop from any of the miss epilogue parts of the SP latter half reach A, the miss epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, or the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach.

[Re-draw part]
The re-lottery part is a part executed after the winning epilogue part where the big win display result is displayed. Specifically, the re-lottery performance is executed after the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, and the rescue winning part. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after each winning part (winning epilogue part, rescue winning part), but there may be cases where the re-lottery performance part is not shifted to. For example, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the rescue part, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the winning epilogue part, or the re-lottery part may not be executed when a probability variation pattern (an odd number pattern indicating a probability variation) is derived as the big win display result.

[Relationship before and after the decision]
Next, an example of a case where a series of performances is divided by the timing before and after the hit/miss determination will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after the hit/miss determination, the SP first half reach A big hit, and the SP final reach big hit. Here, the hit/miss determination is a performance that indicates a branch of whether the result is a big hit or a miss display result at the final stage of the hype part. As shown in FIG. 34(A), a series of performances can be divided into parts that are executed before and after the hit/miss determination at the timing before and after the hit/miss determination from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation. The part before the hit/miss determination includes a start part and a hype part. In addition, the part after the hit/miss determination includes an epilogue part (hit, miss), a relief hit part, and a re-draw part.

In this way, the series of effects from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation is made up of multiple parts. Also, the period from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation can be divided into before and after the start of the SP reach (start of post-fluctuation). In such a case, the period before the start of the SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the pre-fluctuation described above, and the period after the start of the SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the post-fluctuation described above.

Next, using Figure 34 (B), we will explain the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 20, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot among the various fluctuation patterns. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach (later fluctuation start). Then, the instigation part (SP first half reach A) is from the start of the SP reach (later fluctuation start) to the determination of whether it is a win or a loss. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the reels do not move at the timing of the win or a loss determination. Then, the epilogue part (SP first half reach A hit) is from the determination of whether it is a win or a loss to the start of the re-draw performance. Then, the re-draw part is from the start of the re-draw performance to the stop of the fluctuation. For example, in the variation pattern of a SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is set to 60 seconds, the teasing part (SP first half reach A) to 20 seconds, the epilogue part (SP first half reach A hit) to 15 seconds, and the re-draw part to 20 seconds.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 26, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot among the various fluctuation patterns, will be explained using FIG. 34 (C). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the start part is from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach (later fluctuation start). Then, the provocation part (SP first half reach A) is from the start of the SP reach (later fluctuation start) to the development of the second half of the SP. Then, the provocation part (SP final reach) is from the development of the second half of the SP to the determination of whether it is a win or a loss. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the reels do not move at the timing of the determination of whether it is a win or a loss. Then, the epilogue part (SP final reach hit) is from the determination of whether it is a win or a loss to the start of the re-draw performance. Then, the re-draw part is from the start of the re-draw performance to the stop of the fluctuation. For example, the fluctuation pattern for the SP final reach jackpot is set so that the start part is 60 seconds, the teasing part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the teasing part (SP final reach) is 25 seconds, the epilogue part (SP final reach hit) is 30 seconds, and the re-draw part is 20 seconds.

As shown in Figures 34 (B) and (C), the SP Final Reach, which has a higher expectation than the SP First Half Reach A, has a longer fluctuation time. Also, the SP Final Reach, which has a higher expectation than the SP First Half Reach A, has a longer total teasing part time and epilogue part time. This means that the higher the expectation of the fluctuation, the longer the period of excitement for the player can be, and the longer the afterglow time when a hit is achieved, which enhances the sense of celebration.

<About the scenario>
Next, the correspondence between the performance contents executed in the series of performances and the game effect lamps 9 will be explained using the scenarios for each part. The scenario described here serves as a script summarizing the contents of each scene in the series of performances. The scenario for each part corresponds to a diagram for explaining the performance mode corresponding to each part, which will be described later. The contents of the performances executed on the screen of the image display device 5 and the mode of the game effect lamps 9 will be described in detail using diagrams for explaining the performance modes, which will be described later. Below, the correspondence between the diagrams for explaining the scenarios for each part and the diagrams for explaining the performance modes, which will be described later, will be explained.

Figure 35 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the start part. The scenario of the start part corresponding to number 1 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 55 to 61 described later. Figure 36 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the hype part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the hype part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 2 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 62 to 67 described later. Figure 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 3 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 68 to 69 described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 4 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 70 to 71 described later.

Figure 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the instigation part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the instigation part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 5 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figures 72 to 77 described later. Figure 39 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 6 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figures 78 to 80 described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 7 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figures 81 to 82 described later. Figure 40 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the reel operation part (at the time of SP second half development). The scenario of the reel operation part (at the time of SP second half development) corresponding to number 8 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figure 83 described later.

Figure 41 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the instigation part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the instigation part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 9 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 84 to 96, which will be described later. Figure 42 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 10 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 97 to 98, which will be described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 11 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 99 to 100, which will be described later.

Figure 43 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the provocative part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the provocative part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 12 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 101 to 109, which will be described later. Figure 44 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 13 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 110 to 112, which will be described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 14 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 113 to 114, which will be described later.

Figures 45 and 46 are diagrams for explaining the scenario of the hype part (SP final reach). The scenario of the hype part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 15 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 115 to 132 described later. Figure 47 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and the losing epilogue part (SP final reach). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 16 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 133 to 136 described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 17 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 137 to 138 described later. Figure 48 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the rescue winning part. The scenario of the rescue winning part corresponding to number 18 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 139 to 140 described later.

Figure 49 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). The scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation) corresponding to number 19 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 141 to 156 described later. Figure 50 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd symbols after button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd symbols after button operation) corresponding to number 20 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 157 to 159 described later. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figure 160 described later. Figure 51 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving even symbols after button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario for the re-draw part (deriving an even number after pressing a button) corresponding to number 21 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in FIG. 161 to FIG. 163, which will be described later. The scenario for the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode in FIG. 164, which will be described later.

<Output mechanism to LED driver (lamp driver)>
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 outputs brightness data for turning on/blinking/extinguishing one or more lamps (LEDs) among the multiple lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9 to the LED driver (also called a lamp driver). In the following, the control of turning on/blinking/extinguishing a lamp such as an LED by the performance control CPU 120 is also called lamp control. The LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 to be controlled based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120 in order to turn on/blink/extinguish each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blink/extinguish based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 and RAM 122 of the performance control board 12 store brightness data tables in which brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The brightness data tables include an error brightness data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach brightness data table used in each part during the SP reach (such as the instigation part, winning epilogue part, losing epilogue part, and role operation part), and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low probability low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state in which a fanfare performance is executed, a jackpot background brightness data table used during a round in a jackpot game state, an ending background brightness data table used in an ending state in which an ending performance is executed to notify the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability variable background brightness data table used in a high probability high base state (probability variable state).

The above-mentioned background brightness data tables are used without overlapping, and one of the background brightness data tables is used depending on which of the multiple game states, such as the normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, and probability change state, the game is controlled to. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data based on that background brightness data table to the LED driver. This causes each game effect lamp 9 to be lamp-controlled depending on the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, a priority is set for each of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table have the highest priority when used.

For example, when the SP reach develops while outputting brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state, the performance control CPU 120 uses the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach in preference to the normal background brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background brightness data table and develops into an SP reach, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the SP reach based on the SP reach brightness data table. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but when the SP reach ends and the normal state is restored, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is output to the LED driver, and when a jackpot is hit and the fanfare state is entered, the brightness data based on the fanfare background brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to the game state being controlled. However, when the game progresses to an SP reach, etc., the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach is used preferentially over the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the background brightness data table. In other words, even while the performance control CPU 120 is lamp controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table, but since the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the SP reach ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table to the LED driver again, starting from the continuation of the luminance data that was being updated.

For example, when an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table during an SP Reach, the performance control CPU 120 uses the error brightness data table corresponding to the error in preference to the SP Reach brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on the error brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, when an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the SP Reach based on the SP Reach brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error brightness data table. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the error brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but when the error is released and the game state returns to the SP Reach state, the brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the SP reach being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to that SP reach, but when an error occurs, it outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the error brightness data table corresponding to that error in preference to the SP reach brightness data table. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the SP reach brightness data table. In other words, even while the performance control CPU 120 is lamp controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table, but since the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data included in the error brightness data table, the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the error is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table to the LED driver again, starting from the continuation of the luminance data that had been continuously updated.

<Lighting status of the game effect lamp>
In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled by the output of brightness data to the LED driver by the performance control CPU 120 as described above. Here, the lighting state of each game effect lamp 9 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 53 and 54. Figures 53 and 54 are diagrams for explaining the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9.

In this embodiment, terms such as "off," "almost off," "on," and "flashing" are used to refer to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp, role lamp 9A, left panel lamp 9B, attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H. Also, as mentioned above, the state of each game effect lamp 9 when "on" or "flashing" is also referred to as the "lighting state."

The term "off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and has a brightness of 0. The term "almost off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but has a very low brightness (for example, the brightness "1" described below).

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the frame lamp is "000", the frame lamp is "off". Also, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the frame lamp is "111", the frame lamp lights up in white with extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the frame lamp when the RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RRRR (Red, Red, Red, Red) data defined as the brightness data of the reel lamp 9A is "0000", the reel lamp 9A is "off". Also, when the brightness data of the reel lamp 9A (RRRR data) is "1111", the reel lamp 9A is lit in red with extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the reel lamp 9A when the RRRR data is "1111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the WWWWW (White, White, White, White, White) data defined as the brightness data of the board left lamp 9B is "00000", the board left lamp 9B is "off". Also, when the brightness data (WWWWW data) of the board left lamp 9B is "11111", the board left lamp 9B is lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the board left lamp 9B when the WWWWW data is "11111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the attacca lamp 9E is "000", the attacca lamp 9E is "off". Also, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacca lamp 9E is "111", the attacca lamp 9E is lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the attacca lamp 9E when the RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the WWW (White, White, White) data defined as the brightness data of the V attacca lamp 9F is "000", the V attacca lamp 9F is "off". Also, when the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacca lamp 9F is "111", the V attacca lamp 9F is lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the V attacca lamp 9F when the WWW data is "111" may be referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the electric choke lamp 9H is "000", the electric choke lamp 9H is "off". Also, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric choke lamp 9H is "111", the electric choke lamp 9H is lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the electric choke lamp 9H in which the RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" includes a constant lighting state in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, a wave lighting state in which the multiple lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in sequence, and a hazy lighting state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any of "2" to "F." Note that the brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F," with "0" being no brightness, "1" being the lowest brightness, and "F" being the highest brightness.

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X2), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 is "AAA," the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are "lit," and in this particular case, since the brightness is high, the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are lit brightly.

As shown in Figure 53 (X3), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is "AAA," the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are "lit," and in this particular case, because the brightness is high, the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are brightly lit.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X4), when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the reel lamp 9A is "AAAA", the reel lamp 9A is "lit", and in this particular case, since the brightness is high, the reel lamp 9A lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X5), when the brightness data (WWWW data) of the left panel lamp 9B is "AAAAA", the left panel lamp 9B is "lit", and in this particular case, since the brightness is high, the left panel lamp 9B lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X6), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacca lamp 9E is "AAA", the attacca lamp 9E "lights up", and in this case, since the brightness is particularly high, the attacca lamp 9E lights up brightly. When the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacca lamp 9F is "AAA", the V attacca lamp 9F "lights up", and in this case, since the brightness is particularly high, the V attacca lamp 9F lights up brightly. When the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric lamp 9H is "AAA", the electric lamp 9H "lights up", and in this case, since the brightness is particularly high, the electric lamp 9H lights up brightly.

The term "blinking" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is in a state other than the above-mentioned "off" or "on" and in which the brightness of each lamp when it is on alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, "blinking" includes repeating on and off or almost off, and specifically, "blinking" includes switching over time between a case in which the brightness data is any of "2" to "F" and a case in which the brightness data is "0" or "1". As described above, in this embodiment, there is a hazy lighting as a lighting state of the lamp, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing its brightness, whereas the blinking is a state in which all of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are repeatedly lit and off or almost off.

<Presentation Mode of Pachinko Game Machine 1>
Next, the performance of the pachinko game machine 1 during a game will be described with reference to Figures 55 to 164. In this embodiment, the performance when any one of the main variable numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 is selected will be described.

Specifically, when the variation pattern of main variation number 9 is selected, among the multiple routes shown in FIG. 33, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), the teasing part of SP first half reach A (2), and the miss epilogue part of SP first half reach A (4), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), the teasing part of SP first half reach B (5), and the miss epilogue part of SP first half reach B (7).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 12 is selected, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), role operation part (8), SP second half reach A teasing part (9), SP second half reach A miss epilogue part (11), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), role operation part (8), SP second half reach B teasing part (12), SP second half reach B miss epilogue part (14). ), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), the hype part of the SP first half reach B (5), the device operation part (8), the hype part of the SP second half reach A (9), and the miss epilogue part of the SP second half reach B (14), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), the hype part of the SP first half reach B (5), the device operation part (8), the hype part of the SP second half reach B (12), and the miss epilogue part of the SP second half reach B (14).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 15 is selected, the performance will transition in the following order: start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), reel operation part (8), SP final reach teasing part (15), SP final reach miss epilogue part (17), or the performance will transition in the following order: start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), reel operation part (8), SP final reach teasing part (15), SP final reach miss epilogue part (17).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 20 is selected, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), and SP first half reach A winning epilogue part (3), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), and SP first half reach B winning epilogue part (6).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 20 is selected, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), role operation part (8), SP second half reach A teasing part (9), SP second half reach A winning epilogue part (10), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), role operation part (8), SP second half reach B teasing part (12), SP second half reach B winning epilogue part (13). ), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), device operation part (8), SP second half reach A teasing part (9), SP second half reach B winning epilogue part (10), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), device operation part (8), SP second half reach B teasing part (12), SP second half reach B winning epilogue part (13).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 26 is selected, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), reel operation part (8), SP final reach teasing part (15), and SP final reach winning epilogue part (16), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), reel operation part (8), SP final reach teasing part (15), and SP final reach winning epilogue part (16).

The figure also shows the state of each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 and the sound effects output from the speakers 8L, 8R. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after the winning epilogue, but there may be a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed and ends with the winning epilogue part. In addition, although the description of the variation pattern corresponding to the rescue hit part has been omitted from the example of the total variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the rescue hit part will also be explained. In addition, since the variation time is longer in the case of a hit than in the variation pattern of a miss, the rescue hit part, which appears to be a miss but is actually a hit, may use that variation time to execute the effect of the rescue hit part.

[Direction in the starting part]
The presentation mode in the start part will be described with reference to Figures 55 to 61.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a1), when variable display (changing display) starts based on one reserved memory, on the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as the background during the variable display. In this embodiment, an image of a flying girl named Yume Yume-chan is displayed as the character that appears in the change during the normal game state. Yume Yume-chan is a main character that appears as an ally character in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1.

When the variation starts, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background. During the variable display, sound effects are output from the speakers 8L, 8R as appropriate, but the sound effects are only shown in some of the drawings. The lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background, is referred to as "yellow background lighting." The performance control CPU 120 lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a yellow background lighting pattern based on the normal background brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. Note that "lighting" here includes constant lighting, wave lighting, and hazy lighting, as described with reference to Figures 53 and 54, and the same applies in the following explanations.

As shown in FIG. 55(a2), after the left and right decorative symbols reach a reach state where they temporarily stop at the "2" symbol, the "NEXT" symbol stops as a pseudo consecutive symbol in the center symbol. The "NEXT" symbol stops, indicating that the second pseudo variation will begin. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Note that "flashing" here includes the lamp repeatedly turning on and off, as explained with reference to FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, and this also applies to the following explanation. After that, as shown in FIG. 55(a3), the letters "x2" are displayed, indicating that the second variable display will be performed by the pseudo consecutive performance. When "x2" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a4), the re-change is performed as the second change of the pseudo-change. The letters "x2" are displayed in small letters in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that this is the second variable display. During the re-change, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern with a yellow background. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a5), after the reach state is reached, the "NEXT" symbol stops as a pseudo consecutive symbol in the middle symbol. The stopping of the "NEXT" symbol indicates that the third change of the pseudo-change will start. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a6), the letters "x3" are displayed, indicating that the third variable display will be performed by the pseudo consecutive performance. When "x3" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(a7), a pseudo re-change is performed as the third variable display. In the upper left corner of the screen, the letters "x3" are displayed in small letters to indicate that this is the third variable display. During the re-change, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern with the background lit yellow. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(a8), a "2" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and a "2" also stops in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in a reach state called reach tenpai. During reach tenpai, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Then, as shown in FIG. 57(a9), the background starts to darken and the screen goes dark while the middle pattern remains variable in the reach tenpai state. When the background starts to darken, the game effect lamp 9 lights up red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (a10), an image in the shape of a shutter (hereinafter simply referred to as the shutter) is displayed so as to hide the display of the decorative pattern and Yume Yume's character image. The shutter layer has a higher priority than the decorative pattern layer and the Yume Yume character layer. High priority means that the image layer is located on the front side. As shown in FIG. 58 (a10), the shutter is displayed closing from the top and bottom of the screen toward the center of the screen. The shutter image makes it impossible to see the image behind the shutter. Also, the screen brightness gradually decreases as the shutter gradually closes. When the shutter is closed as shown in (a10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while gradually decreasing in brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (a11), the shutter closes further and the screen brightness drops below that at time (a10). In the state where the shutter is closed at (a11), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 drops further from that at time (a10) and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the shutter closes further and the screen brightness drops below that at time (a11). In the state where the shutter is closed at (a12), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 drops further from that at time (a11) and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. The screen brightness gradually drops from (a10) to (a12) so that, for example, the relationship is (a10) 75% > (a11) 50% > (a12) 25%. Also, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 gradually drops from (a10) to (a12).

Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13), the shutter closes completely. With the shutter in the closed state at (a13), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the lamp 9 remaining the same as at time (a12). Thereafter, the shutter remains closed from FIG. 59 (a14) to (a15). With the shutter remaining closed at (a14) and (a15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the lamp 9 remaining the same as at time (a13).

After that, the screen brightness gradually increases as the shutter gradually opens from (a16) to (a18) in FIG. 60. When the shutter is open at (a16), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same brightness as at (a15). After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (a17), the shutter opens further and the screen brightness increases compared to (a16). When the shutter is open at (a17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same brightness as at (a16). After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (a18), the shutter opens further and the screen brightness increases compared to (a17). When the shutter is open at (a18), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same brightness as at (a17).

The screen brightness gradually increases from (a16) to (a17) so that the relationship is, for example, (a16) 25% < (a17) 50% < (a18) 75%. The game effect lamp 9 is lit in red while maintaining the brightness from (a16) to (a18). Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (a19), when the shutter is fully opened, a screen corresponding to the SP first half reach A is displayed. When the shutter is open at (a19), the screen brightness is 100%. When the shutter is open at (a19), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Note that it may be "almost turned off" instead of "turned off". When the shutter is opened, if it has been decided to move to the SP first half reach B, a screen corresponding to the SP first half reach B is displayed. If SP first half reach A is executed from the (a19) state, the performance will transition to that of Figure 62 (b1), and if SP first half reach B is executed from the (a19) state, the performance will transition to that of Figure 72 (e1).

[Performance in the provocation part (first half of SP Reach A)]
With reference to Figures 62 to 67, the presentation in the teasing part (SP first half reach A) will be described. The teasing part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which a story unfolds in which Yume Yume, an ally character, chases the enemy character Bakuchu. In the teasing part (SP first half reach A), a story unfolds in which Yume Yume will win if she can catch Bakuchu, and will lose if she cannot.

As shown in FIG. 62(b1), in the promotional part where SP first half reach A is executed, the title "Catch Bakuchu!" corresponding to SP first half reach A is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the SP first half performance that will be executed. When the title display (b1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(b2), the title display is erased and an image showing an enemy character called Bakuchu landing is displayed. When the title display (b2) is erased, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Also, when the image related to the title display (b2) disappears, BGM corresponding to SP first half reach A is output. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(b3), an image of the enemy character Bakuchu landing in the center of the screen and posing is displayed. When the enemy character (b3) appears, the game effect lamp 9 is lit red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (b4), an image of a confrontation between friendly character Yume Yume and enemy character Bakuchu is displayed in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state of (b4), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side where Yume Yume is displayed lights up in green corresponding to the Yume Yume character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side where Bakuchu is displayed lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (b5), a subtitle display "I found you" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I found you" is displayed on the screen where the characters are confronting each other. In the confrontation state of (b5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (b6), the subtitle "Found" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other, corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Found." In the facing state of (b6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green, corresponding to Yume-chan's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in red, corresponding to Bakuchu speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (b7), Yume Yume, an ally character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (b7), on the Yume Yume close-up screen, a subtitle display "I'll catch you!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "I'll catch you!". Also, in the Yume Yume close-up state of (b7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Then, as shown in (b8), an image of Yume Yume chasing Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (b8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking the line "Too". Then, as shown in (b9), an image of Bakuchu running away from Yume Yume is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu running away state of (b9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red corresponding to Bakuchu speaking the line "Hehehe".

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b10), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background of (b10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (b11), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the subtitle display "Wait~" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Wait~" is displayed on the screen of chasing Yume Yume. In addition, the sound of Yume Yume's footsteps "Zazz zazzazz" is output as a physical sound (hereinafter referred to as physical sound) in accordance with the image of Yume Yume. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta" is output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of chasing Yume Yume of (b11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in green in response to Yume Yume speaking. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red in response to the character Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b12), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the physical sound of Yume Yume's footsteps, "Zzz zazzz," is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Tatatatatat," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (b12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to Yume Yume's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b13), Bakuchu's back view is displayed, along with part of Yume Yume's hand, and the screen changes to one in which Bakuchu runs away from Yume Yume. As shown in (b13), on the screen in which Bakuchu is running away, a subtitle "I won't get caught!" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "I won't get caught!". In addition, the physical sound of Yume Yume's footsteps "Zzz zazzz" is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta ta ta ta" is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of Bakuchu running away in (b13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to Bakuchu speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b14), an image is displayed of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Yume-chan on the left side of the screen. As shown in (b14), the sound of Bakuchu jumping "Pyoon" is output as an artificial sound (hereinafter referred to as an onomatopoeia) to accompany the image of Bakuchu jumping. Also, in the Bakuchu jump state of (b14), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white to indicate that Bakuchu is jumping. After that, as shown in (b15), the enemy character Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (b15), on the Bakuchu up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red to indicate the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (b16), the ally character Yume Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (b16), on the Yume Yume close-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume Yume-chan character. Then, as shown in (b17), an image of Yume Yume-chan jumping and pounces on the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (b17), on the Yume Yume Jump screen, Yume Yume-chan's line "Got it!" is output. Also, in the Yume Yume Jump state of (b17), the background music is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times corresponding to Yume Yume-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (b18), a screen in which Yume Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed at the time of deciding whether or not the win has been determined is displayed. Also, in the scene before the win/loss decision in (b18), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white to correspond to the win/loss decision scene. By muting the sound in the scene before the win/loss decision, it is easy to understand that this is the branching scene for deciding whether or not the win has been determined. If it is determined from the state of (b18) that there will be a big win in the SP first half reach A, the performance transitions to (c1). If it is determined from the state of (b18) that there will be a miss in the SP first half reach A, the performance transitions to (d1). If it is determined from the state of (b18) that there will be a development to the latter half of the SP reach, the performance transitions to (h1).

[Performance in the epilogue part (first half of the SP Reach A)]
The performance of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be described with reference to Figures 68 to 69. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume catching Bakuchu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in Figure 68 (c1), in the winning epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, an image of Yume Yume catching the tail of a Bakuchu with her hand is displayed. Also, in the state of catching a Bakuchu in (c1), the physical sound of Yume Yume catching a Bakuchu, "Bam!", is output in time with the image of Yume Yume catching a Bakuchu. Also, in the state of catching a Bakuchu in (c1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a white lighter than the white light of (tb18) which indicates the lighting mode of (b18) in response to catching a Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(c2), an image of Yume-chan making a V sign after catching the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (c2), in the state of catching the Bakuchu, a subtitle display "Easy win!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume-chan's line "Easy win!". Also, in the state of (c2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors to indicate a big win. Hereinafter, the smooth lighting of rainbow colors is also referred to as rainbow lighting (smooth). Also, in the state of (c2), background music for a win is output. After that, as shown in (c3), an image of Yume-chan making a V sign after catching the Bakuchu is displayed as a still image in a comic book style. In the still image state of (c3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(c4), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (c4), the pattern "222" is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the pattern display state of (c4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a bright white color. After that, as shown in (c5), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (c4). In the pattern display state of (c5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (c6), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a normal size, further reduced than in the state of (c5). In the two-pattern (normal size) state of (c6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the Miss Epilogue Part (First Half of SP Reach A)]
The presentation in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be described with reference to Figures 70 to 71. The miss epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which the story unfolds in which Yume Yume fails to catch the Bakuchu, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 70 (d1), in the miss epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, an image of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the (d1) state where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the onomatopoeic sound of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu, "Skatch", is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu. Also, in the (d1) state where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tb18) which indicates the lighting mode of (b18), in response to the failure to catch the Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (d2), an image is displayed in which Yume Yume, who was unable to catch Bakuchu, kneels in disappointment while Bakuchu is happy. As shown in (d2), in the disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (td1) showing the lighting mode of (d1). After that, as shown in (d3), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (d3), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (d4), the pattern "232", which is a losing pattern combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state in (d4) where the normal screen is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1).

[Performance in the provocation part (first half of SP Reach B)]
With reference to Figures 72 to 77, the presentation in the hype part (SP first half reach B) will be described. The hype part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which a story unfolds in which friendly character Yume Yume and enemy character Boingo face off in hockey. In the hype part (SP first half reach B), a story unfolds to hype up the fact that if Yume Yume beats Boingo, it will be a big hit, and if she loses to Boingo, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 72 (e1), in the promotional part where SP first half reach B is executed, the title "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" corresponding to SP first half reach B is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the performance of the SP first half that will be executed from now on. When the title display of (e1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (e2), an image is displayed in which the screen is cracked and the title display is erased. When the screen is cracked and the title display is erased in (e2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green. After that, as shown in (e3), an image of the opponent character appearance is displayed in which the ally character Yume Yume and the enemy character Boingo appear on the screen. When the opponent character appears in (e3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (e4), an image of a confrontation between Yume Yume, who is an ally character at the front left of the screen, and Boingo, who is an enemy character at the back right of the screen, is displayed. In the confrontation state of (e4), the left side of the game effect lamp 9 where Yume Yume is displayed lights up in green corresponding to the Yume Yume character. Also, the right side of the game effect lamp 9 where Boingo is displayed lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character. Also, when the title display of (e4) disappears, BGM corresponding to the SP first half reach B is output. After that, as shown in (e5), a subtitle display "I won't lose" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I won't lose" is displayed on the screen where the characters are confronting each other. In the confrontation state of (e5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (e6), the subtitle "Come on!" corresponding to Boingo's line "Come on!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (e6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to Yume Yume's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in cream color corresponding to Boingo speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (e7), an image of Yume Yume, an ally character, shooting the puck is displayed. Also, as shown in (e7), on the screen during Yume Yume's turn, Yume Yume's line "Yaaa~" is output. Also, in the Yume Yume turn state of (e7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume's line. After that, as shown in (e8), the puck shot by Yume Yume is displayed in an enlarged manner. Also, in the puck display state of (e8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice corresponding to the physical sound "shoo" of the puck moving. After that, as shown in (e9), an image of Boingo blocking Yume Yume's puck is displayed. Also, in the Boingo blocking state of (e9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up cream corresponding to the Boingo character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (e10), an image of the puck flying through the air is displayed. In the state of (e10) of flying through the puck, the physical sound of the puck spinning, "Shurruru," is output. Also, in the state of (e10), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to the character Yume Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the character Boingo. After that, as shown in (e11), an image of the enemy character Boingo shooting the puck is displayed. Also, as shown in (e11), on the screen during Boingo's turn, Boingo's line "Yoisho~" is output. Also, in the state of Boingo's turn (e11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in cream color corresponding to Boingo speaking. After that, as shown in (e12), the puck shot by Boingo is enlarged and displayed. Also, in the puck display state of (e12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white, corresponding to the physical sound of the puck moving, "shoo."

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (e13), Yume Yume receives damage by receiving the puck directly, and an image of electricity running through her bones is displayed. As shown in (e13), in the Yume Yume damage state, Yume Yume's line "Wow" is output. Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Yume Yume receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e14), an image of Yume Yume receiving damage, electricity running through her bones is displayed. Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e14), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Yume Yume receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e15), an image of Yume Yume receiving damage, electricity running through her bones is displayed in the same content as (e13). Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Yume Yume receiving damage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (e16), Yume Yume is damaged, and an image of electricity running through her bones is displayed in the same manner as in (e14). Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e16), the background music is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white in response to Yume Yume receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e17), the scene before the win/loss determination is displayed, in which the state of Yume Yume receiving damage is displayed. In the scene before the win/loss determination of (e17), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white to correspond to the scene before the win/loss determination. Since the scene before the win/loss determination is muted, it is easy to understand that this is the branching scene of the win/loss determination. If it is determined that the SP first half reach B will be a big hit from the state of (e17), the performance transitions to (f1). If it is determined that the SP first half reach B will be a miss from the state of (e17), the performance transitions to (g1). If it is determined that the game will progress from state (e17) to the second half of the SP Reach, the game will transition to the performance shown in (h1).

[Performance in the epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
The performance of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 78 to 80. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume's victory over Boingo unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in Figure 78 (f1), in the winning epilogue part of Reach B in the first half of the SP, an image of Yume Yume hitting back the puck is displayed. Also, in the Yume Yume attack state of (f1) where Yume Yume attacks by hitting back the puck, the subtitle "Go!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "Go!". Also, in the Yume Yume attack state of (f1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a brighter white than the white of (te17) which indicates the lighting mode of (e17), in response to Yume Yume attacking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (f2), an image of Boingo being blown away by Yume Yume's attack is displayed. As shown in (f2), when Boingo is attacked, a subtitle display "Wow!" corresponding to Boingo's line "Wow!" is displayed. Also, in the state of (f2), the game effect lamp 9 turns into a rainbow light (smooth) indicating a big win. Also, in the state of (f2), a background music for a win is output. After that, as shown in (f3), an image of a Yume Yume victory is displayed, in which Yume Yume pumps her fist and Boingo falls down. As shown in (f3), when in the state of a Yume Yume victory, a subtitle display "Easy win!" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Easy win!" is displayed. Also, in the state of (f3), the game effect lamp 9 turns into a rainbow light (smooth).

After that, as shown in (f4), the image of the dream victory is displayed as a still image in a comic book style. In the still image state of (f4), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in rainbow (smooth). After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (f5), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (f5), the pattern display enlarges the "222" pattern and emphasizes the pattern with a converging line. In the pattern display state of (f5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (f6), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (f5). In the pattern display state of (f6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (f7), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a normal size, further reduced than in the state of (f6). In the (f7) 2 symbol (normal size) state, the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the Miss Epilogue Part (First Half of SP Reach B)]
The presentation of the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 81 and 82. The miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume's defeat by Boingo unfolds, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in Figure 81 (g1), in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B, an image of Yume Yume being blown away by Boingo's attack is displayed. As shown in (g1), in the state where Yume Yume is blown away, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (te17) which indicates the lighting mode of (e17) corresponding to Yume Yume being blown away. After that, as shown in (g2), an image of Yume Yume being blown away further than in the state of (g1) is displayed. As shown in (g2), in the state where Yume Yume is blown away, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (te17) which indicates the lighting mode of (e17) corresponding to Yume Yume being blown away.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (g3), an image is displayed in which Yume Yume, who was defeated by Boingo, kneels in disappointment while Boingo smiles. As shown in (g3), in the disappointment state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tg1) and (tg2) which indicate the lighting modes of (g1) and (g2). After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (g4), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (g4), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (g5), the pattern "232", which is a losing pattern combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state in (g5) where the normal screen is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern common to (ta1) which indicates the lighting mode of (a1).

[Performance during the role action part (later development)]
With reference to Figure 83, the presentation mode in the reel action part (later development) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 83 (h1), when the SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B develops into any of the latter half SP reaches among SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP strongest reach, the movable body 32 as the reel operates. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the reel falls while tilting diagonally from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in response to the start of the reel's fall. The effect image makes it impossible to see the Yume Yume character or the reduced decorative pattern of the "2". Also, in the (h1) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to the reel's fall.

After that, in the state (h2), the reel falls further from the state (h1). In the state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in accordance with the fall of the reel. After that, in the state (h3), the reel falls further to a position where the character "P" of the reel overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative pattern was displayed. In the state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. From the state (h3), a performance in which the reel rises is executed. If it is determined that the reel will develop into the SP second half reach A after the reel rises, the performance shifts to (i1). If it is determined that the reel will develop into the SP second half reach B after the reel rises, the performance shifts to (n1). If it is determined that the reel will develop into the SP final reach after the reel rises, the performance shifts to (r1).

[Performance in the provocation part (SP second half reach A)]
With reference to Figures 84 to 96, the presentation in the teasing part (SP latter half reach A) will be described. The teasing part (SP latter half reach A) is a part in which a story unfolds in which friendly characters Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan chase enemy character Bakuchu. In the teasing part (SP latter half reach A), a story unfolds in which if Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan can catch Bakuchu, it will be a big hit, but if Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan cannot catch Bakuchu, it will be a miss.

As shown in FIG. 84 (i1), in the teasing part where SP latter half reach A is executed, the title corresponding to SP latter half reach A, "Catch Bakuchu!", is displayed. The title display shows the content of the performance of the SP latter half reach that will be executed from now on. When the title display of (i1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (i2), an image of a confrontation between the friendly characters Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan (the characters on the left side) and the enemy character Bakuchu, facing each other in the center of the screen, is displayed. In the confrontation state of (i2), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in white on the left side where Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed, corresponding to the two characters. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red on the right side where Bakuchu is displayed, corresponding to the Bakuchu character. In addition, when the image related to the title display of (i2) disappears, BGM corresponding to SP latter half reach A is output. After that, as shown in (i3), the subtitle "I won't let you get away!" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I won't let you get away!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i4), the subtitle display "I'll help you too!" corresponding to Jam's line "I'll help you too!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i4), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple corresponding to Jam's line. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up red corresponding to Bakuchu's character. After that, as shown in (i5), the subtitle display "I'll run away again!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I'll run away again!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up white corresponding to the two characters Yume Yume and Jam. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes red corresponding to Bakuchu's line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i6), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "I'll catch you!" is displayed, which corresponds to Jam-chan's line "I'll catch you!". In the Jam-chan display state of (i6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, corresponding to Jam-chan speaking. After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (i7), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Let's go!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume-chan's line "Let's go!". In the Yume-Yume display state of (i7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume-Yume speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (i8), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Bring it on!" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "Bring it on!". In the Bakuchu display state of (i8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line. After that, as shown in (i9), when an image of Jam chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" is displayed, which corresponds to Jam's line "Wait!". In the Jam chasing state of (i9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, which corresponds to Jam speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i10), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Jam-chan is displayed, Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" are output as a physical sound. Also, in the state of Bakuchu running away in (i10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to Bakuchu running away. After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i11), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background in (i11), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. After that, as shown in (i12), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. Also, as shown in (i12), a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed on the screen chasing Jam. As shown in (i12), Jam-chan's footsteps "Zazz zazz" are output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Jam-chan. Also, Bakuchu's footsteps "Tatatatat" are output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Jam Chase state of (i12), the left game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, corresponding to Jam-chan speaking. Also, the right game effect lamp 9 lights up red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i13), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i13), the physical sound of Jam-chan's footsteps, "Zazz zazz," is output in sync with the image of Jam-chan. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Jam chasing state of (i13), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i14), an image of Jam-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i14), in the Jam jump state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i15), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i15), the onomatopoeic sound of Bakuchu jumping "Pyoon" is output in accordance with the image of Bakuchu jumping. Also, in the Bakuchu jump state of (i15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i16), an image of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu cannot be caught state of (i16), the subtitle display "I can't catch it" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I can't catch it" is displayed. Also, in accordance with the image of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound of Jam-chan failing to catch it "Skatch" is output in accordance with the image of Bakuchu failing to catch. Also, in the Bakuchu cannot be caught state of (i16), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan uttering a line. Additionally, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red to correspond to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i17), when Yume Yume is displayed, the subtitle "I'm next!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "I'm next!". In the Yume Yume display state of (i17), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. After that, as shown in (i18), an image of Yume Yume chasing Bakuchu is displayed. In the Bakuchu chasing state of (i18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume taking action.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i19), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Yume-chan is displayed, Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" are output as a physical sound. Also, in the state of Bakuchu running away in (i19), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to Bakuchu running away. After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i20), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background in (i20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. After that, as shown in (i21), an image of Yume-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i21), a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed on the screen of chasing Yume-chan. Also, as shown in (i21), Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazz zazz" are output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Yume-chan. Also, Bakuchu's footsteps "Tatatatat" are output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (i21), the left game effect lamp 9 flashes green to indicate that Yume Yume is speaking. Also, the right game effect lamp 9 lights up red to indicate that the Bakuchu character is on.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i22), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i22), the physical sound of Yume Yume's footsteps, "Zazz zazz," is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (i22), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume Yume. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Bakuchu. After that, as shown in (i23), an image of Yume Yume jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i23), in the Yume Yume jump state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times corresponding to Yume Yume jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i24), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i24), the onomatopoeic sound of Bakuchu jumping "Pyoon" is output in accordance with the image of Bakuchu jumping. Also, in the Bakuchu jump state of (i24), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i25), an image of Yume-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu cannot be caught state of (i25), a subtitle display "I can't catch it" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "I can't catch it" is displayed. Also, in accordance with the image of Yume-chan failing to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound of Yume-chan failing to catch it "Skatch" is output in accordance with the image of Yume-chan failing to catch Bakuchu. Also, in the Bakuchu cannot be caught state of (i25), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in green corresponding to Yume-chan uttering a line. Additionally, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red to correspond to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i26), two allies, Yume Yume and Jam, are displayed. As shown in (i26), when the two allies are displayed, a subtitle "Two people next!" is displayed, corresponding to the two allies' lines "Two people next!". In the state of displaying two allies in (i26), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple corresponding to Jam speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. After that, as shown in (i27), Yume Yume is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, in the Yume Yume up state in (i27), the game effect lamp 9 lights up green corresponding to Yume Yume's character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (i28), Jam-chan is displayed enlarged on the left side of the screen, and Yume-Yume-chan is displayed enlarged on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i28), when Yume-Yume and Jam-chan are up, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple, corresponding to Jam-chan's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in green, corresponding to Yume-Yume-chan's character. After that, as shown in (i29), an image is displayed of Yume-Yume-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i29), when the two are chasing each other, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white, corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 30 (i30), an image of Yume Yume and Jam on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen continues to be displayed. In (i30), an image is displayed in which the two are closer to Bakuchu than in (i29). As shown in (i30), the physical sounds of Yume Yume and Jam's footsteps, "Zzz zazzz," are output in sync with the image of Yume Yume and Jam. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Ta ta ta tat," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the state of the two chasing each other in (i30), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i31), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (i31), on the jam up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Then, as shown in (i32), an image of Jam-chan jumping and pounces on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i32), Jam-chan's line "Wow" is output on the jam jump screen. Also, in the jam jump state of (i32), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i33), Yume Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (i33), in the Yume Yume close-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume Yume-chan. Then, as shown in FIG. 95 (i34), an image of Yume Yume-chan jumping and jumping into the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), Yume Yume-chan's line "Wow" is output on the Yume Yume jump screen. Also, in the Yume Yume jump state of (i34), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan jumping. Then, as shown in (i35), an image of both Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping and jumping into the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), in the two-person jump state, the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to the lines of the two allies "Wait!" is displayed. In the two-person jump state of (i35), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times corresponding to the two people jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (i36), an image of Yume Yume and Jam jumping together is displayed as still image 1. In the two-person jump state of (i36), the background music is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes white to indicate that the two are jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (i37), an image of Yume Yume and Jam jumping together is displayed as still image 2. In the two-person jump state of (i37), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white to indicate that the two are jumping. After that, as shown in (i38), an image of Yume Yume and Jam jumping together is displayed as still image 3. In the two-person jump state of (i38), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white to indicate that the two are jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (i39), the scene advances to the pre-decision scene where Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan are jumping, and still image 4 is displayed. In the pre-decision scene of (i39), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white to correspond to the scene before the decision of whether or not the winner has won. As the sound is muted in the scene before the decision of whether or not the winner has won, it is easy to understand that this is the branching scene for deciding whether or not the winner has won. If it has been determined from the (i39) state that there will be a jackpot in the SP's second half Reach A, the performance transitions to (j1). If it has been determined from the (i39) state that there will be a miss in the SP's second half Reach A, or that there will be a rescue hit, the performance transitions to (k1).

[Performance in the epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
The presentation in the winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) will be described with reference to Figures 97 to 98. The winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in Figure 97 (j1), in the winning epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image is displayed of Yume Yume and Jam catching the tail of a Bakuchu with their hands. Also, in the Bakuchu catching state of (j1), the physical sound of Yume Yume and Jam catching a Bakuchu, "Bam!", is output in time with the image of Yume Yume and Jam catching a Bakuchu. Also, in the Bakuchu catching state of (j1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a brighter white than the white of (ti39) which indicates the lighting state of (i39) in response to catching a Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (j2), Yume-chan, who has caught the Bakuchu, makes a V sign, and an image of Jam-chan riding on the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (j2), in the state of catching the Bakuchu, a subtitle display "Too bad for you!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Too bad for you!" is displayed. Also, in the state of (j2), the game effect lamp 9 turns into a rainbow light (smooth) indicating that a jackpot has been hit. Also, in the state of (j2), background music for a hit is output. After that, as shown in (j3), Yume-chan, who has caught the Bakuchu, makes a V sign, and an image of Jam-chan riding on the Bakuchu is displayed as a still image in a comic book style. In the still image state of (j3), the game effect lamp 9 turns into a rainbow light (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (j4), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (j4), the pattern "222" is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the pattern display state of (j4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (j5), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (j4). In the pattern display state of (j5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (j6), the pattern combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (j5) and displayed in normal size. In the two pattern (normal size) state of (j6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the Miss Epilogue Part (SP Second Half Reach A)]
The presentation in the miss epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) will be described with reference to Figures 99 to 100. The miss epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) is a part in which the story unfolds in which Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan fail to catch the Bakuchu, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 99 (k1), in the miss epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image is displayed in which Yume Yume and Jam fail to catch the Bakuchu. Also, in the failed Bakuchu state of (k1), the onomatopoeic sound of failure to catch "Skatch" is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume and Jam failing to catch the Bakuchu. Also, in the failed Bakuchu state of (k1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (ti39) which indicates the lighting mode of (i39), in response to the failure to catch the Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (k2), the Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (k2), the subtitle display "Ushishishi!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Ushishishi!" is displayed on the Bakuchu up screen. In the Bakuchu up state of (k2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tk1) showing the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in (k3), an image of Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan who were unable to catch the Bakuchu and kneel in disappointment is displayed. As shown in (k3), in the disappointment state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tk1) showing the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in FIG. 100 (k4), the screen goes dark. In the screen black state of (k4), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in (k5), the pattern of "232", which is a losing pattern combination, is displayed on the normal screen. When the normal screen (k5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background pattern, which is the same as (ta1) that shows the lighting mode (a1). If it is determined that a rescue win will occur from the (k5) state, the display will transition to (v1).

[Performance in the provocation part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to Figures 101 to 109, the presentation in the hype part (SP latter half reach B) will be described. The hype part (SP latter half reach B) is a part where a story unfolds in which friendly characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan face off against an enemy character, a crab robot. In the hype part (SP latter half reach B), a story unfolds to hype up the fact that if Jam-chan and Nana-chan's crab robot beats Boingo, it will be a big win, but if Jam-chan and Nana-chan lose to the crab robot, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 101 (n1), in the teasing part where the SP second half reach B is executed, the title corresponding to the SP second half reach B, "Gekishin Robo Battle", is displayed. The title display shows the content of the performance of the SP second half that will be executed. Below the title display, the number of stars indicates the expected jackpot probability for this reach. Note that this display indicating the expected jackpot probability may be displayed in other SP reaches. When the title display of (n1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (n2), an image of a confrontation between the ally characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan (the characters on the left) and the enemy character, a crab robot, is displayed. As shown in (n2), a subtitle display "I won't lose!" corresponding to the lines of the two allies "I won't lose!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are confronting each other. In the confrontation state of (n2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in white in response to the two characters uttering their lines. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red, corresponding to the crab character. In addition, when the image related to the title display (n2) disappears, background music corresponding to the SP second half reach B is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (n3), an image of a crab attack in which an enemy character, a crab, shoots a beam is displayed. Also, in the crab attack state of (n3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the crab's attack. After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n4), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam is displayed. As shown in (n4), on the screen where the two are running away, a subtitle display "Kyaa!" corresponding to the words "Kyaa!" spoken by the two allies is displayed. In the state where the two are running away of (n4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the action of the two running away.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n5), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan escape into a depression in the rocks to escape the crab's beam. In the state of two people jumping in (n5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n6), an image is displayed in which the beam passes over the rocks. In the state of the beam passing in (n6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n7), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan look relieved in the shadow of the rocks. As shown in (n7), the subtitle display "Haa haa" corresponding to Jam's line "Haa haa" is displayed on the screen in which the two are relieved. In the state of confrontation in (n7), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan's line. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes in pink in response to Nana-chan's character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n8), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (n8), the subtitle "It's your turn!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "It's your turn!" is displayed on the jam-up screen. Also, in the jam-up state of (n8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple corresponding to Jam-chan speaking the line. After that, as shown in (n9), an image of Jam-chan attacking the crab with the technique called Delta Break is displayed. Also, in the jam attack state of (n9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple corresponding to Jam-chan speaking the line "Delta Break".

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), an image of the crab being damaged by Jam-chan's attack is displayed. Also, in the crab attack state of (n10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to the crab uttering the line "Grrr". After that, as shown in (n11), an image of a confrontation between Jam-chan and Nana-chan and the crab is displayed. In the confrontation state of (n11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white in response to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red in response to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n12), an image of a crab attack in which the enemy character crab shoots a beam is displayed. Also, in the crab attack state of (n12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice in response to the crab's attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (n13), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam is displayed. As shown in (n13), on the screen where the two are running away, a subtitle display "Kyaa!" is displayed, which corresponds to the lines of the two allies saying "Kyaa!". In the state where the two are running away in (n13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the action of the two running away. After that, as shown in (n14), an image of the beam approaching Jam-chan and Nana-chan is displayed. In the beam state in (n14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n15), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan being hit by the crab's beam and receiving damage is displayed. Also, in the state where the two are receiving damage in (n15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the two receiving damage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (n16), an image of the damaged Jam-chan and Nana-chan standing up is displayed. As shown in (n16), on the screen where the two stand up, a subtitle "It's about to begin!" is displayed, corresponding to the lines of the two allies "It's about to begin!" In the state where the two stand up in (n16), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's character. After that, as shown in (n17), Nana-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, in the Nana up state in (n17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's character. After that, as shown in (n18), a screen is displayed where Nana-chan is praying. Nana-chan's prayer action is executed as a performance to confuse the enemy. Also, in the Nana Prayer state (n18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes pink in response to Nana's prayer action.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (n19), an image of the crab becoming confused due to Nana's prayer is displayed. Also, in the crab confused state of (n19), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the crab's confused motion. After that, as shown in (n20), an image of the crab getting angry after recovering from confusion is displayed. In the crab angry state of (n20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n21), an image of the crab swinging its arms to attack is displayed. Also, in the crab attacking state of (n21), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red corresponding to the crab's attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (n22), an image of Nana being attacked by a crab and receiving damage is displayed. Also, in the state of Nana receiving damage in (n22), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white in response to Nana receiving damage. After that, as shown in (n23), an image of Jam holding and operating the remote control is displayed. As shown in (n23), a subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to Jam's line "Leave it to me!" is displayed on the screen of Jam remote control operation. Also, in the state of Jam remote control operation in (n23), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam speaking. After that, as shown in (n24), an image of Jam trying to press a button on the remote control is displayed. As shown in (n24), in the state of Jam remote control operation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple in response to Jam operating the remote control.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (n25), a performance in which a hand comes out of the sky is executed. As shown in (n25), when the hand comes out of the sky, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white. After that, as shown in (n26), an image of a hand reaching out from the sky going to catch a crab is displayed. As shown in (n26), when the hand goes to catch a crab, the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white. After that, as shown in (n27), the scene before the win/loss determination is displayed, in which an enlarged image of a crab and a hand is displayed. In the scene before the win/loss determination of (n27), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white to correspond to the scene before the win/loss determination. Since the scene before the win/loss determination is muted, it is easy to understand that it is a branching scene for the win/loss determination. If it has been determined that a jackpot will occur in the SP latter half reach B from the state of (n27), the performance transitions to (o1). From the (n27) state, if it is determined that there will be a miss in the second half of the SP, Reach B, or that there will be a rescue hit, the performance will move to (p1).

[Performance in the epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
The presentation in the winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 110 to 112. The winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) is a part in which the story of Jam-chan and Nana-chan's victory over the crab robot unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in FIG. 110 (o1), in the epilogue part of the winning round in the second half of the SP, Reach B, an image of a hand reaching down from the sky catching a crab is displayed. Also, as shown in (o1), the screen where the crab is caught displays a subtitle "You got me" corresponding to the crab's line "You got me". Also, in the crab catching state of (o1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a brighter white than the white of (tn27) which indicates the lighting state of (n27) in response to catching the crab. After that, as shown in (o2), an image of the caught crab set up as the store's signboard is displayed. Also, in the state of (o2) where the crab has become the store's signboard, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth) indicating that a big win has occurred. Also, in the state of (o2), the background music for a win is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (o3), the screen shows Jam-chan and Nana-chan in front of the store with a crab as its signboard. Also, as shown in (o3), the subtitle "Nice sign" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Nice sign" is displayed on the screen of the store with a crab as its signboard. Also, in the state of the store with a crab as its signboard in (o3), the game effect lamp 9 turns rainbow lit (smooth). After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (o4), the screen shows Jam-chan and Nana-chan in front of the store with a crab as its signboard, and continues. Also, as shown in (o4), the subtitle "Work hard" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "Work hard" is displayed on the screen of the store with a crab as its signboard. Also, in the state of the store with a crab as its signboard in (o4), the game effect lamp 9 turns rainbow lit (smooth). After that, as shown in (o5), the image of the store with a crab as its signboard is displayed as a still image in a comic-style style. In the still image state of (o5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow pattern (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (o6), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (o6), the pattern "222" is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the pattern display state of (o6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (o7), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (o6). In the pattern display state of (o7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (o8), the pattern combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (o7) and displayed in normal size. In the state of two patterns (normal size) of (o8), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the Miss Epilogue Part (SP Second Half Reach B)]
The presentation in the failure epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 113 and 114. The failure epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) is a part in which a story unfolds in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are defeated by a crab robot, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 113 (p1), in the failed epilogue part of the SP's second half Reach B, an image of a hand reaching out from the sky failing to catch a crab is displayed. Also, in the crab-cannot-be-caught state of (p1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) corresponding to the failure to catch the crab. After that, as shown in (p2), an image of the crab running away sideways is displayed. In the crab-running state of (p2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tp1) indicating the lighting mode of (p1). After that, as shown in (p3), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who have been escaped by the crab, looking down in disappointment is displayed. Also, as shown in (p3), on the disappointment screen, the subtitle "What a shame" is displayed, corresponding to the lines of the two allies saying "What a shame". Also, as shown in (p3), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tp1) which shows the lighting state of (p1).

After that, the screen goes dark as shown in FIG. 114 (p4). In the dark screen state of (p4), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in (p5), the losing symbol combination "232" is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (p5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern common to (ta1) which indicates the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been determined that a rescue hit will occur from the state of (p5), the display transitions to (v1).

[Performance in the provocation part (SP final reach)]
With reference to Figures 115 to 132, the presentation in the teasing part (SP final reach) will be described. The teasing part (SP final reach) is a part in which a story unfolds in which six friendly characters, Yume Yume-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, Maid A, Maid B, and AD, chase the enemy character Bakuchu. In the teasing part (SP final reach), a story unfolds to tease that if the six can catch Bakuchu, they will win, but if the six cannot catch Bakuchu, they will lose. The teasing part (SP final reach) is also the reach with the highest chance of winning of all the reaches.

As shown in FIG. 115 (r1), in the promotion part where the SP final reach is executed, the title corresponding to the SP final reach, "Six people, catch Bakuchu!", is displayed. The title display shows the content of the performance of the SP final reach that will be executed from now on. When the title display of (r1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (r2), an image of a confrontation is displayed in which the six friendly characters, AD, Maid A, Maid B, Nana-chan, Jam-chan, and Yume-chan, face each other in the center of the screen with the enemy character Bakuchu. On the screen where the characters are confronting each other, the lines of the six friendly characters, "This is the last one," are output. Also, in the confrontation state of (r2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in white in response to the six characters uttering lines. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side is lit in red in response to the Bakuchu character. Additionally, when the image related to the title display (r2) disappears, background music corresponding to the SP final reach is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (r3), Bakuchu's line "I'm going to run away again" is output on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (r3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side is lit in white corresponding to the six characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in red corresponding to Bakuchu's line. After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (r4), when AD is displayed, the subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to AD's line "Leave it to me!" is displayed. In the AD display state of (r4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in orange corresponding to AD's line. After that, as shown in (r5), when Maid A is displayed, the subtitle display "Watch me" corresponding to Maid A's line "Watch me" is displayed. In the Maid A display state of (r5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in blue corresponding to Maid A's line. After that, as shown in (r6), when maid B is displayed, the subtitle "I'll do my best" is displayed, which corresponds to maid B's line "I'll do my best." In the maid B display state of (r6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes Hawaiian blue, corresponding to maid B speaking the line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (r7), when Nana-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "I'm going to catch you" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "I'm going to catch you" is displayed. In the state of Nana-chan display in (r7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r8), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "No problem" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "No problem" is displayed. In the state of Jam-chan display in (r8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r9), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Everyone's going!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Everyone's going!" is displayed. In the state of Yume-chan display in (r9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in green corresponding to Yume-chan's line being spoken.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (r10), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Come on, anyone!" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "Come on, anyone!". In the Bakuchu display state of (r10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, corresponding to Bakuchu's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r11), when an image of Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" is displayed, which corresponds to Maid A's line "Wait!". In the jam chasing state of (r11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes blue, corresponding to Maid A speaking. After that, as shown in (r12), when an image of AD and Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait, wait!" is displayed, which corresponds to the two allies' lines "Wait, wait!". In the (r12) AD & Maid A chasing state, the left game effect lamp 9 flashes orange, corresponding to the AD character speaking. Also, the right game effect lamp 9 flashes blue, corresponding to the maid A character speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (r13), when an image of Bakuchuu escaping is displayed, a subtitle display "Will you get caught?" corresponding to Bakuchuu's line "Will you get caught?" is displayed. Also, the sound of Bakuchuu's footsteps "tatatatatap" is output as a physical sound. Also, in the state of Bakuchuu escaping in (r13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red corresponding to Bakuchuu escaping. After that, as shown in (r14), an image of Bakuchuu escaping and running away from the screen is displayed. Also, the sound of Bakuchuu's footsteps "tatatatatap" is output as a physical sound. Also, in the state of Bakuchuu escaping in (r14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up red. After that, as shown in (r15), a city background is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background in (r15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r16), when an image of Nana chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" corresponding to Nana's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the Nana chasing state of (r16), the game effect lamp 9 flashes pink in response to Nana's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r17), when an image of Maid B and Nana chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait wait!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait wait!" is displayed. In the Maid B & Nana chasing state of (r17), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes Hawaiian blue in response to Maid B's character speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes pink in response to Nana's character speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r18), when an image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, the subtitle "Whoa!" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "Whoa!". In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatatap" is output. In addition, in the state of Bakuchu escaping in (r18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, corresponding to Bakuchu escaping. After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (r19), the background of a city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background in (r19), the game effect lamp 9 is lit yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (r20), when an image of Yume Yume chasing a Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "Wait!". In the Yume Yume chasing state of (r20), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. After that, as shown in (r21), when an image of Yume Yume and Jam chasing a Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait wait!" is displayed, which corresponds to the two allies' lines "Wait wait!". In the Yume Yume & Jam chasing state of (r21), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple, corresponding to Jam's character speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes green, corresponding to Yume Yume's character speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r22), the background of a city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background of (r22), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. After that, as shown in (r23), when the image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, the subtitle display "Yikes!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "That's bad!" is displayed. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta-ta" is output. Also, in the state of Bakuchu escaping of (r23), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red to indicate that Bakuchu is escaping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r24), in a scene where the AD character is up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange, corresponding to AD. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), in a scene where the AD jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in orange. At this time, "Ahh!" is output as the AD's spoken line, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r26), in a scene where the maid A's character is up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue, corresponding to maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), in a scene where maid A jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in blue. At this time, "Too!" is output as the maid A's spoken line, but no subtitles are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (r28), when the character of maid B is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue, which corresponds to maid B. After that, as shown in (r29), when maid B jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue. At this time, the same line as maid A, "Too!", is output as maid B's audible dialogue, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r30), when Nana-chan's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink, which corresponds to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r31), when Nana-chan jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana-chan's audible dialogue, but no subtitles are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r32), when Jam's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple, corresponding to Jam. After that, as shown in (r33), when Jam jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple. At this time, "Torya!" is output as Jam's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (r34), when Yume Yume's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green, corresponding to Yume Yume. After that, as shown in (r35), when Yume Yume jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in green. At this time, "Orya!" is output as Yume Yume's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (r36), an image showing a close-up of the faces of the six characters is displayed on the split screen. As shown in (r36), when the close-up image of the six allies is displayed, the subtitle "This is the last time!" is displayed, corresponding to the lines of the six allies "This is the last time!". Also, in the close-up state of the six allies in (r36), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white, corresponding to the six allies speaking. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (r37), the close-up image of the six allies continues to be displayed. Also, in the close-up state of the six allies in (r37), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (r38), Bakuchu is displayed against the background of the city. Also, in the Bakuchu display state of (r38), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (r39), Bakuchu is displayed in an enlarged form. Also, as shown in (r39), when the Bakuchu close-up image is displayed, the subtitle "Yabe!!!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Yabe!!!" is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu up state of (r39), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red corresponding to Bakuchu speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (r40), an image showing the push button 31B and a time gauge are displayed with a concentration line superimposed on the image of the explosive chocolate up. Also, in the explosive chocolate up + button display state of (r40), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white. After that, if the player operates the button within the button operation valid period, a cut-in display of Nana-chan, Yume-chan, and Jam-chan, the three main characters of the pachinko game machine 1, is displayed on the screen as shown in (r41). A cut-in display is a presentation in which another image is displayed by interrupting a displayed image. Also, the color of the cut-in display can indicate the probability of a jackpot. For example, if the cut-in display is red, the probability of a jackpot is higher than if it is green. Also, in the cut-in state of (r41), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red or green depending on the color of the cut-in display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (r42), after the cut-in display is cleared, an image of six people jumping at the explosive chu is displayed. Also, when the cut-in display is cleared in (r42), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (r43), when the screen shows six allies, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. After that, as shown in (r44), when the screen shows explosive chu, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r45), when the six allies are displayed larger than in (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (r46), when the explosive chu is displayed larger than in (r44), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47), when the six allies are displayed larger than in (r45), the subtitle "I've got you cornered!" is displayed, corresponding to the six allies' lines "I've got you cornered!". Also, in the state of (r47) where six allies are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white, corresponding to the six allies speaking. After that, as shown in (r48), the display of Bakuchu and the display of the six allies are displayed alternately. In the state of (r48), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49), an image is displayed in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathering in the center of the screen. As shown in (r49), a sound corresponding to an operation prompt is output in response to the trigger display gathering in the center, to encourage the player to perform an operation. Also, in the state of (r49) where the trigger display is in the center, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r50), an image is displayed in which the trigger display is gathering more in the center of the screen than in (r49). As shown in (r50), a sound corresponding to an operation prompt is output in response to the trigger display gathering in the center, to encourage the player to perform an operation. Also, in the state of (r50) where the trigger display is in the center, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (r51), an image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 1. At this time, the words "Pull!" are displayed superimposed on the image of Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. When the pull indication (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output to encourage the player to operate the game. Also, when the pull indication (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r52), an image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 2. At this time, a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge are displayed together with the word "Pull!" superimposed on the image of the Bakuchu. The time gauge is decreased compared to (r51). In the state where the pull-out display (still image 2) of (r52) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, as shown in (r53), an image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 3. At this time, a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge are displayed together with the word "Pull!" superimposed on the image of the Bakuchu. The time gauge is decreased compared to (r52). In the state where the pull-out display (still image 3) of (r53) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the scene before the win/loss decision is made, in which the image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 4. At this time, the word "Draw!" is displayed superimposed on the image of the Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. The time gauge has decreased compared to (r53). In the state in which the draw display (still image 4) is displayed as the scene before the win/loss decision is made in (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. If it has been determined that the SP final reach will result in a big win from the (r54) state, the performance transitions to (s1). If it has been determined that the SP final reach will result in a miss or a rescue win from the (r54) state, the performance transitions to (u1).

[Performance in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach)]
The performance in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) will be described with reference to Figures 133 to 136. The winning epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which the story of six people catching Bakuchu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in FIG. 133 (s1), in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach, as shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in response to the start of the drop of the reel. This effect image is more showy than the effect image when developing into the latter half of the SP reach. In addition, this effect image makes it impossible to see the Bakuchu character or the reduced "2" decorative pattern. In addition, in the (s1) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors in response to the drop of the reel.

After that, in the state of FIG. 133 (s2), the reel falls further from the state of (s1). In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors in accordance with the fall of the reel. After that, in the state of (s3), the reel falls further to a position where the character "P" of the reel overlaps with the position where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. A performance in which the reel rises from the state of (s3) is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s4), in the state after the reel rises, a scene in which Yume-Yume-chan catches Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s4), the subtitle display "Uuu, I got caught" corresponding to the Bakuchu's line "Uuu, I got caught" is displayed. In the state of catching Bakuchu of (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth). Also, in state (s4), background music for a winning combination is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s5), an image of six people rejoicing after catching a Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s5), a subtitle display "Good job, everyone!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "Good job, everyone!". In the Bakuchu catching state of (s5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbows (smooth). After that, as shown in (s6), an image of six people rejoicing after catching a Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s6), a subtitle display "Good job, everyone!" is displayed. In the Bakuchu catching state of (s6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbows (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7), an image of six people rejoicing after catching a Bakuchu is displayed in a comic-style still image. In the still image state of (s7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth). After that, as shown in (s8), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (s8), the pattern display enlarges the "222" pattern and emphasizes the pattern with a converging line. In the pattern display state of (s8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (s9), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (s8). In the pattern display state of (s9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a normal size, further reduced from the state of (s9). In the (s10) 2 symbol (normal size) state, the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the failed epilogue part (final SP reach)]
The presentation in the failure epilogue part (SP final reach) will be described with reference to Figures 137 to 138. The failure epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which a story unfolds in which the six players fail to catch the Bakuchu, thereby informing the player that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 137 (u1), in the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach, an image of Bakuchu running away is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu escaping state of (u1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tr54) indicating the lighting mode of (r54) in response to not being able to catch Bakuchu. After that, as shown in (u2), an image is displayed of the Bakuchu running away far away, and the six players who were unable to catch Bakuchu are disappointed. Also, as shown in (u2), on the disappointment screen, a subtitle display "Sorry~" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "Sorry~". As shown in (u2), in the disappointment state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tu1) indicating the lighting mode of (u1).

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (u3), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (u3), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (u4), the losing symbol combination "232" is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (u4) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern common to (ta1) which indicates the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been determined that a rescue hit will occur from the (u4) state, the display transitions to (v1).

[Performance in the rescue part]
The presentation in the rescue hit part will be described with reference to Figures 139 to 140. The rescue hit part is a part where a story of rescue performance that becomes a big hit develops after the development of a losing story. In the rescue hit part, a premium character corresponding to rescue (revival) named Drum-kun, who did not appear in other reaches, appears.

As shown in FIG. 139 (v1), in the rescue hit part, a rescue effect is executed in which a character called Drum-kun is displayed on the screen. By seeing Drum-kun, the player can recognize that it is a revival hit disguised as a miss. In the rescue effect of (v1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a brighter red than (td4, tg5, tp5, tu4). After that, as shown in (v3), the screen goes white. In the whiteout of (v2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (v3), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (v3), the pattern "222" is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the pattern display state of (v3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (v4), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (v3). In the pattern display state of (v4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (v5), the pattern combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (v4) and displayed in normal size. In the two pattern (normal size) state of (v5), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation)]
With reference to Figures 141 to 156, the performance mode in the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation) will be described. In Figures 141 to 156, the flow of a series of performances from the detailed performance of the symbol output in the fanning performance to the button operation in the re-draw performance will be described.

As shown in FIG. 141 (A1), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222", which indicates a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (A1), in the two-pattern enlarged state, the "222" pattern is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the two-pattern enlarged state of (A1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (A2), the pattern combination "222" is displayed larger than in the state of (A1). In the two-pattern enlarged state of (A2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (A3), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a reduced size. In the two-pattern reduced state of (A3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (A4), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a further reduced size. In the two symbol reduced state of (A4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (A5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the two symbol normal size state of (A5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (A6), the background changes and the re-lottery performance starts. In the (A6) state, a shaking period occurs in which the symbol combination "222" shakes up and down. In (A6), a screen is displayed in which the symbols have risen from their normal positions to the top. In the two symbol shaking state of (A6), the game effect lamp 9 goes out.

Here, the period during which the symbols are shaking is omitted from the state (A5) to the state (A6). Specifically, the symbols are shaking when they are normal size. After they become normal size, the symbol shaking for the re-draw part continues. At this time, at the timing related to the completion of the symbol release (for example, including the timing just before the symbol becomes normal size, the timing after the symbol becomes normal size, and the timing when the symbol shaking starts), the game effect lamp 9 switches from blinking white to smoothly lighting up in rainbow colors. This allows the smooth symbol release from the symbol release to the re-draw performance, the smooth transition to the shaking period, and the celebration of the symbol alignment to be performed by the illumination of the screen and lamps. After that, during the symbol shaking period of FIG. 143 (A7), a screen in which the symbol has moved downward from the normal position is displayed. During the two-symbol shaking state of (A7), the game effect lamp 9 goes out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (A8), during the pattern shaking period, a screen with the pattern displayed in the center is displayed. As shown in (A8), in the state of two-pattern shaking, the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in (A9), during the period when the movement due to the re-draw performance starts, the two patterns are displayed smaller than in the state of (A8). In the state of two-pattern reduction in (A9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (A10), the two patterns are further reduced from the state of (A9) and displayed. In the state of two-pattern reduction in (A10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, the numbers used as decorative symbols fluctuate at high speed from FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. 148 (A24), and the display is switched. When the display is switched, the decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped are sequentially replaced with other symbols, and the decorative symbols are switched one after another. For example, as shown in (A11), symbol 2 is displayed lightly during high-speed fluctuation. In the state of fluctuation of (A11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, in the state of 3 symbols in (A12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, from FIG. 145 (A13) to FIG. 148 (A23), the symbols fluctuate at high speed and are switched, such as symbol 3, symbol 4, symbol 5, symbol 6, symbol 7, and symbol 1, and light and clear displays are repeated. From Figure 145 (A13) to Figure 148 (A23), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, in Fig. 148 (A24), where the high-speed fluctuation that started with the 2 symbols has completed one cycle and the 2 symbols are displayed clearly again, the button image and the time gauge are faintly displayed under the 2 symbols. After that, as shown in Fig. 149 (A25), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed while the 2 symbols are displayed faintly during the high-speed fluctuation. After that, from Fig. 149 (A26) to Fig. 156 (A46), the symbols are switched while fluctuating at high speed, such as 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, 1 symbols, 2 symbols, 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, and 6 symbols, and the faint and clear displays are repeated. Also, the time gauge gradually decreases over time. From Fig. 148 (A24) to Fig. 156 (A46), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Then, when push button 31B is operated from the (A46) state, if it has been determined that an odd numbered symbol will be generated, the display will transition to (B1). When push button 31B is operated from the (A46) state, if it has been determined that an even numbered symbol will be generated, the display will transition to (C1).

[Performance in the re-draw part (odd number pattern derived after button operation)]
With reference to Figures 157 to 160, the performance in the re-selection part (deriving odd symbols after button operation) will be described. In Figures 157 to 160, the flow of a series of performances from when a button is operated in the re-selection performance until an odd symbol is derived will be described.

As shown in FIG. 157 (B1), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "333", which indicates a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (B1), in the 3-pattern enlarged state, the background becomes brighter, the "333" pattern is enlarged, and the pattern is emphasized by a converging line. In the 3-pattern enlarged state of (B1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (B2), the pattern combination "333" is displayed larger than in the state of (B1). In the 3-pattern enlarged state of (B2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (B3), the pattern combination "333" is displayed in a reduced size. In the 3-pattern reduced state of (B3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 158 (B4), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed. In the three symbol reduced state of (B4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (B5), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the three symbol normal size state of (B5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (B6), the symbol combination "333" enters a swinging period in which it swings up and down. In (B6), a screen in which the symbols have risen upward from their normal positions is displayed. In the three symbol swing state of (B6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, the background changes to a normal background as shown in FIG. 159 (B7). The symbol swing period continues even in the normal background of (B7). In the normal background swing state of (B7), a screen in which the symbols have fallen downward from their normal positions is displayed. In the normal background shaking state (B7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in FIG. 159 (B8), the decorative pattern of "333" is fixed and stopped. Also, during the pattern fixing period of (B8), the small pattern is also fixed and stopped at "333". During the pattern fixing period of (B8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (B9), the pattern fixing period continues. During the pattern fixing period of (B9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the lighting state of flashing rainbow colors. After that, during the fanfare period of FIG. 160 (D1), the same screen as in the state of (B9) is displayed. However, the state of the game effect lamp 9 is turned off corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (D2), the screen switches to a screen displaying the letters "FEVER" and Yume Yume-chan, indicating the fanfare state, with a delay from the state of the game effect lamp 9. Also, the state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time maintains the lighting state of the fanfare state.

[Performance in the re-draw part (deriving even numbers after button operation)]
With reference to Fig. 161 to Fig. 164, the performance mode in the re-selection part (deriving an even number symbol after a button operation) will be described. In Fig. 161 to Fig. 164, the flow of a series of performances from when a button operation is performed in the re-selection performance until an even number symbol is derived will be described.

As shown in FIG. 161 (C1), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222", which indicates a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (C1), in the two-pattern enlarged state, the background becomes brighter and the "222" pattern is enlarged, and the pattern is emphasized by a converging line. In the two-pattern enlarged state of (C1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. After that, as shown in (C2), the pattern combination "222" is displayed larger than in the state of (C1). In the two-pattern enlarged state of (C2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. After that, as shown in (C3), the pattern combination "222" is displayed reduced. In the two-pattern reduced state of (C3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (C4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the two-symbol reduced state of (C4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (C5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the two-symbol normal size state of (C5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (C6), the background returns to the state of (A46), and the symbol combination "222" enters a swinging period in which it swings up and down. In (C6), a screen in which the symbols have risen upward from their normal positions is displayed. In the two-symbol swing state of (C6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, the background changes to the normal background as shown in FIG. 163 (C7). The symbol swinging period continues even in the normal background of (C7). In the normal background shaking state of (C7), the screen shows the pattern lowered from its normal position. In the normal background shaking state of (C7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in FIG. 163 (C8), the decorative pattern of "222" is fixed and stopped. Also, during the pattern fixing period of (C8), the small pattern is also fixed and stopped at "222". During the pattern fixing period of (C8), the game effect lamp 9 is smoothly lit in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (C9), the pattern fixing period continues. During the pattern fixing period of (C9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains its smooth rainbow lighting. After that, during the fanfare period of FIG. 164 (E1), the same screen as in the state of (C9) is displayed. However, the state of the game effect lamp 9 is turned off corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (E2), the screen switches to a screen displaying the letters "FEVER" and Yume Yume-chan, indicating the fanfare state, with a delay from the state of the game effect lamp 9. Also, the state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time maintains the fanfare state lighting.

<Description of Characteristic Parts in the Presentation Mode of the Pachinko Game Machine 1>
Next, the characteristics and modifications of the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described in detail.

(Start 5)
The above-mentioned shutter is an image that makes the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible when closed, and makes the image of the performance being performed visible when opened after closing. The shutter is also executed at a timing related to the teasing part, that is, before the start of the teasing part. When the shutter is in a closing state, the screen brightness is lowered as the area in which the performance is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is in a opening state, the screen brightness is increased as the area in which the performance is visible becomes wider. This makes it possible to make the flow of the performance look favorable by making the closing and opening of the shutter more realistic. Note that the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, but an image other than the shutter may be used, and a similar performance may be executed using a role object.

(Start 6)
The shutters described above are configured to close from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. This allows the effect of gradually changing screen brightness to be displayed in an optimal manner. The shutters may be configured to close from both ends of the screen toward the center like a sliding door. The shutters may be configured to close from the top edge of the screen toward the bottom edge of the screen.

(Start 7)
Also, as shown in Fig. 58, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. This makes it possible to blur the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is low and the edge of the shutter just before the shutter is completely closed as shown in Fig. 58 (a12), and eliminates the sense of incongruity. Similarly, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity when the shutter begins to open as shown in Fig. 60 (a16).

(Start 8)
As shown in Figures 60 and 61, the SP first half reach begins after the shutter opens. The SP first half reach effect does not begin until the shutter is fully open, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and the SP first half effect progresses after the shutter is opened. This prevents dissatisfaction by the SP first half reach effect being executed before the shutter opens, since the SP first half reach effect is something that players want to pay attention to.

(Start 10)
Also, as shown in Fig. 57(a9) described above, the brightness of the screen is lowered before the shutter starts to close, and the shutter is completely closed at the same time. If the brightness of the screen is lowered at the same time as the shutter closes, the speed at which the screen goes dark may be too fast. Therefore, by starting to lower the brightness of the screen in advance, the speed at which the screen goes dark can be made appropriate, and the series of effects can be made to look good.

(Start 12)
In addition, the player is not able to know which SP first half reach will start until the shutter is opened. This allows the player to have high expectations as to which performance will be executed.

(Start 13)
The above-mentioned shutter effect may be executed at a timing other than the timing of development to the first half of the SP. For example, it may be executed at the timing from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo consecutive. Also, when the shutter is closed and then opened, an icon image (e.g., a green reserved image) indicating a change in the active reserved, which is the reserved display of the variation, may be displayed, and the active reserved may change in response to the icon image (e.g., from blue to green). Also, the shutter effect may be executed at the timing of development from the first half of the SP reach to the second half of the SP reach. This can improve the interest of the shutter effect.

(Start 15)
In addition to the above-mentioned pattern in which the shutter closes and then automatically opens, a pattern may be provided in which a button image is displayed after the shutter closes, and the shutter opens when the button is operated. This provides multiple types of shutter effects, increasing the interest of the shutter effects.

(Incitement 1)
In addition, the provocation part, which is the aforementioned provocation of winning or losing, has a performance that is updated as the friendly character and the enemy character alternate in their battle (for example, SP first half reach B and SP second half reach B). In such a provocation part, there is a scene in which the friendly character takes damage. In addition, in such a provocation part, the image display switching interval is faster than in the epilogue part, and the number of image display switchings is greater. Thus, by making the provocation part develop faster than the epilogue part, the provocation part can be made to look good.

(Incitement 2)
Also, as shown in Fig. 63(b5) and the like, in the provocative part, the lines of the friendly characters are spoken first, and subtitles corresponding to the lines are displayed. This allows the friendly characters to be easily recognized in the provocative part.

(Incitement 3)
The subtitle display of the ally character that is displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period of time than the subtitle display in other scenes in the teasing part, so that the ally character can be clearly recognized.

(Incitement 4)
Also, as shown in Fig. 67 (b17) and the like, there are scenes where subtitles are not displayed when an ally character speaks a line. This allows the screen display to be more suitable than if subtitles were displayed for all lines while still displaying the subtitles of the ally character that is displayed first.

(Incitement 5)
In addition, in the above-mentioned provocation part, there are SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B as the first provocation part executed in the first half, and SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach as the second provocation part executed in the second half. In both the first and second provocation parts, there are scenes in which the ally characters play an active role. In addition, in both provocation parts, the ally characters' lines are spoken first, and subtitles corresponding to those lines are displayed. This allows the ally characters to be easily recognized in both provocation parts.

(Incitement 6)
In the above-mentioned provocation part, in the provocation part corresponding to the SP first half reach B, the character Yume Yume plays an active role, and in the provocation part corresponding to the SP second half reach B, the characters Jam and Nana play an active role. In the SP first half reach B, the first ally character Yume Yume speaks a line, and a subtitle corresponding to the line is displayed. In the SP second half reach B, the first ally character Jam and Nana speak a line, and a subtitle corresponding to the line is displayed. This allows the ally characters to be appropriately recognized in each provocation part. The number of characters that play an active role may be one or more. The characters that play an active role in the first half provocation part and the second half provocation part may be the same.

(Incitement 11)
Also, as shown in Fig. 63 (b5) and (b6) above, there are scenes in which friendly and enemy characters are displayed and each character speaks lines. In such a situation, the subtitle display for the lines is of a fixed size and is displayed at a fixed display position. In this way, by not changing the display mode of the lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the opportunities for bugs to occur.

(Provocative cut-in 2)
127 (r39) to 128 (r42), at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the subtitle display is displayed before the button image promotion display is displayed. This allows the button image to continue to be shown to the player who is watching the screen and paying attention to the subtitle display, so that the button image is not overlooked, and the cut-in display can be executed appropriately.

(Teasing cut-in 3)
As shown in the above-mentioned Figures 128 (r41) to 130 (r47), the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period of time after the cut-in display is cleared. Then, after the predetermined period of no dialogue has elapsed, a line is spoken and subtitles are displayed for that line. This allows the player to concentrate on the presentation during the period after the cut-in display, making for an ideal cut-in display.

(True or False 1)
Also, as shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 132 (r54), the scene where the winning or losing was decided was between the teasing part and the epilogue part. And, in the winning or losing decision scene, the player was notified of whether or not it was a big win by operating the trigger as the operating means. Also, in the winning or losing decision scene, if it was a big win, the role-playing device moved after the trigger was operated. In this way, the excitement of the presentation is increased by making the winning or losing decision scene suitable for using the operating means.

(True or False 2)
Also, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 130 (r47) to 132 (r54), before the image corresponding to the operation means is displayed, subtitles are displayed by ally characters, and then the effect that was being executed cannot be seen on the screen corresponding to the operation means. Then, the effect that was being executed after that can be recognized again together with the image of the operation means. In this way, the introduction of the operation means is displayed on the entire screen to give an impact, while the effect that was being executed is displayed firmly at the timing when the operation means can be operated, making the progress of the effect look good.

(True or False 3)
As shown in Fig. 130 (r48) to Fig. 131 (r51) above, the presentation is in progress even while the introductory images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation of the operation means are displayed. By having the presentation proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image (image (r51)) in which the operation means can be operated, and also to draw attention to the development of the presentation.

(True or False 4)
Also, in the above-mentioned FIG. 132 (r51) to FIG. 132 (r54), when a trigger image is displayed as a promotion display, the tail of the Bakuchu image moves slightly each time the image changes. In this way, the performance may be progressed while the promotion display is being displayed. Here, the progress of the performance may not be limited to the tail moving, but may also include scene changes or character movements. This allows attention to be drawn to the development of the performance during the promotion display.

(5 correct or not)
Furthermore, the performance that progresses while the prompting display is displayed progresses slower than the performance that was executed before the prompting display was displayed. This allows the player to pay attention to the prompting display for operating the operating means, and a balance can be achieved between the prompting display and the progress of the performance. Note that the performance that progresses while the prompting display is displayed may be set to progress slower than the performance that progresses while the introduction image is displayed. This allows a difference in the progress speed of the performance between when the prompting display is displayed and when the introduction image is displayed.

(True or False: 6)
It is also preferable to echo the lines that are spoken before the introductory image is displayed, as shown in Fig. 130 (r47) above. This makes it possible to get the players excited before the introductory image is displayed.

(True or False: 7)
Also, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 130 (r47) to 131 (r49), the introduction image is displayed after deleting the subtitle display before the introduction image is displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the timing of the introduction image and the subtitle display from overlapping.

(14 correct or not)
In addition, from the above-mentioned FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39), the image in which the two characters Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged, and at the timing of (i39), one image is displayed still for a predetermined period. After that, if there is a big win, the image of the winning epilogue part is played, and if there is a loss, the image of the losing epilogue part is played. During the period in which one image is displayed still for a predetermined period, one image can be reused, so that the winning/losing decision scene can be favorably stirred up while reducing the data capacity. Note that, during the period in which the image in which the two characters are displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed, more images (for example, 10 images) may be used as shown in FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39).

(16 correct answers)
In addition, from the aforementioned FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54), there is a display period of an introductory image in which an image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is gathered in the center of the screen. After that, there is a period in which a prompting display for operating the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the prompting display, multiple images are gradually moved to make the character appear to be moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching scene of winning or losing, an image of the winning epilogue part is played if it is a big win, and an image of the losing epilogue part is played if it is a loss. All of these periods are periods in which a dynamic display in which the image appears to be moving is performed. This allows a series of performances to be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of performances can be achieved.

(18 correct or not)
In addition, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the winning/losing decision scene shown in the above-mentioned Figures 133 (s1) to 136 (s10) and Figures 137 (u1) to 138 (u4) will be explained. In the winning epilogue part, the image corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the role-playing action. In the losing epilogue part, the screen goes dark after the performance corresponding to the losing epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since the flow is such that multiple images are switched after the winning/losing decision scene, it is possible to achieve a suitable flow of performance.

(Epilogue 1)
The aforementioned winning epilogue part is a part that does not transition when a miss occurs, and is a part that contains scenes in which enemy characters are at a disadvantage and scenes in which friendly characters are at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display switches in the performance is less than in the teasing part. This allows appropriate performance to be executed in each part, and the flow of the series of performances can be displayed in an optimal manner.

(Epilogue 4)
As shown in Fig. 104 (n10) above, subtitles are not displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the provocative part. In contrast, as shown in Fig. 110 (o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the winning epilogue part (the scene where he catches a crab). In this way, subtitles that were not displayed in the provocative part are displayed in the winning epilogue part, emphasizing the feeling of celebration.

(Epilogue 6)
As shown in (s5) to (s6) of FIG. 134, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the teasing part. This allows the player to bask in the afterglow of the big win by displaying the subtitle display in the final winning epilogue part for a longer period, emphasizing the feeling of celebration. Note that the subtitle display may be displayed for a longer period when the number of characters is greater than when the number of characters is smaller. Even in this case, if the winning epilogue part and the teasing part have the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters), the winning epilogue part may be designed to have a longer period for which the subtitle display is displayed.

(Epilogue 15)
As shown in Fig. 134 (s6) to Fig. 135 (s8) above, the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the pattern presentation is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the subtitle display from being covered by the decorative pattern and from being mistaken for a message in the pattern presentation. Therefore, the presentation in the winning epilogue part can be displayed in an optimal manner.

(Epilogue 17)
As shown in Fig. 136 (s10) described above, when the symbol presentation is completed and the player can recognize the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol and the image of the character or the like displayed as the background are still images. This makes it possible to prevent the decorative symbol from becoming difficult to see due to the background of the decorative symbol being animated.

(Epilogue 18)
As shown in Fig. 135 (s7) above, the image that was playing in the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at the timing before the pattern release performance is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the pattern from becoming difficult to see from the timing when the pattern release starts.

(Epilogue 19)
As shown in Fig. 135 (s7) above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special aspect like a comic strip. By adding a special aspect effect to the still image, it is possible to emphasize that the image has stopped and to suggest that the scene has changed, making it a suitable winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 21)
It is preferable that the subtitle display before the pattern display shown in Fig. 134 (s6) described above does not have a fade effect that gradually erases the display. However, the subtitle display displayed at other times may have a fade effect that gradually erases the display. In this way, the fade effect can be applied to all subtitle displays except the final one to provide an effective switching effect, and the final subtitle display can be prevented from being covered by a decorative pattern by instantly erasing it, and from being mistaken for a message in the pattern display performance. Therefore, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Epilogue 22)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed. Then, the decorative pattern is added with an effect image using a convergent line, but the small pattern is not added with an effect image. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image, and is displayed in front. This makes it possible to recognize that the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner while enhancing the performance effect of the effect image for the decorative pattern, and can be a suitable winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 23)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed. Here, the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be synchronized at the timing when the display of the decorative pattern is completed. Specifically, during the pattern swing period when the display of the decorative pattern is completed and the pattern is swinging up and down, the small pattern may also swing up and down in the same manner as the decorative pattern. According to this, by matching the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, the flow of the performance in the winning epilogue part can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Epilogue 24)
As shown in Fig. 157 (B1) to Fig. 158 (B5) above, when the re-draw part is performed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed. Then, the decorative pattern is added with an effect image using a convergent line, but the small pattern is not added with an effect image. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image, and is displayed in front. This makes it possible to recognize that the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner while enhancing the performance effect of the effect image for the decorative pattern.

(Epilogue 25)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be displayed in a state where the patterns are aligned. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-selection part, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be changed again. This allows the decorative pattern and the small pattern to be displayed in a synchronized manner.

(Re-selection effect 3)
As shown in FIG. 142 (A5) above, in the final state of the pattern release performance in the winning epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying and an effect image with concentrated lines is added. When switching from that state to the background of the re-lottery performance as shown in (A6), the effect image with concentrated lines continues to be added. Also, the game effect lamp 9 switches from a smooth rainbow light to an off state. In other words, from the pattern release to the re-lottery performance, the pattern swaying and effect mode continue, and the background and lamp are designed to switch. This makes it easy to understand which decorative pattern the re-lottery performance started from.

(Re-draw performance 6)
As shown in the above-mentioned flow of Fig. 144 (A10) to Fig. 156 (A46) and Fig. 157 (B1) to Fig. 158 (B5), in the re-lottery presentation, a symbol feed is performed using reduced-sized decorative symbols, and a button action prompt is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, a symbol release presentation is performed in which the symbols are enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative symbol that will be finally notified is enlarged and displayed from the moment the symbol is released. In this way, since the symbol that will finally be notified begins to be enlarged, it is possible to easily show the player what the final notification symbol will be.

(Re-draw performance 16)
The above-mentioned pattern display in the FIG. 141 (A1) to FIG. 142 (A5) parts and the pattern display in the FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C5) parts are executed using substantially the same image. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image of the "2" symbol, and the pattern display is executed in a manner in which the background part is different. According to this, since the image of the pattern display can be made substantially the same, it is possible to easily show the player that the game has not been promoted to the probability variation pattern. It is also possible to make the image of the pattern display part, including the background, completely the same.

(Re-draw performance 17)
In the aforementioned pattern display performance, a series of performances is executed in which the pattern is once enlarged and then returned to the normal size at the center of the screen. This allows the series of pattern display performances to be displayed in a favorable manner by enlarging and reducing the pattern.

(Re-draw performance 18)
In the above-mentioned pattern display performance, the data of the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data of the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance may use the same pattern display data. Then, a series of pattern display performances may be executed using the common pattern display data and a combination of multiple decorative patterns. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity while making the pattern display performance look good. Note that the data of the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data of the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance may use substantially the same data.

<Detailed explanation of the performance mode>
Next, with reference to Figures 165 to 191, the following will explain in detail the characteristics and variations of the above-mentioned presentation aspects that should be particularly mentioned.

[Regarding instigation 12, 13, and 15]
In Figure 165, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b11) to (b13))
FIG. 165 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (b11) to (b13) portions of the SP first half reach A described above. As shown in FIG. 165 (b11), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Yume Yume-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right in the left-right direction. In accordance with this character arrangement, the frame left lamp lights up green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, and the frame right lamp lights up red corresponding to Bakuchu. Also, in the (b11) state, Yume Yume-chan's line "Wait~" is output as a dialogue sound, Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazz zazz" are output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as a physical sound.

Also, as shown in (b11), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that, in the front-to-back direction, Bakuchu is in front and Yume Yume-chan is in the back. From the player's perspective, their positions are such that Bakuchu is close by and Yume Yume-chan is far away. In contrast, the relationship in terms of volume is as follows: Yume Yume-chan's line "Wait~" > Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatatap" > Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "za za za". In this way, the volume data is set so that the line sound of Yume Yume-chan, which is far away, is louder than the footsteps of Bakuchu, which is close by.

In FIG. 165 (b12), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is the same as in the state of (b11) in both the left-right and front-back directions. In (b12), no dialogue sounds are output, and the physical sounds of Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "za za za" and Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" are output. The volume relationship is Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" > Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "za za za". In this way, when no dialogue sounds are output, the volume data is set so that the closer Bakuchu's footsteps are louder than the farther Yume Yume-chan's footsteps to match the front-to-back relationship on the screen.

In FIG. 165 (b13), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Yume Yume-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right in the left-right direction. Also, in the state of (b13), Bakuchu's line "I won't get caught!" is output as a dialogue sound, Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "Zzz za za" are output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps "tata tata tata" are output as a physical sound. Also, as shown in (b13), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Yume Yume-chan is in front and Bakuchu is behind in the front-to-back direction. The positional relationship as seen by the player is such that Yume Yume-chan is close and Bakuchu is far away. In contrast, the relationship in volume is such that Bakuchu's line sound "I won't get caught!" > Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "Zzz za za" > Bakuchu's footsteps "tata tata tata". In this way, the volume data is set so that Bakuchu's lines, which are far away, are louder than Yume-chan's footsteps, which are closer.

(Incitement 12)
In the provocation part, the background music for the SP reach is output, and there is a scene where the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also called the operation sound) are output at the same time. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the same time, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume than the physical sound when output from the speakers 8L, 8R. By outputting the physical sound as part of the presentation, the reality of the presentation is brought out, and by outputting the dialogue sound louder when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap, the content of the presentation can be easily conveyed to the player. As a result, the presentation in the provocation part can be made to look better.

(Incitement 13)
Here, the work process when various effects in the pachinko game machine 1 are actually created will be described. First, an image for each effect corresponding to a variable time such as SP reach is created in the pachinko game machine 1. In accordance with this image, sound effects such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are added one by one using dedicated software. The completed image and sound are played, and the sound is further strengthened. In this series of work processes, sound data is set so that a sound that ignores the actual distance feeling that is easily conveyed to the player is output, abandoning reality, rather than outputting the sound with reality while keeping the actual distance feeling on the image. This allows a series of effects to be displayed in an appropriate manner.

(Incitement 15)
In addition, when the dialogue sound of a character that the player feels is far away overlaps with a physical sound that the player feels is close, the sound data is set so that the dialogue sound sounds louder than the physical sound. This discards reality and outputs sounds that ignore the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player, making it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation.

[Regarding instigation 14 and 16]
In Figures 166 and 167, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Volume level explanation)
Fig. 166 is a diagram for explaining volume levels. As shown in Fig. 166(A), the relationship between the volume levels of dialogue sounds, physical sounds (footsteps), and BGM for SP reach among the sounds output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. The output volume levels have the relationship dialogue sounds>physical sounds (footsteps)>BGM for SP reach. In addition, when these three sounds overlap, the way in which the sounds are output differs between dialogue sounds with subtitles and dialogue sounds without subtitles.

As shown in FIG. 166(B), in the case of dialogue sounds with subtitles, when the dialogue sounds (with subtitles) are output at a timing when the dialogue sounds (with subtitles) overlap with the physical sounds and the BGM for the SP reach, the volume level of the BGM for the SP reach is controlled to be output at a lower level. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 166(C), in the case of dialogue sounds without subtitles, when the dialogue sounds (without subtitles) overlap with the physical sounds and the BGM for the SP reach, the volume level of none of the sounds is changed while maintaining the relationship of dialogue sounds > physical sounds (footsteps) > BGM for the SP reach.

(Incitement 14)
In this way, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are outputted in an overlapping manner, the dialogue sound is adjusted and outputted so that it sounds louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are outputted in an overlapping manner, as shown in Fig. 166 (B), the background music of the SP reach is adjusted to be quieter in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, the content of the presentation can be easily conveyed to the player while creating a sense of reality.

(Incitement 16)
166(B) and (C), when comparing a case where the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound has subtitles and a case where the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound does not have subtitles, the dialogue sound with subtitles is adjusted to sound louder by lowering the volume of the BGM for the SP reach. The dialogue sound with subtitles is more related to the content of the SP reach than the dialogue sound without subtitles. Therefore, by outputting the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach louder, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation.

(Volume level explanation)
Fig. 167 is a diagram for explaining volume levels. Fig. 167 explains a method for effectively outputting volume using a method different from that of Fig. 166. In Fig. 167 and Fig. 166, the relationship of the output volume levels is the same, that is, dialogue sound>physical sound (footsteps)>BGM for SP reach. However, as shown in Fig. 167(B), when the physical sound of a character and the dialogue sound are output overlapping, the dialogue sound is adjusted to be louder than the physical sound.

(Incitement 16)
167(B) and (C), when there is a dialogue sound overlapping with a physical sound and there is a subtitle, the volume is adjusted to be louder only when there is a subtitle for the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound. This makes it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation by loudly outputting the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach.

[About provocations 7 and 8]
In Figures 168 to 170, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanation of parts (r24) to (r27))
FIG. 168 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r24) to (r27) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r24), when the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange, which corresponds to the AD. After that, as shown in (r25), when the AD jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes orange. At this time, "Ahh!" is output as the AD's speech sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r25'), when the AD leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times.

After that, as shown in (r26), when the character of maid A is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue, corresponding to maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), when maid A jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes blue. At this time, "Too!" is output as the voice of maid A, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r27'), when maid A leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times.

(Detailed explanation of (r28) to (r31))
FIG. 169 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r28) to (r31) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r28), when the character of maid B is in a close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue, which corresponds to maid B. After that, as shown in (r29), when maid B jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue. At this time, the same line as maid A, "Too!", is output as maid B's speech sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r29'), when maid B leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times.

After that, as shown in (r30), in a scene where Nana's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink, corresponding to Nana. After that, as shown in (r31), in a scene where Nana jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's spoken line, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r31'), in a scene where Nana leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times.

(Detailed explanation of parts (r32) to (r35))
FIG. 170 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r32) to (r35) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r32), when the character of Jam-chan is up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple, which corresponds to Jam-chan. After that, as shown in (r32), when Jam-chan jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple. At this time, "Gotcha!" is output as Jam-chan's speech sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r32'), when Jam-chan leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times.

After that, as shown in (r34), when Yume Yume's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green, corresponding to Yume Yume. After that, as shown in (r35), when Yume Yume jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes green. At this time, "Oryah!" is output as Yume Yume's speech sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r35'), when Yume Yume leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times.

Here, in scenes such as r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35, the lines output are one-liners that seem to express enthusiasm. In these particular scenes, the scene changes faster than in other scenes. Also, in these particular scenes, the subtitles are not directly related to the storyline compared to other scenes with subtitles. For these reasons, subtitles corresponding to the lines are not displayed.

(Incitement 7)
As shown in Figures 168 to 170, there are scenes in the teasing part where the character speaks lines but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in such specific scenes, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in scenes where no subtitles are displayed for the sound of the lines, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. This makes it possible to preferably execute the effect corresponding to the character, and to preferably show the teasing part to the player.

(Incitement 8)
Also, as shown in FIG. 168 to FIG. 170, in the scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to light up in a color other than the color corresponding to the character in the previous scene. Specifically, before the scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in yellow (r22) or red (r23), and then lights up in orange corresponding to the AD character. Also, before the scene (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in orange (r25) or white (r25'), and then lights up in blue corresponding to the maid A character. Also, before the scene (r28), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in blue (r27) or white (r27'), and then lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the maid B character. Also, before the scene (r30), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on/flashed in Hawaiian blue (r29) or white (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in pink corresponding to the character Nana-chan. Also, before the scene (r32), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on/flashed in pink (r31) or white (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in purple corresponding to the character Jam-chan. Also, before the scene (r34), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in purple (r33) or white (r33'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in green corresponding to the character Yume-Yume. In this way, before a character appears, control is performed to turn on the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the corresponding character, and then control is performed to turn on the game effect lamp 9 in the color corresponding to the character. Therefore, the change in the displayed character and the fact that the changed character is easily indicated to the player can be expressed by the lamp, making it a suitable entertainment part.

[About Starts 1 to 4]
The characteristic parts of Figures 171 and 172 will be numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanation of the role movement in (b18) to (i1))
FIG. 171 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the operation of the role in (b18) to (i1). In the scene before the winning or losing decision shown in (b18), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting state. After that, when the game progresses to the SP second half reach, the movable body 32 as the role operates. Specifically, the role falls while tilting diagonally from the top of the screen to the front of the screen. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in accordance with the start of the role fall. The effect image makes it impossible to see the Yume Yume character or the reduced "2" decorative pattern. Also, in the state of (h1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in accordance with the role fall.

After that, in state (h2), the reel falls further so that the letter "P" of the reel overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative pattern was displayed. In state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. In addition, a reel-related sound corresponding to the falling of the reel is output as a sound effect. After that, in state (h3), the position of the reel is maintained at the position where it fell in state (h2). In state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, as shown in (h4), the reel starts to rise (the reel moves from the advanced position to the retreated position). In the (h4) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes yellow. When changing from the (h3) state to the retreating state (h4), the brightness data table output from the brightness data table of the reel operation part to the brightness data table of the SP latter half reach A (teasing part) changes. After that, in the (h5) state, the reel rises further. In the (h5) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes yellow.

Figure 172 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role operation in (b18) to (i1). After (h5), in the state (h6), the role rises further. In the state (h6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in yellow. After that, as shown in (h7), the effect image displayed corresponding to the role becomes lighter when the role rises further. As the effect image becomes lighter (transmittance increases), the background corresponding to the SP second half reach A begins to be faintly seen. In the state (h7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. In addition, as a sound effect, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP, which is BGM corresponding to the SP second half reach, is output. Note that sound effects related to the title of the second half of the SP may be output together with the BGM. After that, in the state (h8), the role rises further from the state (h7). In the state (h8), the effect image becomes lighter than in the state (h7), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state (h8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, in the (h9) state, the reel rises further. In the (h9) state, the effect image is lighter than in the (h8) state, so the background display becomes easier to see. In the (h9) state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the (h10) state, the reel rises further. In the (h10) state, the effect image is lighter than in the (h9) state, so the background display becomes easier to see. In the (h10) state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the (i1) state, the effect image disappears and the title corresponding to the start scene of the SP second half Reach A is clearly displayed. In the (i1) state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

(Start 1)
As shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the action of the reel switches the action from the SP first half reach A to the SP second half reach A. Also, an effect image corresponding to the action of the reel is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, while the reel is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to the screen corresponding to the SP second half reach A. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table of the reel action part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 to be described later) to the brightness data table of the SP second half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIG. 204 and FIG. 205 to be described later). Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the SP second half (for example, BGM of the SP second half) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP before the reel has completed its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be prevented from being spoiled. Also, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the latter half of the SP while the reel is returning to its initial position, the promotional part of the latter half of the SP can be displayed optimally.

(Start 2)
As shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the action of the role switches the action from the SP first half reach A to the SP second half reach A. Also, before the action of the role, the "2" symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the role operates, the role falls so that the character "P" of the role is located at a position where it overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative symbol was displayed. Also, according to the action of the role falling, an effect image corresponding to the role action is displayed in a layer that is prioritized in front of the reduced "2" symbol. Then, after the role rises from the drop position and the "2" symbol is in a position where it does not overlap with the role, the effect image gradually fades and the background corresponding to the SP second half reach A and the "2" symbol are faintly displayed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display from becoming unsightly due to the reduced decorative symbol being displayed during the role operation. Also, the effect image corresponding to the role action is displayed on the premise that the role is in a position where it overlaps with the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the display can be made to look good. In addition, since a reduced decorative pattern is displayed during the reel's rise, it is possible to switch the performance in a way that is suitable for the reel's operation.

(Start 3)
As shown in Fig. 171, the effect image is displayed before the reel moves and reaches the bottom of the drop. This allows the reduced decorative pattern to be hidden early, allowing for a suitable switching of effects involving the reel.

(Start 4)
In addition, when switching from the effect image to the image of the performance that develops in the latter half, an image related to the reel may be displayed. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to (h7) to (h10) of FIG. 172, when the reel rises, the word "POWER II" or images of the main characters Yume Yume, Jam, and Nana may be displayed. In this way, by providing linkage when the performance is switched, it is possible to show a suitable switching of the performance that includes the reel.

[About Epilogues 7, 8, 10-14, and 20]
In Figures 173 and 174, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanation of the role operation in (r54) to (s4))
FIG. 173 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the operation of the accessory in (r54) to (s4). In the scene before the winning/losing decision in (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. At this time, an operation image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed on the screen together with the Bakuchu character. In addition, a time gauge is displayed below the operation image as an operation prompt display for prompting the operation. When the player executes the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A within a predetermined period, or when a predetermined period has elapsed, the movable body 32 as the accessory operates. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the accessory falls while tilting obliquely from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen. Here, the time during which the accessory falls in the winning/losing notification scene is longer than the time during which the accessory falls in the scene that develops into the latter half of the SP.

As shown in (s1), as the reel starts to fall, a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in response to the reel. This effect image is more showy than the effect image when the reel develops into the latter half of the SP reach. Specifically, the effect image in the win/loss notification scene like (s1) is rainbow colored. Note that the effect image in the scene developing into the latter half of the SP is blue or red. Also, the effect image makes it impossible to see the Bakuchu character or the reduced "2" decorative pattern. Also, in the (s1) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors as the reel falls.

After that, in state (s2), the reel falls so that the letter "P" of the reel overlaps with the location where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. In state (s2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, in state (s3), the position of the reel is maintained at the position where it fell in state (s2). In state (s3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in (s3-2), the reel starts to rise (the reel moves from the advanced position to the retreated position). In the (s3-2) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. When changing from the (s3) state to the retreating state (s3-2), the brightness data table output changes from the brightness data table for the reel operation in the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part. After that, in the (s3-3) state, the reel rises further. In the (s3-3) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white.

Figure 174 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role operation in (r54) to (s4). After (s3-3), in the state (s3-4), the role rises further. In the state (s3-4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (s3-5), the effect image displayed corresponding to the role becomes lighter when the role rises further. As the effect image becomes lighter (transmittance increases), the background corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach begins to be faintly seen. In the state (s3-5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. In addition, as a sound effect, a winning epilogue part corresponding sound, which is BGM corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, is output. After that, in the state (s3-6), the role rises further from the state (s3-5). In the state (s3-6), the effect image becomes lighter than in the state (s3-5), so the background display becomes easier to see. In state (s3-6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white.

After that, in the (s3-7) state, the reel rises further. In the (s3-7) state, the effect image is lighter than in the (s3-6) state, so the background display becomes easier to see. In the (s3-7) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, in the (s3-8) state, the reel rises further. In the (s3-8) state, the effect image is lighter than in the (s3-7) state, so the background display becomes easier to see. In the (s3-8) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, in the (s4) state, a scene in which Yume-Yume catches Bakuchu is displayed. At this time, a sound that indicates a successful performance is output as a sound effect. In addition, subtitles are displayed along with Bakuchu's line, "Uuu, I got it." In the (s4) state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

(Epilogue 7)
As shown in Figs. 173 to 174, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, the reel moves to the initial position according to a predetermined retreat pattern. While the reel rises, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to a screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the reel completes the return action to the initial position.

(Epilogue 8)
On the premise that the reel will perform an action to return to its initial position, the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue will be the timing during the ascent related to the timing of the start of the return action. According to this, since the display corresponding to the epilogue is switched to at the timing related to the start of the return action, the display of the effect image corresponding to the reel action ends before the reel returns to its initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect image is displayed when the reel returns to its initial position, and the aesthetics of the presentation are not impaired. The timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same as the timing when the reel starts to rise. Also, the reel may perform a rotation action or a movement action at the falling position.

(Epilogue 10)
The BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is suggested by the BGM, so that the epilogue part can be started appropriately.

(Epilogue 11)
A sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is suggested by the sound effect, so that the epilogue part can be started appropriately.

(Epilogue 12)
BGM and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is suggested by the BGM and sound effects, so that the epilogue part can be started appropriately.

(Epilogue 13)
When the reel returns to its initial position and a display corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and when the reel returns to its initial position and the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitles are displayed. This makes it possible to avoid displaying the subtitles at a time when they are difficult to see, and to execute the epilogue part in an optimal manner.

(Epilogue 14)
When the props return to their initial positions, the dialogue sound can be output and subtitles can be displayed in the epilogue display. This allows the dialogue to be clearly recognized, and the epilogue part can be executed appropriately.

(Epilogue 20)
As shown in FIG. 173 to FIG. 174, the appearance of the performance is switched to the winning epilogue part by the movement of the reel from the scene before the winning or losing decision in the instigation part. Also, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, while the reel is rising, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to the screen corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the reel action to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Also, during the background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part displayed from (s3-5) to (s3-8) until the reel is changed to the initial position, no dialogue sound is output. After that, in the state (s4) where the movement of the reel to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is finished, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitle display is displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position where it overlaps the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part before the reel completes its return to the initial position, the display can be made to look good. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part during the rise of the reel, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately. Furthermore, since the subtitles are displayed after the return to the initial position is completed, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately.

[About Epilogues 2, 3, and 5]
In FIG. 175, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Relationship between number of subtitles and number of lines)
FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. In FIG. 175, for each type of SP reach and the type of epilogue corresponding to each SP reach, the number of lines of the character during the performance and the number of subtitles corresponding to the lines are shown. For example, in the case of SP first half reach A, the number of lines is 8 and the number of subtitles is 5. Also, in the case of a winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1. In the case of a losing epilogue part of SP first half reach A, there are no lines and therefore no subtitles.

In the case of SP first half reach B, there are 5 lines and 3 subtitles. In the case of the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B, there are 3 lines and 3 subtitles. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP first half reach B, there are no lines and therefore no subtitles. In the case of SP second half reach A, there are 16 lines and 14 subtitles. In the case of the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach A, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle.

In the case of SP second half reach B, there are 9 lines and 7 subtitles. In the case of the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B, there are 3 lines and 3 subtitles. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach B, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle. In the case of SP final reach, there are 27 lines and 19 subtitles. In the case of the winning epilogue part of SP final reach, there are 2 lines and 2 subtitles. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP final reach, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle.

(Epilogue 2)
As shown in FIG. 175, the ratio of subtitles displayed for the lines of the characters in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of subtitles displayed for the characters in the SP reach, which is the provocative part. According to this, by displaying the subtitles clearly in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the subtitles can enhance the feeling of celebration. Also, since there are more screen changes in the provocative part than in the epilogue part, even if the subtitles are displayed, the display time is shorter, so that the auxiliary subtitle display does not interfere with the performance, and the primary focus is to convey the performance by switching images. This allows for a suitable performance to be executed in the provocative part.

(Epilogue 3)
As shown in Fig. 175, in the epilogue part, subtitles are always displayed for the dialogue. This makes it possible to emphasize the sense of celebration by clearly showing what the characters are saying in the epilogue part.

(Epilogue 5)
As shown in FIG. 175, there are several types of SP reach, which is the provocative part, and each type has a different development of the performance and the number of lines. However, in any SP reach, the ratio of subtitles displayed for the character's lines in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of subtitles displayed for the character during the SP reach. According to this, in any SP reach that is executed, by displaying the subtitles firmly in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. In addition, in the winning epilogue part, the subtitles can be used to coordinate the feeling of celebration. In addition, since the screen is switched more frequently in the provocative part than in the epilogue part, it is possible to prioritize conveying the performance by switching the images and prevent the performance from being disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display. This allows a suitable performance to be executed in the provocative part.

[About re-draw performances 1, 4, 5, 7 to 18]
In Figures 176 and 177, the characteristic parts of the re-selection part are numbered and explained.

(Details of the re-draw part)
Fig. 176 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (A1) to (A23) parts in the re-selection part. Fig. 177 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (A24) to (A46) parts in the re-selection part.

When the big win display result is derived, the pattern is enlarged as shown in (A1) and (A2), and then reduced as shown in (A3) and (A4). After that, the pattern becomes normal size as shown in (A5). Then, as shown in (A6), the background is switched to the background for the re-draw performance and the re-draw performance starts. Here, the period during which the pattern is shaking is omitted from the state of (A5) to the state of (A6). Specifically, the pattern is shaking when it is normal size. Then, after it becomes normal size, the pattern shaking of the re-draw part continues. At this time, at the timing related to the completion of the pattern release (including, for example, the timing just before it becomes normal size, the timing after it becomes normal size, the timing when the pattern shaking starts, etc.), the game effect lamp 9 switches from flashing white to smoothly lighting in rainbow colors. This allows the screen and lamp to emit light to perform the smooth pattern release from the pattern release to the re-draw performance, the smooth transition to the shaking period, and the celebration by the pattern alignment.

After that, as shown in (A7) and (A8), a period of shaking occurs in which the symbols shake up and down. Then, as shown in (A9) and (A10), the "2" symbol in the center is temporarily reduced in size. Then, from (A11) to (A23), high-speed fluctuations occur in a manner in which the "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" symbols used as decorative symbols are all displayed. After that, high-speed fluctuations occur again in a manner in which the "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" symbols used as decorative symbols are all displayed from (A10') to (A23').

Then, as shown in (A24), after all the decorations have completed two cycles, the button image is faintly displayed along with the initially displayed "2" symbol. Then, from (A25) to (A46), the decoration symbols change rapidly from "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", to "1", while the time gauge displayed below the button image decreases as time passes. The time gauge is a display that indicates the valid period for button operation. If the push button 31B is operated within the valid operation period, or if the push button 31B is not operated within the valid operation period and the valid button operation period ends, an odd number symbol or an even number symbol is derived and displayed as shown in Figs. 157 to 164, and the game moves to a jackpot.

(Re-draw performance 1)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery performance is started using the "2" symbol as it is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance starts from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol-sending performance is executed in which symbols are replaced by rapid variation from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and when the re-lottery performance starts, the symbol-sending performance is executed using the symbol that was temporarily stopped, so that the player can easily understand which decorative symbol the re-lottery started from. As a result, the flow of the series of performances can be clearly seen.

(Re-selection effect 4)
When the symbol transfer performance in the re-lottery performance starts, the decorative symbols that have been displayed since the winning epilogue part start to change from a reduced state. This makes it possible to show the flow of the series of performances well without executing a process to change to a different decorative symbol.

(Re-selection effect 5)
In the symbol forwarding performance, the movement starts with a reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol during the movement is a uniform reduced size. This makes it possible to make the movement during the symbol forwarding performance look smooth, and makes the flow of the series of performances look good.

(Re-selection effect 7)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery performance is started using the "2" symbol as it is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance starts from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed variation from the "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order, such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and then the symbol-sending performance is executed in which the "2" symbol is displayed again. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after the variation of multiple types of decorative symbols. According to this, the pattern-sending performance in which all the decorative symbols are displayed without the final display result being displayed immediately can make the flow of the series of performances look good.

(Re-selection effect 8)
In the symbol transfer performance in the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are transferred in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and then all the decorative symbols are transferred again in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1". In this way, the numbers of the decorative symbols are transferred in order, so that the flow of the series of performances can be clearly seen.

(Re-draw performance 9)
In the symbol forwarding performance in the re-draw performance, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbol when it is temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during the change. Specifically, the symbols are switched such as a "2" symbol with a transparency of 0%, a "2" symbol with a transparency of 50%, a "3" symbol with a transparency of 0%, a "3" symbol with a transparency of 50%, a "4" symbol with a transparency of 0%, and a "4" symbol with a transparency of 50%. According to this, since all symbols can be displayed with a low transparency during the symbol forwarding performance, it is possible to grasp what symbol is being sent.

(Re-draw performance 10)
In the symbol transfer effect in the re-draw effect, all the decorative symbols are transferred in order: "2,""3,""4,""5,""6,""7," and "1." The time each symbol is displayed is the same. This allows all symbols to be displayed for a fixed period of time, making the flow of the series of effects look good.

(Re-draw performance 11)
During the symbol forwarding performance, a promotion display formed of a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed is a position where it does not overlap with the position where the change in the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance, it is possible to make the symbol forwarding easily visible to the player. Note that a part of the promotion display may overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance.

(Re-draw performance 12)
As shown in Figures 176 and 177, the promotion display starts at (A24) and (A25) after all the decorative symbols in the symbol forwarding effect have been displayed twice. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol forwarding pattern is repeated twice, the player can be made to recognize the symbol forwarding effect clearly.

(Re-draw performance 13)
In addition, the symbol at the start of the re-draw performance may be other than the 2 symbol. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image is displayed as the action prompt display is constant. For example, in the case of the 2 symbol, the timing at which the action prompt display is displayed is the timing at which the 2 symbol is displayed again. Similarly, in the case of the 5 symbol, the timing at which the action prompt display is displayed may be the timing at which the 5 symbol is displayed again. In other words, regardless of which symbol starts the re-draw performance, the number of symbols sent is the same. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load by making the control constant.

(Re-draw performance 14)
In the lottery performance, a pattern of displaying an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbol) followed by an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbol) and a pattern of displaying an odd number symbol (for example, 3 symbol) followed by an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbol) are provided. In addition to this, a pattern of displaying an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbol) followed by an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbol) may be provided. In the performance of sending symbols from an odd number symbol to an odd number symbol, it is sufficient that the same odd number symbol is sent when sending symbols. However, in either pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol sending period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. This allows for a suitable re-lottery performance in either pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(Re-draw performance 15)
In the lottery performance, common data is used regardless of whether the pattern is an even number symbol (e.g., 2 symbol) followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2 symbol), an even number symbol (e.g., 2 symbol) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3 symbol), or an odd number symbol (e.g., 7 symbol) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7 symbol). In other words, the performance data is the same, and the design changes the data related to the decorative symbols depending on the pattern. This eliminates the need for a dedicated pattern, and reduces the amount of data.

[About provocations 21-27]
In Figures 178 to 181, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Fade effect)
FIG. 178 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (b4) to (b6) parts in the provocative part and a comparison diagram during the big win round. In the provocative part, a fade effect is applied to the subtitles for the dialogue. The fade effect is an effect consisting of a fade-in where the display gradually becomes clearer, and a fade-out where the display gradually disappears. FIG. 178(A) describes a part of the performance with a fade effect applied in the provocative part, the SP first half reach A.

In the (b4) state, a screen showing Yume Yume and Bakuchu facing each other is displayed. After that, as shown in (b4'), the subtitle "I found you" corresponding to Yume Yume's line is displayed with a transparency of 70%. After that, as shown in (b5), the subtitle "I found you" corresponding to Yume Yume's line is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, a fade-in effect is applied when the subtitle corresponding to the line is displayed. Note that in the (b4') state, the sound of the line "I found you" is not output, and the sound of the line is output when the subtitle transparency is 0% as in the (b5) state.

After that, as shown in (b5'), the subtitle "Found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's line is displayed with a fade-in effect on a layer below the subtitle "Found it" corresponding to Yume-chan's line with a 0% transparency, and the subtitle "Found it" with a 70% transparency is displayed. After that, as shown in (b5''), the subtitle "Found it" and the subtitle "Found it" are both displayed with a 40% transparency. After that, as shown in (b6), the subtitle "Found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's line is displayed with a 0% transparency. In this way, the subtitle "Found it" corresponding to Yume-chan's line gradually fades out from (b5') to (b6). In contrast, the subtitle "Found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's line gradually fades in from (b5') to (b6). Note that in the states of (b5') and (b5''), the sound of the line "Found it" is not output, and the sound of the line is output when the subtitle transparency is 0% as in the state of (b6).

As shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance is executed in which the characters sing along with the music. For example, in FIG. 178 (B), subtitles (lyrics) are displayed in time with the song sung by Nana, saying "Someday I'll get it," followed by subtitles (lyrics) "I'll grab it with these little hands," in time with the song. When subtitles (lyrics) like this are displayed continuously during the jackpot round, no fade effect is applied. This is because, since the progression of the music can be understood from the rhythm while the music is playing, it is easy to tell when the subtitles (lyrics) are to be switched without a fade effect.

(Incitement 21)
In the provocative part, as shown in Fig. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed in response to the lines of a character. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the display period of a first subtitle that is displayed first and the display period of a second subtitle that is displayed next are displayed so as to overlap. When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap, a fade effect is applied. The fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters to differ. This makes it possible to make the change in subtitles easier to understand, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, by making it easier to understand the change in subtitles.

(Incitement 22)
As shown in Fig. 178(A), in a scene where characters face each other, a first subtitle corresponding to the lines of one character may be displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to the lines of another character. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 70% and overlaps the first subtitle displayed with a transparency of 0%. After that, the first subtitle fades out and the second subtitle fades in and is displayed with a transparency of 0%. This makes it easy to tell when the subtitles are switching over due to the fade effect, even when the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other.

(Modification of subtitle display)
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed at a timing where they overlap, the fade effect may be applied to one of the two subtitles instead of to both of them. Specifically, a pattern in which the fade effect is not applied to the first subtitle display and the fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display, and a pattern in which the fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and the fade effect is not applied to the second subtitle display may be considered. Either pattern may be applied by replacing the above-mentioned pattern in which the fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and the fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display. In addition, when the fade effect is applied, the second subtitle display may be overlapped on the first subtitle display, or the second subtitle display may be overlapped under the first subtitle display.

Also, in the above, subtitles for lines of a first character and a second character are described as being displayed at the same time. However, when the same character speaks lines consecutively, the subtitles for the first line may be displayed so that they overlap with the subtitles for the second line. In such a case, a fade effect may be applied to the subtitle display.

(Incitement 24)
As shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the big win round, a performance in which the character sings along with the music is executed. Then, subtitles (lyrics) are displayed along with the progression of the song. However, during the big win round, even if the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously, the fade effect is not applied. This is because, since the progression of the music can be understood by the rhythm while the music is playing, even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without the fade effect, the timing of the switch is easy to understand. Also, since the music during the big win round is a representative music of the content installed in the pachinko game machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand even without the fade effect. This allows the task of applying the fade effect to be omitted during the big win round, and the series of performances can be made to look good.

(Relationship between subtitle transparency and sound output)
FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transparency of subtitles for lines and sound output. FIG. 179 shows the situation when Yume Yume's line "I found you" and Bakuchu's line "I found you" in FIG. 178(A) are uttered. In FIG. 179, the horizontal axis of the graph indicates the number of frames. The subtitle "I found you" is displayed at a transparency of 70% one frame after the transparency of 100%. Furthermore, one frame after that, it is displayed at a transparency of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "I found you" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames. The sound of the line "I found you" is not output during this period.

After that, while the sound of the line "I found it" is being output, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a transparency of 0%. Then, during the period T1, which is a silent period of three frames after the output of the sound of the line "I found it", the subtitle "I found it" continues to be displayed with a transparency of 0% for two frames. After that, for the remaining one frame period of T1, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a transparency from 0% to 100%. This causes the subtitle "I found it" to be displayed with a fade-out effect for the period of one frame.

In addition, during the period T1, the sound of the line "Found" is not output, but starting one frame after the start of the period T1, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-in effect. Specifically, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency of 70% one frame after changing from 100% transparency. Then, one frame after that, it is displayed with a transparency of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames.

After that, for the period during which the sound of the line "Found" is being output, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency of 0%. Then, during the period T2, which is a silent period of three frames after the output of the sound of the line "Found", the subtitle "Found" continues to be displayed with a transparency of 0% for two frames. After that, for the remaining one frame period of T2, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency from 0% to 100%. As a result, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-out effect for the period of one frame.

As shown in FIG. 179, the first subtitle "I found it" corresponding to the Yume Yume character and the second subtitle "I found it" corresponding to the Bakuchu character are given the same fade-in and fade-out fade effects. Also, the fade-in is performed over a period of two frames, while the fade-out is performed over a period of one frame.

(Incitement 23)
As shown in Fig. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle "Found" is such that the first and second subtitles are displayed overlapping each other and are not output during the period when the fade effect is applied. The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from the time when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, the fade effect makes it easy to see the change in subtitles, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, the content of the production can be easily understood by both sight and sound.

(Comparison of subtitles in the promotional and epilogue parts)
FIG. 180 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) and portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 180(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) in the provocative part. FIG. 180(B) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 180(A) and FIG. 180(B) have in common the fact that subtitles are displayed consecutively to the lines spoken by two characters. However, the period from when the first subtitle is displayed to when the second subtitle is displayed is different between FIG. 180(A) and FIG. 180(B).

As shown in FIG. 180(A), in the (b4) to (b7) portions, Yume Yume and Bakuchu are displayed facing each other in (b4). Then, in (b5), a first subtitle corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I found you" is displayed. Then, in (b6), a second subtitle corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I found you" is displayed. Then, in (b6'), Yume Yume is enlarged on the screen. Then, a subtitle corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I'll catch you!" is displayed. The time t1 from the start of (b4) to the end of (b6) is about 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 180(B), in the (o3) to (o5) sections, a shop with the crab that Jam-chan and Nana-chan defeated in (o3) as its signboard is displayed, and a first subtitle corresponding to Jam-chan's line, "Nice signboard," is displayed. Then, from (o3') to (o3''), the background of the shop with the crab as its signboard is displayed without subtitles. Then, in (o4), a second subtitle corresponding to Nana-chan's line, "Work hard," is displayed. Then, the background of the shop with the crab as its signboard becomes a still image. The time t1 from the start of (o3) to the end of (o5) is about 10 seconds.

As shown in Figures 180(A) and 180(B), in the promo and epilogue parts, subtitles corresponding to lines may be displayed multiple times in one scene (the period from 0 to t1 or the period from 0 to t2). When subtitles are displayed multiple times, if there is ample time, it may be possible to make the change in subtitle display easier to see by erasing the subtitle display once. However, if there is not enough time, such as in the period from 0 to t1, it is difficult to take the measure of erasing the subtitle display once. For this reason, as shown in Figures 178 and 179, a fade effect can be applied to the subtitle display to make the change in subtitles easier to see.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the video is created first, and then the dialogue and other sounds are added. After that, subtitles corresponding to each line are added. If the video were to be remade with a longer period for erasing the subtitles during the period from 0 to t1, when there is not much time available, it would be time-consuming. By adding a fade effect, it is possible to make the change in subtitles easier to understand without having to remake the video. Even in cases where there is ample time available, such as the epilogue part where the shop with the crab sign is displayed, the fade effect can be applied uniformly to reduce the overall workload and prevent a sense of incongruity when the subtitles change.

(Incitement 26)
As shown in Fig. 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in a certain scene in the portion (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. The fade effect may be at least one of a fade-in and a fade-out. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it is time-consuming to apply a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps. Therefore, by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display uniformly, an increase in the workload can be prevented.

(Incitement 25)
Although not shown, there are cases where the subtitle display timing overlaps even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, there are many scenes in the epilogue part where the period from subtitle display to subtitle display is longer than in the teasing part. This is because the performance progresses quickly in the teasing part, and not as quickly in the epilogue part. As a result, the teasing part is more likely to be displayed at a timing where the subtitle displays overlap than the epilogue part. In such cases, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity when switching subtitles.

[Regarding Incitement 27]
In Figure 181, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Incitement 27)
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 181(A), subtitle displays for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect and without a blank period, it becomes difficult to understand the switching of the subtitle display. Also, regarding the subtitle display for a long line or a line that progresses quickly, there is a possibility that an awkward feeling may occur when the subtitle display is switched without a blank period. In such a case, the awkward feeling can be eliminated by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display. Also, as shown in Comparative Example 2 of FIG. 181(B), it is possible to overlap "I found it" with the subtitle display of "I found it" and then display "I found it". In such a case, it is difficult to see the subtitle display by not applying the fade effect. Also, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 181(C), it is possible to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two rows, one above the other. In such a case, the display area for the performance is reduced by the subtitle display, which interferes with the performance in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. However, in the present embodiment, by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, such a problem can be solved.

[About Epilogue 23]
In FIG. 182, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

Figure 182 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (B4) to (B11). With reference to Figure 182, the correspondence between the effects using the decorative symbols and small symbols on the screen and the effects using the game effect lamp 9 will be explained. As shown in (B4), in the effect of the re-selection part's symbol display, the enlarged "3" symbol is reduced. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. Next, as shown in (B5), the "3" symbol is displayed in normal size. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. Next, as shown in (B6), the "3" symbol is displayed shaking slightly up and down. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in (B7), the screen changes from the re-draw background to the normal background, and the "3" symbol continues to be displayed with slight up and down swinging on this normal background. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, based on receiving the symbol determination command, the decorative symbol and small symbol are fixed and stopped as shown in (B8). At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. As shown in (B9), the symbol determination period continues for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 s), and the same display as (B8) is maintained on the screen. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 maintains its rainbow flashing illumination.

After that, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the state of the game effect lamp 9 changes after about 10 msec to correspond to the fanfare. Also, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the screen changes after about 33 msec to change to a state in which "FEVER" is displayed. Specifically, as shown in (D1), during the fanfare period after the fanfare command is received, the screen maintains the state of (B9). In contrast, the state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to correspond to the fanfare earlier than the state of the screen. The state of the game effect lamp 9 in (D1) is off. Next, as shown in (D2), the screen changes to a screen in which the letters "FEVER" and Yume Yume-chan, indicating the fanfare state, are displayed, with a delay after the state of the game effect lamp 9. Also, at this time, the game effect lamp 9 maintains the lighted state corresponding to the fanfare.

[About Epilogue 28-31]
In FIG. 183, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

Figure 183 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the pattern display. In the modified example, the pattern display may be performed in the order of (Y1) to (Y7). Specifically, as shown in (Y1), in the scene where the Bakuchu is caught, the reduced decorative patterns (reduced patterns) are aligned in the upper left corner of the screen in the form of "222". The game effect lamp 9 at this time is in a rainbow light (smooth) state. Next, as shown in (Y2), the screen becomes a still image and the reduced patterns flicker slightly up and down. The game effect lamp 9 at this time is in a rainbow light (smooth) state.

Next, as shown in (Y3), the reduced decorative pattern in the upper left corner of the screen is erased. The state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lit (smooth). Next, as shown in (Y4), the decorative pattern "222" that was erased from the center of the screen is enlarged and displayed. The state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is flashing white. Next, as shown in (Y5), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state of (Y4) and displayed. The state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is flashing white. Next, as shown in (Y6), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state of (Y5) and displayed. The state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is flashing white. Next, as shown in (Y7), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state of (Y6) and displayed. The state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is flashing white.

In the modified pattern output, the decorative pattern moves to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode when the SP reach begins, and the patterns line up during the winning epilogue part as shown in (Y1). Then, after the reduced pattern oscillation period as shown in (Y2), the reduced pattern is temporarily deleted and then enlarged from the center of the screen, and the second pattern performance is executed.

(Epilogue 28)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbol is located at the edge of the display area of the screen (the position of the upper left corner of the screen). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the winning epilogue video ends, the reduced symbol is erased and the central area of the screen is used to enlarge and display the symbol, and the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the video of the winning epilogue part is playing, the reduced symbol is positioned at the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the video of the winning epilogue part, and when the video of the winning epilogue part ends and the symbol is displayed, the decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, so that the big win symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, the scene change can be made to look good, and the epilogue part can be made to look good.

(Epilogue 29)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbols are displayed aligned with "222" at the edge of the display area of the screen (the position in the upper left corner of the screen). This allows the player to recognize that the big win display result has occurred due to the reduced decorative symbols even while the winning epilogue video is playing.

(Epilogue 30)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area of the screen (the upper left corner of the screen). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the winning epilogue video ends, the subtitle display displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced pattern at the upper left corner is erased, and the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the central area of the screen. This makes it possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping with the decorative pattern, and to prevent the user from mistaking the display of the pattern for a message, and makes the winning epilogue part look good.

(Epilogue 31)
In a modified example, the decorative symbol moves to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode when the SP reach starts. By positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid interfering with the development of the performance during the SP reach, and the series of performances can be displayed in a favorable manner.

Figures 184 to 187 are diagrams for explaining modified examples of re-drawing. In the modified example, for example, a case where a re-drawing is performed from the pattern display in the order of (F1) to (F12) will be explained. Specifically, the pattern is enlarged and displayed as shown in (F1) and (F2), and then reduced as shown in (F3) and (F4). Thereafter, the pattern returns to normal size as shown in (F5). Then, as shown in (F6), the background is switched to a background for the re-drawing performance, and the re-drawing performance starts. After that, a shaking period occurs in which the pattern shakes up and down as shown in (F7). After that, the "3" pattern is displayed in a reduced size from (F8) to (F9).

After that, as shown in (F10), a button image and time gauge are faintly displayed below the "3" symbol. After that, as shown in (F11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "3" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases over time. The time gauge indicates the valid period for which the button operation is active.

Figure 185 shows the case where the player operates the push button 31B from the (F12) state. In Figure 185, the re-draw effect executed from (G1) to (G27) will be explained. When the player operates the push button 31B from the (F12) state, high-speed fluctuation is performed in a manner in which the "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and "2" used as decorative symbols from (G1) to (G13) are all displayed. After that, as shown in (G14), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

Then, the pattern is enlarged as shown in (G15) and (G16), and then reduced as shown in (G17) and (G18). The pattern then returns to normal size as shown in (G19). The background is then switched to a pattern swing background. Here, the pattern swing is performed by rotating the pattern back and forth on the screen. Specifically, the pattern swings back from (G20) to (G21), and then swings forward from (G22) to (G23), changing to the initial position. The pattern swings forward from (G24) to (G25), and then swings back from (G26) to (G27), changing to the initial position.

Figure 186 shows a case where the player does not operate the push button 31B from the (F12) state. In Figure 186, the re-draw effect executed from (H1) to (H27) will be explained. If the player does not operate the push button 31B from the (F12) state, the "3" symbol remains displayed from (H1) to (H6), and the time gauge decreases as time passes. After that, as shown in (H7), the button image is faintly displayed and then erased. After that, from (H8) to (H20), high-speed fluctuation is performed in a mode in which the "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and "2" used as decorative symbols are all displayed. After that, as shown in (H21), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

Then, the symbols are enlarged as shown in (H22) and (H23), and then reduced as shown in (H24) and (H25). Then, the symbols return to normal size as shown in (H26). Then, the background is switched to the background shown in (G20) to (G27) as shown in (H27). The movement of the symbols in (H22) to (H26) when the push button 31B is not operated is the same as the movement of the symbols in (G15) to (G19) when the push button 31B is operated. However, when the push button 31B is operated, the time that the time gauge decreases when the push button 31B is not operated is absorbed by the period during which the performance of shaking the three symbols is executed. In other words, regardless of when the button is operated, the period until the button is operated is absorbed by the duration of the performance of shaking the three symbols.

Then, after (G27) or (H27), the effect shown in FIG. 187 is executed. In FIG. 187, the re-draw effect executed in (J1) to (J18) will be explained. After (G27) or (H27), the screen goes white for a moment as shown in (J1). Then, the "3" symbol rotates once from (J2) to (J9). Specifically, from the (J2) state, it rotates counterclockwise around the vertical axis of the "3" symbol, from (J3), (J4), (J5), (J6), (J7), (J8), to (J9). The rotation is fast, so the symbol appears to rotate in an instant.

After that, as shown in (J10), the "3" symbol is displayed in a reduced size, and then the symbol swings backward from (J11) to (J12), and then swings forward from (J13) to (J14), changing to its initial position. After that, the symbol swings forward from (J15) to (J16), and then swings backward from (J17) to (J18), changing to its initial position. The movement of the symbol swing from (J11) to (J18) is the same as the movement of the symbol swing from (G20) to (G27). Then, at (J18), the symbol stops neatly in its normal position.

[About Losers 1 to 7]
The characteristic parts of the failed epilogue part will be numbered and explained.

(About the design confirmation period)
FIG. 188 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the pattern determination period. (X1) in FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the timing of winning/losing determination corresponding to (r54) in FIG. 132. Details of the pattern determination period when moving from this state to the winning epilogue part are explained in (X2) to (X5). Also, details of the pattern determination period when moving from the (X1) state to the losing epilogue part are explained in (X6) to (X9).

When moving from state (X1) to the winning epilogue part, an image of the state (s5) in which a Bakuchu has been caught is displayed as shown in (X2). After that, as shown in (X3), the screen is controlled to the normal screen, followed by a pattern determination period in which a pattern such as (B8) is determined and stopped. The pattern determination period continues for 0.5 seconds after the pattern determination command is received. After that, as shown in (X4), a fanfare period such as (B11) occurs. After that, as shown in (X5), a jackpot round period occurs.

When moving from the (X1) state to the failure epilogue part, an image of the regrettable (u2) state where the Bakuchu was not caught is displayed as shown in (X6). After that, as shown in (X7), the background goes black and a symbol combination showing the failure display result of "232" is displayed. After that, as shown in (X8), an eye-catching image depicting a character image that has the effect of attracting the player's attention is displayed. After that, the screen is controlled to the normal screen, and then a symbol determination period begins in which symbols such as those shown in (X9) are determined and stopped. The symbol determination period continues for 0.5 seconds after the symbol determination command is received. If there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display after the symbol determination period ends, the next variable display will begin.

(Detailed explanation of the blackout)
FIG. 189 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the blackout. Details of the blackout will be explained in the order of FIG. 189 (X10) to (X22). As shown in (X10), an image of the regrettable (u2) state where the Bakuchu was not caught is displayed. From this state, the blackout background is displayed with gradually decreasing transparency, and the background of the middle pattern showing "3", one of the decorative patterns displayed in the center, is displayed with gradually decreasing transparency. By decreasing the transparency, the blackout background becomes gradually darker and the middle pattern appears gradually more clearly.

After (X10), as shown in (X11), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 70% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 100%. Then, as shown in (X12), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 60% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 90%. Then, as shown in (X13), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 50% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 80%. Then, as shown in (X14), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 40% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 60%. Then, as shown in (X15), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 30% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 40%. Then, as shown in (X16), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 20% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 20%. Then, as shown in (X17), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 10% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 0%. After that, as shown in (X18), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 0%, and the center pattern is displayed with a transparency of 0%.

After that, a pattern fluctuation period occurs in which the middle symbol "3" fluctuates up and down from (X19) to (X20). After the pattern fluctuation period, an eye-catching image is displayed as shown in (X21). Then, a pattern determination period occurs as shown in (X22). As shown in FIG. 189, the background blackout begins earlier than the middle symbol fade-in, and the background blackout has more stages of transparency change than the middle symbol fade-in.

(Lose 1)
As shown in FIG. 188, if the winning/losing result is a loss after the winning/losing determination, a loss pattern is displayed against a black background in the loss epilogue part. After that, a transition image based on the eye-catching screen is displayed, and then the screen switches to the normal background at the start of the reach. This allows the screen transition at the time of a loss to be viewed in an optimal way by the eye-catching screen.

(Lose 2)
As shown in Fig. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the background when losing gradually blacks out, while the middle pattern gradually fades in. According to this, the image when losing and the middle pattern are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, so that the display when losing can be made to look good due to the relationship between the two.

(Missed 3)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the number of steps required to black out the background when losing from 100% to 0% transparency is greater than the number of steps required to fade in the middle pattern from 100% to 0% transparency. Specifically, the background blacks out in eight steps from (X11) to (X18), while the middle pattern fades in in six steps from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image and the middle pattern when losing are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, and the number of steps of the change in transparency is different, so that the display when losing can be made to look good depending on the relationship between the two.

(Loss 4)
As shown in Fig. 189, the change of the background to black out when a winning combination is lost starts before the change of the center pattern to fade in. According to this, the image and center pattern when a winning combination is lost are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the black out and the fade in, and since the black out is faster than the pattern fade in, the relationship between the two makes the display when a winning combination is lost look favorable.

(Loss 5)
In the image before the blackout, the displayed image changes, whereas in the image at the time of the blackout, the displayed image does not change. In this way, the blackout can be made to look good by starting with an image that does not change. Note that a change in image includes a change in the picture on the screen, a change in the angle of the image, and a change in the displayed scene itself. Also, no change in the image includes the same still image, and even if it is a moving image, the angle of the image does not change, and even if there is movement, only a part of the image moves slightly.

(6th place)
As the background of the loss is blacked out, the middle pattern fades in, and as a result, as shown in (X18) to (X20), the middle pattern with a transparency of 0% and the blacked-out background with a transparency of 0% are displayed for a predetermined period. This predetermined period includes a pattern swing period as shown in (X19) to (X20). The pattern swing period may be repeated for at least two periods, with one period being the period in which the middle pattern moves from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and the center position. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the middle pattern fades in from a transparency of 100% to a transparency of 0%. In addition, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye-catcher is displayed. According to this, since there is a predetermined period during which the middle pattern is displayed in a clear state in a display in which the background is blacked out with a transparency of 0%, it is possible to appropriately show that it is a loss.

(Loser 7)
188 and 189, the eye-catching screen displays the title "POWER II" and images of the main characters Yume Yume, Jam, and Nana as information about the pachinko gaming machine 1. This allows the information about the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be accurately conveyed by the eye-catching image.

[About losers 8, 10-17]
The characteristic parts of the failed epilogue part will be numbered and explained.

(About the game effect lamp when you lose)
FIG. 190 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp when it is a miss and a diagram for explaining a modified example when it is a miss. FIG. 190 also describes the lighting mode of the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50. FIG. 190 (X30) to (X36) are detailed explanatory diagrams of the game effect lamp when it is a miss, and (X40) to (X46) are diagrams showing modified examples when it is a miss. Note that the example shown in FIG. 190 shows the performance when it is a miss in the SP final reach, but the technology shown in FIG. 190 may be applied to the performance when it is a miss in other reaches, such as SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B.

In this embodiment, the brightness data table for a miss is used from the scene where the six friendly characters look disappointed in (X30) to the scene where the background image goes black in (X31). Note that the brightness data table for a miss shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table specified by times tu1 to tu3 of child table WD17 in the miss epilogue part shown in FIG. 216, which will be described later.

After the background image goes black, an eye-catching image is displayed. An eye-catching image is an image that attracts the player's attention, and in this embodiment, as a result of a series of effects in the SP reach, the eye-catching image is displayed before a losing symbol is derived (temporarily stopped) and the screen returns to the normal screen.

The brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the period when switching to the eye-catching screen (X32) to the display of the eye-catching screen (X33). After that, the brightness data table for background is used through the period when switching to the normal screen (X34) and the period when the pattern is determined (X35), and until the next variation (X36) that is executed when a variation pattern command is received when there is a hold. Note that the brightness data table for background shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table 26 specified at time tu4 of the child table WD17 in the losing epilogue part shown in FIG. 216 described later.

The background brightness data table is maintained even when a customer waiting command is received when there are no reserved balls after the pattern determination period (X35). In response to receiving a customer waiting command, the performance screen may be switched to a demonstration display, and a demonstration brightness data table may be used.

In relation to the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 flashes from (X30) to (X34). Then, by receiving a pattern determination command, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 goes off in the (X35) state. After that, by receiving a variable pattern command when there is a reserved ball, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 flashes in the (X36) state. Note that if there is no reserved ball after the pattern determination period of (X35), the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 will remain off even if a customer waiting command is received.

As a variation for when a win occurs, the brightness data table for each state may be different from that of this embodiment. Specifically, the brightness data table for when a win occurs is used from the disappointment of (X40) to the background blackout of (X41). After that, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) may be used for the eye-catching screen switching period of (X42), the eye-catching screen of (X43), the normal screen switching period of (X44), and the pattern determination period of (X45). Then, in the next variation of (X36), the brightness data table for the background may be used.

Here, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the final brightness data (light off) in the brightness data table before the eye-catching is displayed (when it misses). Also, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the initial brightness data in the brightness data table (light off not included) that corresponds to the background when the change starts.

(8th loss)
The characteristic part of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of failure will be explained. The performance screen is switched to the image at the time of failure after the performance of the winning or losing decision. After that, after the blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, it is switched to the normal screen and the screen in which the pattern is confirmed and stopped is displayed. Also, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of winning or losing decision to the brightness data table at the time of failure. Then, it is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, it is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the time of starting the variation. Here, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the timing of switching to the normal screen. And, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 is switched from flashing to off by receiving the pattern confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the pattern confirmation command. In addition, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 switches from off to flashing when the next variation pattern command is received, but the background brightness data table does not switch even when the pattern determination command is received. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, and the brightness data table continues until the next variation, so there is no need to create a separate brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the pattern determination command, and the lamp performance can be displayed without any sense of incongruity from the performance at the time of failure to the next variation, and the series of performances can be displayed appropriately.

(Missed 10)
After the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table with the end of the eye-catching screen, the background brightness data table continues to be used even if there is no reserved memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received. According to this, since the same brightness data table can be used continuously after switching to the background brightness data table, the lamp performance can be shown without discomfort, and the series of performances can be shown appropriately.

(Loser 11)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 switches from blinking to off upon receiving a symbol determination command which is a trigger for the effect of the symbol being determined and stopped. This allows the player to easily understand the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 when it is a miss.

(Missed 12)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 switches from off to blinking upon receiving a variation pattern command for the next variation, which is the trigger for the start of the next variation. This allows the player to easily understand the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 when it is a miss.

(Missed 13)
A modified example of a miss will be described. From the performance where the six friendly characters are disappointed at (X40) to the performance where the background image is blacked out at (X41), the brightness data table at the time of miss is used. After the background image is blacked out, the eye-catching image is displayed. From the switching period to the eye-catching screen at (X42) to the pattern determination period at (X45), the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. After that, when a variation pattern command is received when there is a hold, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for background. That is, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching), and the brightness data table is maintained during the pattern determination period, and at the timing of switching to the next variation, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for background. Also, during the pattern determination period, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used, which is the light-off. According to this, after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data of the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received, making it easier to recognize a miss, and as a result, the miss can be made to look good.

(Missed 14)
The final brightness data in the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is data for turning off and maintaining the brightness. The background brightness data table does not use data for maintaining the brightness off. According to this, since the background brightness data table does not use brightness data for maintaining the brightness off, turning off when the background is displayed is unique to a failure, making it easier to recognize that it is a failure.

(Missed 15)
If there is no reserved memory after the pattern is determined, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting command. According to this, since the brightness data table for background is switched to by receiving a customer waiting command, it is easy to recognize that it is a miss.

(Loser 16)
The initial brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is brighter than the final brightness data (off) of the brightness data table before the eye-catching image is displayed (when the game is lost). This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated with a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easier to recognize the switch by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

(Loser 17)
The initial brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the initial brightness data of the brightness data table (not including the off state) corresponding to the background at the start of the change. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to emit light at high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easy to recognize the switch by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[About 8 to 12]
The characteristic parts related to the decision on whether or not a prize is awarded will be numbered and explained below.

(Detailed explanation of (r48) part)
FIG. 191 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r48) portion. FIG. 191 (r48) is a scene in which the final teaser before the winner is decided is executed. FIG. 191 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the switching of the screen, and FIG. 191 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the switching of the screen and time. As shown in FIG. 191 (A), in the (r48) portion, after the display of the explosive chocolate as in (r48-1), the display of the six allies as in (r48-2) is performed. After that, the display of the explosive chocolate as in (r48-1) is performed again, and then the display of the six allies as in (r48-2) is performed. After that, the switching of the still images between (r48-1) and (r48-2) is repeated, and the switching speed gradually increases as shown in FIG. 191 (B). The images of the ally characters and the enemy characters are gradually enlarged and displayed as time passes.

(True or False: 8)
The scene before the winning or losing decision of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow-motion period in which the movement of the image slows down. In addition, the performance executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from multiple image data, while the performance executed in (r48) is executed using the image of Bakuchu and the images of the six allies. The images of the ally character and the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed over time to make the characters look like they are moving. Here, if the image is created during the slow-motion period using the same amount of image data as during the period other than the slow-motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement is awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to make the movement during the slow-motion period smooth, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow-motion period and making the character look like he is moving by switching and enlarging the display. The number of images used during the slow-motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than the number of images used during the period other than the slow-motion period.

(9 correct or not)
As shown in Fig. 191 (B), the speed of switching between the images of the ally character and the enemy character gradually increases. In this way, after the image switching speed reaches its fastest, a prompting display for trigger operation is displayed, making it possible to tease the player as to whether a scene in which the ally character has an advantage or an enemy character has an advantage will develop, increasing interest. In addition, by switching between images alternately, it becomes difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the ally character and the enemy character.

(10% correct)
The slow motion period performance in (r48) may be executed at the timing of development from the SP first half reach to the SP second half reach or the SP final reach. In this way, the performance can be executed appropriately even at the timing of development from the SP first half reach.

(11 correct answers)
During the slow-motion period in (r48), at least one of the friendly character and the enemy character may be constructed using two or more images. For example, for a friendly character, four images may be repeatedly used, such as image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, etc., to make the character's hair and clothes appear to move gradually. In this way, the data of the character itself is reused while only a portion of the data is changed, thereby reducing the amount of work required for data change and more faithfully expressing the character's movements.

(12 correct answers)
In the slow-motion period in (r48), when the character's hair or clothes are made to appear to move gradually from multiple images, the movement of the hair or clothes may be designed to appear to move at the same speed as during periods other than the slow-motion period. Here, if the number of images is increased to match the slow-motion movement in order to make the movement appear smooth during the slow-motion period, the capacity will increase. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow-motion period, the movement does not become awkward even if the number of images used is reduced, and the movement can be more faithfully expressed while reducing the data capacity.

<Explanation about the game effect lamp>
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to Figures 192 to 260.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data table]
The performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 or RAM 122 to control one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 to light/blink/turn off through lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 124 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 105 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by one for each frame (33 msec) of the image to be displayed. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start a display corresponding to each part (for example, various displays (reach display, etc.) in each part such as the start part and the promotion part), the display control unit 124 performs display control of the image display device 5 based on image data (video data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122. The display control unit 124 sets an extension command corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control performed by itself, and transmits the extension command to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) for which display control is performed by the display control unit 124 based on the extension command received from the display control unit 124.

For example, FIG. 272 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 272, when the display control unit 124 performs display control in the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A, it sends an extension command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 124, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A.

In the parent table, information is stored that specifies the lamps (lighting points) that are the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, information that specifies the maximum time that lamp control is performed for each lamp, and information that specifies the child table that is referenced during lamp control for each lamp (designated address of the child table). Note that in the parent table, only the lamps that are the subject of lamp control are designated, and lamps that are not the subject of lamp control are not designated. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 192 described later, the frame lamp, the role lamp 9A, the left panel lamp 9B, the attacca lamp 9E, the V attacca lamp 9F, and the electric chute lamp 9H are designated as the subjects of lamp control, and 600,000 msec is designated as the maximum time that lamp control is performed for each lamp. In the parent table shown in FIG. 192, the child table WD1 is designated for the frame lamp, the child table YD1 is designated for the role lamp 9A, the child table LD1 is designated for the left panel lamp 9B, and the child table AD1 is designated for the attacca lamp 9E, the V attacca lamp 9F, and the electric chute lamp 9H.

Details will be described later using FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the parent table for the SP first half reach A hit epilogue, 600,000 msec (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control to be performed on the frame lamp, and the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 msec to time this 600,000 msec (10 minutes). In other words, the performance control CPU 120 performs the counter subtraction process 60,000 times to time 600,000 msec (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 msec (10 minutes) is timed. In the parent table for the SP first half reach A hit epilogue, WD3 is specified as the child table.

The child table stores information specifying the lamp (illuminated location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the grandchild table to be referenced at each time when the lamp control is performed (specified address of the grandchild table). For example, in the child table for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 193 described below, the grandchild tables (W4, W11, W12, W21, etc.) to be referenced for each time such as ta1 to ta19 are specified.

Details will be given later using Figure 206, but as shown in Figure 272, in child table WD3 for the epilogue of the SP first half reach A hit, 300 msec is specified as the time for lamp control of the frame lamp, and the performance control CPU 120 counts 3000 msec by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and performs lamp control using the grandchild table specified by child table WD3 until the count reaches 3000 msec. In child table WD3 for the epilogue of the SP first half reach A hit, W4 is specified as the grandchild table.

The grandchild table stores information specifying the lamps (illuminated locations) that are the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and brightness data used at each time that the lamp control is performed. For example, grandchild table W4 shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later, stores brightness data corresponding to RGB used every 30 msec.

The brightness data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of lamp control. For example, a frame lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three elements, "R", "G", and "B", and the brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to that element. Specifically, the brightness data has 16 current values from 0 to F, and when the brightness data is 0, the current value is the minimum value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the maximum value. For example, when brightness data "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "A" flows through the "R" element, when brightness data "1" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when brightness data "F" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "F" flows through the "G" element.

The frame lamp can emit light in various colors by passing a current corresponding to the brightness data through each of the RGB elements. The frame lamp can also be lit in a color corresponding to each of the characters mentioned above by emitting light based on the brightness data. As an example, in a performance in which Yume-chan appears, the data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in red. In a performance in which Maid A appears, the data "00F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in blue. In a performance in which Maid B appears, the data "0AC" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in Hawaiian blue. In a performance in which AD appears, the data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in yellow. In a performance in which Jam-chan appears, brightness data "A5F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up purple. In a performance in which Nana-chan appears, brightness data "F3F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up pink. In a performance in which Bakuchu appears, brightness data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up red. In a performance in which Boingo appears, brightness data "FEA" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up cream.

Details will be described later using FIG. 230, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately specified as brightness data (RGB data) for each lamp at 30 msec intervals. The performance control CPU 120 counts up the time specified by the child table, 3000 msec, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the count reaches 300 msec. Then, based on the received brightness data, the LED driver passes a current corresponding to the brightness data through the specified LED. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 has timers corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and performs lamp control based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table while decrementing the timer at regular intervals (for example, 10 msec intervals).

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table, and when it has completed outputting brightness data up to the last specified location in the grandchild table, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table still remains, it starts outputting brightness data again from the first specified location in the grandchild table. On the other hand, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table becomes 0 while the performance control CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table, it sets a timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying that child table, and starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table specified by that child table. This switches the grandchild table, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after the switch.

Timer management of child tables by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the figure. Figure 273 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of a child table. As shown in Figure 273, in the child table for the SP first half reach A hit epilogue, 3000 msec is specified as the time for lamp control for the frame lamp, and W4 is specified as the grandchild table. In the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as the brightness data (RGB data) for each lamp. For ease of explanation, the data "000" in the first 30 msec will be referred to as data 1, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec as data 2, the data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 3, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec as data 4, the data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 5, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec as data 6, and the data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 7.

The performance control CPU 120 counts the 3000 msec specified by the child table WD3 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and outputs the brightness data of data 1 to data 7 to the LED driver at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the count reaches 3000 msec. However, if the count has not yet reached 3000 msec after outputting data 1 to data 7, it again outputs the brightness data to the LED driver in order starting from the first data 1. When the count eventually reaches 3000 msec, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table W4 at that point, and starts outputting the brightness data based on the next grandchild table W1 specified by the child table. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 loops the output of the brightness data until the time specified by the child table has elapsed.

As shown in the parent table in FIG. 192, which will be described later, child data is specified over a period of 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and the 10-minute data in such a parent table serves as a measure against malfunctions. That is, the performance control CPU 120 switches parent tables based on the performance control command from the CPU 103 to control the lamps, but even if some malfunction occurs while lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table and the performance control CPU 120 does not receive a performance control command from the CPU 103, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so it is possible to prevent different lamp controls from being performed one after another from the point where the malfunction occurred.

Also, as in the child table shown in Figure 193 described later, grandchild data is specified over 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and the 10-minute data in this child table serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again from the first specified location in the child table when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table becomes 0, because the parent table's timer is still remaining.

Also, as in the grandchild table shown in Figure 235 described later, brightness data is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and the 10-minute data in this grandchild table serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again from the first specified location in the grandchild table when the value of the timer corresponding to the grandchild table reaches 0, because the timer of the child table is still remaining.

In this way, by specifying 10-minute brightness data at the end of the grandchild table, the lamp is maintained at a fixed light emission, which prevents the lamp from continually changing in illumination. Furthermore, by specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) of brightness data at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, the lamp can be more effectively prevented from continually changing in illumination.

As mentioned above, the luminance data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table, but in the luminance data table used in each part described below, only characteristic tables among the parent table, child table, and grandchild table are shown, and other tables may be omitted.

[Luminance data table used in the start part]
Fig. 192 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the start part. As shown in Fig. 192, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the start part stores information specifying 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WD1, YD1, LD1, AD1) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 193 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for the start part. As shown in Figure 193, in the frame lamp child table WD1, the time of the start part for the frame lamp is subdivided and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that in this embodiment, only particularly distinctive grandchild tables are described in the child table, and other grandchild tables are marked "omitted" and their description is omitted.

For example, at times ta1, ta4, and ta7, grandchild table W21 is specified. Grandchild table W21 is included in the normal background luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52, and corresponds to grandchild table W21 for the frame lamp in the background luminance data table shown in FIG. 260 described later. As shown in FIG. 260, in grandchild table W21, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamps in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern) corresponding to the normal background.

At time ta3 and time ta6, grandchild table W4 is specified. Grandchild table W4 corresponds to grandchild table W4 for the frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) brightness data table shown in FIG. 230 described later. As shown in FIG. 230, in grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to blink in white by performing lamp control based on grandchild table W4. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to blink in white twice by performing lamp control over 150 msec (30 msec x 5) based on grandchild table W4.

At times ta10 to ta12, grandchild table W11 is specified. Grandchild table W11 corresponds to grandchild table W11 for the frame lamp in the shutter 1 brightness data table shown in FIG. 251, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, grandchild table W11 specifies that the brightness data is gradually lowered from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W11, and lights up the frame lamp in red while gradually lowering the brightness in response to the performance of the shutter closing as shown in FIG. 58 (a10) to (a12).

At times ta13 to ta18, the grandchild table W12 is specified. The grandchild table W12 corresponds to the grandchild table W12 for the frame lamp in the shutter 2 brightness data table shown in FIG. 251, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W12, and lights up the frame lamp in red while maintaining a reduced brightness, corresponding to the performance in which the shutter opens in stages after being maintained for a predetermined time from a fully closed state as shown in FIG. 59 (a13) to (a15) and FIG. 60 (a16) to (a18).

In this way, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1-ta12 before the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data switches so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as background yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and then lighting up red, whereas during the time ta13-ta18 after the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. This allows the lighting state of the frame lamp to liven up the presentation in the start part before the shutters close, and by maintaining the lighting state of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters open, and as a result, the presentation in the subsequent teasing part can be better viewed by the player.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59(a13), the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness from the timing when the shutter is completely closed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the brightness data may be maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness after a predetermined time (e.g., one second) has elapsed after the shutter is completely closed. Alternatively, the brightness data may be maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness from a timing related to the shutter closing operation (e.g., the timing when the shutter starts to close, the timing immediately before the shutter starts to close, etc.).

At time ta19, which is the end of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off in response to the effect of the shutter being maintained in a fully open state as shown in FIG. 61 (a19). Note that "off" here refers to a state in which the brightness data is "0" as explained with reference to FIG. 53, but at time ta19, it may be almost off, with the brightness data being "1". Note that in the following explanation, "off" may also mean "almost off". At time ta19, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the grandchild table, and the frame lamp remains off based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD1 reaches 0.

In this way, the frame lamp goes out when the shutter is fully open, so the lighting state of the frame lamp makes it possible to clearly communicate to the player when the shutter is fully open. Also, the teasing part of SP first half reach A and the teasing part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, start with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp off, and the frame lamp starts to light up or flash based on the brightness data table corresponding to each SP first half reach. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp goes out, the frame lamp starts to light up in accordance with the progress of the performance in the SP first half reach, so it is possible to clearly communicate to the player that the SP first half reach has started.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach A provocation part]
Fig. 194 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach A. As shown in Fig. 194, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach A stores information specifying 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WD2, YD2, LD2, AD2) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 195 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of SP first half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD2 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figure 195, in the frame lamp child table WD2, the time of the provocative part of SP first half reach A for the frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W3 is specified for 1560 msec of time tb10. Grandchild table W3 corresponds to grandchild table W3 for the frame lamp in the yellow haze brightness data table shown in FIG. 229, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 229, in grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at 180 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamps to light up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

During the 150 msec interval of time tb14 and the 210 msec interval of time tb17, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to flash in white.

As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is specified as "000" and "AAA" alternately at 30 msec intervals, with the first 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), and the last 30 msec being "000" (off). In other words, the frame lamp alternates between "off" and "on" over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), causing the frame lamp to flash in white (white flash) multiple times. For example, if the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 over one period of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), the frame lamp will flash white three times, and if the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 over 150 msec (30 msec x 5), the frame lamp will flash white twice.

At both time tb14 and time tb17, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at time tb14, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at time tb17, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is one cycle of 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD2, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tb18, which is the end of the teasing part of the SP first half reach A, the frame lamp lights up in white in response to the performance of teasing whether Yume-chan will catch the Bakuchu before the decision of the win/loss branch (jackpot, miss, SP reach second half development) as shown in FIG. 67 (b18). At time tb18, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes. For example, the grandchild table W8 corresponds to the grandchild table W8 for the frame lamp in the teasing 2 brightness data table without operation promotion shown in FIG. 249 described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the frame lamp maintains the white lighting based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 becomes 0.

As a result, in the winning/losing branch in the teasing part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, as shown in Figure 67 (b18), the frame lamp will remain lit white with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the SP first half Reach A provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tb4, the performance control CPU 120 lights the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan and lights the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, corresponding to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, face each other as shown in FIG. 63 (b4). At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, corresponding to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). At time tb6, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, corresponding to a performance in which Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b6).

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the first half of the SP's Reach A provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tb11, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in green, corresponding to Yume Yume, located on the left side of the screen, chasing Bakuchu, as shown in FIG. 65 (b11). Furthermore, at times tb8 and tb9, when there is a character speaking but no subtitles, as shown in FIG. 63 (b8) and (b9), the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in the color corresponding to the character.

In this way, as shown in Figures 64 (b8) and (b9), even if a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an ideal way.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A]
FIG. 196 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A stores information specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child tables (WD3, YD3, LD3, AD3) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a2), in the child table WD3 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, for the frame lamp, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD3 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time tc1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 67 (b18), causes the frame lamp to flash in white, corresponding to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 68 (c1).

As mentioned above, the white light at the win/lose branch (tb18) indicates that the RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white flashing at tc1 after a win is confirmed indicates that the RGB data is "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch but brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

At times tc2 and tc3, grandchild table W1 is specified. Grandchild table W1 corresponds to grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 225, in grandchild table W1, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, thereby lighting up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in response to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 68 (c2) and (c3).

As shown in FIG. 196 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A stores information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, which is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP reach A, the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP reach A for the frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD0 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Also, the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols is used in common in the first half of the SP reach A and B, the second half of the SP reach A and B, and the final SP reach.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for the 5000 msec period between time tc4 and time tc5. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, as shown in Figures 69 (c4) and (c5).

At time tc6, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 69 (c6). At time tc6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD3 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc2 and time tc3, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of catching a chu, and further, grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc6, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of displaying a winning symbol in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing a win and the grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach A Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 197 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 197(a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, for the frame lamp, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP reach first half A is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD4 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Also, the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue is used in common in the SP reach first half A and B, the SP reach second half A and B, and the SP final reach.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified for 200 msec of time td1. The grandchild table W13 corresponds to the grandchild table W13 for the frame lamp in the miss 1 brightness data table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 67 (b18), lights up the frame lamps in white to correspond to the performance of failing to catch the explosive chocolate as shown in FIG. 70 (d1).

As mentioned above, the white light at the win/lose branch (tb18) indicates that the RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white light at td1 after the loss notification indicates that the RGB data is "888" or "444". This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white light at the win/lose branch (tb18), so that the player can be conveniently notified that a loss has occurred.

During the 5,800 msec period of time td2, grandchild table W14 is specified. Grandchild table W14 corresponds to grandchild table W14 for the frame lamp in the Loss 2 Brightness Data Table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W14, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in a darker white color than td1, corresponding to the performance shown in FIG. 70 (d2) in which Yume-Yume is disappointed after losing.

As mentioned above, when a win occurs (tc2, tc3), the RGB data changes at 30 msec intervals for the rainbow lighting, whereas when a loss occurs (td2), the RGB data changes at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than when a win occurs. As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp changes color at shorter intervals than when a loss occurs, so the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, when a win occurs, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than when a loss occurs, while when a loss occurs, the lighting of the frame lamp is more subdued than when a win occurs, and as a result, a win or loss can be easily communicated to the player through the contrasting lamp states.

At time td3, grandchild table W15 is specified. Grandchild table W15 corresponds to grandchild table W15 for the frame lamp in the Miss 3 brightness data table shown in FIG. 253, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 253, in grandchild table W15, "444" is specified for the first 10 msec, "111" is specified for the next 550 msec, and "111" is specified for the final 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 70 (d3).

At time td4, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, lighting the frame lamp in a yellow background lighting pattern to correspond to a performance in which the normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (d4). In other words, the grandchild table W21 used when the normal screen is displayed in the event of a miss has a lighting mode that corresponds to the normal background, and is the same as the grandchild table W21 specified at time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7 in the start part.

At time td4, lamp control is performed by repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in the grandchild table W21. Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching RGB data based on the grandchild table W21 shown in FIG. 260 described later, until a fluctuation pattern command specifying the next fluctuation is received if there is a hold, or until a customer waiting command is received over time if there is no hold, and if the fluctuation pattern command or customer waiting command has not yet been received even after performing lamp control based on the final RGB data, lamp control is performed again based on the initial RGB data.

As shown in FIG. 190, from the time the frame lamp goes out at time td3 until the frame lamp lights up in a yellow background pattern at time td4 in response to the effect of displaying the normal screen, the eye-catching screen is displayed and the frame lamp lights up based on the brightness data table corresponding to the eye-catching screen. In this way, in lamp control of the frame lamp when a miss occurs, the brightness data table (grandchild table) corresponding to the eye-catching screen is used, and then the grandchild table W21, which is also used in the start part as the brightness data table corresponding to the normal screen, is used. This eliminates the need to prepare a separate brightness data table to be used after the eye-catching screen is displayed and before the pattern is determined, and by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W21, which is also used in the start part, the effect using the frame lamps can be viewed by the player without any sense of incongruity.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach B provocation part]
Fig. 198 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B. As shown in Fig. 198, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B stores 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD5, YD5, LD5, AD5) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 199 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD5 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figure 199, in the frame lamp child table WD5, the time of the provocative part of the SP first half reach B for the frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time te8 and for 210 msec at time te12. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to flash white. Grandchild table W4 is specified at both time te8 and time te12, but at time te8, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at time te12, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time period of one cycle of 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD5, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time te17, which is the end of the teasing part of the SP first half reach B, the frame lamp lights up in white, corresponding to the effect of teasing whether Yume Yume will lose or not in the win/loss branch (jackpot, miss, SP reach second half development) as shown in Figure 77 (e17). At time te18, the lamps are controlled based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes.

As a result, in the winning/losing branch in the teasing part of the first half of the SP, Reach B, as shown in Figure 77 (e17), the frame lamp will remain lit white with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the SP first half reach B teasing part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time te4, the performance control CPU 120 lights the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan and lights the frame right lamp in cream corresponding to Boingo, corresponding to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, and Boingo, located on the right side of the screen, face each other as shown in FIG. 73 (e4). At time te5, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, corresponding to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 73 (e5). At time te6, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame right lamp in cream corresponding to Boingo, corresponding to a performance in which Boingo, located on the right side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 73 (e6).

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the SP first half reach B provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time te11, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in cream color, which corresponds to Boingo, in response to the performance of Boingo shooting the puck as shown in FIG. 75 (e11). Furthermore, at time te7, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in green, which corresponds to Yume Yume, in the case where Yume Yume has a line but there are no subtitles as shown in FIG. 74 (e7).

In this way, as shown in Figure 74 (e7), even if a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an ideal way.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the first half of the SP]
FIG. 200 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD6, YD6, LD6, AD6) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 200(a2), in the child table WD6 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, for the frame lamp, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD6 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time tf1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), causes the frame lamp to flash in white, corresponding to the performance of Yume Yume hitting the puck back as shown in FIG. 78 (f1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in Figure 249 described below, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white flashing at tf1 after a win is confirmed has RGB data of "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch and brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

From time tf2 to tf4, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in accordance with the performance shown in Fig. 78 (f2) to (f4) in which Boingo is attacked and Yume-Yume wins.

As shown in Figure 200 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B stores information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, which is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when controlling the lamp for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in Figure 200 (b2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B, the time for the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B for the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified between time tf5 and time tf6, which is 5000 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, as shown in Figures 79 (f5) and (f6).

At time tf7, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 80 (f7). At time tf7, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps will continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD6 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times tf2 to tf4, and the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1 in response to an effect in which Boingo is attacked and Yume-chan wins. Furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is also specified for time tf7, and the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1 in response to an effect in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing a win and the grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach B Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 201 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B.

As shown in FIG. 201 (a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in Figure 200 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, for the frame lamp, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP reach first half B is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified between time tg1 and time tg2, which is a period of 200 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), the frame lamps are lit in white to correspond to the performance in which Yume Yume is sent flying as shown in FIG. 81 (g1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white lighting at tg1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the win/lose branch (te17), so that the player can be conveniently notified that a loss has occurred.

During the 5,800 msec period of time tg3, grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W14, and lights up the frame lamp in a darker white color than tg1, corresponding to the performance in which Yume Yume is disappointed at losing, as shown in Figures 70 (g2) and (g3).

The rainbow lighting during a win (tf2-tf4) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, while the darker white lighting during a loss (tg3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, so the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued than during a win, and as a result, a win or loss can be easily communicated to the player by the contrasting lamp states.

At time tg4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 82 (g4).

At time tg5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a yellow background lighting pattern in response to a performance in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 81 (g5). Also, at time tg5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the character movement part during the latter half of the SP development]
FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the part of the reel action during the latter half of the SP development. The grandchild table included in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp is included in the brightness data table for SP reach explained with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 202, in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp, a grandchild table to be referred to in the part of the reel action is specified for the frame lamp. The child table WD8 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the first half (falling part) of the part action shown in FIG. 171 (h1) to (h3) (FIG. 83 (h1) to (h3)).

For example, grandchild table W2 is specified for 7000 msec from time th1 to th3. Grandchild table W2 corresponds to grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp in the reel operation red flashing brightness data table shown in FIG. 228, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 228, in grandchild table W2, "A00" is specified for the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W2, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamps to flash red in response to the performance of a reel falling as shown in FIG. 83 (h1) to (h3) after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17).

In addition, during the 7000 msec period from time th1 to time th3 during which the reel falls, lamp control is also performed on the reel lamp 9A. For example, during the 7000 msec period from time th1 to time th3 during which the reel falls, the performance control CPU 120 causes the reel lamp 9A to flash in red based on the child table corresponding to the falling action of the reel in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table.

This allows the lighting pattern of the frame lamp and the reel lamp 9A to more effectively draw the player's attention to the falling reel.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of the SP Reach A promotion part]
Fig. 203 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach A. As shown in Fig. 203, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach A stores 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD9, YD9, LD9, AD9) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figures 204 and 205 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of SP latter half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD9 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figures 204 and 205, in the frame lamp child table WD9, the time of the provocative part of SP latter half reach A for the frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used to control the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (rising part) of the role action shown in Figure 171 (h4) to Figure 172 (h10). Specifically, from times th4 to th6, the frame lamps flash yellow in response to the performance of the role rising, and then from times th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamps light up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach. This allows the player to easily understand that the game has progressed to the SP latter half reach A by gradually changing the frame lamps from flashing yellow to lighting up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP latter half reach A.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, lamp control is also performed on the reel lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so that the reel lamp 9A is gradually turned off based on the child table corresponding to the reel rise action in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table.

As a result, the lighting pattern of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the reel rising, while the lighting pattern of the frame lamp draws the player's attention to the screen indicating that the game has progressed to Reach A in the latter half of the SP.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time ti1, 1330 msec at time ti20, and 1560 msec at time ti11. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamp to light up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp switches over one period of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At times th7 to th10 and ti1, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec. At time ti20, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec. At time ti11, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1560 msec, which is more than two periods, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different timings in one child table WD9, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, thereby changing the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow. This makes it possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow, corresponding to the background of an SP reach, while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using a common grandchild table W3 but varying the reference time, without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of multiple different timings in one child table WD9. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Grandchild table W4 is specified for the 150 msec interval between time ti15 and time ti24, and for the 210 msec interval between time ti14, ti23, and time ti35. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to flash in white. At times ti15, ti24, ti14, ti23, and ti35, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at times ti15 and ti24, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at times ti14, ti23, and ti35, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD9, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

During the 1000 msec period from time ti36 to ti38, grandchild table W7 is specified. Grandchild table W7 corresponds to grandchild table W7 for the frame lamp in the non-operation prompting provocation 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W7, causing the frame lamps to flash in white.

At time ti39, which is the end of the teasing part of the SP second half Reach A, the frame lamps light up in white, corresponding to the effect of teasing whether Yume Yume and Jam will catch the Bakuchu at the win/lose branch (jackpot, miss) as shown in Figure 95 (i39). At time ti39, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the grandchild table W8. As shown in Figure 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the frame lamps will maintain the white light based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 reaches 0.

In this way, in child table WD9 in SP latter half Reach A, which is a reach without operation prompting, the frame lamp flashes in white based on grandchild table W7, and then lights up in white based on grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the win/loss branch in the provocation part of SP latter half Reach A where no operation prompting is performed, the brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W8 is designed to use "FDC" (white lighting), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, so that the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 95 (i39), the frame lamp remains lit in white even with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

Also, as shown in FIG. 249, the final RGB data of grandchild table W7 used during the 1000 msec period from time ti36 to ti38 is specified as "FDC", and furthermore, the final RGB data of grandchild table W8 used thereafter at time ti39 is also specified as "FDC". As a result, the performance control CPU 120 maintains the state in which the luminance data of "FDC" based on grandchild table W7 is output to the LED driver, and then continues to output the luminance data of "FDC" to the LED driver based on grandchild table W8, so that the timing for deciding whether to win or lose can be optimally produced with simpler lamp control without increasing the amount of data too much.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the second half of the SP's Reach A provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time ti2, the performance control CPU 120 lights the frame left lamp in white corresponding to Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan, and lights the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan, located on the left side of the screen, face off against Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, as shown in Figure 84 (i2). At time ti3, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line, as shown in Figure 84 (i3). At time ti4, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in purple corresponding to Jam-chan, in response to a performance in which Jam-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line, as shown in Figure 85 (i4). At time ti5, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame right lamp in red, which corresponds to Bakuchu, to the performance of Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, speaking lines, as shown in Figure 85 (i5).

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the Reach A provocation part in the second half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time ti21, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in green, corresponding to Yume Yume, located on the left side of the screen, chasing Bakuchu, as shown in Fig. 90 (i21). Furthermore, at times ti32 and ti34, when there is dialogue from a character but no subtitles, as shown in Fig. 94 (i32) and Fig. 95 (i34), the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in the color corresponding to that character.

In this way, as shown in Figures 94 (i32) and 95 (i34), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an ideal way.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A]
FIG. 206 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD10, YD10, LD10, AD10) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a2), in the child table WD10 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD10 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, from time tj1 to tj3, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 96 (i39), the frame lamp flashes in white to correspond to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 97 (j1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in Figure 249 described below, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white flashing at tj1 after a win is confirmed has RGB data of "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch and brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

At times tj2 and tj3, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in response to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figures 97 (j2) and (j3).

As shown in FIG. 206 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A, the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A for the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified between time tj4 and time tj5, which is 5000 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color, which corresponds to the display of winning symbols as shown in Figure 98 (j4) and (j5).

At time tj6, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 98 (j6). At time tj6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD10 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, grandchild table W1 is specified for times tj2 and tj3, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of catching a Bakuchu, and further, grandchild table W1 is specified for time tj6, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of displaying a winning symbol in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing a win and the grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the SP second half Reach A Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 207 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach A.

As shown in FIG. 207(a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of the SP reach A, the time of the miss epilogue part in the first half of the SP reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during the 200 msec period of time tk1, the grandchild table W13 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 96 (i39), the frame lamp is lit in white to correspond to the performance of failing to catch the explosive chu as shown in FIG. 99 (k1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white lighting at tk1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the win/lose branch (ti39), so that the player can be conveniently notified that a loss has occurred.

During the 5,800 msec period between time tk2 and time tk3, grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W14, and lights up the frame lamp in a darker white color than tk1, corresponding to the performance shown in Figures 99 (k2) and (k3) in which Yume-chan is disappointed at losing.

The rainbow lighting during a win (tj2, tj3) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, while the darker white lighting during a loss (tk2, tk3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than the interval during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued than during a win, and as a result, the player can easily understand whether they have won or lost with the contrasting lamp states.

At time tk4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 100 (k4).

At time tk5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a pattern with the background lit yellow, corresponding to a performance in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 100 (k5). Also, at time tk5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of the SP Reach B promotion part]
Fig. 208 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach B. As shown in Fig. 208, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach B stores 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD12, YD12, LD12, AD12) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 209 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of SP second half reach B. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD12 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figure 209, the frame lamp child table WD12 subdivides the time of the provocative part of SP second half reach B for a frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used to control the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (rising part) of the role action shown in Figure 171 (h4) to Figure 172 (h10). Specifically, from times th4 to th6, the frame lamps flash yellow in response to the performance of the role rising, and then from times th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamps light up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach. This allows the player to easily understand that the game has progressed to the SP latter half reach B by gradually changing from a flashing yellow color to a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP latter half reach B.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, lamp control is also performed on the reel lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so as to gradually turn off the reel lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the reel rise action in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table.

As a result, the lighting pattern of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the reel rising, while the lighting pattern of the frame lamp draws the player's attention to the screen indicating that the game has progressed to Reach B in the latter half of the SP.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time tn5, 1330 msec at time tn14, and 1560 msec at time tn6. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamp to light up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp switches over one period of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At times th7 to th10, tn1, and tn5, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec. At time tn14, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec. At time tn6, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1560 msec, which is more than two periods, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different timings in one child table WD12, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, thereby changing the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow. In this way, without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings in one child table WD12, it is possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow, which corresponds to the background of an SP reach, while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W3 but varying the reference time. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Grandchild table W4 is specified for each of the 150 msec intervals of time tn3, tn12, and tn25, and the 210 msec intervals of time tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamps to flash in white. At times tn3, tn12, tn25, tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at times tn3, tn12, and tn25, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at times tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD12, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tn27, which is the end of the teasing part of the SP second half Reach B, the frame lamp lights up in white, corresponding to the effect of teasing whether or not to catch the crab at the hit/miss branch (hit, miss) as shown in Figure 109 (n27). At time tn27, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes.

As a result, in the winning/losing branch in the teasing part of Reach B in the second half of the SP, as shown in Figure 109 (n27), the frame lamp will remain lit white with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the SP's second half Reach B teasing part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tn2, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white, corresponding to Jam-chan and Nana-chan, and lights up the frame right lamp in red, corresponding to the crab, to correspond to the performance shown in FIG. 101 (n2), in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, face off against the crab, located on the right side of the screen. Furthermore, because Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, are speaking, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white.

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the SP's second half Reach B provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tn18, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in pink, which corresponds to Nana praying, as shown in FIG. 106 (n18). Furthermore, at time tn10, when there is dialogue from a character (crab) but no subtitles, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in the color (red) corresponding to the character (crab).

In this way, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), even if a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an ideal way.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the second half of the SP Reach B]
FIG. 210 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD13, YD13, LD13, AD13) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 210(a2), in the child table WD13 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, for the frame lamp, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD13 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time to1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 109 (n27), the frame lamp flashes in white to correspond to the performance of catching a crab as shown in FIG. 110 (o1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in Figure 249 described below, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white flashing at to1 after a win is confirmed has RGB data of "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch and brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

At times to2 to to5, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and makes the caught crab act as a store signboard as shown in FIG. 110 (o2) to FIG. 111 (o5) to make Jam-chan and Nana-chan happy, and smoothly lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach B stores information specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP reach B, the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP reach B for the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified between time to6 and time to7, which is 5000 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, as shown in FIG. 111 (o6) and FIG. 112 (o7).

At time to8, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 112 (o8). At time to8, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD13 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times to2 to to5, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors in response to an effect in which the caught crab serves as the store's signboard and Jam-chan and Nana-chan are happy, and further, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time to8, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors in response to an effect in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing a win and the grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each performance with a unified performance. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the SP second half Reach B Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 211 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP reach B.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP reach second half B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during the 200 msec period of time tp1, the grandchild table W13 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 109 (n27), the frame lamp is lit in white to correspond to the performance of failing to catch the crab as shown in FIG. 113 (p1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white lighting at tp1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the win/lose branch (tn27), so that the player can be conveniently notified that a loss has occurred.

During the 5,800 msec period between time tp2 and time tp3, grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W14, and lights up the frame lamp in a darker white color than tp1, corresponding to the performance shown in Figures 113 (p2) and (p3) in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are disappointed at losing.

The rainbow lighting during a win (to2 to to5) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, while the darker white lighting during a loss (tp2, tp3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, so the player can easily know that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued than during a win, and as a result, a win or a loss can be easily communicated to the player by the contrasting lamp states.

At time tp4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 114 (p4).

At time tp5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a pattern with the background lit yellow, corresponding to a performance in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 114 (p5). Also, at time tp5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the SP final reach promotion part]
Fig. 212 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocation part of the SP final reach. As shown in Fig. 212, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocation part of the SP final reach stores information specifying 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WD15, YD15, LD15, AD15) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figures 213 and 214 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the stimulating part of an SP final reach. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD15 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figures 213 and 214, in the frame lamp child table WD15, the time of the stimulating part of the SP final reach for a frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used to control the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the role action shown in Figure 171 (h4) to Figure 172 (h10). Specifically, from times th4 to th6, the frame lamps flash yellow in response to the performance of the role rising, and then from times th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamps light up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach. This allows the player to easily understand that the game has progressed to the SP final reach by gradually changing from a flashing yellow color to a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP final reach.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, lamp control is also performed on the reel lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so as to gradually turn off the reel lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the reel rise action in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table.

As a result, the lighting pattern of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the reel rising, while the lighting pattern of the frame lamp draws the player's attention to the screen indicating that the SP final reach has been reached.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time tr1, 1330 msec at times tr19 and tr22, and 1560 msec at time tr15. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamp to light up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp switches over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At times th7 to th10 and tr1, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec. At times tr19 and tr22, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec. At time tr15, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1560 msec, which is more than two periods, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different timings in one child table WD15, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, thereby changing the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow. In this way, without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of multiple different timings in one child table WD15, it is possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow, which corresponds to the background of an SP reach, while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W3 but varying the reference time. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Furthermore, in each of child table WD9 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the provocation part of SP final reach, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in multiple reach performances. Similarly, in child table WD2 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach A and child table WD5 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach B, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control.

Grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time tr36 and for 210 msec at times tr40 and tr47. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to flash white. Grandchild table W4 is specified at times tr36, tr40, and tr47, but at time tr36, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at times tr40 and tr47, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time period of one cycle of 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD15, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Furthermore, in each of child table WD2 used in the provocation part of the SP first half reach A, child table WD5 used in the provocation part of the SP first half reach B, child table WD9 used in the provocation part of the SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the provocation part of the SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the provocation part of the SP final reach, it is possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing its reference time without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tr41, grandchild table W5 or grandchild table W6 is specified. If information to execute a red cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, grandchild table W5 is specified at time tr41, and if information to execute a green cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, grandchild table W6 is specified at time tr41.

The grandchild table W5 corresponds to the grandchild tables W5a to W5e for the frame lamp in the common red cut-in brightness data table shown in Figures 233 to 235 described later. As shown in Figures 233 to 235, in the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e), as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data is specified at first at 30 msec intervals, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data is specified at the next 20 msec intervals, and finally data showing various brightnesses for only the R data is specified alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in red in response to the cut-in performance (red cut-in performance) shown in Figure 128 (r41).

The grandchild table W6 corresponds to the grandchild tables W6a to W6e for the frame lamp in the common green cut-in brightness data table shown in Figures 242 to 244 described later. As shown in Figures 242 to 244, in the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e), as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data is specified at first at 30 msec intervals, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data is specified at the next 20 msec intervals, and finally data showing various brightnesses for only the G data is specified alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W6, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in green in response to the cut-in performance (green cut-in performance) shown in Figure 128 (r41).

As shown in Figures 128 (r40) and (r41), when push button 31B is displayed and a cut-in performance is executed, the character does not speak and subtitles are not displayed. Furthermore, in the SP final reach, the frame lamp that is the subject of lamp control in scenes other than the cut-in performance continues to be the subject of lamp control in the cut-in performance.

This prevents the display (button display) that prompts the player to operate push button 31B to execute the cut-in effect from overlapping with the subtitle display, preventing the two from overlapping and making either display difficult to recognize or causing the player to misinterpret the content of the display. Furthermore, the brightness data for the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for that cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is designed to use the same frame lamps as the lamp control in the teasing part of the SP final reach, preventing the mixing of unnecessary lamps lighting/flashing, etc., which would spoil the aesthetic appearance, and providing a suitable teasing part performance.

In this embodiment, the button display and cut-in effects and other effects in the final SP reach have the same target of lamp control in that they both use frame lamps, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the button display and cut-in effects and other effects in the final SP reach may have the same target of lamp control in that they only use one or more of the game effect lamps 9, such as the frame lamp, the role lamp 9A, and the left panel lamp 9B, or they may have the same target of lamp control in that they all use all of the game effect lamps 9.

At 860 msec, at times tr49 and tr50, grandchild table W9 is specified. Grandchild table W9 corresponds to grandchild table W9 for the frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W9, lighting up the frame lamp in red in response to a performance in which the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49) and (r50).

In the time tr51 to tr54, which is the last time of the provocation part of the SP final reach, the grandchild table W10 is specified. The grandchild table W10 corresponds to the grandchild table W10 for the frame lamp in the operation promotion brightness data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10 to make the frame lamp blink red in response to the performance that encourages the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIG. 131 (r51) to FIG. 132 (r54). In the time tr51 to tr54, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10 for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp continues to blink red based on the grandchild table W10 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD15 becomes 0.

As a result, at the win/loss branch in the provocation part of the SP final reach, as shown in Figure 131 (r49) to Figure 132 (r54), the frame lamp will switch between flashing white, lit red, and flashing red in succession while sounds corresponding to operation promotions and sounds (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, enhancing the presentation of operations promotions for the player at the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

Here, if no operation prompting the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) is given, such as with child table WD2 used in the teasing part of the first half of SP Reach A, child table WD5 used in the teasing part of the first half of SP Reach B, child table WD9 used in the teasing part of the second half of SP Reach A, and child table WD12 used in the teasing part of the second half of SP Reach B, the frame lamp will remain lit in white at the final win/loss branch of the teasing part, and then it will move to the win epilogue part or the miss epilogue part. On the other hand, when an operation is promoted to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger), such as in the child table WD15 used in the provocation part of the SP final reach, the frame lamp flashes white in a performance that provokes the player as to whether or not the ally character will catch the Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 130 (r47), and then lights up red in response to a performance in which the Bakuchu and the ally character are displayed alternately as shown in FIG. 130 (r48), and then switches to the grandchild table W9, and based on that grandchild table W9, the frame lamp lights up red in response to a performance in which the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 131 (r49) and (r50).

In this way, in the SP Reach performance where no operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, making it appear to the player that the performance has stopped, and the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in the SP Reach performance where operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, a state is set in which a sound corresponding to the operation prompt or a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach is output, and further, by switching the grandchild table multiple times to control the frame lamp to a mode corresponding to the operation prompt, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by different sound control and lamp control between the case where operation prompt is not given at the win/loss branch and the case where operation prompt is given. Furthermore, in the SP final reach, where a player is encouraged to make an operation at the win/loss branch, the brightness data (RGB data) switches sequentially between "500" and "D00" at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W10. This allows the timing of the win/loss branch to be appropriately presented by the lighting state of the frame lamp.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach teasing part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tr2, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white corresponding to the six ally characters and lights the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, corresponding to a performance in which six ally characters located on the left side of the screen confront Bakuchu, as shown in FIG. 115 (r2). Furthermore, because the six ally characters located on the left side of the screen are speaking, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white. Also, at time tr3, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, corresponding to a performance in which Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, is speaking, as shown in FIG. 115 (r3).

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach teasing part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tr11, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in blue corresponding to maid A, in response to the performance shown in FIG. 118 (r11) in which maid A chases a smash. Furthermore, at times tr25, tr27, tr29, tr31, tr33, and tr35, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in the color corresponding to the character when there is a character's line but no subtitles, as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. 124 (r29), FIG. 125 (r31), (r33), and FIG. 126 (r35).

In this way, as shown in Figures 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29), 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to ideally see the performance in the provocative part.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach]
FIG. 215 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a1), the parent table for the device operation used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach hit stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD16a, YD16a, LD16a, AD16a) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215(a2), in the child table WD16a for the reel operation used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the reel operation part in the epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16a for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, the grandchild table W18 is specified for 10,000 msec from time ts1 to ts3. The grandchild table W18 corresponds to the grandchild table W18 for the frame lamp in the winning confirmation brightness data table shown in FIG. 256, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, and after the winning/losing branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), causes the frame lamp to flash in seven colors in response to the performance of a falling role as shown in FIG. 133 (s1) to (s3).

As shown in FIG. 215 (b1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD16b, YD16b, LD16b, AD16b) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215(b2), in the child table WD16b for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16b for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, from time ts3-2 to ts3-8, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white, which corresponds to the rising of the reel as shown in Figure 173 (s3-2) to Figure 174 (s3-8), in response to the performance in which the reel rises and a display appears that looks like a Bakuchu has been caught.

From time ts4 to ts7, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in response to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figure 134 (s4) to Figure 135 (s7).

As shown in FIG. 215 (c1), the parent table for displaying the common symbols used in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach stores information specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215 (c2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach, the time for displaying symbols in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach for the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified between time ts8 and time ts9, which is 5000 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color, which corresponds to the display of a winning pattern, as shown in FIG. 135 (s8) and (s9).

At time ts10, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the effect of the winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 136 (s10). At time ts10, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD16 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, grandchild table W1 is specified for times ts4 to ts7, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of catching a Bakuchu, and further, grandchild table W1 is specified for time ts10, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of displaying a winning symbol in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used when announcing a win and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbol common, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, in child table WD16 of the epilogue part of the SP final reach hit, in an effect where a reel falls, the frame lamp is controlled so that rainbow chromatic colors and achromatic colors (RGB data of "333") alternate. This allows for an effect where achromatic colors are occasionally inserted between rainbow chromatic colors to emphasize the big hit and congratulate the player. After that, in an effect where an ally character catches a Bakuchu, a smooth rainbow light without achromatic colors is used to congratulate the player in a calm manner on the big hit. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be viewed favorably by the player.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach miss epilogue part]
FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the missed epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a1), the parent table for the miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD17, YD17, LD17, AD17) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a2), in the child table WD17 for the miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD17 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, during the 200 msec period of time tu1, grandchild table W13 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), lights up the frame lamp in white to correspond to the performance of the Bakuchu escaping as shown in FIG. 137 (u1).

The red flashing at the win/lose branch (tr54) is based on the grandchild table W10 shown in FIG. 250 (described later), whose RGB data includes "D00", whereas the white lighting at tu1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252 (described later), whose RGB data is "888" or "444". This allows the frame lamp to light up in white when a loss occurs, dimmer than the red flashing at the win/lose branch (tr54), making it possible to conveniently notify the player that they have lost.

During the 3900 msec period of time tr2, the grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, and lights up the frame lamp in a darker white color than tu1, corresponding to the performance shown in FIG. 137 (u2) in which six friendly characters are disappointed at having lost.

The rainbow lighting during a win (ts4-ts7) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, whereas the darker white lighting during a loss (tu1) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued than during a win, and as a result, a win or loss can be easily communicated to the player by the contrasting lamp states.

In addition, in child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, the frame lamps are lit in a lighting mode at the time of a miss based on the grandchild table W14, similar to child table WD17 of the SP final reach. However, while the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, it controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 3900 msec in the SP final reach. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of a miss is common between different reaches, the time for lamp control by referring to the grandchild table can be made different. This allows the child table used for each of the different reaches to use a common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to when a win occurs for each of the different reaches, and by changing the reference time, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control while varying the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to a loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in an appropriate manner for each of the different reaches.

At time tu3, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 137 (u3).

At time tu4, the grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a pattern with the background lit yellow, corresponding to a performance in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 138 (u4). Also, at time tu4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in each part of the rescue]
Fig. 217 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a part per relief. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp is included in the brightness data table for SP reach described with reference to Fig. 52. As shown in Fig. 217, in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp, the time of the part per relief is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, at 1980 msec of time tv1, grandchild table W16 is specified. Grandchild table W16 corresponds to grandchild table W16 for the frame lamp in the one brightness data table per rescue shown in FIG. 254 described later. As shown in FIG. 254, in grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "B00" is specified for each lamp in the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W16, thereby lighting up the frame lamps in red in accordance with the rescue performance shown in FIG. 139 (v1).

In this way, the frame lamp lights up even brighter by switching from the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W21 last specified on each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used when a loss occurs to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W16 first specified on the child table WD18 used when a rescue hit occurs. As a result, when a rescue hit occurs, the frame lamp lights up brighter than it did after a loss notification, so the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 makes it easier for the player to understand the loss notification and the subsequent rescue hit notification.

In this embodiment, the frame lamp lights up once in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background, after the miss notification, and furthermore, when the rescue hits, the frame lamp lights up even brighter in red, which corresponds to the rescue performance. However, this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, at the end of each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of the miss, the grandchild table W15 may be specified, and "111" may be specified as the final brightness data (RGB data). As a result, at the end of the miss, the frame lamp goes out in a white system. Furthermore, "AAA" may be specified as the first brightness data (RGB data) in the grandchild table W16 specified first of the child table WD18 used at the time of the rescue hit. As a result, at the beginning of the rescue hit after the miss notification, the frame lamp lights up brightly in a white system. In this way, when a rescue hit occurs, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (white) as it did after the loss notification, but brighter than it did after the loss notification, so the loss notification and the subsequent rescue hit notification can be more easily seen by the player depending on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9.

At 700 msec of time tv2, grandchild table W17 is specified. Grandchild table W17 corresponds to grandchild table W17 for the frame lamp in the 2 brightness data table per rescue shown in FIG. 255, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 255, in grandchild table W17, white-color data such as "AAA" or "DDD" is specified for each lamp at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W17, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in white in accordance with the whiteout performance shown in FIG. 139 (v2).

During the 5000 msec period between time tv3 and time tv4, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash in white in accordance with the pattern display performance shown in Figures 140 (v3) and (v4).

At time tv5, which is the end of the rescue hit part, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed hit, in accordance with the pattern display performance shown in FIG. 140 (v5). At time tv5, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp continues to be lit in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD18 reaches 0.

[Brightness data table used in the re-draw part]
Fig. 218 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the re-draw part. As shown in Fig. 218, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the re-draw part stores information specifying 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WD19, YD19, LD19, AD19) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

(Brightness data table used before operation promotion)
Fig. 219 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a re-draw part (before operation promotion). As shown in Fig. 219, a child table used before the pattern starts moving and a child table used after the pattern starts moving are prepared as a child table WD19 of a frame lamp. In each child table in the re-draw part, the time of the re-draw part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

Figure 219 (a) shows a child table used just before the pattern starts to move. For example, a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is specified from time tA6 to tA8. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and as shown in Figures 142 (A6) to 143 (A8), once the re-draw performance has started, but before the pattern starts to move due to the re-draw performance, turns off the frame lamp.

In this way, after the frame lamp goes out, it lights up in a lighting mode that corresponds to the effect of the re-draw performance causing the patterns to start moving, so the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes it easy for the player to understand that the patterns will start moving due to the re-draw performance.

Figure 219 (b) shows the child table used after the pattern starts to move. At times tA9 and tA10, grandchild table W19 is specified. Grandchild table W19 corresponds to grandchild table W19 for the frame lamp in the re-draw performance brightness data table shown in Figure 257 described later. As shown in Figure 257, in grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are specified alternately at 60 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W19, and causes the frame lamp to flash in red in response to a performance in which the "2" pattern shrinks as shown in Figures 143 (A9) and 144 (A10).

At times tA11 to tA46, grandchild table W20 is specified. Grandchild table W20 corresponds to grandchild table W20 for the frame lamp in the re-draw performance brightness data table shown in FIG. 258, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 258, in grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals, which is shorter than the grandchild table W20, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W20, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamps to flash rapidly in red in response to a performance in which the patterns change rapidly while switching as shown in FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. 156 (A46).

(Brightness data table used when the design is promoted after the operation is promoted)
Fig. 220 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a re-draw part (pattern promotion after operation promotion). The child table WD20 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 220 is a continuation of the child table WD19 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 219. As shown in Fig. 220, in the child table WD20 of the frame lamp, the time of the re-draw part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the 5000 msec period from time tB1 to tB4, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white in response to a pattern presentation in which the "3" symbol is enlarged after an operation prompt is executed in the re-selection part, as shown in FIG. 157 (B1) to FIG. 158 (B4).

From time tB5 to tB9, grandchild table W18 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W18, and causes the frame lamp to flash in rainbow colors in response to a performance in which the "3" symbol, as shown in FIG. 157 (B5) to (B9), is reduced and displayed at normal size, and the "3" symbol flickers before being finalized.

The flashing of rainbow colors caused by lamp control from time tB5 to tB9 is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting caused by lamp control based on the grandchild table W1. For example, the flashing is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting caused by lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 from time tB5 to tB9. Lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes from time tB5 to tB9, and the frame lamp continues to flash in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD20 reaches 0.

In this way, in child table WD20 in the re-draw part, the frame lamp lights up in rainbow colors as the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-draw, just like child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 in the winning epilogue part, but the flashing of rainbow colors from time tB5 to tB9 when the symbol "2" is promoted to a "3" through the re-draw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the symbol "2" temporarily stops in the winning epilogue part. This allows the player to be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol through the re-draw by the lighting of the frame lamp.

In addition, when the symbols start to move and sway due to the re-draw performance after the lights are turned off, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting pattern different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-draw performance (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W19). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting pattern of the frame lamp for the winning symbol that was provisionally stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed.

In addition, since the frame lamp is designed to flash in rainbow colors when the effect of the number "3" being displayed swaying and then finalized as shown in Figures 159 (B7) to (B9) begins, it is easy for the designer to decide when to start flashing the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the flashing of rainbow colors when the "3" symbol is displayed swaying as shown in FIG. 159 (B7) continues during the symbol determination period as shown in FIG. 159 (B8) and (B9). In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the system is designed so that lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is carried out as is without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no unnecessary increase in data capacity.

(Brightness data table used when the pattern does not increase after the operation is promoted)
Fig. 221 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (after operation promotion). The child table WD21 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 221 is a continuation of the child table WD19 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 219. As shown in Fig. 221, in the child table WD21 of the frame lamp, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the 5000 msec period from time tC1 to tC4, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white in response to a pattern presentation in which the "2" symbol is enlarged after an operation prompt is executed in the re-selection part, as shown in FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C4).

From time tC5 to tC9, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors to correspond to the performance in which the "2" pattern is displayed swaying and then confirmed as shown in Figures 162 (C5) to 163 (C9). From time tC5 to tC9, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp continues to be lit in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD21 reaches 0.

In this way, in child table WD21 of the re-draw part, grandchild table W1 is used in common with child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for lamp control when the pattern is finally determined after the re-draw. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control while allowing the player to see a unified presentation even in different parts (timings). As a result, the presentation in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part can be better shown to the player while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, then goes out, and the symbol starts to move due to the re-draw performance. When the symbol is displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting pattern different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-draw performance (for example, the RGB data in grandchild tables W19 and W20). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting pattern of the frame lamp for the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed.

In addition, the rainbow lighting from time tB5 to tB9 when the "2" symbol is upgraded to a "3" symbol through a redraw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting from time tC5 to tC9 when the "2" symbol is maintained without being upgraded through a redraw. As a result, if the winning symbol is upgraded through a redraw, the player can be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol through the redraw by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and if the winning symbol is not upgraded through a redraw, the data capacity can be reduced by using the grandchild table W1 used in the winning epilogue part and the grandchild table W1 in common.

In addition, since the frame lamp is designed to light up in rainbow colors when the effect of the "2" becoming normal size and finalizing after the "2" pattern has finished being displayed as shown in Figures 163 (C7) to (C9) begins, it is easy for the designer to decide when to start lighting up the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the rainbow lighting that occurs when the "3" symbol is displayed swaying as shown in FIG. 163 (C7) continues even during the symbol determination period as shown in FIG. 163 (C8) and (C9). In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the system is designed so that lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is carried out as is without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no unnecessary increase in data capacity.

[Luminance data table used in the fanfare part]
Fig. 222 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for the fanfare part. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD22 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Fig. 52. As shown in Fig. 222, in the frame lamp child table WD22, the time of the fanfare part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period are specified.

For example, at times tD1 and tE1, a grandchild table is specified for turning off the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and turns off the frame lamp once before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1).

At times tD2 and tE2, a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare mode. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare mode in accordance with the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2). At times tD2 and tE2, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp maintains its fanfare mode illumination based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD22 reaches 0.

[Smooth Rainbow Luminance Data Table]
Fig. 223 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in Fig. 223, the parent table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table stores information specifying 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WS1, YS1, LS1, AS1) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 224 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in Figure 224, in the child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table, for each game effect lamp 9, a grandchild table (W1, Y1, L1, A1) to be referenced in a specific time period is specified.

Figure 225 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a smooth rainbow brightness data table. As shown in Figure 225, in the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 smoothly lights up the frame lamps in the rainbow colors corresponding to the confirmed win by controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W1.

Figure 226 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the reel lamp and a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table. As shown in Figure 226, in the grandchild table Y1 for the reel lamp, data "FFFF" is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the data "RRRR" output to the reel lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the reel lamp 9A in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table Y1. In the grandchild table L1 for the left panel lamp, data "FFFFF" is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the data "WWWWW" output to the left panel lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the left panel lamp 9B in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table L1.

Figure 227 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table. As shown in Figure 227, in the grandchild table A1 for the attacca lamp, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table A1, causing the attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H to light up smoothly in the rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win.

[Data table of red flashing brightness during reel operation]
Fig. 228 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a role object operation red flashing brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 228, in the grandchild table W2 for a frame lamp, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash in red by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W2.

[Yellow Haze Luminance Data Table]
Fig. 229 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at 180 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color.

[White flash brightness data table]
Fig. 230 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a white blinking (white flash) brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, with the first 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), and the last 30 msec being "000" (off). That is, the frame lamp alternates between "off" and "on" over one period of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), causing the frame lamp to blink in white (white flash) multiple times. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to blink in white.

[Common red cut-in luminance data table]
Fig. 231 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in Fig. 231, the parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table stores information specifying 3970 msec as the time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WS5, YS5, LS5, AS5) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 232 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in Figure 232, in the child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table, grandchild tables (W5 (W5a to W5e), Y5 (Y5a to Y5e), L5 (L5a to L5e), A5 (A5a to A5e)) that are referenced in a specific time period are specified for each game effect lamp 9.

233 to 235 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 233 to 235, in the grandchild tables W5a, W5b, and W5c, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data at 30 msec intervals is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In the grandchild table W5d, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In the grandchild table W5e, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables W5 (W5a to W5e).

Figure 236 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 236, in the grandchild tables Y5a, Y5b, and Y5c for the reel lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y5d, data showing various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y5e, data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild tables Y5 (Y5a to Y5e) to light or blink the reel lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

Figure 237 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left board lamp in the common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 237, in the grandchild tables L5a, L5b, and L5c for the left board lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L5d, data showing various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L5e, data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild tables L5 (L5a to L5e) to light or flash the left board lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

238 and 239 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 238 and Fig. 239, in the grandchild tables A5a, A5b, and A5c for the attacca lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals are specified as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In particular, data showing various brightnesses are specified for only the R data as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In the grandchild table A5d, data showing various brightnesses are specified at 20 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses for only the R data. In the grandchild table A5e, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses for only the R data. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild tables A5 (A5a to A5e) to light or flash the attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

[Common green cut-in luminance data table]
Fig. 240 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 240, the parent table in the common green cut-in brightness data table stores information specifying 3970 msec as the time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WS6, YS6, LS6, AS6) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 241 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 241, in the child table in the common green cut-in brightness data table, grandchild tables (W6 (W6a to W6e), Y6 (Y6a to Y6e), L6 (L6a to L6e), A6 (A6a to A6e)) that are referenced in a specific time period are specified for each game effect lamp 9.

242 to 244 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 242 to 244, in the grandchild tables W6a, W6b, and W6c, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data at 30 msec intervals is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In the grandchild table W6d, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In the grandchild table W6e, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in green by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables W6 (W6a to W6e).

Figure 245 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 245, in the grandchild tables Y6a, Y6b, and Y6c for the reel lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y6d, data showing various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y6e, data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild tables Y6 (Y6a to Y6e) to light or blink the reel lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in.

Figure 246 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left board lamp in the common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 246, in the grandchild tables L6a, L6b, and L6c for the left board lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L6d, data showing various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L6e, data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild tables L6 (L6a to L6e) to light or flash the left board lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common 6 cut-in.

247 and 248 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 247 and Fig. 248, in the grandchild tables A6a, A6b, and A6c for the attacca lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals are specified as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In particular, data showing various brightnesses are specified only for the G data as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In the grandchild table A6d, data showing various brightnesses are specified at 20 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses for only the G data. In the grandchild table A6e, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses for only the G data. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild tables A6 (A6a to A6e) to light or flash the attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in.

[Data table of illumination brightness when no operation prompt is given]
Fig. 249 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a non-operation-prompting luminance data table. As shown in Fig. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W7.

In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W8, causing the frame lamps to light up in white.

[Data table of illumination brightness when operation is promoted]
Fig. 250 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table and the operation promotion brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 250, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W9.

In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W10, causing the frame lamps to flash in red.

[Shutter brightness data table]
Fig. 251 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a shutter brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 251, in the grandchild table W11, the brightness data is specified to be gradually decreased from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11 to light up the frame lamp in red while gradually decreasing the brightness.

In the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W12, causing the frame lamps to light up in red.

[Failed brightness data table]
252 and 253 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a miss brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in white by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W13.

In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W14, lighting the frame lamps in a white color that is darker than td1.

As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp for the first 10 msec, "111" is specified for the next 550 msec, and "111" is specified for the final 600,000 msec (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp by controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W15.

[Brightness data table per relief]
254 and 255 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table per rescue. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "B00" is specified for each lamp in the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W17.

As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, white-color data such as "AAA" or "DDD" is specified for each lamp at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in white by controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W18.

[Hit confirmation brightness data table]
Fig. 256 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a winning determination brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 256, in the grandchild table W18, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W18 to make the frame lamp flash in seven colors.

[Redraw performance brightness data table]
257 and 258 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a re-lottery performance brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 60 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W19.

As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash in red. In this way, the grandchild table W20 is designed to switch the brightness data more quickly than the grandchild table W19 while causing the frame lamp to flash in red.

[Background luminance data table]
Fig. 259 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 259, in the child table in the background brightness data table, for each game effect lamp 9, a grandchild table (W21 (W21a, W21b), Y21 (Y21a, Y21b), L21 (L21a, L21b), A21 (A21a, A21b)) to be referred to in a predetermined time period is specified.

Figure 260 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background brightness data table. As shown in Figure 260, in the grandchild table W21a, "550" or "880" is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern) by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21a.

In the grandchild table W21b, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21b, causing the frame lamps to light up in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern).

<About brightness data reference>
The brightness data table has been explained above, but below, the brightness data table used by the lamp control after the winning epilogue part will be explained while being organized according to the performance content.

Figures 268 to 271 are diagrams for explaining the reference of the brightness data table. As shown in Figure 268, during times ts1 to ts3 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the operation of the reel during the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W18. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, and after the winning/losing branch shown in Figure 132 (r54), the frame lamp flashes in seven colors in response to the performance of the reel falling as shown in Figures 133 (s1) to (s3).

During the time ts3-2 to ts3-8 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white corresponding to the rising of the reel, in response to the performance in which the reel rises and a display appears that looks like a Bakuchu has been caught, as shown in Figure 173 (s3-2) to Figure 174 (s3-8).

During the time ts4 to ts7 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 1. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, corresponding to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figure 134 (s4) to Figure 135 (s7).

As shown in FIG. 269, during times tA1 to tA4 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for displaying the symbols during the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color corresponding to the display of symbols in response to the performance of displaying winning symbols as shown in FIG. 141 (A1) to FIG. 142 (A4).

At time tA5 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for displaying the symbols during the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, and the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the performance in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 141 (A5).

As shown in FIG. 270, during times tA6 to tA8 in the re-draw part, the child table before the pattern starts to move during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table for turning off the lamp is performed. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and turns off the frame lamp once after the re-draw performance starts and before the pattern starts to move due to the re-draw performance, as shown in FIG. 142 (A6) to 143 (A8).

At times tA9 and tA10 of the re-draw part, the child table after the start of the movement of the pattern during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W19. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, and causes the frame lamp to flash in red in response to the performance in which the "2" pattern shrinks as shown in Figures 143 (A9) and 144 (A10).

During the re-draw part, times tA11 to tA46, the child table from the beginning of the movement of the pattern during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20, and causes the frame lamp to flash rapidly in red in response to the performance in which the patterns change and fluctuate rapidly as shown in Figures 144 (A11) to 156 (A46).

As shown in FIG. 271, during times tC1 to tC4 of the re-draw part, the child table for displaying the symbols during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white in response to the performance of displaying symbols such as an enlarged display of the symbol "2" after the operation prompt is executed in the re-draw part, as shown in FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C4).

During the re-draw part, times tC5 to tC9, the child table for displaying the symbols during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 1. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamp to light up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to the performance in which the symbol "2" is displayed swaying and then confirmed, as shown in Figures 162 (C5) to 163 (C9).

At time tE1 of the fanfare part, the child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is specified. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and turns off the frame lamp once before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1).

At time tE2 of the fanfare part, a child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare mode. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and lights up the frame lamp in a fanfare mode lighting mode in response to the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2).

In this way, a predetermined child table is set at each timing of each performance part, and the performance control CPU 120 refers to the child table set at each timing of each performance part, and performs lamp control corresponding to the performance using the brightness data (for example, RGB data) contained in the grandchild table (brightness data table) specified by the child table.

Note that in Figures 268 to 271, child tables are shown from the winning epilogue through the re-draw part to the fanfare part when the pattern does not advance, but for other routes, such as child tables from the winning epilogue through the re-draw part to the fanfare part when the pattern advances, predetermined child tables are set at each timing of each performance part, as shown in Figures 192 to 260.

<Description of Characteristic Parts in Lamp Control of Pachinko Game Machine 1>
Next, the characteristics and modifications of the lamp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described in detail.

(Start 9)
As shown in Fig. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp goes off when the shutter is fully open, so the timing when the shutter is fully open can be easily communicated to the player by the lighting state of the frame lamp. In addition, the prodding part of the SP first half reach A and the prodding part of the SP first half reach B executed after the start part start with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp off, and the frame lamp starts to light up or blink based on the brightness data table corresponding to each SP first half reach. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp goes off, the frame lamp starts to light up according to the progress of the performance in the SP first half reach, so that the start of the SP first half reach can be easily communicated to the player.

(Start 11, Start 14)
193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp lights/blinks while changing the color and brightness, such as background yellow lighting, red flashing, white flashing, and red lighting, during the time ta1-ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, whereas the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights in red while maintaining a reduced brightness during the time ta13-ta18 after the shutter is completely closed. In this way, the lighting state of the frame lamp before the shutter is closed can liven up the performance in the start part, and by maintaining the lighting state of the frame lamp when the shutter is closed, the player can be drawn to the content of the performance when the shutter is opened, and as a result, the performance in the subsequent teasing part can be better shown to the player.

(Incitement 7, Incitement 9)
As shown in Fig. 64(b8), (b9), Fig. 74(e7), Fig. 94(i32), Fig. 95(i34), Fig. 104(n10), Fig. 123(r25), (r27), Fig. 124(r29), Fig. 125(r31), (r33), and Fig. 126(r35), even when a character has a line but no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in a color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to suitably express that the character is speaking by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 even in a scene without subtitles, and to suitably show the performance in the provocative part to the player.

(Teasing 10)
When a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character, and when the character speaks a line, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to the character. For example, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, face each other as shown in FIG. 63 (b4), the frame left lamp is lit in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, and the frame right lamp is lit in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). At time tb6, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, in response to a performance in which Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). This allows, in a scene in which multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, to conveniently indicate which character is speaking by lighting/flashing the frame lamp, allowing the performance in the provocative part to be conveniently shown to the player.

(Incitement 17)
The CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at different timings in one child table used in the hype part, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at different timings, while changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 in the lamp control between different timings, thereby changing the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. This allows the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach to be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of different timings in one child table WD9. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Incitement 18)
The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table used in the hype part, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for referencing the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to make the frame lamp blink in white two or three times. This allows the number of white blinks to be different while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, and by changing the reference time. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing the data capacity.

(Incitement 19)
In each of the child table WD9 used in the stimulating part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the stimulating part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the stimulating part of the SP final reach, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be made different while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in a plurality of reach performances. Similarly, in the child table WD2 used in the stimulating part of the SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the stimulating part of the SP first half reach B, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be made different while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control.

(Teasing 20)
In each of the child table WD2 used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD5 used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD9 used in the provocative part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the provocative part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the provocative part of the SP final reach, a common grandchild table W4 is used without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the different timings, but by changing the reference time, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced while the number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, a variety of effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps can be realized while reducing the data capacity.

(Provocative cut-in 1)
The brightness data (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) of the lamp control in the cut-in performance and the button display for the cut-in performance is designed to use the same frame lamp as the lamp control in the provocative part of the SP final reach. This prevents unnecessary lighting/flashing of lamps from being mixed in and spoiling the aesthetic, and provides a suitable performance in the provocative part.

(True or False 13)
In the SP reach performance where no operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/fail branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, so that the player can see the performance as if it has stopped, and the win/fail branch (decision timing) can be easily conveyed to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach performance where operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/fail branch, a sound corresponding to operation prompt or a sound (BGM) corresponding to a reach is output, and further, the grandchild table is switched multiple times to control the frame lamp so as to be in a mode corresponding to operation prompt, so that the timing of the decision of the win/fail branch can be suitably presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision of the win/fail branch can be suitably presented by different sound control and lamp control between the case where operation prompt is not given at the win/fail branch and the case where operation prompt is given.

(15 correct answers)
In the child table WD9 in the SP latter half reach A, which is a reach without operation prompting, the frame lamp flashes in white based on the grandchild table W7, and then lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the win/loss branch in the provocation part of the SP latter half reach A where no operation prompting is performed, the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed to use "FDC" (white lighting), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, so that the win/loss branch (decision timing) can be clearly communicated to the player without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much.

(17 correct or incorrect)
In child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in Figures 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), sounds corresponding to operation promotion and sounds (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and the frame lamp changes in succession from flashing white to lighting red to flashing red, etc., thereby enhancing the presentation of the operation promotion for the player at the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

(20% correct)
In the child table WD4 of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of the SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of the SP second half reach B, the frame lamps are lit in a lighting mode at the time of a miss based on the grandchild table W14, similar to the child table WD17 of the SP final reach. However, the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, whereas in the SP final reach, the frame lamps are controlled based on the grandchild table W14 for 3900 msec. In this way, the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of a miss is common between different reaches, but the time for lamp control by referring to the grandchild table can be made different. In this way, in the child table used for each of the different multiple reaches, instead of preparing a grandchild table dedicated to when a win occurs for each of the different multiple reaches, the common grandchild table W4 is used while changing its reference time, thereby reducing the amount of data used for lamp control and making it possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in the lighting mode corresponding to a loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in a suitable manner for each of the multiple reaches.

(True or False 21)
The frame lamp is lit in the same color (yellow) and brighter by switching from the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W26 last specified in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used when losing to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W16 first specified in the child table WD18 used when winning a rescue. As a result, when a rescue is won, the frame lamp is lit in the same color (yellow) as after the loss notification and brighter than after the loss notification, so that the loss notification and the subsequent rescue hit notification can be more easily seen by the player depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.

(Epilogue 9)
When the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so as to gradually turn off the reel lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the rising action of the reel in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table designated by the child table. In this way, the lighting state of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the rising of the reel, while the lighting state of the frame lamp makes the player pay attention to the screen indicating the development to the latter half of the SP Reach A.

(Epilogue 26)
In the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table used when announcing a winning is shared with the grandchild table used when displaying the winning pattern, so that it is not necessary to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of different timings, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors while enhancing each performance with a unified performance. As a result, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part look better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Epilogue 27)
In the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-drawing part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-drawing. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, and while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control, it is possible to present to the player a performance with a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). As a result, it is possible to present to the player the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part better while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-draw performance 2)
As shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow colors in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp goes out once before the re-draw performance is executed, and then lights up in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-draw performance, so that the player can be easily informed that the re-draw performance is about to begin by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

(Re-draw performance 7, Re-draw performance 14, Re-draw performance 16)
In the winning epilogue part, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, and then goes off, and when the re-lottery performance is executed and the symbols are displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting mode of the frame lamp for the winning symbol temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow colors when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed swaying is continued even during the period when the symbols are confirmed. In this way, the system is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is during the symbol confirmation period, which is performed in a short period, without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, and therefore does not increase the data capacity excessively.

(Re-draw performance 19)
In the child table WD21 of the re-drawing part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-drawing. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting rainbow colors in the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, and while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control, it is possible to present to the player a performance with a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). As a result, it is possible to present to the player the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part better while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-draw performance 20)
In the child table WD20 in the re-draw part, the frame lamp is lit in the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 in the winning epilogue part as the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-draw, but the rainbow lighting during the time tB7 to tB9 when the symbol "2" is upgraded to "3" by the re-draw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the symbol "2" temporarily stops in the winning epilogue part. This allows the player to be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol by the re-draw by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

<Details on Lamp Control>
Next, with regard to the above-mentioned lamp control, particular features worthy of mention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263.

[Comparison of lamp control when winning and losing]
261 to 263 are diagrams for explaining a comparison of the lamps when you win and when you lose.

First, referring to FIG. 261, the lamp control at the time of a miss will be described. As shown in FIG. 261, at the end of the stimulating part in each of the SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W8 to light the frame lamp in white in response to the performance of the win/lose branch (decisive timing). In addition, at the end of the stimulating part in the SP final reach, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W10 to flash the frame lamp in red in response to the performance of the win/lose branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the losing epilogue part that follows the teasing parts in each of the SP first half reach A and B, SP second half reach A and B, and SP final reach, lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W13. In the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in white to correspond to a performance in which an ally character is defeated in the reach performance after the win/lose branch.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W13, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W14. In grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W14, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in a dimmer white color than the white color based on grandchild table W13, corresponding to the performance of an ally character feeling disappointed.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W14, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W15. In grandchild table W15, "444" is specified for the first 10 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "111" is specified for the next 550 msec, and "111" is specified for the final 600,000 msec (10 minutes). By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W15, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark.

After lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15, as explained with reference to FIG. 190, lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching), and then lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W26 that was also used in the start part before the reach. In the grandchild table W26, data corresponding to a yellow pattern corresponding to the normal background is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W26, and lights up the frame lamps in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern) corresponding to the normal background, just like in the start part before the reach.

Next, referring to FIG. 262, we will explain the lamp control at the time of a hit when transitioning to the hit epilogue part via the teasing part in each of the first half SP reach A, B and second half SP reach A, B.

As shown in FIG. 262, at the end of the teasing part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W8, and lights up the frame lamp in white in response to the performance of the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the epilogue part that comes after passing through the teasing parts in each of the SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W19. In the grandchild table W19, "FFF" is specified for the first 40 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, causing the frame lamp to flash in white to correspond to a performance in which the ally character wins.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W19, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W1. In grandchild table W1, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamps to light up smoothly in the rainbow colors corresponding to confirmed wins.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W1, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W21. In grandchild table W21, "AAA" is assigned to each lamp in turn at 20 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and finally "000" is assigned to each lamp at 600,000 msec (10 minutes). By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W21, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, in response to a performance in which a winning pattern is displayed.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W21, lamp control is performed again based on grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and causes the frame lamps to light up smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to a performance in which the winning symbol is ultimately displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, referring to Figure 263, we will explain the lamp control when a hit occurs when transitioning to the winning epilogue part via the teasing part in the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 263, at the end of the teasing part in the SP final reach, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10, and causes the frame lamp to flash red in response to the performance of the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part after passing through the teasing part in the SP final reach, lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W20. In the grandchild table W20, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, with such RGB data being specified repeatedly. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W20, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash in seven colors in response to a performance in which a role object falls.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W20, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamps to light up smoothly in rainbow colors that correspond to a confirmed win.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W1, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W21. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, and lights up the frame lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, in response to the performance of displaying a winning pattern.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W21, lamp control is performed again based on grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and causes the frame lamps to light up smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to a performance in which the winning symbol is ultimately displayed in the center of the screen.

The following describes the characteristic features of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 261 to 263.

(19)
As shown in FIG. 261, when the game moves to the miss epilogue part via the provocative part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the provocative part is "FDC", whereas the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the miss epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, when the game loses in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the frame lamp can be lit in white more dimly while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the win/lose branch, so that the player can be suitably notified that the game has lost. Also, when the game moves to the miss epilogue part via the provocative part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the provocative part includes "D00", whereas the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the miss epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, when the SP final reach is a miss, the frame lamp can be lit in white, which is dimmer than the red flashing that occurs during the win/loss branch, so that the player can be conveniently notified that he or she has missed.

(Role action 1)
As shown in Fig. 262 and Fig. 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data is switched at 30 msec intervals. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 261, in the losing case, the frame lamp is lit in a dim white color based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than the winning case. As a result, in the winning case, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than the losing case, so that the winning case can be easily conveyed to the player by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, in the winning case, the lighting of the frame lamp can be emphasized more than in the losing case, while in the losing case, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made calmer than in the winning case, and as a result, the winning case and the losing case can be easily conveyed to the player by the contrasting lamp modes.

(Role Action 2)
As shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, in the performance where the role object falls, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the frame lamp is turned on so that the rainbow chromatic color and the achromatic color (RGB data of "333") are alternately switched. In this way, by occasionally inserting the achromatic color between the rainbow chromatic color, it is possible to execute a performance that emphasizes the big win and congratulates the player. After that, in the performance where the ally character wins, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp is turned on in a smooth rainbow color without an achromatic color, so that it is possible to execute a performance that congratulates the player in a calm manner on the big win. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be preferably shown to the player.

(Regarding the swinging pattern of the design)
Here, the pattern swinging mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a diagram for explaining the pattern swinging mode. In the pattern swinging period in the above-mentioned instigation part and re-lottery part, the decorative pattern moves as in the first mode to the third mode shown in FIG. 264(a) or the first mode to the third mode shown in FIG. 264(b). Specifically, the first mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located at the center of the screen. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located above the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located below the first mode.

The first mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located at the center of the screen when viewed from the front. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated right around the vertical axis, with the center of the decorative pattern facing more left than in the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated left around the vertical axis, with the center of the decorative pattern facing more right than in the first mode.

(Variation of re-selection effect)
FIG. 265 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-draw performance. FIG. 265(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the re-draw performance by the 7 symbol. Also, FIG. 265(B) is a timing chart of each re-draw performance. As shown in FIG. 265(A), the symbol is enlarged and displayed as shown in (D1) and (D2), and then reduced as shown in (D3) and (D4). Then, the symbol becomes normal size as shown in (D5). Then, as shown in (D6), the background is switched to the background for the re-draw performance, and the re-draw performance starts. Then, as shown in (D7), the symbol is swayed up and down during the shaking period. Then, the "7" symbol is reduced and displayed from (D8) to (D9).

After that, as shown in (D10), a button image and time gauge are faintly displayed below the "7" symbol. After that, as shown in (D11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "7" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases over time. The time gauge is an indication that shows the valid period for button operation. If the player operates the push button 31B from the (D12) state, the "7" will rapidly change, and a faint and clear display will be repeated, as shown in (D13) to (D20). Similar rapid changes are repeated after (D20).

As shown in FIG. 265(B) and the timing chart for each re-lottery performance, the pattern forwarding period when a re-lottery performance in which the patterns change rapidly by button operation is executed is the same for all re-lottery performances. Here, there are a first re-lottery performance in which an even number symbol rises to an odd number symbol, a second re-lottery performance in which an even number symbol does not change to an even number symbol, and a third re-lottery performance in which a 7 symbol does not change to a 7 symbol. For example, in the first re-lottery performance, if the button is operated immediately after the timing at which the pattern forwarding performance can be performed and the pattern forwarding performance is started, there is a period (t1) in which the decorative symbols shake after the pattern forwarding period ends, and then the symbol is finalized.

In addition, in the second re-draw performance, if the button is operated t2 after the button can be operated and the symbol forwarding performance is started, there is a decorative symbol shaking period (t1-t2) after the symbol forwarding period ends, and then the symbol is finalized. In the third re-draw performance, if the button is operated t1 after the button can be operated and the symbol forwarding performance is started, there is no decorative symbol shaking period after the symbol forwarding period ends, and the symbol is finalized. In this way, the symbol forwarding period is constant no matter when the button is operated, and the time from the subsequent symbol shaking period to the button operation is absorbed in the period from the button operation to the symbol determination. This relationship is the same when the button is operated in any of the first to third re-draw performances.

[About re-draw performances 26-28]
The characteristic parts of the re-drawing part will be numbered and explained.

(Variation of re-selection effect)
FIG. 266 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-draw performance. As shown in (K1) to (K3) of FIG. 266, no matter when the button is operated during the winning/losing scene, the decorative pattern moves in the same way after the whiteout. Specifically, when the button is operated immediately after the promotion display is displayed as shown in (K1), the role movement and the winning epilogue part are executed, and the pattern is displayed in the epilogue part as shown in (K4). After that, 5 seconds later during the pattern shaking period, the three patterns face forward as shown in (K5).

Also, as shown in (K2), if the button is operated one second after the prompt display is displayed when the winner is determined, the reel moves and the winning epilogue part is executed, and the pattern is displayed in the epilogue part as shown in (K4). After that, four seconds into the pattern swing period, the three symbols face leftward from the front as shown in (K6). Also, as shown in (K3), if the button is operated two seconds after the prompt display is displayed when the winner is determined, the reel moves and the winning epilogue part is executed, and the pattern is displayed in the epilogue part as shown in (K4). After that, three seconds into the pattern swing period, the three symbols face rightward from the front as shown in (K7).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the pattern will be in a forward position after the pattern shaking period, at the second operation timing, the pattern will be in a position facing left after the pattern shaking period, and at the third operation timing, the pattern will be in a position facing right after the pattern shaking period. However, even if the orientation of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing during the pattern shaking period, a common effect is then executed, as shown in (K8) to (K17), in which the pattern is rotated and reduced after whiteout. Then, after (K17), a pattern advance effect is executed. Note that although FIG. 266 has been explained using odd-numbered patterns, a similar effect is also executed with even-numbered patterns.

(Re-draw performance 26)
As shown in FIG. 266, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, a time for the symbols to shake for absorbing the scale may be provided during the time until the predetermined timing when the re-lottery performance is executed (the symbol shaking period from (K4)). Then, when the predetermined timing is reached and the re-lottery performance is executed, a common performance accompanied by a whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbols are once displayed shaking, and then the common performance accompanied by a whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols at the start of the re-lottery from being unnatural, and the series of performances can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Re-draw performance 27)
The time from when the whiteout screen appears until the re-lottery effect is executed may be the same for any of a plurality of reach effects. This can reduce the data capacity of the effect data.

(Re-draw performance 28)
The movement of the pattern after the whiteout screen may be an extension of the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen. For example, if the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen is a movement of swinging around an axis around the vertical direction of the pattern to the front and back sides on the spot, the movement after the whiteout screen may be a movement of rotating clockwise around an axis around the vertical direction of the pattern while expanding. According to this, by displaying a whiteout between the movement of the pattern on the extension of the same axis, it is possible to prevent the pattern movement from feeling unnatural, and to make the series of performances look good.

(Re-draw performance 29)
Among the multiple SP reaches, there are some that do not notify the user of a button operation or other operation promotion at the branch when determining whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state. In such SP reaches, no time shift occurs due to the operation. However, even in such SP reaches, a re-draw performance similar to that of an SP reach in which a time shift occurs can be executed. In this way, a common performance can be used regardless of the time shift, so that no discomfort is felt even when there is only one re-draw performance. In addition, by limiting the re-draw performance to one, the data capacity can be reduced.

(Re-draw performance 30)
As shown in FIG. 266, the timing of the movement of the pattern after the whiteout screen is set so that it is an extension of the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen. For example, the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen is designed to be one of a series of movements in which the pattern moves from the right position (K3) to the left position (K6) via the front position (K5). In other words, when the pattern is swinging in a clockwise direction, the whiteout by the re-lottery performance is executed, and then the pattern is enlarged and rotates to the right. According to this, the series of right-rotating pattern movements from the pattern swinging period to the re-lottery performance can prevent the pattern movement from feeling strange.

[About re-draw performances 21-25]
The characteristic parts of the re-drawing part will be numbered and explained.

(Variation of re-selection effect)
FIG. 267 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-draw performance. (L1) is a diagram of the case where the button is operated at an earlier timing after the action prompt display is displayed during the pattern forwarding period. (L2) is a diagram of the case where the button is operated at a later timing than (L1) after the action prompt display is displayed. (L3) is a diagram of the case where the button is operated at a later timing than (L2) after the action prompt display is displayed. And, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, the pattern is produced in the same way regardless of the timing at which the button is operated during the pattern forwarding period in the re-draw performance. Then, the decorative pattern with the whiteout in between moves in the same way and then stops. Specifically, as shown in (L1), when the button is operated immediately after the action prompt display is displayed, the pattern is produced as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (L6), the pattern starts to shake, and after a predetermined period has passed, the three patterns are in a state of facing rightward rather than forward as shown in (L7).

Also, as shown in (L2), if the button is operated later than (L1) after the action prompt is displayed, the pattern is displayed as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (L6), the pattern starts to shake, and after a pattern shaking period shorter than that of (L1), the three patterns face to the right rather than the front as shown in (L8). Also, as shown in (L3), if the button is operated later than (L2) after the action prompt is displayed, the pattern is displayed as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (L6), the pattern starts to shake, and after a pattern shaking period shorter than that of (L2), the three patterns face to the front as shown in (L9).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing to the right after the pattern shaking period, at the second operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing to the left after the pattern shaking period, and at the third operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing forward after the pattern shaking period. However, even if the orientation of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing during the pattern shaking period, a common effect is then executed in which the pattern is rotated and reduced after a whiteout, as shown in (J1) to (J10). Then, the pattern stops after the pattern shaking period, as shown in (J11) to (J17). Note that although FIG. 267 has been explained using odd-numbered patterns, a similar effect is also executed with even-numbered patterns.

(Re-draw performance 21)
In the modified example, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, an action prompting display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during the re-lottery effect. During the period in which the action prompting display is displayed, the player operates the push button 31B to execute a common pattern display effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common pattern display effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the pattern as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, the pattern is swayed during the pattern swaying period. The pattern swaying period differs depending on the button operation timing. Thus, after the pattern swaying period, for example, at the first operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing the right, at the second operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing the left, and at the third operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing the front. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is inserted as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and an effect in which the symbols rotate, shrink, and then sway is executed. By performing the common effect regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, the symbols can be stopped cleanly, and the series of effects can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Re-draw performance 22)
When the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the operation valid period, after the notification of whether or not the player will be promoted, the display of the decorative pattern shaking is displayed (an example of no operation in FIG. 267 (L3)). When the push button 31B is operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation valid period, after the notification of whether or not the player will be promoted, the display of the decorative pattern shaking is extended by the amount of time that it was earlier than the first timing (an example of the operation in FIG. 267 (L2) during the operation valid period). When the push button 31B is operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the operation valid period, after the notification of whether or not the player will be promoted, the display of the decorative pattern shaking is extended by the amount of time that it was earlier than the second timing (an example of the operation in FIG. 267 (L1) during the operation valid period). In this way, regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, the length of the performance can be absorbed by the shaking time of the pattern. By performing a common performance after that, the pattern can be stopped cleanly, and the series of performances can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Re-draw performance 23)
As shown in Fig. 267, after executing a whiteout as a common effect, a different effect from the previous pattern mode is executed in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once. According to this, no matter what the pattern position is in the swaying of the scale absorption pattern, by executing a different mode of effect after the whiteout, it is possible to avoid a sense of incongruity in the flow of the effect until the pattern is stopped.

(Re-draw performance 24)
As shown in FIG. 267, during the symbol swing period, the symbol swings backward from (J10) to (J12), then swings forward from (J13) to (J14), changing to the initial position. After that, the symbol swings forward from (J15) to (J16), then swings backward from (J17) to (J18), changing to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the symbol determination period, the symbol is designed to always be located at the initial position facing forward as shown in (J18). This allows the symbol to be determined and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

(Re-draw performance 25)
The game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in rainbow colors at the whiteout timing of (J1) in Fig. 267. The timing of (J1) is an effect that is executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point where such a common effect is executed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, it is easy for the designer to decide the start trigger. Note that the start trigger may be the timing of (J2) when the common start display starts, rather than the timing of (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed effect.

<Main components and effects>
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are listed individually.

(F2019-116)
A gaming machine (e.g., gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A movable body (e.g., a role object, a movable body 32),
A display means (for example, an image display device 5),
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled (for example, a notification effect that notifies whether or not a jackpot is to be won),
The notification performance includes an introductory part (for example, a teasing part) until the result of the advantageous state is notified, a hit/miss notification part (for example, a hit/miss notification part in a hit epilogue part that notifies a jackpot by moving a role) in which the result of the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part (for example, a hit epilogue part) that is executed after the hit/miss notification and when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled,
In the introduction part, a line sound uttered by a character is output, and the first character for which a line subtitle is displayed in response to the line sound is an ally character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 115 (r2)).
The display means, at the timing of transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing informing part, displays an introduction display of a prompting display that prompts a specific action in relation to the performance display in the introduction part, making it difficult to see the performance display, and then displays the prompting display in a state where the performance display is visible (for example, the examples shown in Figures 131 (r49) to 132 (r54)),
In the winning/losing notification part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from a first position (e.g., a retreated position) to a second position (e.g., an advanced position) on the front side of the display means (e.g., the example shown in FIG. 133),
The display means is
When the movable body advances to the second position, an effect display for moving the movable body is performed, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, the effect display is terminated and a display corresponding to an epilogue part is performed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 173 and 174 ).
In the epilogue part, a final line subtitle is displayed in response to the final line sound uttered by the character, and then, after the display of the final line subtitle is terminated, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 134 to 136 ).
In the epilogue part, the proportion of dialogue subtitles displayed for lines spoken by the character is higher than the proportion of dialogue subtitles displayed for lines spoken by the character in the introduction part (for example, the example shown in FIG. 175).

Specifically, the character who speaks the first line in each SP reach as the provocation part is an ally character (for example, FIG. 115 (r2)). This allows the player to accurately recognize the ally character at the start of the SP reach. Also, at the timing of transition from the provocation part to the win/loss notification part, the display of the provocation part's performance is made invisible by displaying the introductory image of the trigger display encouraging the player to operate the trigger with priority over the display of the performance in the provocation part, and then the image of operating the trigger button and the performance in the provocation part become visible (for example, FIG. 131 (r48) to (r51)). This allows the introductory image to give an impact, while the image of the trigger button is changed from the introductory image to the image of the trigger button, allowing the player to confirm the performance of the provocation part, which can excite the player. Also, the beauty of the display can be prevented from being damaged in the flow of the performance in which the winning epilogue part becomes the background display until the retraction of the role is completed. In addition, in the winning epilogue part, the pattern is enlarged after the display of the final dialogue subtitle is finished, so that it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping the pattern and the misunderstanding that it is a message for displaying the pattern. In addition, the above-mentioned provocation part, which performs the provocation of winning or losing, has a performance in which the friendly character and the enemy character fight each other (for example, SP first half reach B and SP second half reach B). In the performance of such a provocation part, there is a scene in which the friendly character receives damage. In addition, the performance of such a provocation part has a faster image display switching interval than the epilogue part, and the number of image display switching is also larger. According to this, by making the provocation part a faster development than the epilogue part, it is possible to make the provocation part look good. In the winning epilogue part, which develops slowly, the subtitles are firmly attached, so it is easy to understand what the character is saying and the feeling of celebration can be emphasized. Also, in the fast-paced promotional parts, the content can be conveyed primarily through video changes, and supplemental subtitles can be displayed without interfering with the video progression. This allows the entire production to be presented in an optimal way.

(F2019-117)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a dialogue subtitle is not displayed.
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
A ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than a ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introduction part of the first notification performance;
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the rate at which subtitles are displayed for the lines of characters in the epilogue part is higher than the rate at which subtitles are displayed for characters in the SP reach, which is the teasing part. By clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying. Furthermore, in a successful epilogue part, subtitles can enhance the feeling of celebration. Furthermore, since there are more screen changes in the teasing part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time may be shorter, which prevents the auxiliary subtitle display from interfering with the performance, and the primary focus can be on conveying the performance through image changes. This allows for an optimal performance to be executed in the teasing part.

(F2019-118)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay effect is executed among a plurality of types of replay effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
Execute the first re-selection performance or the second re-selection performance using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part;
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery performance is started using the "2" symbol as is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-lottery performance starts to change from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol advance performance is executed in which symbols are replaced by rapid changes starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and when the re-lottery performance starts, the symbol advance performance is executed using the symbol that was temporarily stopped, so that it is easy for the player to understand which decorative symbol the re-lottery started from. As a result, the flow of the series of performances can be clearly seen.

(F2019-119)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of replay performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part.
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performance, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-draw performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-draw is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-draw performance is started using the "2" symbol as it is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-draw performance starts to change from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-draw performance, a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2". During the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order, from "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and then a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the "2" symbol is displayed again. In this way, the re-draw performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after multiple types of decorative symbols are changed. In this way, the final display result is not displayed immediately, and the symbol-sending performance in which all the decorative symbols are displayed can make the flow of the series of performances look good.

(F2019-120)
(5) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of replay performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part.
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performance, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a repeat display is performed in which the second symbol is repeatedly displayed after the second symbol is displayed in the first half part, and a third re-selection performance is executed in which the second symbol is displayed again in the second half part.
The first re-selection effect, the second re-selection effect, and the third re-selection effect are configured to have the same performance length,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, there are provided patterns in which an even number symbol (e.g., 2) is displayed followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2), and an even number symbol (e.g., 2) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3). In addition, there may be a pattern in which an odd number symbol (e.g., 7) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7). In a performance in which symbols are sent from odd number symbols to odd number symbols, it is sufficient that the same odd number symbols are sent in all symbol transfers. However, in either pattern, the length of the symbol transfer period in the re-draw performance can be designed to be the same. This allows for an ideal re-draw performance in either pattern without increasing data capacity.

(F2019-121)
(6) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay effect is executed among a plurality of types of replay effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first symbol is displayed with the same or substantially the same animation when the first symbol is displayed once in the epilogue part and when the first symbol is displayed again in the latter half part of the second re-draw performance;
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, the symbol display in the aforementioned FIG. 141 (A1) to FIG. 142 (A5) portions and the symbol display in the FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C5) portions are executed using approximately the same images. Specifically, the same images are used for the symbol display of the "2" symbol and effect images, and the symbol display is executed in a manner in which the background portion is different. In this way, the symbol display images can be made approximately the same, making it easy for the player to understand that the symbol has not been upgraded to a special probability symbol. Note that the image of the symbol display portion, including the background, may be made exactly the same.

(F2019-122)
(7) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay effect is executed among a plurality of types of replay effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the latter half part, from when the first pattern is displayed again until a pattern determination period, a swinging display is performed in which the first pattern is displayed as if it is swinging by changing the display mode of the first pattern to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode;
In the latter half part, from when the second pattern is displayed until the pattern determination period, a swinging display is performed in which the display mode of the second pattern is changed to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode, so that the second pattern is displayed as if it is swinging;
The first mode is a mode in which a player can easily visually recognize the symbols compared to either the second mode or the third mode,
The performance execution means includes:
In the re-selection part, a display for prompting the player to take an action can be executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-selection performance, if an action is performed at a first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes the second mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the first re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-selection performance, if the action is executed at a second timing different from the first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes the third mode when the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the first re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-selection performance, regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is performed in which the swaying display of the second pattern is difficult to see from the predetermined timing, and then the second pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when the pattern determination period begins, the second pattern is displayed stopped in the first mode while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the second pattern;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, if an action is performed at the first timing, the first symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol will be in the second mode when the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the second re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, if an action is performed at the second timing, the first symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol will be in the third mode when the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the second re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is performed in which the swaying display of the first pattern is difficult to see from the predetermined timing, and then the first pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when the pattern determination period begins, the first pattern is displayed stopped in the first mode while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first pattern;
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, an action prompt display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed while the symbols are being sent in the re-draw effect. During the period in which the action prompt display is displayed, the player operates the push button 31B to execute the common symbol release effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common symbol release effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the symbols as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, the symbols are wobbled during the symbol wobbled period. The symbol wobbled period differs depending on the timing of the button operation. Thus, after the symbol wobbled period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the right, at the second operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the left, and at the third operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is inserted as a common effect from (J1) to (J18), and the effect of the symbols rotating and shrinking and then shaking is executed. By doing this, regardless of the timing of the push button 31B operation, the common effect can be performed, so that the symbols can be stopped cleanly and the series of effects can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(F2019-126)
(8) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed;
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed;
The brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and no dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is displayed is configured so that brightness data using an emission color corresponding to the character is switched in response to the action of the character.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 168 to 170, there are scenes in the teasing part where a character speaks lines but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in such specific scenes, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. In this way, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 even in scenes where no subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sounds. This allows the effect corresponding to the character to be executed appropriately, and the teasing part can be shown to the player in an appropriate manner. Also, as shown in Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. 124 (r29), Fig. 125 (r31), (r33), and Fig. 126 (r35), even when a character has a line but no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to appropriately express that the character is speaking by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, and allows the player to appropriately see the performance in the provocative part.

(F2019-127)
(9) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to a scene after the switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a movable body movement brightness data table when the movable body advances to the second position, switches from the movable body movement brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to a post-switching scene while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to the scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.

Specifically, the performance may be switched from the performance at the start of the reach to the performance of the SP first half reach by the operation of the reel. Also, an effect image corresponding to the reel operation may be displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, the display may be gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the reel operation to the screen corresponding to the SP first half reach while the reel is rising. Also, the brightness data table may be switched from the brightness data table of the reel operation part to the brightness data table of the SP first half reach while the reel is rising. Also, a sound corresponding to the SP first half reach may be output while the reel is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel operation is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the reel completes the return operation to the initial position. In addition, the sound effects and the brightness data table for the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the first half of the SP while the reel is rising, allowing the promotional part of the first half of the SP to be displayed optimally.

(F2019-128)
(10) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
The display means is
In the introductory part, a prompt is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the player performs the specific action, a cut-in is displayed.
In the introductory part, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output, and a dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means in response to the dialogue sound;
At the timing when the promotion display is performed in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area,
the luminance data table includes a luminance data table for cut-in display corresponding to the cut-in display, and a luminance data table for an introduction part corresponding to an introduction part,
The light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for cut-in display includes at least the same portions as the light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for the introduction part.

Specifically, the brightness data for the cut-in effect and the lamp control in the button display for said cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is designed to use the same frame lamps as the lamp control in the hype part of the SP final reach. This prevents unnecessary lamps from lighting/flashing, etc., from mixing in and spoiling the aesthetic, and provides an ideal hype part effect.

(F2019-129)
(11) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
During the period before the transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing notification part in the first notification performance,
the display means displays a prompt to prompt a specific action by a player,
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a first notification performance luminance data table,
During the period before the transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing notification part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not display the prompting display for prompting the specific action, but displays a win/lose indicator,
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a second notification performance luminance data table,
The first notification performance luminance data table is configured so that the luminance data is switched,
The brightness data table for the second notification performance is configured so that the brightness data does not switch.

Specifically, in an SP reach performance where no operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, making it appear to the player that the performance has stopped, and the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in an SP reach performance where operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt or a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach is output, and further, by switching the grandchild table multiple times to control the frame lamp to a mode corresponding to the operation prompt, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by different sound control and lamp control between when no operation prompt is given at the win/loss branch and when operation prompt is given.

(F2019-130)
(12) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
The introductory part includes a first scene and a second scene that follows the first scene,
In the first scene, first moving image data is used;
In the second scene, second video data is used;
The second scene is slower in speed than the first scene,
the first moving image data is moving image data in which a movement of a specific character is expressed by a plurality of specific character images;
The second video data is video data in which the movement of a specific character is expressed by one specific character image and an effect image.

Specifically, the scene before the winning or losing decision of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow-motion period in which the movement of the image slows down. Also, while the performance executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from multiple image data, the performance executed in (r48) is executed using an image of Bakuchu and images of six allies. The images of the allied characters and the enemy characters are gradually enlarged over time to make the characters appear to be moving. Here, if the image is created during the slow-motion period using the same amount of image data as outside the slow-motion period, the amount of data will be small and the movements will be awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to make the movements during the slow-motion period smooth, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow-motion period and making the characters appear to be moving by switching and enlarging the display. Note that the number of images used during the slow-motion period can be any number as long as it is smaller than the number of images used outside the slow-motion period.

(F2019-131)
(13) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
There is a shielding display that makes the display invisible by going through a closing operation to a closed state, and makes the display visible by performing an opening operation after the closed state,
The shielding display can be executed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the blocking display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the area in which the effect display is visible becomes smaller,
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the performance display increases as the area in which the performance display is visible becomes larger.

Specifically, the shutter described above is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible, and when opened after closing, makes the image of the performance being performed visible. The shutter is also executed at a timing related to the teasing part, that is, before the start of the teasing part. When the shutter is closing, the screen brightness is lowered as the area in which the performance is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is opening, the screen brightness is increased as the area in which the performance is visible becomes wider. This makes the closing and opening of the shutter appear more realistic, making the flow of the performance look favorable. Note that, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, an image other than a shutter may be used, and a similar performance may be executed using a prop.

(F2019-132)
(14) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene in which the character's dialogue sound and the action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sounds are outputted louder than the action sounds.

Specifically, in the titillation part, the background music for the SP reach is output, and there are scenes where dialogue sounds and physical sounds (also called action sounds) are output at the same time they overlap. When dialogue sounds and physical sounds are output at the same time, the dialogue sounds are output at a louder volume than the physical sounds when output from speakers 8L, 8R. In this way, the realism of the presentation is brought out by outputting the physical sounds as part of the presentation, while the content of the presentation can be more easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds at a louder volume when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. As a result, the presentation in the titillation part can be made to look better.

(F2019-133)
(15) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay effect is executed among a plurality of types of replay effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the epilogue part, when the first pattern is displayed once, the display mode of the first pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode, so that the first pattern is displayed as if it is swaying;
In the case of transition from the epilogue part to the re-selection part, there are a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first manner, a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first pattern is displayed in the second manner, and a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first pattern is displayed in the third manner,
The performance execution means performs a specific display that makes the first pattern difficult to see when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode and transitions from the epilogue part to the re-selection part, when the first pattern is displayed in the second mode and transitions from the epilogue part to the re-selection part, and when the first pattern is displayed in the third mode and transitions from the epilogue part to the re-selection part, and displays the first pattern in a common display mode to execute the first re-selection performance or the second re-selection performance;
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when an image showing the stick controller 31A and a time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, a period of time for the symbols to shake to absorb the scale may be provided in the time until the specified timing when the re-lottery performance is executed (the symbol shaking period from (K4)). Then, when the specified timing is reached and the re-lottery performance is executed, a common performance accompanied by a white-out as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. In this way, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbols are first displayed shaking, then the common performance accompanied by a white-out is executed, and then the re-lottery performance is executed. This makes it possible to prevent discomfort from occurring in the pattern movement at the start of the re-lottery, and makes the series of performances look good.

(F2020-005)
(16) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocative part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed over the lines of a character. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period during which the display period of a first subtitle that is displayed first and the display period of a second subtitle that is displayed next are displayed so as to overlap. When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap, a fade effect is applied. The fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters to differ. With this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the fade effect makes the change in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see the change in subtitles.

(F2020-006)
(17) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part after the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part after the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to inform the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, display the background.
After that, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the pattern confirmation command is issued.
After that, the display of the pattern changes in response to the change command.
The light emission control means
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means for effect using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
When the display switching is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display switching, and the light-emitting means for effect is controlled;
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and the light-emitting means for effect is controlled;
When the stop display of the pattern is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table for stopping the fourth pattern to control the light emitting means for the fourth pattern, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for the performance;
When the display of the changing patterns is started, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table for a fourth pattern change to control the light-emitting means for the fourth pattern, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light-emitting means for the performance.

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 when it is lost will be explained. The production screen is switched to the image when it is lost after the production of the winning or losing decision. After that, after the blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, it is switched to the normal screen and the screen in which the pattern is confirmed and stopped is displayed. Also, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table when the winning or losing is decided to the brightness data table when it is lost. After that, it is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, it is switched to the brightness data table of the background when the variation starts. Here, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the timing of switching to the normal screen. Then, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 is switched from flashing to off by receiving the pattern confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the pattern confirmation command. In addition, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 switches from off to flashing when the change pattern command for the next change is received, but the background brightness data table does not switch even when the pattern confirmation command is received. This means that the brightness data table switches to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, and this brightness data table continues until the next change, so there is no need to create a separate brightness data table that corresponds to the reception of the pattern confirmation command, and the lamp effects can be displayed without any sense of incongruity from the performance when a miss occurs to the next change, making the series of effects look good.

[Start 1]
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after the switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using the movable body movement brightness data table when the movable body advances to the second position, switches from the movable body movement brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to a post-switching scene while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emission means using the brightness data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to the scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the action of the reel switches the action from the SP first half reach A to the SP second half reach A. Also, an effect image corresponding to the action of the reel is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the reel to the screen corresponding to the SP second half reach A while the reel is rising. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table of the reel action part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 described later) to the brightness data table of the SP second half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIG. 204 and FIG. 205 described later). Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the SP second half (for example, BGM for the SP second half) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the reel is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the reel has completed its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be avoided. Also, since the brightness data table for the sound effects and game effect lamp 9 is switched to one corresponding to the second half of the SP while the reel is returning to its initial position, the promotional part of the second half of the SP can be displayed optimally.

[Start 2]
Before the movable body is moved, a reduced image is displayed at a specific display position,
The movable body is moved so that the movable body covers the specific display position,
In response to the movement of the movable body, an effect corresponding to the movement of the movable body is displayed in a layer having priority over the display layer of the reduced-displayed pattern;
After the movable body starts to retreat and is no longer located at the specific display position, the effect display is switched to a display corresponding to the post-switching performance in which a reduced pattern is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the action of the reel switches the action from the SP first half reach A to the SP second half reach A. Also, before the action of the reel, the "2" symbol is displayed in a reduced form in the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the reel is actuated, the reel falls so that the "P" character among the letters of the reel is positioned to a position where it overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative symbol was displayed. Also, according to the action of the reel falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the reel is displayed in a layer that is prioritized in front of the reduced "2" symbol. Then, after the reel rises from the drop position and the "2" symbol is in a position where it does not overlap with the reel, the effect image gradually fades and the background corresponding to the SP second half reach A and the "2" symbol are faintly displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the display from becoming unattractive due to the reduced decorative symbol being displayed during the action of the reel. Furthermore, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position that overlaps with the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be prevented from being marred. Also, because a reduced decorative pattern is displayed while the reel is rising, it is possible to switch to an appropriate presentation according to the reel action.

[Start 3]
The movable body moves, and an effect display is performed before the movable body reaches the specific display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171, the reel operates and displays the effect image before it reaches the bottom of the drop. This allows the reduced decorative pattern to be hidden early, resulting in a suitable switching of effects that incorporate the reel.

[Start 4]
When the effect display is switched to the display of the developed performance, the effect display is switched using an image related to the movable body.

Specifically, an image related to the prop may be displayed when switching from an effect image to an image of the performance that develops into the latter half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to FIG. 172 (h7) to (h10), when the prop rises, the letters "POWER II" and images of the main characters Yume Yume, Jam, and Nana may be displayed. In this way, by linking the performance change, it is possible to show a suitable change in performance involving the prop.

[Start 5]
There is a shielding display that makes the display invisible by going through a closing operation to a closed state, and makes the display visible by performing an opening operation after the closed state,
The occlusion display can be performed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the blocking display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the area in which the effect display is visible becomes smaller,
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the performance display increases as the area in which the performance display is visible becomes larger.

Specifically, the shutter described above is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible, and when opened after closing, makes the image of the performance being performed visible. The shutter is also executed at a timing related to the teasing part, that is, before the start of the teasing part. When the shutter is closing, the screen brightness is lowered as the area in which the performance is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is opening, the screen brightness is increased as the area in which the performance is visible becomes wider. This makes the closing and opening of the shutter appear more realistic, making the flow of the performance look favorable. Note that, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, an image other than a shutter may be used, and a similar performance may be executed using a prop.

[Start 6]
An image corresponding to the blocking display has a shape in which doors close from both ends of the screen in the center of the screen, or a shape in which doors close from one end of the screen to the other end.

Specifically, the shutters described above are configured to close from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. This allows the effect of gradually changing screen brightness to be displayed in an optimal way. The shutters may also be configured to close from both ends of the screen toward the center, like a sliding door. The shutters may also be configured to close from the top edge of the screen toward the bottom edge of the screen.

[Start 7]
In the occlusion display, the edges of the opposing doors that make the performance display invisible are colored black.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 above, the image of the edge of the shutter is rendered in black. This makes it possible to blur the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is low and the edge of the shutter just before the shutter is completely closed as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), eliminating any sense of incongruity. Similarly, it is possible to eliminate any sense of incongruity when the shutter begins to open as shown in FIG. 60 (a16).

[Start 8]
After the blocking display undergoes a closing operation and then an opening operation, a display corresponding to the introduction part is displayed.
A display corresponding to the introduction part is performed during an intermediate stage in which the shielding display is being released, and the brightness of the display corresponding to the introduction part increases stepwise, while the display corresponding to the introduction part does not progress until the release operation of the shielding display is completed, and the display corresponding to the introduction part starts to progress after the release operation of the shielding display is completed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 60 and 61 above, after the shutter opens, the SP first half reach begins. Until the shutter is fully open, the SP first half reach effect does not begin, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half effect progresses. In this way, since the SP first half reach effect is an effect that players want to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction by having the effect executed before the shutter opens.

[Start 9]
When the release operation of the shielding display is completed, the light emitting means is turned off.
After the release operation of the masking display is completed and one frame of image is displayed, the display corresponding to the introductory part progresses and the light emitting means starts emitting light.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp goes out when the shutter is fully open, so the timing when the shutter is fully open can be clearly communicated to the player by the lighting state of the frame lamp. Also, the provocative part of SP first half reach A and the provocative part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, start with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp off, and the frame lamp starts to light up or flash based on the brightness data table corresponding to each SP first half reach. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp goes out, the frame lamp starts to light up in accordance with the progress of the performance in the SP first half reach, so it is possible to clearly communicate to the player that the SP first half reach has started.

[Start 10]
The effect display starts to go dark before the closing operation of the shielding display starts, and the closing operation ends in time with the effect display going completely dark.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57 (a9) above, the screen brightness is first lowered before the shutter starts to close, and the shutter is fully closed in time for it to close. Here, if the screen brightness were lowered in time with the shutter closing, there is a risk that the screen will darken too quickly. Therefore, by starting to lower the screen brightness in advance, the screen will darken at an appropriate speed, making the series of effects look optimal.

[Start 11] (2019-1944)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The display means is capable of performing a shielding display in which the effect display is made invisible by going through a closing operation to a closed state, and the effect display is made visible by performing an opening operation after the closed state,
The occlusion display is performed at a timing related to the introduction part,
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table for the shielding display when performing the shielding display;
The brightness data table for the shielding display is configured so that the brightness data is switched when the shielding display performs a closing operation, and so that the brightness data is not switched during the period from when the shielding display becomes a closed state until when it performs an opening operation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in child table WD1 of the start part, during times ta1-ta12 before the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as background yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and lighting red, whereas during times ta13-ta18 after the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. In this way, the lighting state of the frame lamp before the shutters closes enhances the presentation in the start part, and by maintaining the lighting state of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters open, and as a result, the presentation in the subsequent teasing part can be better viewed by the player.

[Start 12]
The performance display includes a display before the introduction part starts and a display during the introduction part,
During the start part, while a display corresponding to a predetermined effect is being performed, the blocking display performs a closing operation, and then the blocking display performs an opening operation, thereby starting the introduction part;
There are a plurality of types of introduction parts, and it is not possible to know which introduction part is to be executed until the operation of releasing the shielding display is completed.

Specifically, until the aforementioned shutter opens, the player does not know which SP first half reach will start. This allows the player to have expectations about which performance will be executed.

[Start 13]
The shielding display may also be performed at times other than the transition to the introduction part.

Specifically, the shutter effect described above may be executed at a timing other than the timing of development into the first half of the SP. For example, it may be executed from the second re-fluctuation to the third re-fluctuation in a pseudo consecutive win. Also, when the shutter closes and then opens, an icon image (for example, a green hold image) may be displayed that suggests a change in the active hold, which is the hold display for that fluctuation, and the active hold may change in response to that icon image (for example, changing from blue to green). Also, the shutter effect may be executed at the timing of development from the first half of the SP reach to the second half of the SP reach. This can increase the interest of the shutter effect.

[Start 14]
The timing at which the luminance data is maintained is the timing at which the closing operation of the shielding display is completed, the timing at which a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the closing operation of the shielding display is completed, or the timing related to the closing operation of the shielding display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in child table WD1 of the start part, during times ta1-ta12 before the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as background yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and lighting red, whereas during times ta13-ta18 after the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. In this way, the lighting state of the frame lamp before the shutters closes enhances the presentation in the start part, and by maintaining the lighting state of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters open, and as a result, the presentation in the subsequent teasing part can be better viewed by the player.

[Start 15]
The period during which the brightness data is maintained is the period from when the shielding display becomes closed until the release action is taken, or the period from when the shielding display becomes closed until a prompting display is taken to encourage the player to take an action.

Specifically, in addition to the pattern described above where the shutter closes and then automatically opens, a pattern may be provided where the shutter closes and then a button image is displayed, and the shutter opens when the button is operated. This provides multiple types of shutter effects, which increases the interest of the shutter effects.

[Start 16]
At the timing when the blocking display becomes the closed state and the promotion display is performed, the maintained luminance data is switched to the changing luminance data, and after the promotion display is performed, the luminance data is switched back to the maintained luminance data.

Specifically, in a performance using a shutter display as shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, a prompting display is displayed to prompt the player to perform an action (for example, pressing a button, placing a hand over an infrared sensor, etc.), and when the player's action corresponding to the prompting display is detected, a performance in which the shutter opens may be performed. Then, while such a shutter display is in a closed state, lamp control is performed based on a brightness data table in which the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, a frame lamp) is maintained, while at the timing when the shutter display is in a closed state and the prompting display is performed, the brightness data table is switched to one in which the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table, and after the prompting display is performed (while the prompting display is continuing), lamp control may again be performed based on a brightness data table in which the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained. Note that the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting state used again after the prompting display is performed may be the same as or different from the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting state used before the prompting display is performed. This keeps the game effect lamp 9 lit while the shutter display is in the closed state, making it easier for the player to focus on the next performance that will be performed after the shutter display is in the open state.

[Start 17]
The promotion display is a display including a button image and promotion text that prompts the player to take an action.
When a promotion character is displayed, a sound corresponding to the promotion character is output, and luminance data is incorporated such that the luminance data changes in association with the sound.

Specifically, in the performance using the shutter display as shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, a prompting display is displayed to prompt the player to perform an action (for example, pressing a button, placing a hand over an infrared sensor, etc.), and when the player's action corresponding to the prompting display is detected, the shutter may be opened. In the prompting display, a sound (for example, the sound "push") that prompts the player to perform an action may be output, and text (for example, the text "push") that prompts the player to perform an action may be displayed. Furthermore, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed based on a brightness data table that changes the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, a frame lamp) in response to the sound that prompts the player to perform an action. In this way, the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes in response to the sound that prompts the player to perform an action, so that the text display that prompts the player to perform an action can be emphasized by the sound that prompts the player to perform an action and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, and the player can be more effectively made to perform an action corresponding to the prompting display.

[Incitement 1]
The introduction part is
This is the part until the result of controlling the game to an advantageous state is notified.
The game includes scenes in which the display is updated as friendly characters and enemy characters fight, and scenes in which friendly characters take damage.
The display switching interval is faster than in the epilogue part.
There are more display changes than in the epilogue part.

Specifically, the provocation part, which involves the aforementioned hit-or-miss provocation, is updated with an alternating battle between friendly and enemy characters (for example, SP first half reach B and SP second half reach B). Such provocation parts include scenes in which friendly characters take damage. Also, the image display switching intervals in such provocation parts are faster than in the epilogue part, and the number of image display switches is greater. Thus, by making the provocation part develop faster than the epilogue part, the provocation part can be made to look good.

[Incitement 2]
In the introductory part, first, the sound of a line spoken by an ally character is output, and a line subtitle corresponding to the sound of the line is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(b5) and the like, in the provocative part, the first thing the ally character says is a line, and subtitles corresponding to that line are displayed. This allows the ally character to be easily recognized in the provocative part.

[Incitement 3]
In the introductory part, the display duration of the first dialogue subtitle is set to be longer.

Specifically, the subtitle display of the first friendly character to be displayed may be set to be displayed for a longer period of time than the subtitle display in other scenes in the teasing part. This allows the friendly character to be clearly recognized.

[Incitement 4]
There are scenes in which the dialogue sounds of friendly characters are output but the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (b17) and the like, there are scenes where subtitles are not displayed when an ally character speaks a line. This allows the screen display to be more suitable than if subtitles were displayed for all lines, while still displaying the subtitles for the ally character that is displayed first.

[Incitement 5]
It may be expanded from the first introduction part to the second introduction part,
In both the first and second introduction parts, the friendly characters play an active role.
In the first introduction part, the dialogue sound of an ally character is output first, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.
In the second introduction part, first, the dialogue sound of an ally character is output, and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the aforementioned provocation part, there are SP First Half Reach A and SP First Half Reach B as the first provocation part executed in the first half, and SP Second Half Reach A, SP Second Half Reach B, and SP Final Reach as the second provocation part executed in the second half. In both the first and second provocation parts, there are scenes in which ally characters play an active role. In addition, in both provocation parts, the first thing an ally character says is a line, and subtitles corresponding to that line are displayed. This allows the ally characters to be easily recognized in both provocation parts.

[Incitement 6]
In the first introductory part, the first character plays an active role.
In the second introductory part, the second character plays an active role.
In the first introduction part, a line sound of a first character is output first, and a line subtitle corresponding to the line sound is displayed;
In the second introduction part, the dialogue sound of the second character is output first, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the aforementioned provocation part, in the provocation part corresponding to the SP first half reach B, Yume Yume's character plays an active role, and in the provocation part corresponding to the SP second half reach B, Jam and Nana's characters play an active role. In the SP first half reach B, the first ally character, Yume Yume, speaks a line, and subtitles corresponding to said line are displayed. In the SP second half reach B, the first ally characters, Jam and Nana, speak a line, and subtitles corresponding to said line are displayed. This allows the ally characters to be appropriately recognized in both provocation parts. Note that there may be one or more characters playing an active role. Also, the character playing an active role in the first half provocation part and the second half provocation part may be the same.

[Incitement 7]
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed;
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed;
The brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and no dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is displayed is configured so that brightness data using an emission color corresponding to the character is switched in response to the action of the character.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 168 to 170, there are scenes in the teasing part where a character speaks lines but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). In these specific scenes, sounds that are difficult to express in subtitles are output as lines, so the setting is such that subtitles are not displayed. However, even in these specific scenes, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. In this way, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sounds. This allows the effect corresponding to the character to be executed appropriately, and the teasing part can be shown to the player in an appropriate manner. Also, as shown in Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. 124 (r29), Fig. 125 (r31), (r33), and Fig. 126 (r35), even when a character has a line but no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to appropriately express that the character is speaking by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, and allows the player to appropriately see the performance in the provocative part.

[Incitement 8]
In a scene in which a character appears, the light emitting means emits light in a color other than the color corresponding to the character.

Specifically, as shown in Figs. 168 to 170, in scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to light up in a color other than the color corresponding to the character in the previous scene. Specifically, before the scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in yellow (r22) or red (r23), and then lights up in orange corresponding to the AD character. Also, before the scene (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in orange (r25) or white (r25'), and then lights up in blue corresponding to the maid A character. Also, before the scene (r28), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in blue (r27) or white (r27'), and then lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the maid B character. Also, before the scene (r30), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on/flashed in Hawaiian blue (r29) or white (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in pink corresponding to the character Nana-chan. Also, before the scene (r32), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on/flashed in pink (r31) or white (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in purple corresponding to the character Jam-chan. Also, before the scene (r34), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in purple (r33) or white (r33'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in green corresponding to the character Yume-Yume. In this way, before a character appears, control is performed to turn on the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the corresponding character, and then control is performed to turn on the game effect lamp 9 in the color corresponding to the character. Therefore, the lamps can be used to clearly show the player that the displayed character is changing and which character has changed, making them a suitable incentive.

[Incitement 9]
The light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on one side of the screen, and the light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on the other side of the screen.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. 124 (r29), Fig. 125 (r31), (r33), and Fig. 126 (r35), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to appropriately express that the character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to appropriately see the performance in the provocative part.

[Incitement 10] (2019-1930)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The introduction part is
a first scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed and a line sound uttered by the first character is output;
a second scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed and a line sound uttered by the second character is output;
The light emission control means
In the first scene, a light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table corresponding to the first scene;
In the second scene, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table corresponding to the second scene;
the luminance data table corresponding to the first scene is configured such that when luminance data, in which the light-emitting means on the side where a first character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means has a light emission color corresponding to the first character and the light-emitting means on the side where a second character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means has a light emission color corresponding to the second character, is switched in response to a line sound uttered by the first character, the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means switches, but the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means does not switch;
The luminance data table corresponding to the second scene is configured so that when the luminance data, in which the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means has a light color corresponding to the first character and the light-emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means has a light color corresponding to the second character, is switched in response to the dialogue sound uttered by the second character, the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means does not switch but the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means is switched.

Specifically, when a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character, and when the character speaks, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to the character. For example, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, face each other as shown in FIG. 63 (b4), the frame left lamp is lit in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, and the frame right lamp is lit in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). At time tb6, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, in response to a performance in which Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). This allows the player to conveniently see which character is speaking in a scene where multiple characters are displayed, by lighting/flashing the frame lamp, and allows the player to conveniently see the effects of the provocative part.

[Incitement 11]
In a state in which the first character and the second character are displayed, dialogue subtitles are displayed in each of a scene in which the dialogue sound of the first character is output and a scene in which the dialogue sound of the second character is output, and the dialogue subtitles are displayed in a fixed font and at a fixed position.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 63 (b5) and (b6), there are scenes in which friendly and enemy characters are displayed and each character speaks lines. In such a situation, the subtitle display for the lines is of a fixed size and is displayed at a fixed display position. In this way, by not changing the display mode of the lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the opportunities for bugs to occur.

[Incitement 12]
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene in which the character's dialogue sound and the action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sounds are outputted louder than the action sounds.

Specifically, in the titillation part, the background music for the SP reach is output, and there are scenes where dialogue sounds and physical sounds (also called operation sounds) are output at the same time they overlap. When dialogue sounds and physical sounds are output at the same time, the dialogue sounds are output at a louder volume than the physical sounds when output from speakers 8L, 8R. In this way, the realism of the presentation is brought out by outputting the physical sounds as part of the presentation, while the content of the presentation can be more easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds at a louder volume when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. As a result, the presentation in the titillation part can be made to look better.

[Incitement 13]
Various sounds such as background music, action sounds, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are output in accordance with the performance in the introductory part.
During the design stage, various sounds are output together with displays corresponding to the performances performed in the introductory part, and the volume of the various sounds is adjusted.

Specifically, the work process when actually creating various effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, images for each effect corresponding to variable times such as SP reach are created in the pachinko gaming machine 1. To match this image, sound effects such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are added one by one using dedicated software. The completed image and sound are played, and the volume of the sound is then adjusted. In this series of work processes, the sound data is set so that, rather than outputting the sound with the same realism as the actual distance on the image, the reality is abandoned and a sound that ignores the actual distance is output, which is easier for the player to understand. This allows the series of effects to be presented in an optimal way.

[Incitement 14]
When the output of an action sound and a dialogue sound corresponding to one character overlap, the volume of the dialogue sound is adjusted so that the volume of the action sound is larger than the volume of the dialogue sound.

Specifically, when a character's physical sound and dialogue sound are output together, the dialogue sound is adjusted so that it sounds louder than the physical sound. For example, when a physical sound and dialogue sound are output together, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the background music for the SP reach is adjusted to be quieter to match the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, it is possible to convey the content of the presentation to the player more easily while still creating a sense of realism.

[Incitement 15]
When the dialogue sound output of a first character, which is far away, overlaps with the action sound output of a second character, which is close, when viewed from the front of the screen, the volume is adjusted so that the dialogue sound volume is louder than the action sound volume.

Specifically, when the dialogue sound of a character that the player feels is far away overlaps with a physical sound that the player feels is close, the sound data is set so that the dialogue sound sounds louder than the physical sound. This discards realism and outputs sounds that ignore the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player, making it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation.

[Incitement 16]
In a case where the output of the operation sound and the dialogue sound overlap and the subtitles are not displayed, and a case where the output of the operation sound and the dialogue sound overlap and the subtitles are displayed, the volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound with the subtitles displayed is larger than the volume of the dialogue sound with the subtitles not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 166 (B) and (C), when the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound has subtitles compared to when the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound does not have subtitles, the dialogue sound with subtitles is adjusted to sound louder by lowering the volume of the BGM for the SP reach. The dialogue sound with subtitles is more related to the content of the SP reach than the dialogue sound without subtitles. Therefore, by outputting the dialogue sound with subtitles, which is related to the content of the SP reach, louder, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation.

[Incitement 17] (2019-1933)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The light emission control means
In a first scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a first upper table and a specific luminance data table;
In a second scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a second upper table and a specific luminance data table;
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
the first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time period longer than the specific time period;
The second higher level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different timings in one child table used in the hype part, lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, thereby changing the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow. In this way, without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings in one child table WD9, the common grandchild table W3 is used while changing the reference time, thereby reducing the data capacity used for lamp control and varying the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

[Incitement 18] (2019-1934)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The light emission control means
In a first scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a first upper table and a specific luminance data table;
In a second scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a second upper table and a specific luminance data table;
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
The first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a specific period of time,
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table, and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a predetermined time period shorter than the specific time period.

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table used in the promotion part, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

[Incitement 19] (2019-1935)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The light emission control means
In one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled by using a first higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
In one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
the first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time period longer than the specific time period;
The second higher level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, in each of child table WD9 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the provocation part of SP final reach, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in multiple reach performances. Similarly, in child table WD2 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach A and child table WD5 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach B, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control.

[Incitement 20] (2019-1936)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The light emission control means
In one scene of an introduction part in a first notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled by using a first higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
In one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
The first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a specific period of time,
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table, and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a predetermined time period that is shorter than the specific time period.

[Incitement 21]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In a specific scene, while a first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, a second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocative part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed over the lines of a character. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period during which the display period of a first subtitle that is displayed first and the display period of a second subtitle that is displayed next are displayed so as to overlap. When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap, a fade effect is applied. The fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters to differ. With this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the fade effect makes the change in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see the change in subtitles.

[Incitement 22]
In a provocative scene where multiple characters confront each other,
When a line sound of one character is output, a first subtitle corresponding to the line sound is displayed, and thereafter, when a line sound of the other character is output, a second subtitle corresponding to the line sound is displayed;
The second subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 50% so as to overlap the portion where the first subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 0%, and thereafter, when the second subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 0%, the display of the first subtitle is terminated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178(A), in a scene where characters confront each other, a first subtitle corresponding to the lines of one character may be displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to the lines of another character. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 70% and overlaps the first subtitle displayed with a transparency of 0%. The first subtitle then fades out and the second subtitle fades in, displaying with a transparency of 0%. This makes it easy to tell when the subtitles are switching, due to the fade effect, even when the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other.

[Incitement 23]
The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other and at least one of them has a fade effect applied, the subtitle is not output.
It is output when only the secondary subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle "Found" is such that the first and second subtitles are displayed overlapping each other and are not output during the period when the fade effect is applied. The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from the time when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, the fade effect makes it easy to see the change in subtitles, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, the content of the production can be easily grasped both visually and aurally.

[Incitement 24]
In the advantageous state, music is output and lyrics are displayed.
When the display of the lyrics is switched from the first subtitle to the second subtitle, no fade effect is applied to either subtitle display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance in which a character sings along with the music is executed. Then, subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, no fade effect is applied, even if the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously. This is because, since the progression of the music can be understood from the rhythm while the music is playing, it is easy to understand the timing of the change in the subtitles (lyrics) even if the fade effect is not applied. Also, since the music during the jackpot round is a representative piece of content installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player can easily understand the lyrics to be displayed next even without the fade effect. This makes it possible to omit the task of applying the fade effect during the jackpot round, and makes it possible to show the series of performances clearly.

[Incitement 25]
In both the introduction and epilogue parts, the characters' lines may overlap.
The dialogue sounds overlap more frequently in the introduction part than in the epilogue part.

Specifically, although not shown, there are cases where the timing of subtitle display overlaps even in epilogue parts. However, as shown in FIG. 180, there are many scenes in epilogue parts where the period between subtitle display is longer than in teasing parts. This is because the performance progresses quickly in teasing parts, but not as quickly in epilogue parts. As a result, teasing parts are more likely to be displayed with overlapping subtitle displays than epilogue parts. In such cases, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity when switching subtitles.

[Incitement 26]
Even in certain scenes where the subtitles do not overlap,
A fade effect is applied when the subtitles are displayed or when the display of the subtitles disappears.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in certain scenes in the portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. The fade effect may be at least one of a fade-in and a fade-out. In subtitle display created after the video is created, it is time-consuming to apply fade effects depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps. Therefore, by applying a fade effect uniformly to the subtitle display, an increase in the workload can be prevented.

[Incitement 27]
The display of the first subtitle without the fade effect and the display of the second subtitle may be switched.
It is possible to provide a blank period in which nothing is displayed between the display of the first subtitle and the display of the second subtitle, but this would create an awkward feeling when long lines or lines with a fast tempo are output, so such a blank period is not provided.

Specifically, FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 181(A), subtitle displays for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect and without a blank period, it becomes difficult to understand the switching of the subtitle display. In addition, for subtitle displays for long lines or lines that progress quickly, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur when subtitles are switched without a blank period. In such a case, the sense of incongruity can be eliminated by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display. Also, as shown in Comparative Example 2 of FIG. 181(B), it is possible to overlap "I found it" with the subtitle display of "I found it" and then display "I found it". In such a case, it becomes difficult to see the subtitle display by not applying the fade effect. Also, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 181(C), it is possible to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two rows, one above the other. In such cases, the display area for the effects is reduced by the subtitle display, which ends up interfering with the effects in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. By contrast, this embodiment of the invention solves this problem by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display.

[Provocative cut-in 1]
The display means is
In the introductory part, a prompt is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the player performs the specific action, a cut-in is displayed.
In the introductory part, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output, and a dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means in response to the dialogue sound;
At the timing when the promotion display is performed in the introduction part, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area,
the luminance data table includes a luminance data table for cut-in display corresponding to the cut-in display, and a luminance data table for an introduction part corresponding to an introduction part,
The light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for cut-in display includes at least the same portions as the light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for the introduction part.

Specifically, the brightness data for the cut-in effects and the lamp control in the button displays for said cut-in effects (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is designed to use the same frame lamps as the lamp control in the teasing part of the SP final reach. This prevents unnecessary lamps from lighting/flashing, etc., from mixing in and spoiling the aesthetic, and provides an ideal teasing part performance.

[Provocative cut-in 2]
Dialogue subtitles are displayed in the scene before the button promotion is performed.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 127 (r39) to FIG. 128 (r42), at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the subtitle display is displayed before the button image promotion display is displayed. This allows the button image to continue to be shown to the player who is watching the screen and paying attention to the subtitle display, so that the button image is not overlooked, and the cut-in display can be executed optimally.

[Provocative cut-in 3]
At the timing when the cut-in display ends, the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are not displayed, and after a period in which the dialogue sound is not output, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 128 (r41) to 130 (r47), the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period of time after the cut-in display is cleared. Then, after the predetermined period of no dialogue has elapsed, dialogue is spoken and subtitles are displayed for that dialogue. This allows the player to concentrate on the presentation during the period after the cut-in display, resulting in an ideal cut-in display.

[True or False 1]
In the part where the winner is notified,
The player is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.
A prompt is displayed to encourage the player to take a specific action,
It is executed between the introduction and epilogue parts,
After the promotion display is performed, the movable body is moved.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 132 (r54), the scene where the win or loss was determined was between the teasing part and the epilogue part. Then, in the scene where the win or loss was determined, the player was notified of whether or not they had won the jackpot, after operating a trigger as an operating means. Also, in the scene where the win or loss was determined, if a jackpot was reached, the reel moved after operating the trigger. This increases the interest of the presentation by creating an ideal scene where the win or loss was determined using the operating means.

[True or False 2]
In the winning/losing notification part that is executed after the introduction part,
When the introduction display of the promotion display is performed while the unfolded display is being performed before the promotion display is performed, the unfolded display becomes invisible, and then the promotion display is performed while the unfolded display is visible.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 130 (r47) to 132 (r54), subtitles are displayed by ally characters before the image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and then the effect that was being executed becomes invisible due to the screen corresponding to the operating means. Then, the effect that was being executed after that becomes recognizable together with the image of the operating means. In this way, the introduction of the operating means is displayed on the entire screen to create an impact, while the effect that was being executed is displayed properly when the operating means can be operated, making it possible to optimally show the progression of the effect.

[True or False 3]
The deployment display is shown behind the introduction display.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 130 (r48) to FIG. 131 (r51), the presentation is in progress even while the introductory images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation of the operating means are displayed. In this way, by having the presentation proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image in which the operating means can be operated (image (r51)), and also to the development of the presentation.

[True or False 4]
The expansion display is performed while the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned Figures 132 (r51) to 132 (r54), when a trigger image was displayed as a promotion display, the tail of the Bakuchu image moved slightly each time the image changed. In this way, the performance may be allowed to progress while the promotion display is displayed. Here, the progression of the performance may not be limited to the tail moving, but may also include scene changes or character movements. This makes it possible to draw attention to the development of the performance during the promotion display.

[5 correct or not]
When an unfolding display is performed while a promotion is in progress, it proceeds slower than it did before the promotion was in progress.

Specifically, the presentation that progresses while the prompting display is displayed progresses slower than the presentation that was being executed before the prompting display was displayed. This allows the player to focus on the prompting display, which is intended to cause the player to operate the operating means, and a balance can be achieved between the prompting display and the presentation's progress. Note that the presentation that progresses while the prompting display is displayed can be made to progress slower than the presentation that progresses while the introductory image is displayed. This allows a difference in the speed of presentation progress between when the prompting display is displayed and when the introductory image is displayed.

[True or False 6]
The dialogue before the introductory text is echoed.

Specifically, it is preferable to have an echo added to the lines that are spoken before the introductory image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) above. This will get the players excited before the introductory image is displayed.

[True or False 7]
The introduction display is performed after terminating the output of the dialogue sound that was displayed during the development display before the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 130 (r47) to 131 (r49), the introduction image is displayed after deleting the subtitles displayed before the introduction image is displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the timing of the introduction image and the subtitles from overlapping.

[True or False 8]
The introductory part is composed of a predetermined period and a slow-motion period after the predetermined period and before the announcement of the result.
A character's movement is depicted using a plurality of image data during a predetermined period of time;
During the slow motion period, a single image data is provided with a special effect to depict the character's movement.

Specifically, the scene before the winning or losing decision of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow-motion period in which the movement of the image slows down. Also, while the performance executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from multiple image data, the performance executed in (r48) is executed using an image of Bakuchu and images of six allies. The images of the allied characters and the enemy characters are gradually enlarged over time to make the characters appear to be moving. Here, if the image is created during the slow-motion period using the same amount of image data as outside the slow-motion period, the amount of data will be small and the movements will be awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to make the movements during the slow-motion period smooth, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow-motion period and making the characters appear to be moving by switching and enlarging the display. Note that the number of images used during the slow-motion period can be any number as long as it is smaller than the number of images used outside the slow-motion period.

[9 correct or not]
The game has an introductory part where friendly and enemy characters appear, and a conclusion part after the introductory part.
The introduction section has a set period of time during which scenes showing allies and enemies alternate.
When the prompting display is being displayed during a predetermined period, the player can move on to the conclusion part,
During a predetermined period of time, the speed at which the scenes displaying the ally and the scenes displaying the enemy alternate is gradually increased, and the promotion display is performed when the speed reaches its fastest;
Even in depictions in which scenes showing allies and scenes showing enemies alternate, each of the allies and enemies is reproduced using a single image data.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191(B), the speed at which the images of the ally character and the enemy character switch gradually becomes faster. In this way, a prompting display encouraging the player to operate the trigger is displayed after the image switching speed has reached its fastest, making it possible to tease the player as to whether a scene in which the ally character has an advantage or an enemy character has an advantage will unfold, increasing interest. In addition, by switching between images alternately, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that a single image is being used to represent both the ally character and the enemy character.

[10% correct]
The above-mentioned predetermined period during which the scene in which an ally is displayed and the scene in which an enemy is displayed are alternately switched is also applied to a scene in which a reach effect develops from one reach effect to another.

Specifically, the slow motion period in (r48) may be performed at the timing when the SP first half reach develops into the SP second half reach, or into the SP final reach. This allows the performance to be performed appropriately even when developing from the SP first half reach.

[True or False 11]
An enemy character is depicted using a plurality of image data in order to change a portion of the enemy character, but the image data of the enemy character itself is reused and only that portion is changed.

Specifically, during the slow-motion period in (r48), at least one of the friendly and enemy characters may be constructed using two or more images. For example, for an friendly character, four images may be used repeatedly: image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, etc., to make the character's hair and clothes appear to move gradually. In this way, by reusing the data for the character itself and changing only some of the data, it is possible to more faithfully express the character's movements while reducing the amount of work required to change the data.

[True or False 12]
During the slow motion periods, parts of the characters change.

Specifically, during the slow-motion period in (r48), when a character's hair or clothes are made to appear to move gradually from multiple images, the movement of the hair or clothes may be designed to appear to move at the same speed as during periods other than the slow-motion period. Here, if the number of images is increased to match the slow-motion movements in order to make the movements appear smoother during the slow-motion period, the capacity will increase. However, by speeding up the movements during the slow-motion period, the movements do not become awkward even if fewer images are used, and the movement can be more faithfully represented while reducing the data capacity.

[True or False 13]
During the period before the transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing part in the first notification performance,
The display means displays a prompting display for prompting a specific action by a player,
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using the first notification performance luminance data table,
During the period before the transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not display a prompting display for a specific action, but displays a winning or losing indicator,
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a second notification performance luminance data table,
The first notification performance luminance data table is configured so that the luminance data is switched,
The brightness data table for the second notification performance is configured so that the brightness data does not switch.

Specifically, in an SP reach performance where no operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, making it appear to the player that the performance has stopped, and the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in an SP reach performance where operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt or a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach is output, and further, by switching the grandchild table multiple times to control the frame lamp to a mode corresponding to the operation prompt, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by different sound control and lamp control between when no operation prompt is given at the win/loss branch and when operation prompt is given.

[True or False 14]
When the promotion display is not performed, the display transitions in the order of a first display period consisting of a moving image, a second display period consisting of a still image, and a third display period consisting of a moving image that branches depending on whether the display is correct or not.

Specifically, from the aforementioned Fig. 95 (i36) to Fig. 96 (i39), the image in which the two characters Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged, and at the timing of (i39), one image is displayed still for a predetermined period of time. After that, if there is a big win, the video of the hit epilogue part is played, and if there is a loss, the video of the loss epilogue part is played. During the period in which one image is displayed still for a predetermined period of time, one image can be reused, so that the data capacity can be reduced while favorably stirring up the scene of the win/loss decision. Note that during the period in which the image in which the two characters are displayed is gradually enlarged, more images (for example, 10 images) may be used as shown in Fig. 95 (i36) to Fig. 96 (i39).

[True or False 15]
A scenario for controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data when the promotion display is not performed is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period; and
a third scenario corresponding to a third display period;
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple luminance data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which the predetermined luminance data is maintained;
The third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in child table WD9 in SP latter half Reach A, which is a reach without operation prompting, the frame lamp flashes in white based on grandchild table W7, and then lights up in white based on grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the win/loss branch in the provocation part of SP latter half Reach A where no operation prompting is performed, the brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W8 is designed to use "FDC" (white lighting), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, so that the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much.

[True or False 16]
When the promotion display is performed, the display transitions in the following order: a first display period in which an introductory display is performed before the promotion display is performed, a second display period consisting of moving images, and a third display period consisting of moving images that branches depending on whether the display is correct or not.

Specifically, from the aforementioned FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54), there is a display period of an introductory image in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are displayed gathering in the center of the screen. After that, there is a period in which a prompting display for operating the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the prompting display, multiple images are gradually moved to make the character appear to be moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching scene for deciding whether or not the player has won, an image of the win epilogue part is played if the player has won, and an image of the miss epilogue part is played if the player has lost. All of these periods are periods in which a dynamic display in which the images appear to be moving is displayed. This allows a series of performances to be executed within a dynamic flow, resulting in a favorable flow of performances.

[True or False 17]
A scenario for controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data when the promotion display is performed is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period; and
a third scenario corresponding to a third display period;
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple luminance data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which multiple luminance data are switched.
The third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in Figure 131 (r49) to Figure 132 (r54), sounds corresponding to operation promotion and sounds (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and the frame lamps change in sequence from flashing white to lit red to flashing red, etc., enhancing the presentation of operations to encourage the player at the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

[True or False 18]
Following on from the winning/losing announcement part,
When it has been determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, a display for when it has been determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed, and then a display corresponding to the normal background is displayed.

Specifically, the winning epilogue part and losing epilogue part following the winning/losing determination scene shown in the above-mentioned Figures 133 (s1) to 136 (s10) and 137 (u1) to 138 (u4) will be explained. In the winning epilogue part, the image corresponding to the winning epilogue part is displayed after the performance of the reel action. In the losing epilogue part, the screen goes dark after the performance corresponding to the losing epilogue part and then returns to the normal screen. This allows for a flow of switching between multiple images following the winning/losing determination scene, which can be an ideal flow of performance.

[Right or Wrong 19] (2019-1937)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is set to a lower luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 261, when the player moves to the miss epilogue part via the teasing part in each of the SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the teasing part is "FDC", while the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the miss epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, when the player loses in each of the SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the frame lamp can be lit in white more dimly while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the win/lose branch, so that the player can be appropriately notified that the player has lost. Also, when the player moves to the miss epilogue part via the teasing part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the teasing part includes "D00", while the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the miss epilogue part is "888" or "444". This allows the frame lamp to light up in white when the SP final reach is lost, which is dimmer than the red flashing that occurs during a win/loss branch, allowing the player to be appropriately notified that they have lost.

[Yes or No 20] (2019-1938)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance, and the first notification performance for notifying the fact that the control will be made to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the fact that the control will be made to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part for notifying the fact that the control will be made to the advantageous state,
The first notification performance for notifying the user that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part for notifying the user that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second notification performance for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second notification performance for notifying the user that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part for notifying the user that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
the upper level table includes a first upper level table, a second upper level table, a third upper level table, and a fourth upper level table;
The luminance data table includes a luminance data table for a first notification performance, a luminance data table for a second notification performance, and a specific luminance data table,
The light emission control means
In an introduction part of a first notification performance for notifying that the advantageous state is not being controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a first higher level table and a brightness data table for the first notification performance;
In an introduction part of a second notification performance for notifying that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a second notification performance brightness data table;
In an epilogue part of the first notification performance for notifying that the advantageous state is not being controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a third higher-level table and a specific brightness data table;
In an epilogue part of the second notification performance for notifying that the advantageous state is not being controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a fourth higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the first notification performance for notifying the user that the advantageous state will not be achieved and the specific brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the second notification performance for notifying the user that the advantageous state will not be achieved are a common brightness data table.
The third higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time period,
The fourth higher level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period different from the first time period.

Specifically, in child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, the frame lamps are lit in a lighting mode at the time of a miss based on the grandchild table W14, similar to child table WD17 of the SP final reach. However, while the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, it controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 3900 msec in the SP final reach. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of a miss is common between different reaches, the time for lamp control by referring to the grandchild table can be made different. This allows the child table used for each of the different reaches to use a common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to when a win occurs for each of the different reaches, and by changing the reference time, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control while varying the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to a loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in an appropriate manner for each of the different reaches.

[Yes or No 21] (2019-1939)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification effect to be executed when it is determined that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state is as follows:
A first pattern including an introduction part until the result of controlling to the advantageous state is notified, and a first epilogue part in which the result of controlling to the advantageous state is notified;
a second pattern including an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the advantageous state will be achieved, a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved, and a relief notification part that is executed after the second epilogue part and in which it is notified that the advantageous state will be achieved;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
In a second epilogue part in the second pattern of the notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
In a relief notification part in the notification performance of the second pattern, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table corresponding to the relief notification part;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the relief notification part is set to be higher in luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

[Loser 1]
Following on from the winning/losing announcement part,
When it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, an image for when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed, and an epilogue part for when the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is executed, in which the determination that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is notified by a decorative pattern;
Thereafter, the display is switched to an image corresponding to the background at the start of the reach.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, if the result is a loss after the win/loss determination, a loss symbol is displayed against a blackout background in the loss epilogue part. After that, a transition image using the eye-catching screen is displayed, and then the screen switches to the normal background used when a reach begins. This allows the eye-catching screen to optimally show the screen transition when a loss occurs.

[Loser 2]
In the epilogue part when a player loses, an image when it has been determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed in a blacked-out state, and the central pattern of the decorative pattern is displayed in a fade-in state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the background gradually blacks out when a winning combination is lost, while the center pattern gradually fades in. This allows the image and center pattern when a winning combination is lost to be displayed in inverse proportion to the blackout and fade-in relationship, so that the relationship between the two makes the display when a winning combination is lost look optimal.

[Loser 3] (2020-400)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
the display means displays a decorative pattern in the second epilogue part so as to become gradually clearer, and displays a display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part so as to become gradually darker, thereby displaying a notification that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
The number of stages by which the display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part is made darker is greater than the number of stages by which the decorative pattern is made clearer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the number of steps required to black out the background when losing from 100% to 0% transparency is greater than the number of steps required to fade in the center pattern from 100% to 0% transparency. Specifically, the background is blacked out in eight steps from (X11) to (X18), while the center pattern is faded in in six steps from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image and center pattern when losing are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and fade-in, and because the number of steps of the change in transparency are different, the relationship between the two makes the display when losing look favorable.

[Loss 4]
When it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, the image is blacked out before the center pattern of the decorative pattern is faded in.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, when a winning combination is lost, the background blacks out before the center pattern fades in. This allows the image and center pattern when a winning combination is lost to be displayed in inverse proportion to the blackout and fade-in relationship, and because the blackout is faster than the pattern fade-in, the relationship between the two makes the display when a winning combination is lost look favorable.

[Loss 5]
When it is decided that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state before the blackout, the cut of the displayed image changes,
When it has been determined that control will not be performed in an advantageous state during blackout, the cut of the displayed image does not change.

Specifically, the image displayed during a miss before the blackout changes, whereas the image displayed during the blackout remains unchanged. This allows the blackout to be viewed favorably by starting the blackout with an image that remains unchanged. Note that a change in image includes a change in the picture on the screen, a change in the angle of the image, and a change in the displayed scene itself. Furthermore, no change in the image includes the same still image, or even if it is a moving image, the angle of the image does not change, and even if there is movement, only a portion of the image moves very slightly.

[Loser 6]
The image when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state goes black, and the center pattern of the decorative pattern fades in, so that the transmittance of the center pattern becomes 0%, and the period during which the transmittance of one image required for blackout becomes 0% is maintained for a predetermined period of time.
In a predetermined period, the symbol itself is caused to oscillate for at least two periods,
The predetermined period is longer than the period during which the image of the middle pattern changes from a state of 100% transparency to a state of 0% transparency, and is longer than the period during which the switching display is performed.

Specifically, as the background of the loss becomes blacked out and the middle pattern fades in, the middle pattern with a transparency of 0% and the blacked-out background with a transparency of 0% are displayed for a predetermined period of time, as shown in (X18) to (X20). This predetermined period includes a pattern swing period as shown in (X19) to (X20). The pattern swing period may be repeated for at least two periods, with one period being the period during which the middle pattern moves from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and back to the center position. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the middle pattern fades in from a transparency of 100% to a transparency of 0%. In addition, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye-catcher is displayed. According to this, since there is a predetermined period during which the middle pattern is displayed clearly in a display with a blacked-out background with a transparency of 0%, it is possible to appropriately show that it is a loss.

[Loser 7]
The switching display is a display configured to include information related to the gaming machine.

Specifically, as shown in Figs. 188 and 189, the eye-catching screen displays the title "POWER II" and images of the main characters Yume Yume, Jam, and Nana as information about the pachinko gaming machine 1. This allows the eye-catching image to accurately convey information about the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[Loser 8]
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the result of the game is notified, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the fact that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state after the result of the game is notified,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the result of the game is notified, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state after the result of the game is notified,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to inform the player that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state;
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, display the background.
After that, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the pattern confirmation command is issued.
After that, the display of the pattern changes in response to the change command.
The light emission control means includes:
in the second epilogue part, controlling a light-emitting means for effecting the performance using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
When the display is switched, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display, thereby controlling the light-emitting means for the effect;
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and the light emitting means for the effect is controlled;
When the stop display of the pattern is performed, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the fourth pattern stop to control the light emitting means for the fourth pattern, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for the performance;
When the variable display of the patterns is started, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table for the fourth pattern variation to control the light emitting means for the fourth pattern, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for the performance.

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 when it is lost will be explained. The production screen is switched to the image when it is lost after the production of the winning or losing decision. After that, after the blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, it is switched to the normal screen and the screen in which the pattern is confirmed and stopped is displayed. Also, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table when the winning or losing is decided to the brightness data table when it is lost. After that, it is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, it is switched to the brightness data table of the background when the variation starts. Here, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the timing of switching to the normal screen. Then, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 is switched from flashing to off by receiving the pattern confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the pattern confirmation command. In addition, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 switches from off to flashing when the change pattern command for the next change is received, but the background brightness data table does not switch even when the pattern confirmation command is received. This means that the brightness data table switches to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, and this brightness data table continues until the next change, so there is no need to create a separate brightness data table that corresponds to the reception of the pattern confirmation command, and the lamp effects can be displayed without any sense of incongruity from the effect when a miss occurs to the next change, making the series of effects look good.

[No. 9]
The brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the reach is a table that loops and refers to the brightness data until the change condition is met,
In the introduction part, the luminance data corresponding to the background is not used, but the luminance data corresponding to the background is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, when a specific change condition is met, such as when the game progresses to an SP reach, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach or other performance after the change, and thereafter, the lamp control based on the SP reach brightness data table is performed. In this case, while the SP reach performance is being performed, in the background of the lamp control based on the SP reach brightness data table, the switching of the brightness data in the background brightness data table continues without stopping as time passes. Also, when a specific change condition is met, such as when an error occurs, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the error brightness data table corresponding to the error state, and thereafter, the lamp control based on the error brightness data table is performed. In this case, in the error state, in the background of the lamp control based on the error brightness data table, the switching of the brightness data in the background brightness data table continues without stopping as time passes. This makes the series of performances that are being performed look more suitable.

[Loser 10]
After being switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part, the luminance data table corresponding to the background is used even if a pattern determination command is received, and thereafter, when there is no reserved ball, the luminance data table corresponding to the background continues to be used even if a customer waiting command is received.

Specifically, after the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, the background brightness data table continues to be used even if there is no pending memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received. This allows the same brightness data table to be used continuously after switching to the background brightness data table, so the lamp effects can be displayed without any sense of incongruity, and the series of effects can be displayed optimally.

[Loser 11]
When the pattern is confirmed, the light emitting means of the special pattern stops,
Upon receiving the symbol determination command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol changes from blinking to off.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 switches from flashing to off when a symbol determination command is received, which is the trigger for the effect of the symbol being determined and stopped. This makes it possible to clearly show the player the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 when it loses.

[Loser 12]
When the next change begins, the light emitting means of the special chart flashes,
When the next variation command is received, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol changes from off to flashing.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 switches from off to flashing when a next variation pattern command is received, which is the trigger for the start of the next variation. This makes it possible to clearly show the player the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 when it loses.

[Loser 13] (2020-401)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to inform the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, display the background.
After that, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the pattern confirmation command is issued.
After that, the display of the pattern changes in response to the change command.
The light emission control means
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
when the display is switched, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the display is switched;
when the background display is performed, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is continuously used to control the light emitting means;
When the stop display of the symbols is performed, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is continuously used to control the light emitting means;
When the varying display of the patterns is started, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the varying display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the varying display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, from the effect where the six friendly characters are disappointed at (X40) to the effect where the background image blacks out at (X41), the brightness data table for misses is used. After the background image blacks out, the eye-catching image is displayed. From the switching period to the eye-catching screen at (X42) to the pattern determination period at (X45), the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. After that, when a variation pattern command is received when there is a hold, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for background. In other words, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, and the brightness data table is maintained during the pattern determination period, and is switched to the brightness data table for the background at the timing of switching to the next variation. Also, during the pattern determination period, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used, which is the light-off. With this, after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data in the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received, making it easier to recognize a miss, and as a result, making the miss look favorable.

[Loser 14]
The final luminance data is off data, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part does not include luminance data for maintaining the light off.

Specifically, the final brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is data for maintaining the light off. The brightness data table for the background does not use data for maintaining the light off. As a result, since the brightness data table for the background does not use brightness data for maintaining the light off, being off when the background is displayed is unique to a miss, making it easier to recognize that it is a miss.

[Loser 15]
By receiving the customer waiting command, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the customer waiting command.

Specifically, if there is no reserved memory after the design is confirmed, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting command. In this way, since the brightness data table for background is switched to by receiving a customer waiting command, it is easy to recognize that it is a miss.

[Loser 16] (2020-402)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification performance for notifying the fact that the advantageous state will not be controlled includes an introduction part until the fact that the advantageous state will be controlled is notified, and a second epilogue part for notifying the fact that the advantageous state will not be controlled,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to inform the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, display the background.
After that, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the pattern confirmation command is issued.
The light emission control means
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
when the display is switched, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the display is switched;
switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display when the background display is performed, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the switch display is set to a higher luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

Specifically, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the final brightness data (off) in the brightness data table before the eye-catching image is displayed (when a miss occurs). This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated at a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easier to recognize the switch by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Loser 17]
The initial luminance data of the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is set to a higher luminance than the initial luminance data of the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part.

Specifically, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the initial brightness data in the brightness data table (not including turning off) that corresponds to the background at the start of the change. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated at a high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easy to recognize the switch by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Role-player Action 1] (2019-1940)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
In a first epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be performed in the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be performed to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 262 and Fig. 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothly lit in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals. In contrast, as shown in Fig. 261, in the case of a loss, the frame lamps are lit in dim white based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than when there is a win. As a result, when there is a win, the lighting color of the frame lamps switches at shorter intervals than when there is a loss, so that it is possible to easily inform the player that there is a win by the lighting mode of the frame lamps. Furthermore, when there is a win, the lighting of the frame lamps is more emphasized than when there is a loss, while when there is a loss, the lighting of the frame lamps can be made more subdued than when there is a win, and as a result, it is possible to easily inform the player of a win or a loss by the contrasting lamp modes.

[Role Action 2] (2019-1941)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for moving the movable body;
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing chromatic colors and the luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used in sequence.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, in the performance where the reel falls, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the frame lamp is lit so that the rainbow chromatic colors and the achromatic colors (RGB data of "333") alternate. This allows for a performance where the achromatic colors are occasionally inserted between the rainbow chromatic colors to emphasize the big win and congratulate the player. After that, in the performance where the ally character wins, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp is lit in smooth rainbow colors without achromatic colors, allowing for a performance where the player is calmly congratulated on the big win. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be viewed favorably by the player.

[Epilogue 1]
The epilogue part is a congratulatory part that follows the announcement of a decision to control the game to an advantageous state, and includes a scene in which an enemy character is defeated, no scene in which an ally character is damaged, and has fewer display changes than the introduction part.

Specifically, the aforementioned winning epilogue part is a part that does not transition in the event of a miss, and is a part that contains scenes in which enemy characters are at a disadvantage and scenes in which friendly characters are at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display switches in the presentation is less than in the teasing part. This allows appropriate presentation to be executed in each part, and the flow of the series of presentations can be displayed in an optimal way.

[Epilogue 2]
In the epilogue part, the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the lines of the character is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the lines of the character in the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the rate at which subtitles are displayed for the lines of characters in the epilogue part is higher than the rate at which subtitles are displayed for characters in the SP reach, which is the teasing part. By clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying. Furthermore, in a successful epilogue part, subtitles can enhance the feeling of celebration. Furthermore, since there are more screen changes in the teasing part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time may be shorter, which prevents the auxiliary subtitle display from interfering with the performance, and the primary focus can be on conveying the performance through image changes. This allows for an optimal performance to be executed in the teasing part.

[Epilogue 3]
In the epilogue part, dialogue subtitles are always displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, subtitles are always displayed for the dialogue in the epilogue part. This makes it easy to see what the characters are saying in the epilogue part, emphasizing the sense of celebration.

[Epilogue 4]
In the introduction, when an enemy character is injured, the dialogue sound is output and the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
In the epilogue part, when a dialogue sound is output in a scene in which an enemy character is damaged, a dialogue subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) above, subtitles are not displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene in the teasing part where the enemy character receives damage. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 110 (o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene in the winning epilogue part where the enemy character receives damage (the crab catching scene). In this way, subtitles that were not displayed in the teasing part are displayed in the winning epilogue part, emphasizing the sense of celebration.

[Epilogue 5]
There are a first introduction part and a second introduction part, each of which has a different development and number of lines, but the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to the output of a character's dialogue sound in the epilogue part is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to the output of a character's dialogue sound in the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, there are multiple types of SP Reach, which is the provocative part, and each has a different development of the performance and the number of lines. However, regardless of the SP Reach, the rate at which subtitles are displayed for the character's lines in the epilogue part is higher than the rate at which subtitles are displayed for the character during the SP Reach. This means that regardless of which SP Reach is executed, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in a successful epilogue part, subtitles can be used to enhance the feeling of celebration. Also, since there are more screen changes in the provocative part than in the epilogue part, the primary focus is on conveying the performance through image changes, and auxiliary subtitle display can be used to prevent the performance from being a hindrance. This allows for an optimal performance to be executed in the provocative part.

[Epilogue 6]
The dialogue subtitles that are displayed finally in the epilogue part are displayed longer than the dialogue subtitles with the same number of characters that are displayed in other scenes.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134 (s5)-(s6) above, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period of time than the subtitle display displayed in the teasing part. In this way, by displaying the subtitle display in the final winning epilogue part for a longer period of time, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the big win, emphasizing the sense of celebration. Note that when displaying subtitles, a display with a larger number of characters may be displayed for longer than a display with a smaller number of characters. Even in such a case, if the winning epilogue part and the teasing part have the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters), the display should be designed so that the winning epilogue part is displayed for a longer period of time.

[Epilogue 7]
When the movable body is located at the advanced position, a background display for the movable body is performed,
The movable body operates according to a retraction pattern in which the movable body is retracted, and the background display for the movable body is switched to an epilogue display before the retraction pattern is completed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 173 to 174, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed in accordance with the action of the reel falling. After that, the reel moves to the initial position according to a predetermined evacuation pattern. As the reel rises, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to a screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, the aesthetics of the display can be avoided by switching to a background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the reel completes its return action to the initial position.

[Epilogue 8]
The deformed member performs a storage operation and a return operation.
The timing of the switch to the epilogue display is linked to the start of the return movement.

Specifically, the premise is that the reel will return to its initial position, and the timing for switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue will be during the ascent related to the start of the return motion. In this way, the display corresponding to the epilogue is switched to at a timing related to the start of the return motion, so the display of the effect image corresponding to the reel motion ends before the reel returns to its initial position. This prevents a situation in which the effect image is displayed when the reel returns to its initial position, and does not impair the aesthetics of the presentation. The timing for switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same as the timing when the reel starts to rise. The reel may also perform a rotation or movement motion at the falling position.

[Epilogue 9]
During the return movement, the light emitting means of the movable body fades out and approaches extinction.

Specifically, when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so as to gradually turn off the reel lamp 9A based on a child table corresponding to the rising action of the reel in the reel lamp 9A and a grandchild table specified by the child table. In this way, the lighting state of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the reel rising, while the lighting state of the frame lamp makes the player pay attention to the screen indicating that the game has progressed to the latter half of the SP Reach A.

[Epilogue 10]
The transition is suggested by the background music that accompanies the image in the epilogue.
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, background music is output.

Specifically, the BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part can be suggested by the BGM, allowing the epilogue part to start in an optimal manner.

[Epilogue 11]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, a sound effect indicating the change is output.

Specifically, a sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of a display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is indicated by the sound effect, allowing the epilogue part to start in an appropriate manner.

[Epilogue 12]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, background music and a sound effect indicating a change are output.

Specifically, background music and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is indicated by the background music and sound effects, allowing the epilogue part to start in an optimal manner.

[Epilogue 13]
When the epilogue is displayed while the moving object is returning, the dialogue sound is not output.
In the epilogue display after the movable body is stored, a dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, when the reel returns to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and when the epilogue display is made after the reel returns to its initial position, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitles are displayed. This avoids the subtitles being displayed at a time when they are difficult to see, and allows the epilogue part to be executed optimally.

[Epilogue 14]
A dialogue sound is output when the moving object is retracted.
At the timing when the retraction of the movable body is completed, a dialogue sound is outputted, and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, when the props return to their initial positions, the dialogue sound is output in the epilogue display and subtitles are displayed. This allows the dialogue to be clearly recognized, and the epilogue part can be executed smoothly.

[Epilogue 15]
The display of the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds output at the end of the epilogue part ends at the timing when the pattern output starts.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 134 (s6) to 135 (s8), the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the pattern presentation is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping with the decorative pattern and from being mistaken for a message in the pattern presentation. This makes it possible to present the presentation in the winning epilogue part in an optimal way.

[Epilogue 17]
The video that was played during the epilogue becomes a still image when the symbols are finally displayed and the player recognizes the final completed symbols.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the symbol presentation is complete and the player is able to recognize the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol and the characters and other images displayed as the background are still images. This prevents the decorative symbol from becoming difficult to see because the background to the decorative symbol is a moving image.

[Epilogue 18]
The video that plays before the pattern starts to appear is treated as a still image.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) above, the image that was playing during the winning epilogue part becomes a still image just before the pattern release performance is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the pattern from becoming difficult to see from the moment the pattern release starts.

[Epilogue 19]
Special effects are applied at the same time as the image freezes.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special aspect reminiscent of a comic strip. By adding a special effect to the still image, it is possible to emphasize that the image has stopped and to suggest that the scene has changed, making it a suitable winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 20] (2019-1931)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 173 to Fig. 174, the appearance of the performance is switched to the winning epilogue part by the movement of the reel from the scene before the winning or losing decision in the instigation part. Also, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, while the reel is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to the screen corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the reel action to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Also, during the background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part displayed from (s3-5) to (s3-8) until the reel changes to the initial position, no dialogue sound is output. After that, in the state (s4) where the movement of the reel to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is finished, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitle display is displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position where it overlaps the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be prevented from being marred. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the reel is rising, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately. Furthermore, since the subtitles are displayed after the return to the initial position is completed, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately.

[Epilogue 21] (2019-1932)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
A first scene in which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introductory part;
a second scene in which, in the epilogue part, a final line subtitle is displayed in response to the final line sound uttered by the character, and then, after the display of the final line subtitle is terminated, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
While no switching effect is applied when the display of the final dialogue subtitle is terminated in the second scene, a switching effect is applied when the display of the dialogue subtitle is terminated in the first scene.

[Epilogue 22]
When the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
Although an effect is applied to the decorative pattern, the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, so that the effect does not interfere with the visibility of the small pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the symbols are displayed, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol are displayed. Then, an effect image using converging lines is added to the decorative symbol, but no effect image is added to the small symbol. Furthermore, the decorative symbol has a higher priority than the decorative symbol and the effect image, and is displayed in front. This enhances the effect of the effect image for the decorative symbol, while allowing the player to recognize that the small symbol is being displayed in a changing state, making it a suitable epilogue part for winning.

[Epilogue 23]
When the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
The movements of the decorative pattern and the small pattern are synchronized at the timing when the display of the decorative pattern is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, both the decorative and small patterns are displayed during the pattern presentation. Here, the movement of the decorative and small patterns may be synchronized at the timing when the presentation of the decorative patterns ends. Specifically, during the pattern swing period when the presentation of the decorative patterns ends and the patterns are swinging up and down, the small patterns may also swing up and down in the same manner as the decorative patterns. In this way, by synchronizing the movements of the decorative and small patterns, the flow of the presentation in the winning epilogue part can be made to look good.

[Epilogue 24]
When the symbols are drawn in the re-draw part, both the decorative symbols and the small symbols are displayed.
Although an effect is applied to the decorative pattern, the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, so that the effect does not interfere with the visibility of the small pattern.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 157 (B1) to 158 (B5), when the symbols are displayed in the re-draw part, both the decorative symbols and the small symbols are displayed. Then, an effect image using converging lines is added to the decorative symbols, but no effect image is added to the small symbols. Furthermore, the decorative symbols have a higher priority than the decorative symbols and effect images, and are displayed in the foreground. This makes it possible to increase the effect of the effect image for the decorative symbols, while letting the player know that the small symbols are being displayed in a changing state.

[Epilogue 25]
Before the redraw part, the small symbols are in a state indicating that it has been determined that they will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the small symbols change again in conjunction with the transition to the redraw part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the patterns are displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be displayed in a aligned state. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-selection part, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may change again. This allows the decorative pattern and the small pattern to be synchronized for an optimal display.

[Epilogue 26] (2019-1942)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a higher-level table configured with storage destination data indicating a storage destination of a luminance data table and a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The epilogue part is,
A first scene in which a story development corresponding to an epilogue part is displayed;
A second scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means
in a first scene in the epilogue part, a first upper table is used to control the light emitting means;
in a second scene in the epilogue part, a second upper table is used to control the light emitting means;
in a first scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and at a specific timing, switching from the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part to a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for achieving the rainbow light emitting mode;
In a second scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for enlarged display, and at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for changing the light emitting mode to a rainbow light emitting mode from the luminance data table for enlarged display;
the luminance data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode used in the first scene in the epilogue part and the luminance data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode used in the second scene in the epilogue part are a common luminance data table,
The first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part and storage destination data of a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode,
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data for a luminance data table for enlarged display and storage destination data for a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table used during the winning notification performance and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning pattern, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used to control the lamps to light up in rainbow colors without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each performance with a unified performance. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using frame lamps, while reducing data capacity.

[Epilogue 27] (2019-1943)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a higher-level table configured with storage destination data indicating a storage destination of a luminance data table and a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The epilogue part includes a result notification scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area and the result of the notification performance is notified,
The re-draw part includes a re-draw result notification scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area and the result of the re-draw is notified,
The light emission control means
in a result notification scene in the epilogue part, a first upper table is used to control the light emitting means;
In a re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, the light emitting means is controlled using a second superior table;
In the result-informing scene in the epilogue part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for enlarged display of the result-informing scene, and at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for changing the light-emitting mode to a rainbow light-emitting mode from the luminance data table for enlarged display of the result-informing scene;
In a re-draw result notifying scene in the re-draw part, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for enlarged display of the re-draw result notifying scene, and at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for making the re-draw result notifying scene into a rainbow light emitting mode from the luminance data table for enlarged display of the re-draw result notifying scene;
The brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode used in the result notifying scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode used in the re-lottery result notifying scene in the re-lottery part are a common brightness data table,
The first higher level table is composed of storage destination data of a luminance data table for enlarging and displaying the result-announcement scene, and storage destination data of a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light-emitting mode,
The second higher level table is made up of storage destination data of a luminance data table for enlarged display of the re-lottery result informing scene, and storage destination data of a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-draw part, grandchild table W1 is used in common with child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for lamp control when the pattern is finally determined after the re-draw. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control while allowing the player to see a unified presentation even in different parts (timings). As a result, the presentation in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part can be better shown to the player while reducing the data capacity.

[Epilogue 28] (2020-399)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The display means includes:
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area while displaying the story development corresponding to the epilogue part;
After that, the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbol is located at the edge of the display area of the screen (the upper left corner of the screen). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the winning epilogue video ends, the reduced symbol is erased and the central area of the screen is used to enlarge and display the symbol. In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image, the brightness data table switches from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display. According to this, when the winning epilogue part video is playing, the reduced symbol is positioned at the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the winning epilogue part video, and when the winning epilogue part video ends and the symbol is displayed, the decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, so that the big win symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, scene changes can be made to look good. In this way, the epilogue part can be made to look good.

[Epilogue 29]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, the decorative patterns are aligned and positioned at the edge of the display area.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbols are displayed aligned with "222" at the edge of the display area of the screen (the upper left corner of the screen). This allows the player to recognize that a big win has been displayed due to the reduced decorative symbols, even while the winning epilogue video is playing.

[Epilogue 30]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, a decorative pattern is positioned on an edge of the display area;
In relation to the timing when the display of the image corresponding to the epilogue ends, the output of the displayed dialogue ends, the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed on the edge of the display area ends, and the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative pattern is displayed at an edge position in the display area of the screen (the upper left corner of the screen). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes still and the winning epilogue video ends, the subtitle display displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced pattern in the upper left corner is erased, and the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the central area of the screen. This prevents the subtitle display from overlapping with the decorative pattern, and prevents the user from mistaking the display of some kind of message for another when the pattern is displayed, allowing the winning epilogue part to be displayed in an optimal way.

[Epilogue 31]
At the start of the introductory part, a decorative pattern is located at the edge of the display area.

Specifically, the decorative pattern may be set to move to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode when the SP reach begins. By positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid interfering with the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and to make the series of performances look optimal.

[Re-draw performance 1]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-draw performance is executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
Execute the first re-draw performance or the second re-draw performance using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery performance is started using the "2" symbol as is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-lottery performance starts to change from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol advance performance is executed in which symbols are replaced by rapid changes from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and when the re-lottery performance starts, the symbol advance performance is executed using the symbol that was temporarily stopped, so that it is easy for the player to understand which decorative symbol the re-lottery started from. As a result, the flow of the series of performances can be clearly seen.

[Re-selection performance 2]
When an image corresponding to the background where the arrangement of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped is displayed, the light emitting means is turned off, and when a screen is shifted to a re-lottery screen, the light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the re-lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow colors in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp goes out once before the re-draw performance is executed, and then lights up in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-draw performance, so that the player can be easily informed that the re-draw performance is about to begin by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

[Re-selection effect 3]
When moving to the re-draw screen, the decoration pattern alignment is temporarily stopped,
When the display is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern alignment is displayed with a swaying effect, but the image corresponding to the background and the light emission mode of the light-emitting means are switched to those for re-drawing while the swaying display with the effect is maintained.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (A5) above, in the final state of the pattern release presentation in the winning epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying and an effect image with converging lines is added. When switching from that state to the background of the re-draw presentation as shown in (A6), the effect image with converging lines continues to be added. Also, the game effect lamp 9 switches from a smooth rainbow light to being turned off. In other words, from the pattern release to the re-draw presentation, the pattern swaying and effect mode continue, while the background and lamps switch. This makes it easy to see which decorative pattern the re-draw presentation started from.

[Re-selection effect 4]
When the pattern feed begins, the decorative pattern that has been displayed since the epilogue shrinks,
The image is reduced and then the image begins to move.

Specifically, when the symbol-sending effect in the re-draw effect starts, the decorative symbol that has remained displayed since the winning epilogue part starts changing from a reduced state. This makes it possible to clearly show the flow of the series of effects without having to execute a process to change to a different decorative symbol.

[Re-selection effect 5]
The image feed starts at a reduced size, and all other images are reduced to the same size.

Specifically, in the symbol advance performance, the change starts with a reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol during the change is a uniform reduced size. This makes the change during the symbol advance performance look smoother, and makes the flow of the series of performances look better.

[Re-selection effect 6]
While a plurality of kinds of decorative patterns are being sent in a reduced size, the display transitions in the order of an action prompt display, acceptance of the action, display of a decorative pattern slightly larger than the reduced size, and display of the enlarged decorative pattern.

Specifically, as shown in the flow of Fig. 144 (A10) to Fig. 156 (A46) and Fig. 157 (B1) to Fig. 158 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery presentation, a reduced-sized decorative pattern is used to advance the pattern, and a button action prompt is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, a pattern release presentation is executed in which the pattern is enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative pattern that will be finally notified is enlarged and displayed from the moment the pattern is released. In this way, since the pattern that will finally be notified begins to expand, it is possible to clearly show the player what the final notification pattern will be.

[Re-selection effect 7]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-selection performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of re-selection performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the multiple types of re-draw performance, in which a replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-draw performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-draw is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-draw performance is started using the "2" symbol as it is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-draw performance starts to change from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-draw performance, a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2". During the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order, from "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and then a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the "2" symbol is displayed again. In this way, the re-draw performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after multiple types of decorative symbols are changed. In this way, the final display result is not displayed immediately, and the symbol-sending performance in which all the decorative symbols are displayed can make the flow of the series of performances look good. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, then goes off, and a re-lottery performance is executed, and when the symbol is displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting mode of the frame lamp for the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow colors when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed swaying is continued even during the period when the symbol is confirmed. In this way, the system is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is during the short symbol confirmation period without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no need to increase the data capacity excessively.

[Re-selection effect 8]
The pattern transfer according to a predetermined pattern is a performance in which the pattern is temporarily stopped and then the next pattern is transferred in order, and after the last pattern is transferred, the pattern is returned to the temporarily stopped pattern and then the next pattern is transferred in order.
The predetermined pattern is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 in that order, which is then looped.

Specifically, in the symbol sending performance during the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then all the decorative symbols are sent again in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1". In this way, the numbers of the decorative symbols are sent in order, which makes the flow of the series of performances look good.

[Re-draw performance 9]
While the patterns are being sent in a predetermined pattern, all the decorative patterns being sent are displayed with the same resolution as when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped.

Specifically, in the symbol forwarding performance during the re-draw performance, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbol when it was temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during the change. Specifically, the symbols are switched as follows: "2" symbol with 0% transparency, "2" symbol with 50% transparency, "3" symbol with 0% transparency, "3" symbol with 50% transparency, "4" symbol with 0% transparency, and "4" symbol with 50% transparency. This allows all symbols to be displayed properly with low transparency during the symbol forwarding performance, so it is possible to know what symbol is being sent.

[Re-draw performance 10]
After the symbol transmission is started, the display time of each of the multiple types of decorative symbols is the same until a notification is made as to whether or not the symbol will be promoted.

Specifically, in the symbol-sending performance during the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "7," and "1," but the time each symbol is displayed is the same. This allows all symbols to be displayed for a fixed period of time, making the flow of the series of effects look good.

[Re-draw performance 11]
The action prompt is displayed while the pattern is being sent.
The action prompting display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the pattern being fed.

Specifically, during the symbol forwarding performance, a promotion display formed from a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position at which the promotion display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position at which the change in the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance is displayed. In this way, the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol forwarding. Note that a portion of the promotion display may overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance.

[Re-draw performance 12]
The action prompting display is started during the advancement of the symbols, that is, during the second loop of a predetermined pattern.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 176 and 177, the promotion display begins at (A24) and (A25) after the change in which all decorative symbols are displayed during the symbol advance performance has been repeated twice. In this way, the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol advance pattern has been repeated twice, allowing the player to clearly recognize the symbol advance performance.

[Re-draw performance 13]
When the symbol feed starts from the symbol "1", the timing when the action prompt display is performed is, for example, the symbol "5",
When the symbol advance starts from the symbol "4", the timing when the action prompting display is performed is, for example, the symbol "8".

Specifically, the symbol at the start of the re-draw performance may be other than the 2 symbol. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image is displayed as the action prompt is constant. For example, in the case of the 2 symbol, the timing at which the action prompt is displayed is the timing at which the 2 symbol is displayed again. Similarly, in the case of the 5 symbol, the timing at which the action prompt is displayed should be the timing at which the 5 symbol is displayed again. In other words, regardless of which symbol starts the re-draw performance, the number of symbols sent is the same. This allows for constant control, reducing the processing burden.

[Re-draw performance 14]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-selection performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of re-selection performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part.
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a repeat display is performed in which the second symbol is repeatedly displayed after displaying the second symbol in the first half part, and a third re-selection performance is executed in which the second symbol is displayed again in the second half part;
The first re-selection effect, the second re-selection effect, and the third re-selection effect are configured to have the same duration,
The light emission control means includes:
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, there are provided patterns in which an even number symbol (e.g., 2) is displayed followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2), and an even number symbol (e.g., 2) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3). In addition, there may be a pattern in which an odd number symbol (e.g., 7) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7). In a performance in which symbols are sent from odd number symbols to odd number symbols, it is sufficient that the same odd number symbols are sent in all symbol transfers. However, in either pattern, the length of the symbol transfer period in the re-draw performance may be designed to be the same. This allows for an appropriate re-draw performance in either pattern without increasing data capacity. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, then goes off, and a re-lottery performance is executed, and when the symbol is displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting mode of the frame lamp for the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow colors when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed swaying is continued even during the period when the symbol is confirmed. In this way, the system is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is during the short symbol confirmation period without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no need to increase the data capacity excessively.

[Re-draw performance 15]
The re-draw performance is displayed by combining the display data other than the decorative pattern with the display data of various decorative patterns, and reproducing each pattern of multiple types of re-draw performance.
By using common display data in each re-draw performance, the performance time is common between the respective re-draw performances, and only the type of symbols being sent and the symbols to be displayed in the symbol output are different in each re-draw performance.

Specifically, the lottery presentation uses the same data whether the pattern is to display an even number symbol (e.g., 2) followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2), an even number symbol (e.g., 2) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3), or an odd number symbol (e.g., 7) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7). In other words, the presentation data is the same, and the design changes the data related to the decorative symbols depending on the pattern. This eliminates the need for dedicated patterns, reducing the amount of data.

[Re-draw performance 16]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-draw performance is executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the multiple types of re-draw performance, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first symbol is displayed with the same or substantially the same animation when the first symbol is displayed once in the epilogue part and when the first symbol is displayed again in the latter half part of the second re-draw performance;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, the pattern display in the above-mentioned FIG. 141 (A1) to FIG. 142 (A5) parts and the pattern display in the FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C5) parts are executed using approximately the same image. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image of the "2" symbol, and the pattern display is executed in a manner in which the background part is different. According to this, since the image of the pattern display can be made approximately the same, it is possible to easily show the player that the promotion to the probability variable symbol has not been made. It is also possible to make the image of the pattern display part, including the background, exactly the same. Also, in a state in which the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, after the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, a re-draw performance is executed with a turn-off in between, and when the symbol is displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-draw performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25). This prevents the player from mistakingly believing that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been confirmed based on the lighting state of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the rainbow lighting when the "3" and "2" symbols are displayed swaying is continued during the period in which the symbols are subsequently confirmed. In this way, during the short symbol confirmation period, the system is designed so that lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as is without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no need to increase data capacity excessively.

[Re-draw performance 17]
The animation when the first identification information is displayed includes an animation in which the pattern is displayed and then enlarged until it reaches the first position.

Specifically, in the aforementioned pattern display performance, a series of effects is executed in which the pattern is first enlarged and then returned to normal size in the center of the screen. This allows the pattern display performance to be displayed in an optimal way by enlarging and reducing the pattern.

[Re-draw performance 18]
When temporarily stopping the arrangement of decorative symbols before the re-draw is performed and when informing whether the arrangement of decorative symbols will be upgraded in the notification part, the display means refers to common display data;
The common display data is combined with display data for a plurality of kinds of decorative patterns to display a plurality of kinds of patterns.

Specifically, in the pattern display performance described above, common pattern display data may be used for the data for the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance. Then, a series of pattern display performances may be executed using the common pattern display data and a combination of multiple decorative patterns. This makes it possible to reduce data capacity while still providing a good appearance for the pattern display performance. Note that substantially the same data may be used for the data for the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance.

[Re-draw performance 19]
In the event that you are not promoted in the re-draw performance,
The light emission mode in displaying the patterns is the same when the decorative pattern alignment is temporarily stopped before the re-draw is performed and when a notice is given that the decorative pattern alignment will not be upgraded by the re-draw.

Specifically, in child table WD21 of the re-draw part, grandchild table W1 is used in common with child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for lamp control when the pattern is finally determined after the re-draw. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control while allowing the player to see a unified presentation even in different parts (timings). As a result, the presentation in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part can be better shown to the player while reducing the data capacity.

[Re-draw performance 20]
In the case of promotion in the re-draw performance,
The lighting state of the pattern is different when the decorative pattern alignment is temporarily stopped before the re-draw is performed and when the decorative pattern alignment is promoted by the re-draw.
The light emission mode in the pattern display is more intense when a notice is given that the decorative pattern arrangement will be upgraded by the re-draw than when the decorative pattern arrangement is temporarily stopped before the re-draw is executed.

Specifically, in child table WD20 in the re-draw part, the frame lamps are lit in the same rainbow colors as child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 in the winning epilogue part as part of the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-draw, but the rainbow lighting during times tB5 to tB9 when the symbol "2" is upgraded to a "3" through the re-draw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the symbol "2" temporarily stops in the winning epilogue part. This allows the player to be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol through the re-draw by the lighting of the frame lamps.

[Re-draw performance 21]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-draw performance is executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the multiple types of re-draw performance, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the latter half part, from when the first pattern is displayed again until a pattern determination period begins, a swaying display is performed in which the display mode of the first pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode, so that the first pattern is displayed as if it is swaying;
In the latter half part, from when the second pattern is displayed until a pattern determination period begins, a swinging display is performed in which the display mode of the second pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode so that the second pattern is displayed as if it is swinging;
The first mode is a mode in which the player can easily visually recognize the symbols compared to either the second mode or the third mode,
The means of performance execution are:
In the re-lottery part, a display for prompting a player to take an action can be executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-draw performance, if the action is executed at a first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol will be in a second mode when a predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the first re-draw performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-selection performance, if the action is executed at a second timing different from the first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes a third mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the first re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-lottery performance, regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is performed in which the swaying display of the second pattern is difficult to see from a predetermined timing, and then the second pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when a pattern determination period is reached, the second pattern is displayed stopped in the first mode while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the second pattern;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-draw performance, if the action is performed at a first timing, the first symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol becomes a second mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-draw performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, if the action is performed at a second timing, the first symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol will be in a third mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, whether the action is executed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is executed to make the swaying display of the first pattern difficult to see from a predetermined timing, and then the first pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when a pattern determination period is reached, the first pattern is displayed stopped in a first manner while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first pattern;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, an action prompt display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed while the symbols are being sent in the re-draw effect. During the period in which the action prompt display is displayed, the player operates the push button 31B to execute the common symbol release effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common symbol release effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the symbols as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, the symbols are wobbled during the symbol wobbled period. The symbol wobbled period differs depending on the timing of the button operation. Thus, after the symbol wobbled period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the right, at the second operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the left, and at the third operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is inserted as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) afterwards, and an effect in which the symbols rotate, shrink, and then sway is executed. By doing this, regardless of the timing of the push button 31B operation, the symbols can be stopped cleanly by executing the common effect, and the series of effects can be displayed in an optimal manner.

[Re-draw performance 22]
When an operation is performed at a first timing of the effective period of the operation, after a notification of whether or not the player has been promoted is made, the decorative pattern is displayed flickeringly until a predetermined timing for the change arrives;
When an action is performed at a second timing earlier than the first timing of the valid period of the action, after notification of whether or not the action is to be promoted, a decorative pattern is displayed flickeringly by the amount by which the action was earlier than the first timing until a predetermined timing of the change arrives, and the time is absorbed.

Specifically, when the push button 31B is operated at a first timing during the effective operation period, a notification of whether or not the player will be promoted is issued, and then the display of the swaying decorative pattern is displayed (an example of no operation in FIG. 267 (L3)). When the push button 31B is operated at a second timing earlier than the first timing during the effective operation period, the display of the swaying decorative pattern is extended by the amount of time that it was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not the player will be promoted (an example of the operation in FIG. 267 (L2)). When the push button 31B is operated at a third timing earlier than the second timing during the effective operation period, the display of the swaying decorative pattern is extended by the amount of time that it was earlier than the second timing after the notification of whether or not the player will be promoted (an example of the operation in FIG. 267 (L1)). In this way, regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, the duration of the performance can be absorbed by the time the pattern sway. By performing a common performance after that, the pattern can be stopped cleanly, and the series of performances can be displayed in a favorable manner.

[Re-draw performance 23]
The predetermined performance starts when the swaying decorative pattern starts to expand and rotate while a white light flashes.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, after a whiteout is executed as a common effect, a different effect is executed in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once, which is different from the previous pattern appearance. In this way, regardless of the pattern position in the swaying of the scale absorption pattern, a different appearance is executed after the whiteout, so that the flow of the appearance until the pattern stops does not feel unnatural.

[Re-draw performance 24]
The decorative pattern is displayed so as to sway around the first position as an axis.
The swaying display is such that the decorative patterns are positioned in the order of the first position, the second position, the third position, the second position, the first position, the fourth position, the fifth position, the fourth position, the first position, and the second position, and the predetermined performance is designed so that when the fixed period is reached, the decorative patterns are always swayed and displayed in the order of the second position, the first position, and so on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, during the symbol shaking period, the symbol shakes backward from (J10) to (J12), and then shakes forward from (J13) to (J14), changing to the initial position. After that, the symbol shakes forward from (J15) to (J16), and then shakes backward from (J17) to (J18), changing to the initial position. This series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the symbol determination period, the symbol is designed to always be in the initial position facing forward, as shown at (J18). This allows the symbol to be determined and stopped in a manner that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

[Re-draw performance 25]
The starting point when the light emitting means emits light in rainbow during the second part is to emit light in rainbow at the start of the predetermined performance.

Specifically, it is designed so that the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow colors at the whiteout timing of (J1) in Figure 267. The timing of (J1) is an effect that is executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point where such a common effect is executed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, it is easy for the designer to decide the start trigger. Note that the start trigger may be the timing of (J2) when the common start display starts rather than the timing of (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed effect.

[Re-draw performance 26]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-draw performance is executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the multiple types of re-draw performance, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the epilogue part, when the first pattern is displayed once, the display mode of the first pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode, so that the first pattern is displayed as if it is swaying;
In the case of transition from the epilogue part to the re-selection part, there are a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in a first manner, a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in a second manner, and a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third manner,
The performance execution means performs a specific display that makes the first pattern difficult to see when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode, when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the second mode, and when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the third mode, and displays the first pattern in a common display mode to execute the first re-selection performance or the second re-selection performance;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance is used to control the light emitting means.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when an image showing the stick controller 31A and a time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, a period of time for the symbols to shake to absorb the scale may be provided in the time until the specified timing when the re-selection performance is executed (the symbol shaking period from (K4)). Then, when the specified timing arrives and the re-selection performance is executed, a common performance accompanied by a white-out as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. In this way, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbols are first displayed shaking, then the common performance accompanied by a white-out is executed, and then the re-selection performance is executed. This makes it possible to prevent discomfort from occurring in the pattern movement at the start of the re-selection, and makes the series of performances look good.

[Re-draw performance 27]
Regardless of which of the multiple types of introduction parts you win, the re-draw performance is the same.

Specifically, the time from when the whiteout screen appears until the re-draw effect is executed can be made common to all of the multiple reaches. This can reduce the data size of the effect data.

[Re-draw performance 28]
The movement of the decorative pattern after the specific display is an extension of the movement of the decorative pattern that was once swaying before the specific display.

Specifically, the movement of the pattern after the white-out screen may be an extension of the movement of the pattern before the white-out screen. For example, if the movement of the pattern before the white-out screen is a movement in which the pattern sways from the front to the back on the spot on an axis around the vertical direction of the pattern, the movement after the white-out screen may be a movement in which the pattern expands and rotates once in the clockwise direction on an axis around the vertical direction of the pattern. In this way, by displaying a white-out between the movement that is an extension of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the pattern movement from feeling unnatural, and to make the series of performances look good.

[Re-draw performance 29]
The plurality of types of introduction parts include a predetermined introduction part which is a branch of notification as to whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state and is not notified by operation of the operation means as a trigger,
In the predetermined introduction part, since there is no point where the scale is shifted, if it is determined that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state in the predetermined introduction part, there is no shaking in the swaying display of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern until the re-draw performance is executed, but the same re-draw performance as that of a reach where the scale shift occurs is executed.

Specifically, among the multiple SP reaches, there are some that do not notify the player of any button operation or other prompts at the branch point when determining whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state. In such SP reaches, no time shift occurs due to the operation. However, even in such SP reaches, a re-draw performance can be executed in the same way as in SP reaches that do cause a time shift. In this way, a common performance can be used regardless of whether or not there is a time shift, so that no sense of incongruity is created even when there is only one re-draw performance. Furthermore, by limiting the re-draw performance to one, the data volume can be reduced.

[Re-draw performance 30]
In the flow of going to the re-draw performance after the swinging display of the decorative pattern at the big win in the specified introduction part,
The timing of the transition to the re-draw performance is designed so that the movement is an extension of the decorative pattern after the specific display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, the timing of the movement of the patterns after the white-out screen is set so that it is an extension of the movement of the patterns before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the patterns before the white-out screen is designed to be one of a series of movements in which the patterns move from a right-side position (K3) to a front position (K5) to a left-side position (K6). In other words, when the patterns are swinging in a clockwise direction in one of a series of movements, a white-out due to a re-draw performance is executed, and then the patterns continue to expand and rotate to the right. In this way, the series of clockwise movements of the patterns from the pattern swinging period to the re-draw performance can be used to prevent the movement of the patterns from feeling unnatural.

<Terminology>
The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above. In the following, some terms used in the present specification will be explained.

"Variable display" (fluctuating display) includes the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), multiple types of normal symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols.

The "changes" in the patterns include updating the display of multiple types of patterns, such as multiple types of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern), multiple types of normal patterns, and multiple types of decorative patterns, scrolling the display of multiple types of patterns, transforming one or more patterns, enlarging/reducing one or more patterns, turning on/flashing/turning off lamps (fourth pattern unit 50, special pattern 1 variable display unit 53, special pattern 2 variable display unit 54, etc.), etc.

The "decorative symbols" include symbols that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game.

"Reduced symbols" are symbols that are smaller than the decorative symbols, and include symbols that are smaller than the decorative symbols. When the reduced symbols are displayed, a number symbol that is the same as the decorative symbol is displayed on the edge of the screen, but smaller than the decorative symbol.

The "small patterns" include patterns that correspond to the changing display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a smaller size than the decorative patterns. The small patterns are arranged horizontally in a row and correspond to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R.

"Confirmation of the pattern" includes the stopping of the fluctuations of the fourth pattern unit 50, the special pattern 1 variable display section 53, the special pattern 2 variable display section 54, the decorative patterns, etc., which had been changing, and the final determination of the pattern in that special pattern game. For example, this includes a state in which the fluctuations of the decorative patterns changing in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns changing in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns changing in the right decorative pattern display area 5R have all stopped.

The "pattern determination period" includes a period during which the display result is determined by stopping the fluctuations of the fourth pattern unit 50, the special pattern 1 variable display unit 53, the special pattern 2 variable display unit 54, the decorative patterns, etc., which had been changing. For example, it includes a state in which the fluctuations of the decorative patterns changing in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns changing in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns changing in the right decorative pattern display area 5R each stop, and the display result is displayed definitively.

"Reach" includes the situation where decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be displayed in a variable manner when the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed form part of a winning combination, and includes a situation where, for example, the decorative symbol "2" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol "2" stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, but the decorative symbol display in the center decorative symbol display area 5C continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

"Turning off" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes a state in which the value of the luminance data for turning on (emitting light from) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is "0" (the value indicating the lowest luminance). Note that "turning off" of the lighting means (light emitting means) may also include a state in which the value of the luminance data for turning on (emitting light from) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is a value close to the luminance data "0" corresponding to turning off, such as "1" or "2". Note that a state in which the value of the luminance data for turning on (emitting light from) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is a value close to the luminance data "0" corresponding to turning off, such as "1" or "2", may be included in "turning on" or "almost turning off".

"Lighting" or "light emission" of the lighting means (light emitting means) refers to a state in which the value of the luminance data for lighting (emitting light) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is higher than when it is off, and includes a state in which the value of the luminance data is equal to or greater than the luminance data value ("0") corresponding to the above-mentioned "off." "Lighting" refers to constant lighting, in which the lamp is always on, wave lighting, in which multiple lamps are switched from off to on in sequence, and hazy lighting, in which the lamp is dimly lit while changing its luminance.

"Flashing" of a lighting means (light-emitting means) includes a state in which the lamp (lighting means, light-emitting means) is in a state other than "off", "almost off", or "on", and includes the lamp repeating "on" and "off" over time. Also, "flash" of a lighting means (light-emitting means) includes the lamp repeating "on" and "almost off" over time.

"Brightness" is a value indicating the brightness of a lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), and in this embodiment, the brightness data is expressed in hexadecimal as data corresponding to brightness. For example, when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "0", the lamp is controlled so that the brightness of the specific lamp is the lowest (the lamp is dimmed), and when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "F", the lamp is controlled so that the brightness of the specific lamp is the highest (the lamp is brightest). As described above, the brightness data corresponds to the value of the current flowing through the lamp, and when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "0", the current flowing through the specific lamp is the smallest, and when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "F", the current flowing through the specific lamp is the largest. Note that "lamp" is not limited to LED (light emitting diode) lamps, but includes any type of lamp, such as EL (electroluminescence) lamps and incandescent light bulbs.

The "lighting color" or "emission color" of a lamp includes colors represented by the light emitted by one or more light-emitting elements contained in the lamp. For example, if a lamp is composed of an LED consisting of three light-emitting elements, such as "R" (red), "G" (green), and "B" (blue), the LED lights up in various colors as the three light-emitting elements emit light depending on the current to the three light-emitting elements, which is adjusted by an LED driver based on brightness data. Note that the "lighting color" of a lamp varies depending on the color of the light-emitting element; for example, in the case of an LED consisting of only "W" (white) light-emitting elements, the lamp lights up in white, although the brightness varies depending on the current flowing, and in the case of an LED consisting of only "R" (red) light-emitting elements, the lamp lights up in red, although the brightness varies depending on the current flowing.

The "rainbow colors" (seven colors) of the lamp's lighting colors include colors that are made up of seven different colors. For example, the "rainbow colors" include red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. Note that the "rainbow colors" are not limited to the colors mentioned above, and may be made up of the other seven colors. Even with the same "rainbow colors," the lighting pattern of rainbow colors may differ depending on the set brightness data, just as the lighting pattern differs between smooth lighting based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in FIG. 225 and blinking based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in FIG. 256.

"Colors corresponding to characters" include colors that are predefined for each character that appears in the effects of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the color corresponding to the character Yume Yume-chan is green, the color corresponding to Jam-chan is purple, and the color corresponding to Bakuchu is red, and so on.

"The light color corresponding to a character" is the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9, and includes colors that are predetermined for each character that appears in the effects of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, "the light color corresponding to a character" includes the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in green corresponding to the Yume Yume character, the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in purple corresponding to Jam-chan, and the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in red corresponding to Bakuchu.

"Dialogue sounds" include sounds that correspond to words spoken by characters appearing in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are output in time with the words spoken by those characters. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, sounds (dialogue sounds) that correspond to words spoken by characters are output in time with the image of the character that appears in the performance.

"Dialogue subtitles" include characters corresponding to dialogue sounds that are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when the dialogue sounds are output. Dialogue subtitles are also referred to as subtitle displays.

"Physical sounds" include physical sounds that are generated by the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, physical sounds that would be generated by the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance are output in accordance with the images of the objects.

"Onomatopoeia" includes simulated sounds that express the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, simulated sounds (onomatopoeia) that express the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance are output in accordance with the images of the objects.

"Character action" includes a performance in which a character appearing in the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs some kind of action. For example, it includes an action in which the Yume Yume character chases the Bakuchu character.

The "re-draw effect" includes an effect that is executed before the pattern is determined, in which a normal jackpot pattern that does not result in a special jackpot (for example, an even number pattern such as a "2") is temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing display of the decorative pattern, and then the normal jackpot pattern is upgraded to a special jackpot pattern (for example, an odd number pattern such as a "3") to arouse interest in whether or not the normal jackpot pattern will be upgraded to a special jackpot pattern (for example, an odd number pattern such as a "3").

"Replacement display" is an effect included in the "re-draw effect", and includes the display of an image in which a temporarily stopped decorative symbol is replaced by other symbols in sequence, causing the decorative symbols to change one after another. In this embodiment, "replacement display" includes a display in which the symbol "2" fluctuates at high speed and is replaced by other symbols in sequence, until the symbol "2" or "3" finally stops.

"Repeated display" refers to the repetition of the same display, and refers to the repetition of a display using the same animation. This is an effect included in the "re-lottery effect", and includes a display in which a decorative pattern that has been temporarily stopped is displayed multiple times with the same animation. As an example, "repeated display" includes a display in which the "7" pattern changes rapidly and is replaced by other patterns in sequence, until the "7" pattern finally stops.

The "swaying display" displays the decorative pattern while swaying, indicating that the change has not ended and is still ongoing.

A "stop display" is when the decorative pattern is displayed still and not moving, indicating that the fluctuation has ended.

"Swing speed" refers to the speed at which the decorative pattern moves from the first position to the second position while being displayed swinging.

The "first pattern aspect," "second pattern aspect," and "third pattern aspect" are aspects that indicate the position of the decorative pattern. For example, when the decorative pattern is displayed swinging up and down, if the first aspect is in the center position, the second aspect is the upper position, and the third aspect is the lower position. Also, when the decorative pattern is displayed swinging back and forth, if the first aspect is in the front position, the second aspect is the left-facing position, and the third aspect is the right-facing position.

The "fanfare effect" is an effect that is executed at the start of a jackpot game state, and notifies the player that a jackpot game state has been reached.

"Advancing a movable body (prop)" refers to the action of the movable prop moving from its initial position. The edge of the movable area within which the prop moves is the advancing position.

"Retreating a movable body (prop)" refers to the action of the movable body (prop) moving from an advanced position to an initial position. The initial position of the movable area within which the prop moves is the retrenched position.

"Effect display for moving movable body" is a display to enhance the visual effect around the reel on the screen as the reel moves to the advance position as a movable body. For example, an effect image is displayed to make the reel movement stand out when the reach develops into the latter half or when a jackpot is announced.

"Story development" refers to the progression of a story or a series of performances. In other words, the story is presented to the player in a continuous flow, without interruption by scene changes or the like.

"Part" and "scene" each refer to a section that makes up a performance, with a part being a larger section than a scene. Parts are divided according to roles.

"Scene change"
A scene change mainly refers to a change in the display, and in particular to a change in the background, characters, etc. that are displayed.

A "cut-in display" is an effect in which another image is displayed by interrupting the currently displayed image. The cut-in display can also indicate the likelihood of a jackpot by the color of the cut-in display. For example, if the cut-in display is red, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than if it is green.

The "switching display (eye-catching display)" is a presentation that is displayed when the scene changes. In this embodiment, the eye-catching display is used when the scene changes from a state indicating a loss to a state of normal play. The eye-catching display has the role of making it easy to understand that the Super Reach has ended.

"Shielding display (shutter display)" is a display in which the image display device 5 displays an image such as a shutter so as to cover the entire area displayed by the image display device 5, shielding the image that was displayed before the shielding display was performed. The shielding display may also be performed by displaying something other than a shutter to shield the image.

"The brightness data changes" means that the timer for the brightness data defined in the grandchild table reaches 0, and the next brightness data is used. The change in brightness data means that the light emission mode of the lamp changes. The change in the light emission mode of the lamp gives the player the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene has been updated.

"Brightness data does not switch" means that the timer for the brightness data defined in the grandchild table does not reach 0, and that brightness data continues to be used. By not switching brightness data, the light emission mode of the lamp remains constant. By keeping the light emission mode of the lamp constant, the player is given the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene has stopped and is not being updated.

"Video data" is data for displaying videos, including animations. Images displayed on the image display device 5 are switched at high speed, several tens of images per second, to give the appearance of movement. Video data may be compressed before being stored.

The "first video data" is video data that is created using many images to move a character.

The "second video data" is video data that is created using fewer images to move the character.

"Specific character movement" refers to the movement that corresponds to a specific character among the multiple characters that appear in the performance.

"Blackout" is an effect in which a black image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, causing the display area to go dark (black out) so that the image displayed in the display area cannot be seen. The blackout may be performed in such a way that the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot varies depending on the duration of the darkened state.

"Whiteout" is an effect in which a white image is displayed (whiteout) in the display area of the image display device 5 to make the image displayed in the display area unrecognizable. The whiteout may be in a form in which the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot varies depending on the duration for which the white image is displayed.

"A specific display that is difficult to see" refers to an image displayed on the screen that hides the displayed decorative symbols from the player. For example, a white image is displayed across the entire screen (whiteout), making the decorative symbols invisible to the player.

"Fade effect" refers to fade-in and fade-out used in video technology. Fade-in means gradually changing from a state where a background image is displayed to a state where a specific image is visible. In this embodiment, for example, from a state where the room background is displayed, an image showing dialogue is gradually displayed. Gradually displaying means gradually decreasing the transparency of the image showing dialogue. For example, after displaying the dialogue image at 100% transparency, the transparency is decreased by 10% every 0.1 seconds, and the dialogue image is displayed after 1 second. Moreover, fade-out means, in contrast to fade-in, gradually changing from a state where a specific image is visible superimposed on the background image to only the background image. In this embodiment, for example, from a state where an image showing dialogue is displayed on top of the room background, the image showing dialogue is gradually made invisible. Gradually making invisible means gradually increasing the transparency of the image showing dialogue. For example, after displaying a dialogue image with 0% transparency, the transparency is increased by 10% every 0.1 seconds, and after 1 second the dialogue image becomes invisible. The fade effect also includes a crossfade, which simultaneously fades in and fades out, swapping images.

<Example of time-saving control without going through a hit>
Next, an example of executing time-saving control without going through a hit (a big hit, a small hit, etc.) as a time-saving state will be described.
(Example of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)

(A1) In each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7A. In other words, the time-saving state may be controlled to not pass through a win (big win, small win, etc.).

(A2) In addition, the time-saving symbols described above may be part of the losing symbols or part of the small winning symbols.

(A3) In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving symbols, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries, such as a lottery random number for a losing symbol, a lottery random number for a jackpot symbol, a lottery random number for a small jackpot symbol, a random number for judging a jackpot, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

(A4) Furthermore, these time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state. However, when a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state, and no lottery is conducted to determine the number of times the time-saving state will be used.

(A5) In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value. In other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

(A6) In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern may be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

(A7) In addition, for winning when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is conducted, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. Also, a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery for the time-saving symbol is performed using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in combination with the time-saving symbol, the variable display count of the time-saving state (time-saving count) is set so as not to change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

(A9) In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when these random numbers are used as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since performance other than the probability of winning varies depending on the settings.

(A10) The timing of determining the result of the lottery for the time-saving symbol may be performed after the determination of a jackpot. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is performed only in the low probability low base state. However, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already established, the number of times the time-saving symbol is reset or the lottery is not performed, as long as it is determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed when it is derived can have multiple predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

(A12) In addition, when the number of time-saving times differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for allocating the time-saving symbols can be changed between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2.

(A13) In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving times awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

(A14) In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

(A15) In addition, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-saving times may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving period until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time-saving times may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

(A16) In addition, the number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving times may be different between the time-saving times controlled by the time-saving symbols and the time-saving times controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

(A17) In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

(A18) In addition, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled in the case of a lottery using a structure is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

(A19) In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a predetermined number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the gaming machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

(A20) In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated is updated.

(A21) The time required for the time-saving symbol to be determined may also be different from the time required for the other symbols to be determined.

(Other examples of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)
As another time-saving control using the time-saving symbol, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) In the normal state, game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern (special display result), and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern in the time-saving state (even if the time-saving pattern is displayed, game state switching control such as overwriting the time-saving state (such as the time-saving state occurring again) may not be performed). In addition, different effects may be performed when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the time-saving state (for example, for decorative patterns, a special pattern is displayed as the time-saving pattern in the normal state and a general losing pattern is displayed in the time-saving state). This allows suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is increased by executing effects depending on whether the state is changed or not).

(B2) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), when the display result of a special symbol is a time-saving symbol, the special symbol may be a time-saving symbol that is common in both the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol may be a different symbol displayed as the display result in the normal state and the time-saving state (for example, the decorative symbol may be a special symbol that corresponds to the time-saving symbol in the normal state, but a symbol that simply corresponds to the time-saving symbol may be displayed in the time-saving state, such as a missing symbol). This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative symbol in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decline in interest in the game.

(B3) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), in the normal state, a presentation is executed that suggests whether the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time-saving pattern), but in the time-saving state, the presentation that suggests whether the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time-saving pattern) may not be executed. This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the presentation in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B4) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative symbols (the time for which the display state is maintained after the fixed surface result is displayed) may be controlled to be different between the normal state and the time-saving state. This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the presentation of the decorative symbols in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B5) After the first variable display using the first special pattern has been performed, and after the second variable display using the second special pattern has been performed, the state can be controlled to be advantageous to the player, and game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern (special display result) in the normal state, and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern in the time-saving state (game state switching control may not be performed to overwrite the time-saving state (such that the time-saving state occurs again) even if a time-saving pattern is displayed). The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display result of the time-saving pattern than the first variable display, and information about the variable display is stored as reserved memory information, and different effects can be executed depending on whether the reserved memory information is stored when the time-saving state ends (such as a display of continued time-saving when switching to time-saving control, and an effect that can identify that time-saving control is not being executed when switching to time-saving control is not switched to), and during the time-saving state, right-hit play is performed in response to a right-hit notification (an indication instructing right-hit), until all variable displays based on the reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to disable a left-hit notification (an indication instructing left-hit). This allows for suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, interest is increased by executing an effect depending on whether the state is switched or not).

(B6) After the first variable display using the first special pattern has been performed, and after the second variable display using the second special pattern has been performed, the state can be controlled to be advantageous to the player, and game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern (special display result) in the normal state, and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern in the time-saving state (game state switching control may not be performed to overwrite the time-saving state (such that the time-saving state occurs again) even if a time-saving pattern is displayed). The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display result of the time-saving pattern than the first variable display, and information about the variable display is stored as reserved memory information, and different effects can be executed depending on whether the reserved memory information is stored when the time-saving state ends (such as a display of continued time-saving when transitioning to time-saving control, and an effect that can identify that time-saving control is not being executed when not transitioning to time-saving control), and during the time-saving state, right-hitting play is performed in response to a right-hitting notification, until all variable displays based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to disable a left-hitting notification (a notification instructing left-hitting). This allows for suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, interest is increased by executing effects depending on whether the state is transitioned or not).

(B7) A left hit notification may be executed in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends is completed. This allows the game to proceed smoothly because instructions on how to hit are displayed appropriately, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(B8) The notification mode of the right-hit notification executed in response to a win may be different between when the display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends and when a win (small win, big win) occurs in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This prevents the player from feeling like they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern through the presentation of the notification mode of the right-hit notification, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends, when there is reserved memory information that displays the display result of a time-saving pattern and when there is no reserved memory information, it may be possible to execute a different effect after executing a common effect (for example, when the fourth of four remaining reserved memories has reserved memory information that displays the display result of a time-saving pattern, a common effect that suggests whether or not to return to the time-saving state can be executed up to the variable display based on the third reserved memory information, and a time-saving state return effect different from the common effect can be executed with the variable display based on the fourth reserved memory information). This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the effect of the notification mode of the right-hit notification, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B10) The notification mode of the right-hit notification executed in response to a win may be different between the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends and the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This allows the presentation to change depending on the game state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(B11) The final display time (the time from when the finalized surface result is displayed to when the display state is maintained) of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends may be the same as the final display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This can suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends is executed, the right-hit notification may not be executed, and when the time-saving pattern display result is displayed in the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information, the right-hit notification may be executed during the initial period at the start of the next variable display. This allows the player to play smoothly because the instructions on how to play are given appropriately, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(B13) In the normal state, a game is controlled to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving pattern with a special pattern, and a common specific effect (reach effect, advance notice effect) can be executed when the variable display result is a winning pattern (specific display result) such as a small win pattern or a big win pattern, and when the variable display result is a time-saving pattern (special display result), and the rate at which the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed may differ depending on which of the multiple types of common specific effects is executed. And when the display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the variable display, a right-hit notification may be executed during the initial period at the start of the next variable display. This allows the effect to be controlled appropriately depending on the game state when the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific effect, the display result may be a winning pattern (specific display result) or a time-saving pattern (special display result). This increases the variety of variable display results, making the game more interesting.

(B15) The game control CPU 103 can select a common variation pattern for when a winning symbol (specific display result) is obtained, when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, or when a losing symbol (predetermined display result) is obtained, and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute different presentations in the variable display depending on the type of pattern designation command that designates the display result, even when it receives a command designating the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103. This increases the variety of presentations in the variable display, making the game more interesting.

(B16) After the common specific effect is executed, a special effect can be executed when a time-saving pattern (special display result) is obtained. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game by the special effect after the execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of common specific effect, a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving pattern (special display result) is achieved may or may not be executed (for example, a special effect may not be executed when an effect with a higher expectation of a win among multiple types of super reach effects is executed). This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without excessively encouraging the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B18) The expectation (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) appearing when the special effect is executed may be different depending on the type of common specific effect. This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without executing an effect that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B18) The expectation (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) appearing when the special effect is executed may be different depending on the type of common specific effect. This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without executing an effect that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B19) The expectation level (proportion) of a time-saving pattern (special display result) may be different depending on the presentation mode of a predetermined presentation different from the common specific presentation (for example, a presentation that displays an active display (a display that has moved from the display position of a pending display to another display position, and that performs a presentation that can suggest the expectation level of a hit corresponding to the currently active variable display) that can change the display mode depending on the expectation level of a hit)). This allows for an increase in interest in the game, as a presentation that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state is not executed and the expectation of a hit is maintained.

(B20) In a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is reached, an effect that indicates a winning symbol (specific display result) (such as a special jackpot with a higher play value than the time-saving state) may be executed after an effect that suggests the time-saving symbol (special display result) is reached (such as a time-saving suggestion effect). This increases the interest in the game because the expectation of a win is maintained without excessively emphasizing only the time-saving state.

(B21) The game control CPU 103 can control the time-saving state (special state) to have different number of time-saving times (duration of time-saving times) depending on the type of the multiple types of time-saving patterns (special display results) provided (for example, first time-saving pattern: 50 time-saving times, second time-saving pattern: 100 time-saving times, etc.), and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a presentation in which the number of time-saving times (duration) granted when the time-saving pattern stops varies depending on the type of presentation executed (for example, the type of reach presentation, etc.). This can draw the player's attention to the number of time-saving times that will follow depending on the type of presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(B22) In the normal state, a game control is performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving pattern with a special pattern, and a command is sent from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute a performance based on the command. The command sent includes a special command that can specify the transition (control) from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and when the performance control CPU 120 receives multiple types of commands including a special command, it may limit the execution of the pre-reading preview performance for the reserved memory information that occurs after the reserved memory information that is specified to execute a variable display that can transition to the time-saving state (special state) based on the pre-reading of the reserved memory information (such as not executing it at all or allowing it to be executed rarely). This allows the performance control to be executed appropriately according to the game state when the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) It is also possible to restrict the execution of a pre-reading preview performance for reserved memory information that occurs after reserved memory information that has been identified as a variable display that can transition (control) to a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) based on a pre-reading of the reserved memory information. In addition, it is also possible to make it possible to execute a performance of a common aspect as a pre-reading preview performance during the execution restriction of such a pre-reading preview performance. In this way, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game by restricting the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state as the gaming state transitions.

(B24) In both cases where the variable display based on the reserved memory information for the pre-reading target is a variable display that displays a time-saving pattern (special display result) and a variable display that appears to display a time-saving pattern (special display result) but does not, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance for the reserved memory information that occurs after the reserved memory information may be restricted. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game by restricting the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes.

(B25) During the execution restriction of the above-mentioned look-ahead preview performance, the look-ahead preview performance does not execute a performance with a higher expectation level than a specific expectation level (for example, when the expectation level of the color of the reserved display is blue < green < red, the color of the reserved display is not changed to red). This restricts the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(B26) During the execution restriction of the above-mentioned look-ahead preview performance, the look-ahead preview performance does not execute a specific type of performance (for example, when the expected color of the reserved display is blue < green < red, the color of the reserved display is not changed to red). This restricts the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(Example of time-saving control using the number of variable display times resulting in a predetermined display result, such as the number of variable display times of failure)
Next, an example of time-saving control using the number of variable displays (the number of times that a variable display that has become a miss) that have resulted in a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As described below, the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times that a variable display that has become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) has continued has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times). Note that, as the predetermined result, the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times that a variable display that has become a miss display result has continued has reached a special number.

(C1) After the first variable display by the first special symbol is performed and after the second variable display by the second special symbol is performed, the game can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the variable display result has become a specific display result, and the numerical information of the number of times the variable display has been executed that has become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small win display result that does not become a big win, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and when a special condition is established in which the number of times the variable display that has become the predetermined display result (the number of times it continues) has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times, etc.) based on the numerical information, the game can be controlled to transition from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state). The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is achieved in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is achieved in the second variable display. As a result, the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result has been achieved continues to be updated regardless of whether the first variable display or the second variable display is executable, making it easier for the player to be rescued by the time-saving state and increasing the player's motivation to play. This makes it possible to optimally realize rescue for players through time-saving states.

(C2) The special condition may be established when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) in succession. This allows the player to be rescued by transitioning to a time-saving state (special state) when a series of display results unfavorable to the player are displayed, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when a variable display is executed even in a state other than the normal state (a high probability state, a time-saving state). This allows the player to be appropriately rescued when a series of display results that are unfavorable to the player are displayed.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is met. Such an initialization condition may be met by control to the advantageous state. This makes it possible to suppress rescue when there is no longer a need to rescue the player, such as when an advantageous state is reached that is advantageous to the player, and to prevent the player's gambling tendency from increasing more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control for transitioning to a time-saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition may be established when the special display result is displayed. This makes it possible to suppress rescue when there is no longer a need to rescue the player, such as when the time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player is reached, and to prevent the tendency to gamble more than necessary.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is executed a special number of times. This effectively makes it possible to control the game to a time-saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(C7) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and when a specific condition is met, such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on, the backed up data can be initialized, and the numerical information can be initialized when the specific condition is met. This prevents the numerical information backed up in the event of a power outage from being initialized and not remaining when the data is initialized, thereby preventing disadvantages to the game center.

(C8) The time-saving state (special state) for a period of more than the special number (for example, 1000 times or more) can be controlled based on the numerical information becoming the special number (for example, 1000 times or more), and during the time-saving state (special state), the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled again based on the numerical information becoming the special number, and different effects can be executed in the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state). As a result, in a game in which the game is in an extremely unfavorable state such as being controlled in the second time-saving state (special state), it is possible to change the appearance of the effects, such as shortening the variable display time in the second time-saving state more than in the first time-saving state, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. It is also possible to execute similar effects in the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state) without executing such effects. This makes it possible to prevent players from being overly aware that they are in an extremely unfavorable state, such as being controlled to the second time-saving state (special state), and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(C9) When the value of the special chart process flag is a first value (0 to 2), a first process related to variable display is executed, when the value of the special chart process flag is a second value (4 or more) different from the first value, a second process related to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special chart process flag is a third value (3) different from the first and second values, a third process for controlling to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition is executed. Also. The game ball can be hit into the first path (left game area) and the second path (right game area), and in the normal state, the game ball is hit into the first path, and in the time-saving state (special state), the game ball is hit into the second path to play. And, during the execution of the third process, although it is not controlled to the time-saving state (special state), a notification that the ball should be shot into the second path (for example, a right-hit notification by a right-hit lamp, etc.) may be issued. In addition, during execution of the third process, a notification effect may be given to indicate that the game will transition to a time-saving state (special state). This allows for suitable control even if new functions are added to the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex. For example, by turning on the right-hit lamp using the gaming control CPU 103, it is possible to execute a notification effect regarding the launch direction early (before the actual time-saving fluctuation begins) when the game actually transitions to the time-saving state (special state).

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in a variable display where the special condition is met, the second process may be executed after the first process is executed, and the third process may not be executed. This gives priority to control to an advantageous state over control to a time-saving state (special state) based on the fulfillment of a special condition, so that the result is not more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display starts, and based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the time-saving state (special state) is controlled after the variable display in which the numerical information has become a specific value ends (next fluctuation starts, waiting for customers) and when the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the special information (special number of times reached flag) is changed from a first value to a second value (flag set), and when controlling to the time-saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second value to the first value (flag reset). This makes it possible to preferably execute control to transition to the time-saving state (special state) by managing the special information.

(C12) The game control CPU 103 may select and determine a variation pattern of the variable display, and may select and determine a variation pattern of the symbol determination time that differs when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. This makes it possible to preferably execute a performance when the variable display of the special number of times is executed.

(C13) When the value of the special chart process flag is a first numerical value (0 to 2), a first process related to variable display is executed, when the value of the special chart process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, a second process related to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special chart process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, a third process for controlling to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of a special condition is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the CPU 103 (game control means) for game control that controls the progress of the game, and a performance based on the command can be executed by the CPU 120 (performance control means) for performance control that receives the command. And, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variable pattern) according to when the value of the special chart process flag is the second numerical value and when it is the third numerical value when in the special state. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, different game states can be suitably identified, making game control easier. Then, by varying the command depending on the game state identified at that time, the presentation control CPU 120 (presentation control means) can execute suitable presentation control depending on the game state.

(C14) When the special condition is established during the time-saving state (special state), the value of the special chart process flag may be set to a fourth value different from the first value, the second value, and the third value, so that the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled again. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex.

(C15) During the time-saving state (special state), different effects may be executed depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the specific display result (winning symbol) or whether the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time is executed than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot game state). This makes it possible to execute effects for the time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(C16) During the time-saving state (special state), it may be possible to execute similar effects when the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the specific display result (winning symbol) and when the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, a time-saving state effect with a similar variable time may be executed when the time-saving state is entered because the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count and when the time-saving state is entered after a jackpot has ended). This does not require new performance data, so development costs do not increase, and interest in the game can be increased by not confusing the player.

(C17) During the time-saving state (special state), different effects may be executed depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the special display result (time-saving pattern) or whether the special condition (condition for the number of variable displays) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the number of variable displays is equal to or greater than the special number, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot is executed). This makes it possible to execute effects for the time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(C18) During the time-saving state (special state), it may be possible to execute the same effects when the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the special display result (time-saving pattern) and when the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot is executed). This does not require new effect data, so development costs do not increase, and interest in the game can be increased by not confusing the player.

(C19) In the event of a power outage or other power outage, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and when the power is turned on, the game control CPU 103 can send predetermined information (a RAM clear command at cold start, and a command notifying the number of variable displays until the end of the time-saving state at hot start) to the presentation control CPU 120 based on the backed up data, and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute suggestive presentations (such as a different early morning number roll, a different background image, or a presentation that suggests whether a 100-spin variation is far or close) regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on, based on receiving the predetermined information. This gives players a motivation to play early in the morning, increasing the operating rate of the gaming machine while preventing an increase in the processing burden.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 may transmit specific information (a command capable of identifying information related to the time-saving state) to the presentation control CPU 120 in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the presentation control CPU 120 may execute a special presentation (such as a presentation suggesting the end of the time-saving state count) in relation to the control to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. The specific information may include first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown presentation information) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is less than a predetermined value (for example, 127), and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 spins) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). This can reduce the risk of the player unknowingly losing money by periodically suggesting the function, and can also suitably realize command processing.

(C21) The presentation control CPU 120 can execute a suggestion presentation (for time-saving state suggestion presentation control) that suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state (special state) when a special condition is met, based on the execution of a first predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 300 times) that are less than the special number of times, and can execute a suggestion presentation each time a second predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 100 times) that are less than the first predetermined number of times are executed before the execution of the special number of variable displays. This reduces the risk of the player unknowingly incurring losses by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and the game control CPU 103 can initialize the backed up data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, and the performance control CPU 120 executes different performances (such as different performances when transitioning to the time-saving state) when the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (condition for variable display count) before the specific display result is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result (winning pattern) is displayed and the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition after the backup-stored data is initialized. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can know whether the backup-stored data has been initialized or not based on the difference in performance, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed, it is possible to know that the setting may have been changed, which increases the number of elements for guessing the setting and improves the interest in the game.

(C23) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and the game control CPU 103 can initialize the backed up data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, and the performance control CPU 120 executes different performances after being controlled to the time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition (condition for variable display count) before the specific display result is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized, and when the performance control CPU 120 is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition after the specific display result (winning pattern) is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized (e.g., the performance after transition to the time-saving state is different). This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can know whether the backup-stored data has been initialized based on the difference in performance, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed, it can be known that the setting may have been changed, which increases the number of elements for guessing the setting and improves the interest in the game.

(D1) The execution rate of the group preview effect may be different depending on whether the result of the variable display is a time-saving pattern, a jackpot, or a miss.

This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Each configuration related to the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be combined as appropriate with some or all of each configuration related to other features. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined as appropriate with some or all of each configuration related to other features.

The above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a winning prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a winning prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, this also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

Another example of the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
In a first epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be performed in the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be performed in the advantageous state, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
an average time from when one piece of luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until when it is switched to the next piece of luminance data is set shorter than an average time from when one piece of luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until when it is switched to the next piece of luminance data;
moreover,
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., a hold display and an active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific display presentation (e.g., a portion that displays a reserved display or an active display in one of display patterns α to γ) that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., the occurrence of a start winning), and a specific light emission presentation (e.g., a flash presentation at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that the light emitted by the light-emitting means is recognizable to the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Figs. 283-28, 283-29(A) to 283-32(H), and 283-49(A) to 283-50(D), a portion that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F before the display of the pending display is completed),
The proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting effect is executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the proportion of the game being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g., a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The first light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during a first period from the start of the specific light-emitting performance to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the early-stage winning flash performance to the end timing of the early-stage winning flash performance) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance (for example, a period from the start of the late-stage winning flash performance to the start timing of the reach performance of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance) (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early-stage winning flash performance, and flashes with brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the late-stage winning flash performance).
The second light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d flash with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flash with brightness C2 and cycle T0 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance).
According to this feature, the notification effect can be executed with suitable brightness control, which enhances interest. Furthermore, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, and since the specific light emitting effect can be made more prominent by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period of the specific light emitting effect, the player can more easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect.

In other words, by setting different brightness depending on whether or not the notification effect is controlled to be in an advantageous state, it is possible to produce a suitable effect and create a sense of anticipation for an advantageous state, while allowing the player to easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect due to the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means, resulting in a gaming machine. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in an arcade, makes the effects easy for players to understand and tends to increase their interest in the effects.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine that executes a light-emitting performance using a light-emitting means, there is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., a hold display and an active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific display presentation (e.g., a portion that displays a reserved display or an active display in one of display patterns α to γ) that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., the occurrence of a start winning), and a specific light emission presentation (e.g., a flash presentation at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that the light emitted by the light-emitting means is recognizable to the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Figs. 283-28, 283-29(A) to 283-32(H), and 283-49(A) to 283-50(D), a portion that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F before the display of the pending display is completed),
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting effect is executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g., a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The first light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during a first period from the start of the specific light-emitting performance to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the early-stage winning flash performance to the end timing of the early-stage winning flash performance) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance (for example, a period from the start of the late-stage winning flash performance to the start timing of the reach performance of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance) (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early-stage winning flash performance, and flashes with brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the late-stage winning flash performance).
The second light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d flash with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flash with brightness C2 and cycle T0 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance). An example of this form of the gaming machine will be described below as another example.

(Other examples)

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(form)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., a hold display and an active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific display presentation (e.g., a portion that displays a reserved display or an active display in one of display patterns α to γ, a specific display start presentation) that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., the occurrence of a start winning), and a specific light emission presentation (e.g., a flash presentation at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that the light emitted by the light-emitting means is recognizable to the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Figs. 283-28, 283-29(A) to 283-32(H), and 283-49(A) to 283-50(D), a portion that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F before the display of the pending display is completed),
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting effect is executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g., a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The first light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during a first period from the start of the specific light-emitting performance to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the early-stage winning flash performance to the end timing of the early-stage winning flash performance) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance (for example, a period from the start of the late-stage winning flash performance to the start timing of the reach performance of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance) (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early-stage winning flash performance, and flashes with brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the late-stage winning flash performance).
The second light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d flash with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flash with brightness C2 and cycle T0 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance).
According to this feature, the light-emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, making it easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect, and during the first period of the specific light-emitting effect, not only the first light-emitting means but also the second light-emitting means are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect, making the specific light-emitting effect stand out more, making it even easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The specific display performance is composed of an appearance performance section where the appearance performance of the specific display is executed (for example, as shown in Fig. 283-15, Fig. 283-30(D) to Fig. 283-32(H), Fig. 283-49(B) to Fig. 283-50(D), a section where an appearance animation is displayed in which the reserved display or active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top as a result of the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific display start performance execution process), and a periodic performance section where a periodic performance is executed in which the display mode of the specific display periodically changes at a predetermined position after the appearance performance (for example, as shown in Fig. 283-15, Fig. 283-30(D) to Fig. 283-32(H), Fig. 283-49(B) to Fig. 283-50(D), a section where the reserved display or active display is displayed as a rotation animation as a result of the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific display rotation display performance execution process),
The timing at which the display of the specific display is completed is the timing at which the cyclical effect starts (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-19 and FIG. 283-20, the part where the rotation animation of the pending display or active display starts from the timing at which the appearance animation of the pending display or active display is completed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can increase the player's attention to the particular display.

The gaming machine of aspect 3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1 or 2,
The effect execution means is capable of starting the specific light emission effect before the start of the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Fig. 283-29 (A) to Fig. 283-32 (H), when executing the specific display start effect B, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are illuminated as the winning flash effect from a timing before the start of the display of the pending display or the active display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the specific light emitting effect starts before the specific display effect starts, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made to stand out more.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect (e.g., a specific display start effect) in which the specific display appears,
The display means is capable of displaying the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display start performance A in which only an appearance animation is executed in which the pending display or the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top, and a specific display start performance B in which an appearance animation is executed in which the pending display or the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top after the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D or the active display area 135SG005A),
The duration of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect starts before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28 and FIG. 283-49 (A) to FIG. 283-50 (D), the winning flash effect starts before the end timing of the specific display start effect A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light-emitting effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can reliably recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects,
The effect execution means controls the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low brightness state once and then starts the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in Figs. 283-28, 283-29(A), 283-29(B), 283-49(A), and 283-49(B), when it is determined to execute a flash effect at the time of winning based on the start winning, a part that temporarily turns off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of a specific light-emitting effect.
In the present invention, the "low luminance state" includes not only a state in which light is emitted at a low luminance, but also a state in which no light is emitted.

A gaming machine according to a sixth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects,
The effect execution means controls the display means to a low visibility state once and then starts the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-11, when executing a flash effect when winning, the brightness of a backlight or the like built into the image display device 5 is temporarily lowered to reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and then the flash effect when winning is started).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier for players to recognize the start of a specific light-emitting effect.
In addition, the "low visibility state" in the present invention includes a state in which the visibility of the display means is reduced compared to the immediately preceding state, and also includes a state in which the visibility of the display is reduced by means other than a reduction in the brightness of the display means.

A gaming machine according to a seventh aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (e.g., a preview effect) that suggests that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state while the variable display is being executed, and is capable of executing the specific light emission effect when the suggestive effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is not being executed (for example, as shown in Figs. 283-29(A) to 283-48(n) and Figs. 283-49(A) to 283-68(n), a portion that can execute a flash effect at the time of winning when the preview effect is being executed and when it is not being executed).
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) is provided that can output a variable display corresponding sound (variable display corresponding sound shown in FIG. 283-28) corresponding to the variable display, a suggestive performance corresponding sound (preview performance corresponding sound shown in FIG. 283-29(A)) corresponding to the suggestive performance, and a specific light emitting performance corresponding sound (winning flash performance corresponding sound shown in FIG. 283-29(B)) corresponding to the specific light emitting performance,
The sound output means includes:
When the specific light-emitting performance is being executed while the variable display corresponding sound is being output, the specific light-emitting performance corresponding sound can be output in priority to the variable display corresponding sound being output (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-29(B), when a flash performance is executed during the execution of a variable display, the variable display corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 while the flash performance corresponding sound is output at volume V1 (V1>V2)).
When the specific light-emitting effect is executed while the suggestive effect corresponding sound is being output, the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound can be output in priority to the suggestive effect corresponding sound being output (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-29(B), when a winning flash effect is executed during the execution of a preview effect, the preview effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, while the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V1 (V1>V2)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if a variable display corresponding sound or a suggestion effect corresponding sound is being output, the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound becomes easier to hear, and the output of the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound makes it easier for the player to recognize that a specific light-emitting effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of aspect 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 7,
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound is provided,
The effect execution means outputs a sound corresponding to a specific light-emitting effect from the sound output means in the specific light-emitting effect before the completion of the display of the specific display and the light emission of the light-emitting means (for example, as shown in Fig. 283-28, Fig. 283-29(A) to Fig. 283-32(H), Fig. 283-49(A) to Fig. 283-50(D), when it is determined that a winning flash effect is to be executed in response to a start winning, the output of a winning flash effect corresponding sound from the speakers 8L, 8R is started, and then the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect allows the player to quickly recognize that a predetermined condition has been met, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh aspects,
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound is provided,
The performance execution means, in the specific light emission performance,
A sound corresponding to a specific light-emitting effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a part capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a flash effect when a prize is won from speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-12, when it is determined that a flash effect is to be executed in response to the start of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning starts to blink, and then the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emitted by the light emitting means can make the player quickly recognize that the predetermined condition has been met, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth aspects,
The specific light emitting effect is an effect in which the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that is a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner that is less emphasized than the predetermined manner during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, during the execution period of the early winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at a brightness C1, and during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at a brightness C2 (C1>C2)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light-emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, it is possible to make the player aware of the start of a specific light-emitting effect, and it is also possible to prevent the first light-emitting means from continuing to emit light in the predetermined manner during the second period from interfering with other effects and reducing interest in the game.
In addition, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a slow blinking mode with a low degree of emphasis due to a slow blinking speed.

A gaming machine according to an eleventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect is executed and a period during which the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the execution period of the later winning flash effect is a portion that includes a period during which the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is executed and a period during which the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first light-emitting means emits light in a specific manner both before and after the start of the variable display that is the subject of the specific light-emitting performance, making it easier for the player to recognize that it is a variable display of the subject, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect is the gaming machine according to the tenth or eleventh aspect,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect starts (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-13, when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect when winning starts, the part that causes the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to flash with brightness C1 and cycle T1).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twelfth aspects,
The display means displays a specific light-emitting effect corresponding image corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect in a first display mode during the first period, and displays the specific light-emitting effect corresponding image in a second display mode in which the degree of emphasis is lower than that of the first display mode during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, a portion that displays an effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of early winning, and displays a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of late winning).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, during the first period, the display means displays the specific light-emitting performance corresponding image in a first display mode, thereby making the player aware of the start of the specific light-emitting performance, and during the second period, the display means displays the specific light-emitting performance corresponding image in a second display mode, thereby preventing the display means from continuing to display the specific light-emitting performance corresponding image in the first display mode, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the thirteenth aspect,
The display means displays the specific light-emitting effect corresponding image in a first display mode when a variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect starts (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-13, a part that displays an effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 when a variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fifteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourteenth aspects,
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect is provided;
The sound output means outputs the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound in a first output mode during the first period, and does not output the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound or outputs the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound in a second output mode having a lower intensity than the first output mode during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, during the execution period of the early winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1, and during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by outputting the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound in the first output mode, it is possible to easily allow the player to recognize that the specific light-emitting effect has started, and by not outputting the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound or outputting it in the second output mode while the specific light-emitting effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to other effects being hindered by the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound.

A gaming machine according to a sixteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the fifteenth aspect,
The sound output means outputs the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect starts (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-13, when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts, a part that outputs the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a seventeenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixteenth aspects,
The first light emitting means stops emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting performance during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting performance is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-69 as modified example 135SG-1, the performance control CPU 120 stops output of the winning flash performance corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, turns off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, makes the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 invisible, and clears the process timer for the late winning flash performance, based on receiving a pattern determination command during the execution of the late winning flash performance. During the pattern determination period, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are not executed as the late winning flash effect, and based on the reception of the first variable display start command, the selection of the late winning flash effect process table and the resetting and starting of the late winning flash effect process timer are performed again, thereby starting the late winning flash effect (the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S) in response to the start of a new variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the emission of light from the light-emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of aspect 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 17,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the display is temporarily stopped after the start of the variable display before the display result is derived, and then the display is re-variable displayed,
The first light emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting performance during the provisional stop when the re-variable display performance executed in the second period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting performance is started is executed (for example, as shown in Figs. 283-69 and 283-70(A) to 283-89(n) as modified example 135SG-1, during the provisional stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, a portion that continues to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the variable display has ended, even though it is actually a temporary stop.

A gaming machine of aspect 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 18,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the display is temporarily stopped after the start of the variable display before the display result is derived, and then the display is re-variable displayed,
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 283-69 and 283-70(A) to 283-89(n) as modified example 135SG-1, a portion in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at brightness C1 and cycle T2 even during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect),
Even during the provisional stop when the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is executed, the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance continues (for example, as shown in Fig. 283-69 and Fig. 283-70(A) to Fig. 283-89(n) as modified example 135SG-1, during the provisional stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2).
19. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 18,
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the variable display has ended, even though it is actually a temporary stop.

A gaming machine according to a 20th aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 16th aspects,
The first light-emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is started (for example, as shown in Fig. 283-29 (A) to Fig. 283-48 (n), during the execution of the later winning flash performance, during the pattern determination period of the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance is started, a portion that continues to blink the winning flash lamp 135SG009F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the light emission continues even during the display period of the display results of the variable display in the second period, the player's anticipation of being controlled to an advantageous state can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 21 is the gaming machine according to aspect 20,
In the display means, a game machine capable of executing variable display of a first performance identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) and variable display of a second performance identification information (e.g., a small pattern) having lower visibility than the first performance identification information,
During the result display period, the second performance identification information in a stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-33(J) and the like, during the pattern determination period, the portion in which the small pattern is displayed in a state in which the variable display is stopped),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the light emission continues during the result display period, the second effect identification information in a stopped state is displayed, so that the player can recognize that it is the result display period.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-second aspect is the gaming machine according to the twenty-first aspect,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific light-emitting effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during the second period so as not to overlap with the display of the second effect identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-33(J) etc., during the execution of the winning flash effect, a silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of a first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific light-emitting effect corresponding display is overlapped with the display of the second effect identification information, making it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display.

A gaming machine of aspect 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 22,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of a super reach) that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The first light-emitting means, when the specific performance is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance, emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance until the specific performance starts, and starts emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific performance when the specific performance starts (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-90 as modified example 135SG-2, in the variable display of the Super Reach that is the target of the win-time flash performance, before the start of the reach performance of the Super Reach, the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked with brightness C2 and cycle T2, and from the start timing of the reach performance of the Super Reach, the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is lit with brightness C2).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means changes the mode according to the specific performance and emits light in a mode according to the specific performance, thereby increasing the interest in the specific performance.

A gaming machine of aspect 24 is the gaming machine according to aspect 23,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect starts (for example, a portion that displays the first display area 135SG005F in white (whiteout) as shown in Figs. 283-96(K) to 283-98(O) and Figs. 283-104(K) to 283-106(O)),
The first light-emitting means is in a low-luminance state when the display of the display means is switched to the specific performance start image, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific performance after being in the low-luminance state (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-90, during a white-out period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at a luminance C2 from the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach thereafter).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emission mode of the first light-emitting means changes with a low brightness state accompanying the switch to the specific performance start image in between, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emission mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 25 is the gaming machine according to aspect 23 or 24,
A movable body (e.g., movable body 32) is provided,
The performance execution means is capable of executing, as the specific performance, a motion performance that moves the movable body at the start of the specific performance (e.g., a movable body motion performance shown in FIG. 283-90) and a motion suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the motion performance (e.g., a movable body motion suggestion performance shown in FIG. 283-90);
The first light-emitting means is in a low-luminance state when the action suggestion performance is executed, and after being in the low-luminance state, emits light in a manner corresponding to the action performance, which is a manner corresponding to the specific performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-90, a portion in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off during the execution period of the movable body action suggestion performance, which is a white-out period, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at a luminance C2 from the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach thereafter).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emission mode of the first light-emitting means changes between low brightness states associated with the execution of a suggestive performance, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emission mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special effect different from the specific light-emitting effect is executed by the effect execution means, the special effect can be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-108(A) as a modified example 135SG-3, when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which a flash effect at the time of winning is not being executed, a portion capable of lighting up a flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect).
When the specific light-emitting effect is started during the execution of the special effect, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect in priority to the manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-108(B) as modified example 135SG-3, when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which a flash effect at the time of winning is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to light up (blink) in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a manner corresponding to a specific light emission effect from starting at an inappropriate timing, such as the timing at which a special effect ends.

A gaming machine of aspect 27 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 26,
The light emission of the first light-emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance may end at a first timing during the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance, and at a second timing that is later than the first timing (for example, as shown in Figs. 283-119(A) and 283-119(B) as modified example 135SG-4, the timing for ending the light-emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F includes the timing for starting the movable body operation performance during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, and the timing for starting the reach performance of the super reach).
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is different between when the light emission of the first light-emitting means in the mode corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance ends at the first timing and when the light emission of the first light-emitting means in the mode corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance ends at the second timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-119(C) as modified example 135SG-4, the portion where the expectation of a jackpot is different when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation performance from the start timing of the movable body operation performance and when the light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance is changed from the start timing of the reach performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the light emission in a manner corresponding to a specific light emission presentation ends, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-eighth aspect is the gaming machine according to a twenty-seventh aspect,
The effect executed by the effect execution means at the time of the end of the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is different between when the light emission ends at the first timing and when the light emission ends at the second timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-119 as modified example 135SG-4, depending on the timing at which the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends, it may be during the execution of a movable body operation effect or during the execution of a super reach reach effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

A gaming machine of aspect 29 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 28,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a first performance (for example, a movable body operation performance shown in FIG. 283-119 as modified example 135SG-4) and a second performance different from the first performance (for example, a reach performance of a super reach shown in FIG. 283-119 as modified example 135SG-4) during variable display,
The first light emitting means is
The light emission can be changed from a light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the first performance in association with the execution of the first performance during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-119(A) as modified example 135SG-4, a part that changes the light emission mode of a winning flash lamp 135SG009F from a light emission mode corresponding to a winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement performance from the start timing of the movable body movement performance),
The light emission can be changed from a state corresponding to the specific light emission performance to a state corresponding to the second performance in association with the execution of the second performance during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-119(B) as modified example 135SG-4, a portion that changes the light emission state of a winning flash lamp 135SG009F to a light emission state corresponding to the reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance),
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is different when the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission performance changes to the light emission mode corresponding to the first performance and when the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission performance changes to the light emission mode corresponding to the second performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-119(C) as modified example 135SG-4, the expectation of a jackpot is different when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation performance from the start timing of the movable body operation performance and when the light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emission mode of the first light-emitting means changes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a 30th aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 28th aspects,
A movable body (e.g., movable body 32) is provided,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an action effect (e.g., a movable body action effect) that causes the movable body to move, an action suggestion effect (e.g., a movable body action suggestion effect) that suggests the execution of the action effect, and a specific effect (e.g., a reach effect for a super reach) that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The first light emitting means is
The light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changeable from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the action suggestion performance when the action suggestion performance is being executed during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-4, a portion that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action suggestion performance from the start timing of the movable body action suggestion performance),
The light emission can be changed from a light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the specific performance in association with the execution of the specific performance during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-4, a part that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach),
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is different when the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is changed to the mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect and when the light emission mode is changed to the mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-4, the expectation of a jackpot is different when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action suggestion effect from the start timing of the movable body action suggestion effect and when the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect is changed to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emission mode of the first light-emitting means changes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 31 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 30,
The display modes of the specific display include a normal mode (e.g., display pattern α), a special mode (e.g., display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIG. 283-120 as modified example 135SG-5), and a special mode (e.g., display pattern β and display pattern γ),
The special pattern includes a first special pattern (e.g., a display pattern γ) and a second special pattern (e.g., a display pattern β) different from the first special pattern,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the probability of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-17, when the reserved display or active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the display pattern β is displayed),
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-120 as modified example 135SG-5, a portion in which a hold display or an active display displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε can be changed to a hold display or an active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ),
The rate at which the specific light emitting effect is executed is higher when the specific display is displayed in the special mode than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-120 as modified example 135SG-5, the rate at which the winning flash effect is executed is higher when the pending display or active display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε than when the pending display or active display is displayed in display pattern β or display pattern γ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a specific display is displayed in a special mode, a specific light-emitting effect is executed at a high rate, thereby drawing the player's attention to whether the special mode will change to the first special mode or the second special mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a thirty-second aspect is the gaming machine according to a thirty-first aspect,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, a white flashing mode as shown in FIG. 283-120 as modified example 135SG-5),
The special mode is a mode of a special color different from the specific color (for example, blue or red as shown in FIG. 283-17 );
The normal mode is a mode of a color other than the specific color and the special color (for example, white color),
The specific display of the specific color has a higher probability of changing to the special color when the specific light-emitting effect is being executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not being executed (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-5, when the pending display or active display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the probability of the display pattern of the specific display changing to display pattern β or display pattern γ differs depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the difference in the form of the specific display can be easily grasped by the difference in color, and when a specific display of a specific color is displayed, the player can pay attention to whether or not a specific light-emitting effect is being executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to aspect 33 is the gaming machine according to aspect 31 or 32,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a change suggestion effect, which suggests that a specific display displayed in the special mode will change to the special mode, in a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, a portion capable of executing the first action effect and the second action effect shown in modified example 135SG-5),
When the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode, the special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate than when the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-5, the second action effect is a part that acts on a specific display displayed in display pattern δ to change the specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first action effect),
The rate at which the specific light emitting effect is executed is higher when the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode than when the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-5, when the second action effect is executed, the winning flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first action effect is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the change suggestion effect will be executed in the first mode or the second mode, and by executing the specific light-emitting effect, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation that the change suggestion effect will be executed in the second mode.

A gaming machine of aspect 34 is the gaming machine according to aspect 33,
The special mode includes a first special mode in which the change suggestion performance is executed in the second mode and the rate at which the change suggests performance changes to the special mode is low (for example, display pattern δ shown in FIG. 283-120 as modified example 135SG-5), and a second special mode in which the change suggestion performance is executed in the second mode and the rate at which the change suggests performance changes to the special mode is higher than that of the first special mode (for example, display pattern ε shown in FIG. 283-120 as modified example 135SG-5),
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the specific light emission effect is executed at a higher rate than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the flash effect is executed at the time of winning at a higher rate than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and since the specific light-emitting effect is executed at a high rate when the second special mode is displayed, which has a high probability of changing into a special mode, the execution of the specific light-emitting effect can heighten the player's anticipation of the specific display being displayed in the second special mode.

A gaming machine of aspect 35 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 34,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific light-emitting effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during the specific light-emitting effect so as to overlap the specific display corresponding to the variable display of the target of the specific light-emitting effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-7, a portion capable of displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the specific display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect, and since the specific display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect, it is possible to provide the player with an element of surprise and increase his/her interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 36 is the gaming machine according to aspect 35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of different types of specific light-emitting effect corresponding displays (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-7, a portion capable of displaying silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when a prize is won),
The overlapping manner with respect to the specific display differs depending on the type of the specific light-emitting performance-compatible display (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-129(L) and FIG. 283-130(N) as modified example 135SG-7, the overlapping manner between silhouette image 135SG005S and active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of silhouette image 135SG005S to be displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a plurality of specific light-emitting effect corresponding displays are displayed, and the overlapping manner with the specific display changes depending on the specific light-emitting effect corresponding display that is displayed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a thirty-seventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the thirty-fifth or thirty-sixth aspect,
The specific display includes a first specific display (e.g., a hold display) corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed, and a second variable display (e.g., an active display) corresponding to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means is capable of displaying the specific light-emitting effect-corresponding display so as to overlap the first specific display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect is started, and is capable of displaying the specific light-emitting effect-corresponding display so as to overlap the second specific display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-7, a portion that displays a silhouette image 135SG005S so as to overlap the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect displayed in a first pending memory display area 135SG005D before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, and displays the silhouette image 135SG005S so as to overlap the active display that is the target of the winning flash effect displayed in an active display area 135SG005A during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance, and since not only the first specific display but also the second specific display are hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance, it is possible to provide the player with an even greater sense of surprise and increase his or her interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 38 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 37,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the display is temporarily stopped after the start of the variable display before the display result is derived, and then the display is re-variable displayed,
The display means is capable of displaying a re-variable related display related to the re-variable display performance, and is capable of displaying a specific light-emitting performance corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the specific light-emitting performance, superimposed on the re-variable related display (for example, in the case where a pseudo consecutive performance is executed in the variable display during the execution of the winning flash performance, a portion in which a silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash performance can be displayed superimposed on a special pattern (see FIG. 283-40, etc.) that stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the re-variable related display is hidden by the specific light emitting performance corresponding display, which gives the player an element of surprise and increases his/her interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 39 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 35 to 38,
The display means is capable of displaying the specific light-emitting effect corresponding display even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28 and FIG. 283-42(a) to FIG. 283-47(l), the portion where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even during the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is a variable display that is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect, and interest in the variable display that is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect can also be increased.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to thirty-ninth aspects,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to control the performance so that the first light-emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance, and the light emission ends at a predetermined end timing before the variable display corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, during the variable display that is the target of the win-time flash performance, the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at a brightness C2 and a cycle T2 before the start of the reach performance, and the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start timing of the reach performance).
If the light emission of the first light-emitting means in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance is not terminated at the specified end timing due to the occurrence of a specified event, special end control is performed to terminate the light emission of the first light-emitting means at a specific end timing after the specified end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-22, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to the generation of static electricity, etc., a part that terminates the late winning flash performance including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern determination command), which is a timing after the start timing of the reach performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt when the light emission in a manner corresponding to a specific light emission effect does not end normally.

A gaming machine according to a 41st aspect is the gaming machine according to a 40th aspect,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of a game is provided;
The game control means is capable of transmitting variable display end information notifying the end of the variable display when the variable display ends to the performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-4(A), a portion in which the CPU 103 can transmit a pattern determination command specifying the stop of the variable display of the decorative pattern);
The performance execution means performs the specific end control based on the reception of the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-22, the performance control CPU 120 ends the flash performance at the time of the later winning based on the reception of a pattern determination command).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the sense of discomfort felt when terminating the light emission in a manner corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be further reduced.

A gaming machine of aspect 42 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 39 to 41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-4, a portion in which the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be ended at the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion performance and the start timing of the reach performance),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-4, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot stop the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F due to the generation of static electricity or the like, the later winning flash performance including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is ended at the end timing of the variable display, which is a timing later than the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion performance and the start timing of the reach performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission performance can be ended at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of aspect 43 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 42,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of a super reach) that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied while the specific performance is being executed, the specific light emitting performance is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-21, when a start winning occurs at the first start port during the execution of the reach performance of the Super Reach, the part that does not determine the execution of the winning flash performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to a specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect 44 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 43,
The effect execution means does not execute the specific light emitting effect when the specified condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is equal to or shorter than the specified period, and is capable of executing the specific light emitting effect when the specified condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is longer than the specified period (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning occurs in the first start port during execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or shorter than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the previous winning, the part that does not decide to execute the flash effect at the time of the winning).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance from becoming difficult to understand due to the specific light-emitting performance being executed when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

A gaming machine of aspect 45 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 44,
The performance execution means includes:
A specific effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state can also be executed in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-9, a portion in which the reach effect of a super reach can be executed even in a variable display in which the variable display result is a miss).
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state, the specific light emitting effect can be executed in response to the start of the next variable display of the variable display (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning occurs in the first start port during the execution of a variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or shorter than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the previous winning, the flash effect at the time of the winning can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a miss).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the special effects and the special light-emitting effects due to the special effects and the special light-emitting effects being executed at the same time.

A gaming machine of aspect 46 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 45,
A specific area through which the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game medium passes through (for example, a winning ball device 6A that forms a first start winning hole);
A specific light-emitting means (e.g., a starting lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific area and capable of emitting light in different light-emitting modes;
Equipped with
The display means can display the specific display in any one of a plurality of display modes having different rates of control of the specific display to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-17, a portion in which a reserved display or an active display can be displayed in any one of display patterns α to γ having different jackpot expectations);
The specific light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in a light-emitting manner corresponding to the display manner of the specific display, regardless of whether the specific light-emitting performance is executed or not (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, when it is determined that the display is in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the start gate lamp 135SG009S is a portion that emits light in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the variable display based on the start winning, regardless of the light-emitting manner of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinking as the winning flash performance or the game effect lamp 9, etc.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can be recognized by the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting means provided around the specific area, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 47 is the gaming machine according to aspect 46,
The number of light emission modes that the specific light emitting means can emit is greater than the number of light emission modes that the first light emitting means can emit in the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-9, a portion in which the number of light emission modes of the start gate lamp 135SG009S in the start gate lamp light emission performance is greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emission variation of the specific light emitting means is increased, which can increase the interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 48 is the gaming machine of aspect 46 or aspect 47,
The light-emitting area of the first light-emitting means is larger than the light-emitting area of the specific light-emitting means (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-10, the light-emitting area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as a winning flash performance is larger than the light-emitting area in which the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light as a starting gate lamp light-emitting performance).
The period during which the specific light-emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition 1 is longer than the period during which the first light-emitting means emits light according to the specific light-emitting effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (in the case where the execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light from the occurrence of the start winning to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the start winning flash effect, while the start opening lamp 135SG009S emits light from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the variable display that is the target of the hold display notice effect (the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented due to the first light-emitting means emitting light in response to a specific light-emitting effect for an excessively long period of time, while the player's anticipation of an advantageous state being achieved through the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting means can be maintained for a long period of time.

A gaming machine of aspect 49 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 46 to 48,
Both the first light-emitting means and the specific light-emitting means are capable of flashing (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, a portion in which a winning flash lamp 135SG009F can flash, and as shown in modified example 135SG-10, a portion in which a starting port lamp 135SG009S can flash),
The blinking cycle of the first light-emitting means is different from the blinking cycle of the specific light-emitting means (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-10, the blinking cycle of the starter lamp 135SG009S is different from the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash effect),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the blinking cycles are different, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the first light-emitting means and the specific light-emitting means, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Fig. 274 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by being shot from a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 276). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, three locations at the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are general winning openings 10 that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 276), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 274). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 274), a movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided. The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each composed of an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 276).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 276).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 275 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, the operation of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 276. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also installed. The various control boards are a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations in the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 277 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 277, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is generated periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute timer interrupt process periodically.

After executing such game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 278. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 278 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 279 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process processing executed in step S25 shown in Figure 278. In this special symbol process processing, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning determination processing (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been set for transmission in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 277.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In addition, the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Fig. 280 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Fig. 280(A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Fig. 280(B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state where probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The gameplay may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the gameplay state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to the probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V probability type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot is 1/320, the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the gameplay state is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the high base (during time-saving control) (so-called type 1/2 mixed type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but a setting may be set in which the probability of a big win or small win is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a big win game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the gameplay is changed according to the setting value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a performance switch (a switch for executing a predetermined performance each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability variable state or a big win game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 281. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 281 is started, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to emit an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 282 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 281 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 282, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The small win presentation process of step S90174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process of step S90175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol showing "- " may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Part 135SG)
Next, the characteristic part 135SG in the embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present characteristic part 135SG) will be described. FIG. 283-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic part 135SG. As shown in FIG. 283-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic part 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a starting hole lamp 135SG009S for illuminating the winning ball device 6A (first starting hole) is provided near the winning ball device 6A.

Furthermore, a stick lamp 135SG009X for illuminating the stick controller 31A is provided within the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for illuminating the push button 31B is provided within the push button 31B. These stick lamps 135SG009X and button lamps 135SG009Y, together with the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d described above, constitute the game effect lamps 9 in this feature section 135SG.

As shown in FIG. 283-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starter lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be lit (blinked) by control from the performance control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14.

Figure 283-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 135SG constitutes the first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 constitutes the second display area 135SG005Sa including the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D capable of displaying the number of reserved first special symbols by the number of reserved circular symbols, the second reserved memory display area 135SG005U capable of displaying the number of reserved second special symbols by the number of reserved circular symbols, and the caption display area 135SG005T capable of displaying captions showing the game status and the effects currently being performed.

The upper right corner of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 135SG005Sb that includes a fourth pattern 135SG005J, which indicates that the special pattern is being variably displayed, and a display of the number of reserved first special patterns and the number of reserved second special patterns.

In the center of the first display area 135SG005F, the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged, and variable display of the decorative patterns can be performed. In addition, small patterns 135SG005M, which are smaller than the decorative patterns, are displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small patterns correspond to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and are arranged vertically. In addition, the small patterns 135SG005M are not hidden during variable display, and are always displayed in the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 283-3, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A is provided at the bottom center of the first display area 135SG005F in this characteristic section 135SG for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as an active display.

Hereafter, in this feature section 135SG, the pending display and the active display may be collectively referred to as the specific display.

Figure 283-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature unit 135SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 283-4(A) is just one example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 283-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 283-4 (B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "jackpot", or "minor hit", and the result of the determination (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type the variable display result will be when the variable display result is a "jackpot".

For example, as shown in FIG. 283-4(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "1" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a pattern specification command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not, the judgment result of the type of jackpot (probable hit or non-probable hit), and whether it will be a small hit, as the judgment result at the time of winning. In addition, command C6XXH is a variable category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, that is, whether the random number value for judging the fluctuation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other".

The commands shown in FIG. 283-4(A) are just an example, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 283-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 283-5, in this feature section 135SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so that they can be counted. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 shown in FIG. 283-10.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the change pattern is a random number value used to determine the change pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 283-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 135SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature section 135SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature unit 135SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature unit 135SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature unit 135SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Also, FIG. 283-6(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result determination table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 135SG, regardless of whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result determination table 2 in this feature section 135SG, the number of determination values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a determination value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no determination value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 283-7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature unit 135SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 135SG will be explained using FIG. 283-7(B). In this feature section 135SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). And the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player is repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" and "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this feature section 135SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of a special jackpot will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a special jackpot, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the jackpot game state ends, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which jackpot game states occur consecutively without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special game games (100 times in this feature part 135SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special game games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 283-7(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a normal opening jackpot state or a high-speed opening jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 283-7(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 283-8 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). In addition, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the normal reach variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance described later is not executed, and a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance described later is executed once, and a common normal reach reach reach performance is executed. Furthermore, the super reach variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance described later is executed twice, and a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance described later is executed three times, and a common super reach reach reach performance is executed. In other words, in this feature section 135SG, an example is shown in which only one type of reach performance is provided for each of the normal reach reach performance and the super reach reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple reach performances may be provided for the normal reach reach performance and the super reach reach performance.

The variation patterns in this feature section 135SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" or the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C."

As shown in Figure 283-8, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature part 135SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

The normal reach variation pattern in this feature unit 135SG includes a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo consecutive performance in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed during the variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during the variable display. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special symbol variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during the variable display.

Furthermore, the super reach variation pattern in this feature section 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during the variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times during the variable display. In the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special chart variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times during the variable display.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the probability of a jackpot increasing, and therefore in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

In other words, for the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern in this feature section 135SG, the more pseudo consecutive effects that are executed during the variable display, the higher the chance of a big win.

In addition, in this characteristic section 135SG, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 283-9 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 283-9, when the variable display result is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using this jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach pseudo-consecutive performance 1 jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern for a super reach pseudo-consecutive performance 2 jackpots), or PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern for a super reach pseudo-consecutive performance 3 jackpots). Also, if the variable display result is a sure-win jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 1 jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 2 jackpots), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 3 jackpots).

As shown in FIG. 283-9, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B have different determination rates for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 at a rate of 30%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 45%. In other words, in this feature part 135SG, when the variable display result is a sure-variable jackpot, the variable display result is determined to be a super reach fluctuation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-sure-variable jackpot. Furthermore, when looking at the number of times the pseudo consecutive performances are performed, if the variable display result is a jackpot with a high probability of winning, it is easier for more pseudo consecutive performances to be performed during the variable display than if the variable display result is not a jackpot with a high probability of winning. For this reason, this feature unit 135SG makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the change patterns in the variable display and the number of times the pseudo consecutive performances are performed.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small win, the special win fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern) using the special win fluctuation pattern determination table.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach pseudo consecutive performance two misses), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach pseudo consecutive performance three misses).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature unit 135SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved variable charts stored in memory being 3 or 4, or the time-saving state, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 135SG is provided with a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIG. 283-10, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 135SG150 shown in FIG. 283-10 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 135SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 135SG151B, a regular chart reserve memory section 135SG151C, a game control flag setting section 135SG152, a game control timer setting section 135SG153, a game control counter setting section 135SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 135SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 135SG151A stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 135SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 135SG151A thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 135SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 135SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 135SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 135SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 135SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 135SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 135SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 135SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 135SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. 283-11(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 283-11(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 135SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 135SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 135SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 135SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 135SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 135SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 135SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 135SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 135SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 135SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 135SG, the data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. 283-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 135SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 135SG194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special chart reserved memory (for example, "4"). In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 135SG194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special chart reserved memory (for example, "4"). When a start winning occurs in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, a set of four commands, namely, a start winning port winning designation command (first start winning port winning designation command or second start winning port winning designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start winning port winning designation commands, the area for storing pattern designation commands, the area for storing variable category designation commands, the area for storing reserved memory number notification commands, the area for storing reserved display flags, and the area for storing winning flash performance target flags indicating whether or not the winning flash performance is the target of the winning flash performance described later, in association with the reserved memory number, and are divided into the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

When the start conditions are met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start conditions are met are copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. 283-11 (C), and the contents of the copied reserved memory are themselves deleted from the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A. The contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved memory are then shifted one by one to the higher storage areas.

As described above, when the variable display of the reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B, so as shown in FIG. 283-11 (C), a storage area similar to that of the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A is provided. That is, an area for storing the start port winning designation command, an area for storing the pattern designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the reserved memory number notification command, an area for storing the reserved display flag, and an area for storing the winning flash effect target flag that indicates whether or not the winning flash effect described below is the target.

In this feature section 135SG, if a start win occurs when variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, the start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number notification command based on the start win are stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without passing through the start win reception command buffer 135SG194A. The reserved display flag is set by the performance control CPU 120 executing the advance notice setting process (S161) described below.

The contents stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) during the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

The reserved display flag is a flag that indicates the display mode of the reserved display or the active display that corresponds to the variable display being executed. Details will be described later, but in this feature unit 135SG, the display mode of these reserved displays and active displays (the value of the reserved display flag) can suggest the rate at which the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature part 135SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 279 will be described based on FIG. 283-12. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is in the ON state based on the detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A (step 135SGS101a). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 135SGS102). The CPU 103 can specify the first reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. When the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "1" (step 135SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step 135SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 135SGS101b; Y), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 135SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 135SGS105 (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "2" (step 135SGS106).

After executing either the process of step 135SGS103 or step 135SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 (step 135SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 135SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 135SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 135SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 135SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 135SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 277 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of step 135SGS111, a random number value determination process is executed at the time of winning (step 135SGS112). After that, a setting is made to send a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 135SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 278 after the special pattern process process is completed.

After executing the process of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116), and the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 283-13 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS112 in Figure 283-12 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 135SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the normal special symbol process (step S110 in Figure 279) determines whether or not to control the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) to a "jackpot" and set the game state to a jackpot. In addition, the variable pattern setting process (step S111 in Figure 279) determines the variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbols.

On the other hand, apart from these judgments, when the game ball is detected in the start winning hole (first start winning hole or second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number judgment process of step 135SGS112 to judge whether or not it is judged that the jackpot pattern is to be stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and judge whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that entered the start winning hole is started, that is, before it is decided whether or not it is a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is judged that the special symbol display result will be a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be, and based on this judgment result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. will execute a preview performance such as a pre-reading preview performance as described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 283-13(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the special probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the special probability state when the special probability flag is on, identifies the time-saving state when the special probability flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, and identifies the normal state when both the special probability flag and the time-saving flag are off.

Following the processing of step 135SGS121, the special chart display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 283-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result extracted in step 135SGS109 of FIG. 283-12 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 135SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 135SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, it is possible to set values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range, and have the CPU 103 compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 135SGS123 that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, i.e., if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 135SGS123; N), the special chart display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 283-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS124). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result extracted in step 135SGS109 in FIG. 283-12 is within a predetermined small win determination range (step 135SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within a predetermined small win determination range, that is, if it is determined that a small win will occur in the variable display (step 135SGS125; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small win", is executed (step 135SGS126), a variable pattern determination table for special wins is selected and set (step 135SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS138.

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is not within the predetermined small win judgment range, that is, if the variable display result in the variable display is "miss", the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss" (step 135SGS128), is executed, and it is judged whether the time-saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current game state is in the time-saving state or not (step 135SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set (step 135SGS131). The miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is a miss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less. In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when the game state is a high base state in which time-saving control is being executed.

In addition to these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A and D, this feature unit 135SG also has miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, which is used when the number of reserved memories is three, and miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, which is used when the number of reserved memories is four, prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 283-9, of these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, and in miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns. On the other hand, in the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, which is within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern.

For this reason, in step 135SGS126, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, and the determination of non-reach and super reach will always result in a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination, so the determination at the time of the initial winning is made using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A.

Also, if it is determined in step 135SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 283-13 (A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 135SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types the jackpot type is determined to be.

The controller 100 also executes the setting to send the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, i.e., the second symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command if it is a non-variable jackpot (step 135SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 135SGS134). If the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), the controller 100 selects and sets the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 135SGS135), and proceeds to step 135SGS138.

Also, if the determined jackpot type is a guaranteed jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), select and set jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B (step 135SGS136), and proceed to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, the variable category according to the range of judgment values that includes the random number MR3 is determined using each of the variable pattern determination tables set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variable pattern (step 135SGS138). In this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 283-13 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the total reserved memory number, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and it is sufficient to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the processing in step 135SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 135SGS139), and the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

Figure 283-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S75 of Figure 281. In the command analysis process shown in Figure 283-14, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not there is a received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the memory contents of the performance control command receiving buffer (step 135SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If a command is received in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), it is determined whether the received command is a command to designate winning at the first starting port, for example by checking the MODE data of the received command (step 135SGS222).

If the received command in step 135SGS222 is not a first start port winning designation command (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is a second start port winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

If the received command in step 135SGS224 is not a second start port winning designation command (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a pattern designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command in step 135SGS226 is not a pattern designation command (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command in step 135SGS227 is not a variable category command (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command in step 135SGS228 is not the first pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the command received in step 135SGS222 is a first start port winning designation command (step 135SGS222; Y), if the command received in step 135SGS224 is a second start port winning designation command (step 135SGS224; Y), if the command received in step 135SGS226 is a pattern designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), or if the command received in step 135SGS227 is a variable category command (step 135SGS227; Y), If the command received in step 135SGS228 is the first pending memory count notification command (135SGS228; Y), or if the command received in step 135SGS230 is the second pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning time received command buffer 135SG194A or active display buffer 135SG194B shown in FIG. 283-11 (step 135SGS233), and processing returns to step 135SGS221.

In step 135SGS233, specifically, if there is no pending memory and the variable display is not in progress, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B, and if there is pending memory or the variable display is in progress, the received command is stored at the top of the free area in the start winning time received command buffer 135SG194A.

In addition, when a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), the pending memory number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. In other words, it is sufficient if the performance control commands received in response to the occurrence of a start winning can be stored sequentially from the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A.

If the received command in step 135SGS230 is not the second pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 135SGS234), and processing returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis process of this characteristic part 135SG, if the received command is a start port winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category command, or a reserved memory number notification command, the received command is stored sequentially from the beginning of the free space in the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the received command is a start port winning designation command, a timer is set to wait for the reception of the reserved memory number notification command, and if the reserved memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry reserved memory that has not received the reserved memory number notification command may be set as not being subject to the pre-reading preview performance described below.

Next, the performance control process processing in this characteristic section 135SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 283-15, in the performance control process processing, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), and then executes a specific display start performance execution process (step 135SGS162) to execute a specific display start performance as a display start animation for the pending display in the active display area 135SG005A, the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, and the second pending memory display area 135SG005U, and a display start animation for the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. In addition, after the specific display start performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 executes a winning flash performance execution process (step 135SGS163) for executing a winning flash performance, a specific display rotation display performance execution process (step 135SGS164) for executing a specific display rotation display performance as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the reserved display or active display after the above-mentioned specific display start performance has ended (see Figures 283-19 (B-1) to 283-19 (B-4)), and a start port lamp light emission performance execution process (step 135SG165) for executing a start port lamp light emission performance in which the start port lamp 135SG009S is illuminated in a color according to the display mode of the reserved display/active display based on the reserved memory until the variable display based on the reserved memory that is the target of the reserved display notification performance ends, when it is determined that the reserved display notification performance is to be executed as a pre-reading notice in this characteristic part 135SG, and then executes one of the processes from step S170 to step S177.

The specific display rotation display effect execution process in this characteristic section 135SG also includes a process of shifting each pending display to the next display position based on the start of the variable display and displaying it as a rotation animation, and a process of shifting the pending display to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and displaying it as a rotation animation.

Figure 283-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 161 of Figure 283-15 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240) and determines whether there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241). If there is no entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; Y), it determines whether there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2", that is, whether the pending display notice performance as the pre-reading notice performance is already being executed (step 135SGS242).

If there is no entry with the display mode flag set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; N), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243). If the symbol designation command of the entry does not indicate a small win (step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is identified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 135SGS244a) and the variable category is identified from the variable category command of the entry (step 135SGS244b). Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display preview performance and the display pattern based on the identified variable display result and variable category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 283-17, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a non-reach, there is a 95% chance that the hold display preview performance will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the hold display or active display is white), there is a 5% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed in display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or active display is blue), and there is a 0% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed in display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or active display is red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), there is an 80% chance that the hold display preview performance will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the hold display or active display is white), there is a 20% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed with display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or active display is blue), and there is a 0% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed with display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or active display is red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, there is a 65% chance that the hold display preview performance will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the hold display or active display is white), there is a 25% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed with display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or active display is blue), and there is a 10% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed with display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or active display is red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 15% chance that the hold display preview performance will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the hold display or active display is white), there is a 30% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed in display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or active display is blue), and there is a 55% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed in display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or active display is red).

In other words, this feature unit 135SG is set so that when the reserved display or active display is displayed in red, the target variable display result has the highest probability of being a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate), and when the reserved display or active display is displayed in white, the target variable display result has the highest probability of being a miss (jackpot expectation rate according to the display color of the reserved display or active display: red > blue > white).

Returning to FIG. 283-16, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has decided to execute a hold display preview performance in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246). If it has decided to execute a hold display preview performance in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246; Y), it sets the display mode flag of the entry to a value ("1" or "2") corresponding to the decided display pattern (step 135SGS247), and ends the advance preview setting process.

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; Y), if the symbol designation command of that entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243; Y), or if it has been decided not to execute the pending display preview performance (step 135SGS246; N), then the display mode flag of that entry is set to "0" (step 135SGS248), which corresponds to not executing the dig display preview performance, and the advance preview setting process is terminated.

Note that, in this feature section 135SG, an example is given of a form in which the preview effect that determines the display mode of the pending display and the effect that determines the display mode of the active display can be executed together as a preview effect for the pending display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the preview effect that determines the display mode of the pending display and the effect that determines the display mode of the active display can also be executed individually as different effects.

Figure 283-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step 135SGS162 of Figure 283-15 as the specific display start performance execution processing. In the specific display start performance execution processing, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not either specific display start performance A or specific display start performance B is being executed (step 135SGS251). Whether or not either specific display start performance A or specific display start performance B is being executed can be determined by whether or not the process timer for specific display start performance A or the process timer for specific display start performance B, which will be described later, is operating.

If the specific display start performance A or the specific display start performance B is not being executed (step 135SGS251; N), it is determined whether or not a start winning designation command has been received (whether or not the start winning designation command reception flag is set) (step 135SGS252). If the start winning designation command has not been received (step 135SGS252; N), the specific display start performance execution process is terminated. Also, if a start winning designation command has been received (step 135SGS252; Y), a newly generated reserved memory entry is identified by referring to the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (263SGS273), and it is determined whether or not it is the first special chart reserved memory (step 135SGS253a). In addition, whether or not it is the first special chart reserved memory can be determined by the start opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (the identified entry) is not the first special chart reserved memory (step 135SGS253a; N), proceed to step 135SGS255. If the entry is the first special chart reserved memory (step 135SGS253a; Y), determine whether the display mode flag of the identified entry is 0 or not, that is, whether the entry is the target of the reserved display notice performance (step 135SGS254). If the display mode flag of the identified entry is 0, that is, the entry is not the target of the reserved display notice performance (step 135SGS254; Y), proceed to step 135SGS255.

In the processing of step 135SGS255, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table for specific display start performance A according to the display position of the specific display (pending display or active display). Then, it starts a process timer for specific display start performance A (step 135SGS256).

If the display mode flag of the identified entry is not 0, that is, if the entry is the target of the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS254; N), a process table for specific display start effect B corresponding to the display position of the specific display (pending display or active display) is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, a process timer for specific display start effect B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing step 135SGS256 or step 135SGS258, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device according to the contents of process data 1 in the set specific display start performance process table (step 135SGS259), and ends the specific display start performance execution process.

Also, if specific display start performance A or specific display start performance B is being executed (step 135SGS251; Y), the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer for the specific display start performance being executed (process timer for specific display start performance A or process timer for specific display start performance B) by 1 (step 135SGS260), and determines whether the process timer for the specific display start performance that has been decremented by 1 (process timer for the specific display start performance being executed) has timed out (step 135SGS261). If the process timer for the specific display start performance being executed has not timed out (step 135SGS261; N), the performance device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the specific display start performance being executed (step 135SGS262), and the specific display start performance execution process is terminated.

If the process timer for the specific display start performance currently being executed times out (step 135SGS261; Y), it is determined whether or not the process timer for the specific display start performance is the last process timer for the specific display start performance (step 135SGS263). If the last process timer for the specific display start performance has timed out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display start performance ends (step 135SGS267) and the specific display start performance execution process ends. If the last process timer for the specific display start performance has not timed out (step 135SGS263; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the next specific display start performance is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the next specific display start performance (step 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, step 135SGS266), and the specific display start performance execution process ends.

As described above, in this characteristic part 135SG, when a start winning occurs and it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance (hold display preview performance) based on the start winning, or when the start winning is a start winning at the second start port, as shown in Figures 283-19 (A), 283-19 (B), and 283-19 (B-1) to 283-19 (B-4), a specific display start performance A is displayed in a position according to the number of hold memories in the active display area 135SG005A or the hold memory display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U, in which a hold display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the appearance animation of the pending display (active display) as the specific display start performance A is approximately 0.2 seconds. After the specific display start performance A ends, the pending display (active display) transitions to a display with a rotating animation in the active display area 135SG005A or pending memory display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U as with other pending displays and active displays, as the specific display rotating display performance described above.

In addition, when a start winning occurs, and the execution of a pre-reading preview performance (hold display preview performance) is determined based on the start winning, and the start winning is a start winning to the first start port, as shown in Figures 283-20 (A) to 283-20 (C) and 283-20 (C-1) to 283-20 (C-4), as a specific display start performance B, first, an animation of character A appearing from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. After character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, a variable display is executed at the timing of the start winning, or if the first special reserved memory already exists, an animation of character A moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is displayed. At this time, character A is displayed overlapping with a part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D.

When character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, as shown in Figures 283-20 (C-1) to 283-20 (C-4), an animation is displayed in which character A attacks (acts) the position where the pending display is displayed based on the initial winning. When the display of this animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where character A attacked.

In this characteristic part 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the animation in which character A attacks the position where the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is displayed as the specific display start performance B is about 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the reserved display appearance animation is about 0.2 seconds. In other words, when the specific display start performance B is executed for the reserved display in the first special chart, it takes 1.2 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning to the completion of the display of the reserved display based on the start winning. Then, the reserved display after the specific display start performance B ends transitions to a display with a rotating animation in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D as the specific display rotation display performance described above, just like other reserved displays and active displays.

When character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the specific display start performance B, if the variable display is not being executed at the timing of the start winning and the first special chart reserved memory does not exist, an animation of character A moving to the active display area 135SG005A is displayed. Then, when character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, an animation of character A attacking (acting) on the position where the active display is displayed based on the start winning, i.e., the active display area 135SG005A, is displayed, as in Figures 283-20 (C-1) to 283-20 (C-4). When the display of this animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where character A attacked.

In this feature 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the animation in which character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display start performance B is approximately 0.5 seconds, and the period from the end of that animation to the end of the active display appearance animation is approximately 0.2 seconds. In other words, when specific display start performance B is executed for the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning to the completion of the display of the active display based on the start winning. Then, after the specific display start performance B ends, the active display transitions to a display with a rotation animation in the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display rotation display performance described above.

Figures 283-21 and 283-22 are flow charts showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS163 of Figure 283-21 as the winning flash effect execution process. In the winning flash effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command reception buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and determines whether there are any entries in the start winning command reception buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B with the display mode flag set to "1" or "2", i.e., whether the pending display preview effect is being executed (step 135SGS273).

If there is an entry with the display mode flag set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS273; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is an entry based on a start winning at the first start gate (step 135SGS274). Whether the entry is an entry based on a start winning at the first start gate can be determined from the start gate winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry is based on a start winning into the first start port (step 135SGS274; Y), the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether the game state is normal or not (step 135SGS275). If the game state is normal (step 135SGS275; Y), it further judges whether the value of the presentation control process flag is any of 0 to 3, that is, whether the game state is a big win game state or a small win game state (step 135SGS276). If the value of the presentation control process flag is any of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), it judges whether the variable category of the entry (an entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is a super reach or not (step 135SGS277).

If the variable category of the entry is Super Reach (step 135SGS277; Y), it is determined whether the value of the performance control process flag is 2 or not, i.e., whether variable display is being executed or not (step 135SGS278). If the value of the performance control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a reach performance is being executed or not (step 135SGS279). Whether a reach performance is being executed or not can be determined from the contents of the variable display process data, etc.

If the value of the performance control process flag is not 2 (step 135SGS278; N) or if the reach performance is not being executed (step 135SGS279; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the flash performance when a win occurs based on the variable display result. Note that the variable display result can be determined from the design specification command of an entry for which the flash performance target flag when a win occurs is not set.

As shown in FIG. 283-24, if the variable display result is a miss, the flash effect when a prize is won is determined to be executed with a probability of 10%, and the flash effect when a prize is won is determined not to be executed with a probability of 90%. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the flash effect when a prize is won is determined to be executed with a probability of 20%, and the flash effect when a prize is won is determined not to be executed with a probability of 80%.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if the winning flash effect is executed from the start of the winning, the probability of being controlled to the big win game state is set to be higher than if the winning flash effect is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 283-21, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects judges whether or not it has decided to execute a flash effect when a prize is won (step 135SG279b). If it has decided to execute a flash effect when a prize is won (step 135SG279b; Y), the CPU 120 sets the flash effect target flag for the entry (the entry for which the flash effect target flag for the prize is not set) to "1" indicating that the entry is a pending memory for the flash effect when a prize is won (step 135SG280), and turns on the flash effect execution flag for the prize (step 135SG280a). It selects a process table for flash effects when a prize is won in the previous period, starts a process timer for flash effects when a prize is won in the previous period, and controls the effect device according to the contents of process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to 135SGS283), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in FIG. 283-23, the early winning flash effect is an effect in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 flash in a manner corresponding to the early winning flash effect for 1.5 seconds from the occurrence of the initial winning (as shown in FIG. 283-26 (A) and FIG. 283-26 (B) the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are repeatedly turned on and off at high brightness C1), a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, and an effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. The winning flash effect corresponding sound in this characteristic part 135SG is divided into a first-term winning flash effect corresponding sound output during the execution of the first-term winning flash effect, and a second-term winning flash effect corresponding sound output during the execution of the second-term winning flash effect. Of these, the first-term winning flash effect corresponding sound may be a sound with a relatively short output period (for example, 1 second) such as an electronic sound or a voice sound of a specific character that is output once. Also, the second-term winning flash effect corresponding sound may be a sound with a longer output period than the first-term winning flash effect corresponding sound such as a dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect). In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 135SG, in addition to the winning flash effect corresponding sound described above, multiple performance sounds such as the advance notice effect corresponding sound and the variable display corresponding sound described below can be simultaneously output from the speakers 8L and 8R using different channels at different volumes.

If the entry is based on a win at the second starting port (step 135SG274; N), if the game state is not normal (step 135SG275; N), if the effect control process flag is not 0 to 3 (step 135SG276; N), if the variable category of the entry is not a super reach (step 135SG277; N), if a reach effect is being executed (step 135SG279; Y), or if it has been decided not to execute a flash effect when a win is generated (step 135SG279b), the flash effect target flag for the entry when a win is generated is set to "0" (step 135SG279c), indicating that the entry is not eligible for the flash effect when a win is generated, and the flash effect execution process when a win is generated is terminated.

Also, in step 135SGS271, if the winning flash effect execution flag is on (step 135SGS271; Y), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the process timer for the previous winning flash effect is in operation (step 135SGS284). If the process timer for the previous winning flash effect is in operation (step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the previous winning flash effect is decremented by 1 (step 135SGS285), and it is judged whether the process timer for the previous winning flash effect after decrementing the value by 1 has timed out (step 135SGS286). If the process timer for the previous winning flash effect has not timed out (step 135SGS286; N), the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the previous winning flash effect that is currently in operation (step 135SGS287), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period has timed out (step 135SGS288). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period has not timed out (step 135SGS288; N), the CPU 120 for controlling the effect switches the process data, starts the process timer for the next process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period, and controls the effect device according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the next process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period (steps 135SGS289, 135SGS290, and 135SGS291), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

In step 135SGS292, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) other than the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to blink in a manner corresponding to the previous winning flash performance. In addition, the winning flash performance corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash performance execution process is terminated. In addition, as a manner corresponding to the previous winning flash performance, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly illuminated in white or red. In addition, as a mode according to the winning flash effect, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and stick lamp 135SG009Y and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be illuminated in the same color.

Also, in step 135SGS288, if the last process timer for the flash effect when a prize is won in the early stage has timed out (step 135SGS288; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect when a prize is won in the early stage (step 135SGS294). Then, it selects a process table for the flash effect when a prize is won in the later stage, starts the process timer for the flash effect when a prize is won in the later stage, controls the effect device according to the contents of process data 1 (steps 135SGS294 to 135SGS297), and proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in FIG. 283-23, the later winning flash effect is an effect in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes in a manner corresponding to the later winning flash effect from the end of the earlier winning flash effect to the start of the reach effect of the target variable display super reach, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, and the silhouette image 135SG005S of character A modeled by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. As a manner corresponding to the later winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly illuminated in white or red, as in the earlier winning flash effect. In addition, because the flash effect for later winning is performed at a lower brightness than the flash effect for earlier winning (see Figure 283-28), the actual light emitted by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F during the flash effect for later winning will be darker than the flash effect for earlier winning.

As shown in FIG. 283-27(A), the game effect lamp 9 (particularly the frame lamp 9b) is repeatedly turned on (blinking) and off at a brightness C2 that is lower than the brightness C1 described above during the period except when the flash effect is being performed. In particular, the blinking period at brightness C2 is longer than the blinking period during the flash effect is being performed during the previous period, and during the blinking period, as shown in FIG. 283-27(B) to FIG. 283-27(D), the frame lamp 9b blinks while changing the light color in stages at multiple points in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. For this reason, the game effect lamp 9 during the period except when the flash effect is being performed during the previous period makes a lesser impression on the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the previous period flash effect is being performed.

Also, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of early prize winning is not running in step 135SGS284, that is, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning is running (step 135SGS284; N), the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning by 1 (step 135SGS298), and determines whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning that has been decremented by 1 has timed out (step 135SGS299). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning has not timed out (step 135SGS299; N), the performance device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning that is currently running (step 135SGS300), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the later winning has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of the later winning has timed out (step 135SGS301). If the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of the later winning has not timed out (step 135SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the next flash effect at the time of the later winning is started, and the effect device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 (steps 135SGS302 to 135SGS304), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

In addition, if the process timer for the last flash effect at the time of late winning expires (step 135SGS301; Y), the process timer for the first flash effect at the time of late winning starts, and the effect device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 (step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

In step 135SGS307, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to blink in a manner corresponding to the later winning flash performance. In addition, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound corresponding to the winning flash performance at volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309) and determines whether the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1", that is, whether the variable display being executed is a variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance (step 135SGS310). If the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "0" (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash performance execution process ends. If the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1" (step 135SGS310; Y), it determines whether it is the start timing of the reach performance (step 135SGS311).

If it is time to start the reach effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the later winning flash effect, turns off the winning flash effect execution flag (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and ends the winning flash effect execution process.

Also, if it is not the timing to start the reach effect (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol determination command has been received (step 135SGS311a). If a symbol determination command has been received (step 135SGS311a; Y), the later winning flash effect ends, the winning flash effect execution flag is turned off (steps 135SGS312, 135SGS313), and the winning flash effect execution process ends. If a symbol determination command has not been received (step 135SGS311a; N), the winning flash effect execution process ends without executing the processes of steps 135SGS312 and 135SGS313.

As described above, the flash effect at the time of early winning in this feature section 135SG is an effect that ends when a predetermined performance period (e.g., 1.5 seconds) has elapsed, while the flash effect at the time of late winning is an effect that is executed repeatedly without ending every time a certain period of time has elapsed until the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display of the performance target.

In addition, if the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is unable to determine that it is time to start the reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to static electricity or the like during the execution of the later winning flash performance, it is possible to end the later winning flash performance including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F again at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern determination command), which is later than the start timing of the reach performance.

As shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 283-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. 283-22, in this feature section 135SG, the performance control CPU 120 selects one performance process table as the process table for the flash performance when a prize is won in the early stage, and selects one performance process table as the process table for the flash performance when a prize is won in the late stage. In other words, the performance patterns (performance periods) of the flash performance when a prize is won in the early stage and the flash performance when a prize is won in the late stage in this feature section 135SG are always executed in the same performance mode and for the same performance period, regardless of the number of reserved memories, etc.

Figure 283-25 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance processing (step S172) in the performance control process processing. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the values of the process timer, variable time timer, and variable control timer by 1 (steps 135SGS351, 135SGS352, and 135SGS353). Note that the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers that are set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process (step 135SGS358). In addition, the control state for the performance device (performance component) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135SGS356; N), the performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 135SGS360).

In particular, the control contents of steps 135SGS359 and 135SGS360 are as follows: the performance control CPU 120 outputs a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 lower than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display corresponding sound in this characteristic part 135SG refers to background music corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, background music corresponding to the number of pseudo consecutive performances executed during the variable display, etc. In addition, when the flash effect for winning a previous period is not being executed (step 135SGS362; N), the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed (step 135SGS363), whereas when the flash effect for winning a previous period is being executed (step 135SGS362; Y), the game effect lamp 9 is not controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed (as shown in Figures 283-21 and 283-22, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash effect for winning a previous period).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a preview performance execution process (step 135SG364). In this preview performance execution process, for example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process, it determines whether or not to execute a preview performance during variable display execution and in which performance pattern the preview performance will be executed, and it is possible to execute the preview performance according to the determination result. In addition, when determining the performance pattern of the preview performance in the variable display start setting process described above, one performance pattern is determined from multiple performance patterns at different rates depending on the variable display result, so that the proportion of the preview performance controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on which performance pattern the preview performance is executed in.

The preview effect executed in this feature section 135SG is a line preview effect in which the character's lines are displayed on the image display device 5, and the expected probability of a jackpot varies depending on the lines displayed.

The performance control CPU 120 also checks whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the performance control CPU 120 creates image data for the next display screen of the left, center, and right decorative patterns (screens that should be displayed 30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative patterns) and writes it to a specified area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). In this way, variable display control of the decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on data that superimposes image data of a specified area such as a set background image and image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variable display of the decorative pattern are displayed in the image display device 5. In addition, a specified value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

In addition, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after executing step 135SGS366, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that a pattern confirmation command has been received is set (step 135SGS369; Y), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern confirmation command is received, the control will transition to stopping the variable display. Therefore, even if, for example, a variable pattern designation command indicating a long variable time is received due to noise between boards, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be ended when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special pattern has ended).

The process table used for controlling the variable display of the decorative pattern contains the process data during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer settings of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n times out in the processing of step 135SGS356, there is no process data to switch (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the performance control of the decorative pattern based on the process table ends.

Next, the operation of each of the presentation devices when the winning flash presentation is executed in the characteristic part 135SG will be explained based on Fig. 283-28 to Fig. 283-68. First, Fig. 283-28 is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during execution of the variable display and a decision is made to execute a winning flash presentation based on the start winning. Fig. 283-28 is a timing chart corresponding to both the case where execution of the pending display notice presentation is decided when execution of the winning flash presentation is decided based on the start winning, and the case where non-execution of the pending display notice presentation is decided. Fig. 283-29 to Fig. 283-48 are diagrams showing the presentation modes of the image display device 5 and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F when a start winning occurs during execution of the variable display and execution of the pending display notice presentation and the winning flash presentation are decided based on the start winning. Figures 283-49 to 283-68 are diagrams showing the presentation state of the image display device 5 and winning flash lamp 135SG009F when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and a decision is made to execute a winning flash presentation based on the start winning, while a decision is made not to execute a pending display advance presentation.

Note that "when it is decided to execute the pending display preview effect and the winning flash effect" shown in Figures 283-29 to 283-48 refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect is displayed in display pattern β or display pattern γ (displayed as a blue or red circle), and "when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect but not to execute the pending display preview effect" shown in Figures 283-49 to 283-68 refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect is displayed in display pattern α (displayed as a white circle).

First, as shown in Fig. 283-28 and Fig. 283-29(A), while the variable display is being performed, the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner, and the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound corresponding to the variable display at a volume of V2. Also, while the variable display is being performed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to flash at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (flashing in the manner shown in Fig. 283-27(A) to Fig. 283-27(D)).

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, if the preview performance is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance (for example, a preview performance-related sound such as a character speaking the characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output from the speakers 8L, 8R at volume V2. In addition, there are three first special chart reserve memories as reserve memories (three reserve displays are displayed in the first reserve memory display area 135SG005D).

If a winning entry (start winning entry) occurs in the first starting port during such a variable display, and a decision is made to execute a pending display notice effect and a winning flash effect based on the starting winning entry, the previous winning flash effect will start, as shown in Figures 283-28 and 283-29 (B).

As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, first, as shown in Fig. 283-28 and Fig. 283-29 (B), the speaker 8L, 8R starts to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at volume V1 (V1>V2), and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in Fig. 283-28, Fig. 283-30 (C) and Fig. 283-30 (D), the image display device 5 starts to display the effect image 135SG005E around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, stick lamp 135SG009X, and button lamp 135SG009Y start to blink at cycle T1. In addition, with this blinking control, each lamp is lit at brightness C1, which is higher than brightness C2.

In addition, when the previous winning flash performance starts, as shown in Figures 283-30 (D), 283-31 (E), and 283-31 (F), an animation of character A appearing from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed as the specific display start performance B described above, along with an animation of character A moving to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an animation of character A attacking (acting) on the position in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D where the pending display is displayed (the position where the fourth pending display is displayed in the case of this feature part 135SG) is displayed.

After character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an appearance animation is displayed at the affected position, in which the pending display that is the subject of the ongoing winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) gradually appears from bottom to top (see Figures 283-20 (D-1) to 283-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display that has completed its appearance animation in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display like other pending displays, as a special display rotating display performance.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a start winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will blink, and the effect image 135SG005E will start on the image display device 5 before the pending display based on the start winning is completed. Note that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in this feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the later winning flash effect (see Figures 283-32 (G) and 283-32 (H)).

When the early winning flash effect ends, the late winning flash effect starts from the same timing. For the late winning flash effect, as shown in Fig. 283-28, Fig. 283-32 (G) and Fig. 283-32 (H), the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to flash at brightness C2 and with a period T2 (period T2 > period T1). In addition, the image display device 5 starts to display the silhouette image 135SG005S of character A at regular intervals around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

At the end of the early winning flash performance and the start of the late winning flash performance, the light emission mode (flashing at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y as part of the early winning flash performance ends. Then, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y switches to a mode (flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T0 as shown in Figures 283-27(A) to 283-27(D)) corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. In other words, the lighting state of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y will return to the lighting state before the start of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning, based on the end of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y will remain in the off state after the start timing of the flash performance at the time of the later winning.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 is executed in the same manner as before the flash effect at the time of the previous winning (light emission manner shown in FIG. 283-29 (A)) as described above, in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, a blue-based gradation if the background image is a daytime image, a red-based gradation if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The blinking period of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is the period T2, is longer than the previously mentioned period T1, but shorter than the previously mentioned period T0 (lamp blinking period length: T0>T2>T1). Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the later winning flash performance.

As shown in Figures 283-32(H), 283-33(I) and 283-33(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with a transparent black image 135SG005B superimposed on the entire first display region 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5. The silhouette image 135SG005S in this characteristic portion 135SG is displayed in blue so that it is easily visible to the player when superimposed on the black image 135SG005B.

In this characteristic section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that it is easily visible to the player when it is displayed overlapping with the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in multiple colors such as the aforementioned blue, green, and red, the probability of a jackpot may be made to differ depending on the color in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

As shown in Fig. 283-32(H) and Fig. 283-33(J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of the image display device 5. Therefore, in the winning flash performance of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlapping each other, and the player can check whether the variable display is being performed by visually checking the small pattern 135SG005M, regardless of whether the silhouette image 135SG005S is being displayed during the winning flash performance.

As shown in Fig. 283-33(J), Fig. 283-34(K) and Fig. 283-34(L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the pattern determination command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a loss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash effect at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is executed regardless of whether or not it is the pattern determination period. That is, as shown in Fig. 283-33(J), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

When the pattern determination period ends, a new variable display begins. At this time, in the image display device 5, the reserved display displayed at the top of the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one space to the right. In addition, output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 also begins.

After that, as shown in Figures 283-34 (K) to 283-41 (Z), in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the following is repeatedly executed: the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 as a later winning flash effect; the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2; and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

In particular, as shown in Fig. 283-38 (S) to Fig. 283-40 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, even during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (see Fig. 283-40 (W). In this feature section 135SG, decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a special symbol notifying of a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the central decorative symbol display area 5C), the later winning flash performance is executed by outputting the winning flash performance corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a period T2, and displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 283-41(Y) and Fig. 283-41(Z), when the variable display that has become a normal reach miss in response to the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance ends, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash performance at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is also executed during the pattern determination period of the variable display of the normal reach miss. That is, as shown in Fig. 283-41(Y) and Fig. 283-41(Z), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash performance corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

As shown in Figures 283-40 (W) and 283-40 (X), during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d emit light in a lighting mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (for example, if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, the lighting mode is blue at brightness C2), and returns to a lighting mode corresponding to the background image when the variable display is executed again. Furthermore, during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can recognize that the variable display has not yet ended by visually checking the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in Figures 283-42(a) and 283-42(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance starts, the pending display that corresponds to the variable display displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display.

As shown in Figure 283-43(c) to Figure 283-47(l), the variable display continues to execute the flash effect at the time of the later winning. Also, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figure 283-43(d) and Figure 283-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figure 283-45(g) to Figure 283-46(j)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 283-46(j)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in Fig. 283-45(g) and Fig. 283-46(j), during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, blue at brightness C2 for the first temporary stop, and green at brightness C2 for the second temporary stop), and return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Although not shown in this feature section 135SG, when three pseudo consecutive performances are executed during the variable display, during the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, red at brightness C2), and return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display.

As shown in Figures 283-48(m) and 283-48(n), when the timing for the reach effect to start comes due to the progression of the variable display, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 goes white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display and the first display area 135SG005F goes white), and then the reach effect starts. Note that in this feature portion 135SG, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach will then be executed.

At this whiteout timing, the output of the winning flash sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as part of the later winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 end.

At the whiteout timing, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 ends. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d remain off during the whiteout period.

In other words, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are kept off. Then, when the whiteout ends, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d start to emit light (lighting up at brightness C1) according to the reach effect described above.

During the whiteout period, the speakers 8L and 8R stop outputting the variable display corresponding sound. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is silence. When the whiteout ends, the aforementioned winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d start to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) in response to the reach performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the reach performance corresponding sound, which is the sound in response to the reach performance. Note that, as the reach performance corresponding sound in this characteristic section 135SG, background music or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the reach performance (the reach performance of the super reach) is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 283-28, if a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display and it is decided to execute the hold display preview performance based on the start winning, the start gate lamp 135SG009S will start emitting light in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the hold display preview performance (for example, blue if the display pattern of the hold display is display pattern β, and red if the display pattern of the hold display is display pattern γ) from the timing of the start winning as a start gate lamp lighting performance.

The illumination of the start gate lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the aforementioned winning flash effect, and regardless of the blinking pattern of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, it continues to emit light in a color that corresponds to the display pattern of the hold display preview effect from the aforementioned start winning until the end of the target variable display of the start gate lamp illumination effect (target variable display of the winning flash effect).

Next, we will explain the cases where the execution of the pending display preview effect along with the winning flash effect is not decided upon starting winning during the execution of the variable display.

First, as shown in Fig. 283-28 and Fig. 283-49 (A), while the variable display is being performed, the image display device 5 performs variable display of decorative symbols, and the speakers 8L, 8R output a sound corresponding to the variable display at a volume of V2. Also, while the variable display is being performed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on, and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to flash at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (flashing in the manner shown in Fig. 283-27 (A) to Fig. 283-27 (D)).

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, if the preview performance is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance (preview performance corresponding sound) is output from the speakers 8L, 8R at volume V2. In addition, there are three first special chart reserved memories as reserved memories (three reserved displays are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

If a winning entry (start winning entry) occurs in the first starting port during such a variable display, and a decision is made to execute a pending display notice effect and a winning flash effect based on the starting winning entry, the previous winning flash effect will start, as shown in Figures 283-28 and 283-49 (B).

As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, first, as shown in Fig. 283-28 and Fig. 283-49 (B), the speaker 8L, 8R starts outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at volume V1 (V1>V2), and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in Fig. 283-28, Fig. 283-50 (C) and Fig. 283-50 (D), the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect image 135SG005E around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, stick lamp 135SG00X, and button lamp 135SG009Y start blinking control with a cycle of T1. In addition, with this blinking control, each lamp is lit at brightness C1, which is higher than brightness C2.

In addition, when the previous winning flash performance starts, as shown in Figures 283-49 (B), 283-50 (C), and 283-50 (D), the reserved display that is the subject of the currently running winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) gradually appears from bottom to top as the aforementioned specific display start performance A, as shown in Figures 283-19 (B-1) to 283-19 (B-4)). Note that the reserved display that has completed the appearance animation in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display like the other reserved displays as a specific display rotating display performance.

In particular, when the special display start performance A is executed together with the winning flash performance, the pending display appearance animation ends while the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned special display start performance B is executed together with the winning flash performance, the pending display appearance animation ends after the display of the effect image 135SG005E has finished on the image display device 5 (see Figures 283-29 to 283-32). In other words, when the special display start performance A is executed, the display of the pending display (appearance animation) is completed and the rotation animation is started at an earlier timing than when the special display start performance B is executed.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a start winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will start flashing, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 will start before the pending display based on the start winning is completed. Note that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect A in this feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the previous winning flash effect.

When the early winning flash performance ends, the late winning flash performance starts from the end timing. For the late winning flash performance, as shown in Figures 283-28, 283-52 (G) and 283-52 (H), the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to flash at brightness C2 and with a period T2 (period T2 > period T1). In addition, the image display device 5 starts to display a silhouette image 135SG005S of character A at regular intervals around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

At the end of the early winning flash performance and the start of the late winning flash performance, the light emission mode (flashing at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y as part of the early winning flash performance ends. Then, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y switches to a mode (flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T0 as shown in Figures 283-27(A) to 283-27(D)) corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. In other words, the lighting state of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y will return to the lighting state before the start of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning, based on the end of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y will remain in the off state after the start timing of the flash performance at the time of the later winning.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 is executed in the same manner as before the flash effect at the time of the previous winning (light emission manner shown in FIG. 283-29 (A)) as described above, in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, a blue-based gradation if the background image is a daytime image, a red-based gradation if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The blinking period of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is the period T2, is longer than the previously mentioned period T1, but shorter than the previously mentioned period T0 (lamp blinking period length: T0>T2>T1). Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the later winning flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figures 283-52(H), 283-53(I) and 283-53(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where a transparent black image 135SG005B is superimposed over the entire first display region 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5.

As shown in Fig. 283-52(H) and Fig. 283-53(J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of the image display device 5. Therefore, in the winning flash performance of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlapping each other, and the player can check whether the variable display is being performed by visually checking the small pattern 135SG005M, regardless of whether the silhouette image 135SG005S is being displayed during the winning flash performance.

As shown in FIG. 283-53(J), FIG. 283-54(K) and FIG. 283-54(L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the pattern determination command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a loss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash effect at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is executed regardless of whether or not it is the pattern determination period. That is, as shown in FIG. 283-53(J), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

When the pattern determination period ends, a new variable display begins. At this time, in the image display device 5, the reserved display displayed at the top of the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one space to the right. In addition, output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 also begins.

After that, as shown in Figures 283-54 (K) to 283-61 (Z), in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the following is repeatedly executed: the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 as a later winning flash effect; the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2; and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

In particular, as shown in Fig. 283-58 (S) to Fig. 283-60 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, even during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (see Fig. 283-60 (W). In this feature section 135SG, decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a special symbol notifying of a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the central decorative symbol display area 5C), the later winning flash performance is executed by outputting the winning flash performance corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 283-61 (Y) and Fig. 283-51 (Z), when the variable display that has become a normal reach miss in response to the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance ends, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash performance at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is also executed during the pattern determination period of the variable display of the normal reach miss. That is, as shown in Fig. 283-61 (Y) and Fig. 283-61 (Z), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash performance corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

As shown in Figures 283-60 (W) and 283-60 (X), during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (for example, if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, the light emission mode corresponds to the background image when the variable display is executed again). Furthermore, during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can recognize that the variable display has not ended yet by visually checking the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in Figures 283-62(a) and 283-62(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance starts, the pending display that corresponds to the variable display displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display.

As shown in Figures 283-63(c) to 283-67(l), the variable display continues to execute the flash effect at the time of the later winning. Also, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figures 283-63(d) and 283-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figures 283-65(g) to 283-66(j)).

As shown in Fig. 283-65(g) and Fig. 283-66(j), during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, blue at brightness C2 for the first temporary stop, and green at brightness C2 for the second temporary stop), and return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Although not shown in this feature section 135SG, when three pseudo consecutive performances are executed during the variable display, during the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, red at brightness C2), and return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display.

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 283-66(j)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 283-68(m) and 283-68(n), when the timing for the reach effect to start comes due to the progression of the variable display, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 goes white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display and the first display area 135SG005F goes white), and then the reach effect starts. Note that in this feature portion 135SG, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach will then be executed.

At this whiteout timing, the output of the winning flash sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as part of the later winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 end.

At the whiteout timing, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 ends. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d remain off during the whiteout period, but once the whiteout ends, they emit light in a manner that corresponds to the reach presentation.

During the whiteout period, the speakers 8L and 8R stop outputting the variable display corresponding sound. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is silence. When the whiteout ends, the aforementioned winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d start to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) in response to the reach performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the reach performance corresponding sound, which is the sound in response to the reach performance. Note that, as the reach performance corresponding sound in this characteristic section 135SG, background music or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the reach performance (the reach performance of the super reach) is being executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in Figures 283-28, 283-29 (A) to 283-32 (H), and 283-49 (A) to 283-50 (D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up before the pending display is completed, making it easier for the player to recognize the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash performance. Furthermore, the present invention has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the first light-emitting means in the present invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d as the second light-emitting means in the present invention. As shown in FIG. 283-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flashes at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance, while the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash at a brightness of C3 and a cycle of T4 during the early winning flash performance. During the execution of the winning flash effect, it flashes at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1, and during the execution of the later winning flash effect, it flashes at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T0. Therefore, during the execution of the early winning flash effect, not only the winning flash lamp 135SG009F but also the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d flash at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1, making the winning flash effect stand out more, and making it even easier for the player to recognize the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when a new start winning occurs during variable display, whether or not to execute the winning flash effect and whether or not to execute the reserved display notice effect are determined for the reserved memory based on the start winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new start winning occurs when variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, whether or not to execute the winning flash effect and whether or not to execute the reserved display notice effect are determined for the reserved memory based on the start winning. Specifically, when a new start winning occurs during variable display, as the specific display start effect A or specific display start effect B, an animation of the appearance of the active display of one of the display patterns α to γ (display pattern when the reserved display notice effect is not executed or the display pattern when the reserved display notice effect is executed) is executed in the active display area 135SG005A, and then, as the specific display rotation display effect, a rotation display of the active display is executed, and a winning flash effect (early winning flash effect and late winning flash effect) is executed based on the start of the variable display based on the start winning.

As shown in Fig. 283-15, Fig. 283-30(D) to Fig. 283-32(H), Fig. 283-49(B) to Fig. 283-50(D), the specific display start performance is composed of a part where an appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display gradually appears from the bottom to the top, and a part where the pending display is displayed as a rotation animation as shown in Fig. 283-15, Fig. 283-30(D) to Fig. 283-32(H), Fig. 283-49(B) to Fig. 283-50(D), and as shown in Fig. 283-19 and Fig. 283-20, the rotation animation of the pending display starts from the timing when the appearance animation of the pending display is completed, so that the player's attention to the pending display can be increased.

Also, as shown in Fig. 283-29(A) to Fig. 283-32(H), when performing special display start performance B, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d light up as the winning flash performance from a timing before the reserved display starts, so the winning flash performance can be made more prominent. Note that, in this characteristic part 135SG, even when performing special display start performance A of Fig. 283-49(A) to Fig. 283-50(D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d light up as the winning flash performance from a timing before the reserved display starts, so the winning flash performance can be made more prominent.

In addition, the execution period of the special display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of the special display start effect B is 1.2 seconds, and as shown in FIG. 283-28 and FIG. 283-49(A) to FIG. 283-50(D), the winning flash effect starts before the end timing of the special display start effect A. Therefore, regardless of whether the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern α to display pattern γ, the winning flash effect can start before the specific display start effect ends, so the player can reliably recognize the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect.

Also, as shown in Figures 283-28, 283-29(A), 283-29(B), 283-49(A) and 283-49(B), if it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c and movable body lamp 9d are temporarily turned off, allowing the player to recognize the start of the winning flash effect.

In this characteristic section 135SG, when it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are temporarily turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d may be changed to a lower brightness than the previous brightness (for example, if they were emitting light at brightness C2 until then, they may be changed to a brightness C3 that is lower than the brightness C2). In other words, the "low brightness state" in this invention includes a state in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are emitting light at a low brightness, as well as a state in which they are turned off (not emitting light).

Also, as shown in Figures 283-29 (A) to 283-48 (n) and Figures 283-49 (A) to 283-68 (n), during the variable display, a flash effect when a prize is won can be executed whether or not a preview effect is being executed, and as shown in Figure 283-29 (B), when a flash effect when a prize is won is executed while the variable display is being executed, speakers 8L, 8R output the variable display corresponding sound at volume V2 while outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V1 (V1 > V2), and when a flash effect when a prize is won is executed while the preview effect is being executed, the preview effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2 while outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V1 (V1 > V2). Therefore, even if the variable display corresponding sound or advance notice corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash corresponding sound can be output so that it is easy for the player to hear, so the output of the winning flash corresponding sound makes it easy for the player to recognize that the winning flash corresponding sound is being executed.

In this characteristic section 135SG, as an example of a form in which the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output in priority over the preview effect corresponding sound and the variable display element corresponding sound, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, and the preview effect corresponding sound and the variable display corresponding sound are output at volume V2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as an example of a form in which the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output in priority over the preview effect corresponding sound and the variable display element corresponding sound, the winning flash effect corresponding sound may be output at volume V2, while the preview effect corresponding sound and the variable display corresponding sound may be output at a volume lower than volume V2 (for example, volume V3).

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, a form in which the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output in priority over the advance notice effect corresponding sound and the variable display body corresponding sound is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash effect corresponding sound does not have to be output in priority over the advance notice effect corresponding sound and the variable display body corresponding sound. Specifically, if the advance notice effect starts during the execution of the winning flash effect (while the winning flash effect corresponding sound or the variable display corresponding sound is being output from the speakers 8L and 8R), the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be temporarily stopped, and only the variable display corresponding sound and the advance notice effect corresponding sound, or only either the advance notice effect corresponding sound or the variable display corresponding sound, may be output. In this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game caused by the advance notice effect corresponding sound and the variable display corresponding sound being difficult for the player to hear due to the winning flash effect corresponding sound.

Also, as shown in Fig. 283-28, Fig. 283-29(A) to Fig. 283-32(H), Fig. 283-49(A) to Fig. 283-50(D), when it is decided to execute a winning flash effect in response to a start winning, the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from speakers 8L, 8R, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to blink and the animation of the pending display is completed. Therefore, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L, 8R allows the player to quickly recognize that a starting winning has occurred and that it has been decided to execute a winning flash effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic section 135SG, an example is given in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking and the pending display animation is completed after the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the pending display appearance animation may start after the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Also, as shown in FIG. 283-28, during the execution of the early winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to flash at brightness C1, and during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to flash at brightness C2 (C1>C2). By making at least the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flash at brightness C1, the player can be made aware of the start of the winning flash effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashing at brightness C1 even during the execution of the later winning flash effect can be prevented from interfering with other effects and decreasing interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 283-28, an example is given in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to flash at a brightness C1 and a cycle T2 as a flash effect when a prize is won in the early stage, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to flash at a brightness C2 that is lower than the brightness C1 and a cycle T2 that is longer than the cycle T1 as a "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" as a flash effect when a prize is won in the later stage. In other words, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the later winning flash performance of this characteristic part 135SG includes both a slow flashing mode with a low degree of emphasis due to a slow flashing speed (long flashing cycle) and a low brightness mode with a low degree of emphasis due to low brightness, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the later winning flash performance may be only one of the slow flashing mode and the low brightness mode.

Also, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the execution period of the later winning flash effect includes the execution period of the variable display before the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect, and the execution period of the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect. Therefore, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 before and after the start of the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect, making it easier for the player to recognize that it is the variable display that is the subject, and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 283-28, during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the later winning flash performance, silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5. During the execution period of the early winning flash performance, effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, allowing the player to recognize the start of the winning flash performance, and during the execution period of the later winning flash performance, silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, preventing the image display device 5 from continuing to display effect image 135SG005E from interfering with other displays and decreasing interest in the game.

In particular, in this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in Figures 283-30(D) to 283-31(F) and 283-34(L), the effect image 135SG005E is displayed in a brighter color than the silhouette image 135SG005S, and the display area on the image display device 5 is also larger, so that the display of the effect image 135SG005E can effectively allow the player to recognize the start of the flash performance when a prize is won.

Also, as shown in FIG. 283-28, during the execution of the early winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, and during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V1 as the winning flash effect, it is possible to easily make the player aware that the winning flash effect has started, and by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V2 during the execution of the later winning flash effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the interference with other effects by the winning flash effect corresponding sound.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, while the later winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in playing due to other effects being hindered by the winning flash effect corresponding sound. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing due to other effects being hindered by the winning flash effect corresponding sound by not outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound while the later winning flash effect is being executed.

Also, as shown in Figures 283-29(A) to 283-48(n), during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to flash during the variable display pattern determination period before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect begins. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 continues to flash the winning flash lamp 135SG009F during the pattern determination period regardless of whether or not a pattern determination command has been received (the determination command reception flag has been set) or whether or not the variable display time timer has timed out. This allows the player's anticipation of being controlled into a jackpot game state to be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, as the early winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are illuminated in a manner (brightness C1 and cycle T1) corresponding to the early winning flash performance, and after the early winning flash performance ends, as the late winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is illuminated in a manner (brightness C2 and cycle T2) corresponding to the late winning flash performance, while the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are illuminated in a manner (brightness C2 and cycle T2) corresponding to the late winning flash performance. Although an example has been given of the body lamp 9d being illuminated in a manner corresponding to the background image (brightness C2 and cycle T0), the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 may clear the process timer for the early winning flash performance when the early winning flash performance ends, thereby preventing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d from illuminating in a manner corresponding to the early winning flash performance during the execution of the late winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-3, a small symbol 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 283-33(J) etc., during the symbol determination period, the small symbol 135SG005M is displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped. Therefore, even if the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to emit light during the symbol determination period, the small symbol 135SG005M is displayed in a combination that indicates a loss, so the player can recognize that the symbol determination period is in progress.

Also, as shown in Figure 283-33 (J), while the winning flash performance is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, thereby preventing the silhouette image 135SG005S from being overlapped with the small pattern 135SG005M, making it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display.

In addition, this feature section 135SG can execute a pseudo consecutive performance including a temporary stop of the decorative symbols and a re-variable display on the image display device 5 during variable display, and when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed in the variable display while the winning flash performance is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S as the winning flash performance can be displayed superimposed on the special symbol (see FIG. 283-40, etc.) that stops in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C when the decorative symbols temporarily stop, so that the silhouette image 135SG005S hides the special symbol, providing the player with an element of surprise and increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 283-28 and Fig. 283-42(a) to Fig. 283-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is the subject of the flash effect when a prize is won, making it easier for the player to recognize that it is a variable display that is the subject of the flash effect when a prize is won, and increasing the interest of the variable display that is the subject of the flash effect when a prize is won.

Also, as shown in FIG. 283-28, during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at brightness C2 and cycle T2 before the start of the reach effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start of the reach effect. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 283-22, if the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the effect due to static electricity or the like, the later winning flash effect including the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is ended again at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern determination command), which is a timing later than the start timing of the reach effect, so that the discomfort felt when the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect does not end at the start timing of the reach effect can be reduced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 283-22, if the performance control CPU 120 is unable to determine that it is time to start the reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to the generation of static electricity or the like, the performance control CPU 120 will end the later winning flash performance based on the reception of a pattern determination command, thereby further reducing the sense of discomfort felt when ending the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-21, if a start winning occurs at the first start port while the reach performance of the Super Reach is being executed, the execution of the winning flash performance is not decided, so that a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the reach performance of the Super Reach can be prevented.

As shown in FIG. 283-17, in this feature section 135SG, the reserved display and active display can be displayed in one of display patterns α to γ, which have different jackpot expectation rates, and as shown in FIG. 283-28, when it is decided to display the reserved display and active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ, the start gate lamp 135SG009S will emit light in a color corresponding to display pattern β or display pattern γ from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the variable display based on the start winning, regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash performance or the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc. Therefore, the player can recognize the display mode of the reserved display and active display from the light emission mode (light emission color) of the start gate lamp 135SG009S, which increases the fun of the game.

The features of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, the flash effect at the time of the later winning in the characteristic portion 135SG has been exemplified as being executed regardless of whether or not it is during the pattern determination period (when the variable display is stopped), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 283-69 to 283-89 as modified example 135SG-1, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc. as the flash effect at the time of the later winning may not be executed during the pattern determination period.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 283-69 and Fig. 283-70 (A), while the variable display is being performed, the image display device 5 performs variable display of decorative symbols, and the speakers 8L, 8R output a sound corresponding to the variable display at a volume of V2. Also, while the variable display is being performed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on, and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to flash at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (flashing in the manner shown in Fig. 283-27 (A) to Fig. 283-27 (D)).

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, if the preview performance is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance (preview performance corresponding sound) is output from the speakers 8L, 8R at volume V2. In addition, there are three first special chart reserved memories as reserved memories (three reserved displays are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

If a winning entry (start winning entry) occurs in the first starting port during such a variable display, and a decision is made to execute a pending display notice effect and a winning flash effect based on the starting winning entry, the previous winning flash effect will start, as shown in Figures 283-69 and 283-70 (B).

As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, first, as shown in Fig. 283-69 and Fig. 283-70 (B), the speaker 8L, 8R starts outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at volume V1 (V1>V2), and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in Fig. 283-69, Fig. 283-71 (C) and Fig. 283-71 (D), the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect image 135SG005E around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, stick lamp 135SG00X, and button lamp 135SG009Y start blinking control with a cycle of T1. In addition, with this blinking control, each lamp is lit at brightness C1, which is higher than brightness C2.

In addition, when the previous winning flash performance starts, as shown in Figures 283-71 (D), 283-72 (E), and 283-72 (F), an animation of character A appearing from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed as the specific display start performance B described above, along with an animation of character A moving to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an animation of character A attacking (acting) on the position in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D where the pending display is displayed (the position where the fourth pending display is displayed in the present modified example 135SG-1) is displayed.

After character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an appearance animation is displayed at the affected position, in which the pending display that is the subject of the ongoing winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) gradually appears from bottom to top (see Figures 283-20 (D-1) to 283-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display that has completed its appearance animation in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display like other pending displays, as a special display rotating display performance.

In other words, in this modified example 135SG-1, if a start winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 starts before the pending display based on the start winning is completed. Note that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in this modified example 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the later winning flash effect (see Figures 283-73 (G) and 283-73 (H)).

When the early winning flash performance ends, the late winning flash performance starts from the end timing. As shown in Fig. 283-69, Fig. 283-73 (G) and Fig. 283-73 (H), the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2 > cycle T1), the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y start to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (flashing in the manner shown in Fig. 283-27 (A) to Fig. 283-27 (D)), and the image display device 5 starts to display the silhouette image 135SG005S of character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at regular intervals.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, at brightness C2 and cycle T2 is performed in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, a blue-based gradation if the background image is a daytime image, a red-based gradation if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The blinking period of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is the period T2, is longer than the previously mentioned period T1, but shorter than the previously mentioned period T0 (lamp blinking period length: T0>T2>T1). Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the later winning flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figures 283-74(I) and 283-74(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where a transparent black image 135SG005B is superimposed over the entire first display region 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 283-74(J), 283-75(K) and 283-75(L), when the variable display ends based on receipt of a pattern confirmation command, the decorative pattern and small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Then, as shown in Figures 283-69, 283-76 (M) and 283-76 (N), during the pattern determination period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R as the late winning flash effect and the display of silhouette image 135SG005S on image display device 5 are stopped, and only the flashing of main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c and movable body lamp 9d in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on image display device 5 continues.

When the pattern determination period ends, a new variable display begins. At this time, in the image display device 5, the reserved display displayed at the top of the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one space to the right. In addition, output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 also begins.

After that, as shown in Fig. 283-75 (K) to Fig. 283-82 (Z), in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the following are repeatedly executed as the later winning flash effect: the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and with a cycle T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5; however, during the pattern determination period, the following are not executed as the later winning flash effect: the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and with a cycle T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in Fig. 283-79 (S) to Fig. 283-81 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (see Fig. 283-81 (W). In this modified example 135SG-1, decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a special symbol notifying of a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the central decorative symbol display area 5C), a later winning flash performance is executed by outputting a winning flash performance corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a cycle of T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

In FIG. 283-81(W), while the winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not flashed at brightness C2 and in cycle T2 when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect. However, depending on the timing of the temporary stop, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at brightness C2 and in cycle T2 even when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. In other words, in this modified example 135SG-1, the winning flash effect is executed continuously for the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 283-82(Y) and Fig. 283-82(Z), when the variable display that has become a normal reach miss in response to the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance ends, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash performance at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is also executed during the pattern determination period of the variable display of the normal reach miss. That is, as shown in Fig. 283-82(Y) and Fig. 283-82(Z), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash performance corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

As shown in Figures 283-81 (W) and 283-81 (X), during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is being executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can recognize that the variable display has not yet ended by visually checking the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in Figures 283-83(a) and 283-83(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance starts, the pending display that corresponds to the variable display displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display.

As shown in Figures 283-84(c) to 283-88(l), the variable display continues to execute the flash effect at the time of the later winning. Also, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figures 283-84(d) and 283-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figures 283-86(g) to 283-87(j)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 283-87(j)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a period T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 283-89(m) and 283-89(n), when the timing for the reach effect to start comes due to the progression of the variable display, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 goes white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display and the first display area 135SG005F goes white), and then the reach effect starts. Note that in this modified example 135SG-1, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach will then be executed.

At this whiteout timing, the output of the winning flash effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as the later winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 end. On the other hand, the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 and the blinking of the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 continue.

As shown in FIG. 283-69, if a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display and it is decided to execute the hold display preview performance based on the start winning, the start gate lamp 135SG009S will start illuminating in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the hold display preview performance (for example, blue if the display pattern of the hold display is display pattern β, and red if the display pattern of the hold display is display pattern γ) from the timing of the start winning as a start gate lamp illumination performance.

The illumination of the start gate lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the aforementioned winning flash effect, and regardless of the blinking pattern of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, it continues to emit light in a color that corresponds to the display pattern of the hold display preview effect from the aforementioned start winning until the end of the target variable display of the start gate lamp illumination effect (target variable display of the winning flash effect).

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the initial winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off as the later winning flash effect during the pattern determination period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that the variable display is being performed due to the winning flash lamp 135SG009F being continuously turned on as the later winning flash effect during the pattern determination period. Furthermore, during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that the variable display has ended even though it is during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-1, during the pattern determination period during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F for the later winning flash effect, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the pattern determination period during the execution of the later winning flash effect, as long as it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that a variable display is being executed, it is also possible to execute only one or two of the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F for the later winning flash effect, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S.

Furthermore, in this modified example 135SG-1, during the pattern determination period during the execution period of the later winning flash performance, the output of the winning flash performance corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc., as the later winning flash performance are not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a form in which the output of the winning flash performance corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc., as the later winning flash performance are not executed during the pattern determination period during the execution period of the later winning flash performance, the performance control CPU 120 may clear the process timer for the later winning flash performance based on receiving a pattern determination command during the execution of the later winning flash performance, so that the output of the winning flash performance corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, as the later winning flash performance, are not executed during the pattern determination period.

In this case, the performance control CP 120, upon receiving the first variable display start command, selects the later winning flash performance process table again and resets and starts the later winning flash performance process timer, thereby starting the later winning flash performance (output of winning flash performance corresponding sound, illumination of winning flash lamp 135SG009F, display of silhouette image 135SG005S) in response to the start of the new variable display.

As an example of a form in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not illuminated as a late winning flash effect during the pattern determination period during the execution of the late winning flash effect, the effect control CPU 120 may, based on receiving a pattern determination command while the late winning flash effect is being executed, continue to output to the lamp control board 14 lighting control data that keeps the winning flash lamp 135SG009F off (for example, the RGB value of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is "0:0:0" indicating off), rather than lighting control data according to the process data of the late winning flash effect process timer, until it receives a variable display start command.

In addition, if the later winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern determination period, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be executed again from the beginning of each cycle from the start timing of the new variable display (see Figure 283-69), or the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle from the start timing of the new variable display.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-1, when the variable display ends while the later winning flash performance is being executed, the output of the winning flash performance corresponding sound from speakers 8L, 8R as the later winning flash performance and the display of silhouette image 235SG005S are stopped during the pattern determination period of the variable display, while the flashing of main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d continues in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the flashing of main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d may also be stopped during the pattern determination period. In particular, the flashing of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d may be stopped during the pattern determination period by turning off the in lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d during the pattern determination period, or the in lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d may be kept continuously lit in a constant color (for example, a color corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5) during the pattern determination period.

In addition, in the description of FIG. 283-8, in the feature section 135SG, it has been stated that multiple reach effects may be provided as the reach effect of the Super Reach. However, when multiple reach effects are provided as the reach effect of the Super Reach in this manner, the likelihood of a jackpot may be made different between the reach effects of the multiple Super Reach (for example, as the reach effect of the Super Reach, a reach effect of Super Reach α and a reach effect of Super Reach β, which has a higher likelihood of a jackpot than the reach effect of Super Reach α, may be provided).

In particular, in this way, when it is possible to execute multiple Super Reach reach effects with different jackpot expectations, as shown in Figs. 283-90(A) and 283-90(B) as modified example 135SG-2, the movable body 32 is made movable between a retreat position (e.g., an upper position of the image display device 5) and an effect position (e.g., a central front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5), and when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is a variable display with a variable pattern of Super Reach α (a variable display that executes the reach effect of Super Reach α), the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 during the variable display is temporarily whited out. During this period, the movable body 32 is repeatedly moved between the evacuation position and the evacuation position (for example, an intermediate position between the aforementioned evacuation position and the performance position) to execute a movable body operation suggestion performance that suggests that the movable body 32 should move to the performance position, and if the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance is a variable display in the variable pattern of Super Reach β (a variable display that executes the reach performance of Super Reach β), the aforementioned movable body operation suggestion performance may be executed during the period when the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is temporarily whited out, and then a movable body operation performance that moves the movable body 32 from the evacuation position to the performance position may be executed.

By doing this, during the whiteout period, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the movement of the movable body 32, and when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position (when the movable body movement performance is executed), the player can be notified that the movable body movement performance will execute the reach performance of Super Reach β, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach performance of Super Reach α, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

For example, if the target of the winning flash effect is a variable display with a Super Reach α variable pattern, as shown in Figures 283-91(A) and 283-91(B), when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts, the output of the variable display corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, the variable display continues to execute the late winning flash effect. Furthermore, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figures 283-91(B), 283-92(C), and 283-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variable pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figures 283-93(E) to 283-94(H)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Fig. 283-94 (H)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 283-95(I) to 283-96(L), when the timing for the reach effect to start comes as a result of the progression of the variable display, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 goes white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display for a moment and the first display area 135SG005F goes white). Note that in this modified example 135SG-2, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach will then be executed.

As shown in FIG. 283-90(A) and FIG. 283-96(K) to FIG. 283-97(N), during the whiteout period, at the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at brightness C2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body operation suggestion performance, the movable body operation suggestion performance ends based on the movable body 32 repeatedly moving back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (four times in this modified example 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism not shown, and the whiteout period also ends. During the execution period of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output the movable body operation suggestion performance corresponding sound at volume V2 instead of the variable display corresponding sound. As the movable body operation suggestion performance corresponding sound, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "clatter") that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retreat position and the suggested position may be output.

As shown in Figures 283-90 (A), 283-98 (O) and 283-98 (P), from the timing when the movable body operation suggestion effect and whiteout end, the reach effect of Super Reach α starts on the image display device 5, and the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d and winning flash lamp 135SG009F start to light up at brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the reach effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R start to output a reach effect corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach α (such as background music different from the variable display corresponding sound).

When the target of the winning flash effect is a variable display with a Super Reach β variable pattern, as shown in Fig. 283-99(A) and Fig. 283-99(B), when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts, the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, the variable display continues to execute the late winning flash effect. Furthermore, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Fig. 283-99(B), Fig. 283-100(C), Fig. 283-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variable pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Fig. 283-101(E) to Fig. 283-102(H)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 283-102 (H)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a period T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 283-103(I) to 283-104(L), when the timing for the reach effect to start comes as a result of the progression of the variable display, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 goes white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display for a moment and the first display area 135SG005F goes white). Note that in this modified example 135SG-2, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach will then be executed.

As shown in FIG. 283-90(B) and FIG. 283-104(K) to FIG. 283-105(N), during the whiteout period, at the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at brightness C2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, the movable body operation suggestion performance ends when the movable body 32 has repeatedly traveled back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (four travels in this modified example 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism not shown. During the execution period of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output the movable body operation suggestion performance corresponding sound at volume V2 instead of the variable display corresponding sound. As the movable body operation suggestion performance corresponding sound, it is sufficient to output a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "clatter") that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retreat position and the suggested position.

After the movable body operation suggestion performance ends, as shown in Fig. 283-90 (B) and Fig. 283-106 (O) to Fig. 283-106 (P), the whiteout period ends and the movable body 32 moves from the retreat position to the performance position by a drive mechanism not shown as a movable body operation performance. During the movable body operation performance period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are lit at brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the movable body operation performance. Also, although not shown in Fig. 283-90 (B), a movable body operation performance corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1 (see Fig. 283-106 (P)). As the movable body operation performance corresponding sound in this feature part 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "bang") that allows the player to recognize that the movable body has operated may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 283-107(Q), the movable body operation presentation ends based on the return of the movable body 32 from the presentation position to the retreat position. As shown in FIG. 283-90(B), FIG. 283-107(Q) and FIG. 283-107(R), from the timing when the movable body operation presentation and the whiteout end, the reach presentation of the Super Reach β starts on the image display device 5, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d and the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F start to light up at brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the reach presentation, and the speakers 8L and 8R start to output a reach presentation corresponding to the reach presentation of the Super Reach β. Note that, as the reach presentation corresponding to the reach presentation of the Super Reach β, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound and the reach presentation corresponding sound corresponding to the reach presentation of the Super Reach α may be output so that the player can recognize that the reach presentation of the Super Reach β is being executed.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-2, in the variable display of the Super Reach, which is the subject of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 before the start of the Super Reach reach effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at brightness C2 from the start timing of the Super Reach reach effect. In other words, when the reach effect starts, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes from flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T2 to emitting light in a manner corresponding to the reach effect (lighting on at brightness C2), thereby increasing the interest in the reach effect.

In particular, as shown in Figs. 283-96(K) to 283-98(O) and Figs. 283-104(K) to 283-106(O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (whiteout), and during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and from the start of the reach performance of the super reach thereafter, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at brightness C2, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable due to changes in the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and thus improving the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is a variable display with a Super Reach β variation pattern, the movable body action suggestion effect is executed during the whiteout period, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off in response to the execution of the movable body action suggestion effect, and then, in response to the execution of the movable body action effect (movement of the movable body 32 to the performance position), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the movable body action effect. In other words, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at brightness C1 with a period of turning off in response to the execution of the movable body action suggestion effect, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to changes in these light emission modes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, a form in which a dialogue preview effect can be executed as a preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-3, the preview effect may be, in addition to a dialogue preview effect, a step-up effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes in stages, with the expected probability of a jackpot varying depending on the final number of stages of change, or a group preview effect in which a group of multiple characters crosses the image display device 5, etc.

In particular, in the case where a step-up effect can be executed as modified example 135SG-3, as shown in Figures 283-108 (A) and 283-109 (A) to 283-113 (L), when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which a winning flash effect is not being executed, the effect of the step-up effect can be enhanced by temporarily lighting up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 at the timing when an image (step-up image) is displayed on the image display device 5 or when the image is changed gradually. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 283-108(B) and FIG. 283-114(A) to FIG. 283-118(F), when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which a winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is already blinking at brightness C2 and cycle T2, so the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on when the image (step-up image) is displayed on the image display device 5 or when the image is changed in stages. In other words, while the winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect, may not be emitting light in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-3, when a step-up effect is started in the variable display while the winning flash effect is being executed, that is, when the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is already flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T2 as the winning flash effect and a step-up effect is started to light up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect is executed with priority, so it is possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from starting to light up in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect at an inappropriate timing, such as the end timing of the winning flash effect.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, an example is given of a form in which the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the reach performance of the Super Reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute a movable body operation performance that moves the movable body 32 from a retracted position (e.g., a position above the image display device 5) to a performance position (e.g., a central front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5) before the start of the reach performance of the Super Reach, thereby making it possible to notify the player that the reach performance of the Super Reach will be executed.

In this way, when it is possible to execute a movable body movement effect before the reach effect of the Super Reach, as shown in Figures 283-119(A) and 283-119(B) as modified example 135SG-4, when a winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the Super Reach, the expected probability of a jackpot may differ depending on whether the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to either the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect or the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect of the Super Reach.

For example, as shown in FIG. 283-119 (C), when the variable display result of the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is a jackpot, at the start of the variable display, it is decided with a probability of 70% that the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect from the start timing of the movable body operation effect, and it is decided with a probability of 30% that the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect. Then, if the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance is a miss, at the start of the variable display, it is decided that the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation performance at a rate of 30% from the start timing of the movable body operation performance, and that the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance at a rate of 70% from the start timing of the reach performance.

When it is decided to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation presentation or the light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation, the process data corresponding to the decision is selected, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer as the variable display progresses.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-4, depending on the timing when the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends, it may be during the execution of the moving body movement effect or during the execution of the reach effect of the Super Reach, so the player can easily recognize whether the winning flash effect ends during the execution of the moving body movement effect or during the execution of the reach effect of the Super Reach. In particular, as shown in FIG. 283-119(C), the expectation of a big win differs when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the moving body movement effect from the start timing of the moving body movement effect, and when the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the moving body movement effect from the start timing of the reach effect, so that the player can pay attention to the end timing of the winning flash effect, and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, an example is given of a form in which the probability of a jackpot varies depending on the timing when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (changing to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect or a light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect), but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to suggest a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 depending on the timing when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends. This also makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the winning flash effect, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed either at the start of the movable body movement presentation during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash presentation, or at the start of the reach presentation of the super reach. Since the expectation of a jackpot differs between the case where the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement presentation from the start timing of the moving body movement presentation, and the case where the light emission mode is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation, the player can be drawn to the presentation that is being executed at the time when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, in the variable display of the super reach, a form in which the movable body operation presentation can be executed before the start of the reach presentation of the super reach is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a movable body operation suggestion presentation that suggests the execution of the movable body operation presentation may be executed before the execution of the movable body operation presentation. In this way, when the movable body operation suggestion presentation can be executed before the execution of the movable body operation presentation, a case is provided in which the light emission mode of the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning time flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation suggestion presentation from the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion presentation, and the expectation of a jackpot may be different between the case in which the light emission mode of the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning time flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation suggestion presentation from the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion presentation and ... is changed to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the effects being performed when the lighting state of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this modified example 135SG-4, an example is given of a form in which the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on whether the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash presentation to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement suggestion presentation from the start timing of the movable body movement suggestion presentation, or whether the light emission mode is changed to a light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a form in which the light emission (flashing) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends at the start timing of the movable body movement suggestion presentation and a form in which it ends at the start timing of the reach presentation, so that the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on when the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends. Furthermore, even if multiple timings are provided for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as part of the winning flash effect during one variable display, if the effect control CPU 120 is unable to stop the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F due to static electricity or the like, the later winning flash effect, including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, can be ended again at the end of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern confirmation command), which is a timing that comes after these timings.

By doing this, even if the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as part of the winning flash effect cannot be ended at the start of the movable body operation suggestion effect or the start of the reach effect, the later winning flash effect, including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, can be ended at the end of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, the display patterns for the specific display (pending display and active display) are display pattern α, which has the lowest jackpot expectation and is a white circle, display pattern β, which has a higher jackpot expectation than display pattern α and is a blue circle, and display pattern γ, which has a higher jackpot expectation than display pattern β and is a red circle, but the present invention is not limited to this, and display patterns other than display pattern α to display pattern γ may be provided as the display patterns for the specific display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 283-120 as modified example 135SG-5, in addition to the above-mentioned display patterns α to γ, the display patterns of a specific display may include a display pattern δ that is a white flashing circle that may change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any time during display as a pending display or active display (expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: low), and a display pattern ε that is a specific character-shaped circle that is more likely than display pattern δ to change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any time during display as a pending display or active display (expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: high).

In other words, for the display patterns of the pending display and active display in variant 135SG-5, among display patterns α to γ, display pattern γ (red display) is set to have the highest jackpot expectation, and display pattern α (white display) is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, for the jackpot expectation of display patterns δ and ε when there is no change to display pattern β or display pattern γ, the jackpot expectation may be set lower than that of display pattern α, or may be set higher than that of display pattern α and lower than that of display pattern β.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, display pattern δ and display pattern ε are provided as hold display and active display patterns that may change to display pattern β and display pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may also be cases where display pattern α changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a lower rate than display pattern δ and display pattern ε. Furthermore, there may also be cases where the hold display and active display of display pattern β changes to display pattern γ.

Furthermore, in the characteristic section 135SG, an example was given of a form in which the execution or non-execution of the pending display preview performance (a performance in which the pending display or active display is displayed in display pattern β or display pattern β) and the display pattern are determined independently of the decision to execute the flash performance when a prize is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination of the execution or non-execution of the pending display preview performance and the display pattern may be determined in relation to the decision to execute the flash performance when a prize is won.

For example, as shown in FIG. 283-120 for the aforementioned modified example 135SG-5, when it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the display mode of the pending display or active display based on the start winning may be decided as follows: display pattern ε at the highest rate, display pattern δ at a lower rate than display pattern ε, display pattern γ at a lower rate than display pattern δ, display pattern β at a lower rate than display pattern γ, and display pattern α at the lowest rate (display pattern decision rate when deciding to execute a winning flash effect: display pattern ε > display pattern δ > display pattern γ > display pattern β > display pattern α).

As described above, display patterns α to ε are provided as the display modes for the special displays (pending display and active display), and when the special display is displayed as display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the probability that the winning flash effect will also be executed is higher than when the special display is displayed as display pattern β or display pattern γ. Therefore, by executing the winning flash effect, the player can be drawn to the special display, and the player can also be drawn to whether the special display will change from display pattern δ or display pattern ε to display pattern β or display pattern γ, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, display pattern α is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed as a white circle, display pattern β is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed as a blue circle, display pattern γ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed as a red circle, and display pattern δ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed as a white blinking circle, so that the player can easily identify the difference between the specific displays by the display color and blinking pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, there is no description of the rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ may differ depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is executed. In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the winning flash effect is executed when the specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, a display pattern δ that flashes white is exemplified as a special mode of the specific display in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special mode of the specific display in the present invention (display pattern δ) may be a color other than white, blue, and red, which are the normal and special modes of the specific display in the present invention (for example, purple, black, etc.).

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, a form is exemplified in which a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ, thereby suggesting that the specific display will change to display pattern β or display pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute an action presentation that can change a specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ by acting on the specific display.

In particular, when an action effect is used, a plurality of action effects with different ratios of changing the specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ may be provided as the action effect (for example, a first action effect that can change the specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in display pattern δ, and a second action effect that has a different performance ratio from the first action effect and can change the specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher ratio than the first action effect) and when the second action effect is executed, a winning flash effect may be executed at a higher ratio than when the first action effect is executed.

By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the action performance will be executed as the first action performance or the second action performance, and by executing the flash performance when a prize is won, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation that the action performance will be executed as the second action performance.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, when the special display is displayed in display pattern ε, the probability that the flash effect will be executed when a prize is won is higher than when the special display is displayed in display pattern δ. Therefore, when the special display is displayed in display pattern ε and the flash effect is executed when a prize is won, the player's attention can be drawn to the change in the display pattern of the special display to display pattern β or display pattern γ, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned modified example 135SG-5, a display pattern ε that displays a character is provided as the display pattern of the specific display (pending display and active display), and an example is given in which the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ by executing an action performance on the character as the specific display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as modified example 135SG-6, a character as the specific display can act on another character, and as a result of this action, the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 283-121(A) and 283-121(B), when the number of first special reserved memories is three and is being variably displayed, a winning entry into the first start port (start winning) occurs, and based on the start winning, the display pattern of the reserved display based on the start winning is determined to display pattern ε as a reserved display preview performance, and an ally character is displayed as the fourth reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, and the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to an enemy character (see Figure 283-121(B-1)).

In this state, the variable display ends and a new variable display begins; that is, as shown in Figures 283-122(A) and 283-122(B), when the ally character (pending display of display pattern ε) displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the fourth pending display to the display position of the third pending display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Next, each time the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in Figures 283-122(C) and 283-122(D), when the ally character displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third pending display to the display position of the second pending display, and when the ally character displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the second pending display to the display position of the first pending display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Furthermore, when the variable display ends and the variable display that is the subject of the pending display preview performance begins, the ally character displayed in the display position of the first pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A, and the ally character directly acts on the enemy character within the active display area 135SG005A (a battle performance between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

As shown in Figures 283-123(G) and 283-123(H), if an ally character wins as a result of the battle performance, the ally character changes to an active display of display pattern β or display pattern γ in the active display area 135SG005A. On the other hand, as shown in Figures 283-123(I) and 283-123(J), if an ally character is defeated as a result of the battle performance, the enemy character or ally character changes to an active display of display pattern α in the active display area 135SG005A.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-6, when the reserved display is displayed in display pattern ε, an ally character as the reserved display of the display pattern ε can defeat an enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A, thereby changing the active display of the ally character to the active display of display pattern β or display pattern γ. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved display is displayed in display pattern ε, the ally character as the reserved display can be changed to the reserved display of display pattern β or display pattern γ by defeating an enemy character when the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D.

In addition, when the pending display is displayed in display pattern ε, the pending display of display pattern ε may be changed to the pending display (or active display) of display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher rate when both winning flash effects are executed than when neither winning flash effect is executed. In this way, not only can the player be drawn to the outcome of the battle between the ally character and enemy character as the pending display of display pattern ε, but the player can also be drawn to whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed during the battle, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Moreover, in the modified example 135SG-5 and the modified example 135SG-6, display patterns for the pending display and active display are exemplified by adding display pattern δ and display pattern ε to display pattern α through display pattern γ described in characteristic part 135SG, but when the pending display and active display are displayed using display pattern δ or display pattern ε, specific display start performance A or specific display start performance B can be executed in the same manner as when the pending display and active display are displayed using display pattern α through display pattern γ.

More specifically, when the reserved display or active display is displayed in display pattern δ, the specific display start effect A (see FIG. 283-19) is executed as in the case of display pattern α, and when the reserved display or active display is displayed in display pattern ε, the specific display start effect B (see FIG. 283-20) is executed as in the case of display pattern β or display pattern γ, or a specific display start effect in which the period during which the display of the reserved display or active display is completed is longer than that of specific display start effect A and shorter than that of specific display start effect B is executed. In this way, when the reserved display or active display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the player will be able to recognize the winning flash effect sound and the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from a timing before the display of the reserved display or active display is completed, similar to the characteristic part 135SG.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, a form was exemplified in which the winning flash effect is achieved by displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 together with the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed in stages in accordance with the progress of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in Fig. 283-124(A) and Fig. 283-124(B), if a win (start win) occurs in the first start port during variable display when there are three first special chart reserved memories, and a decision is made based on the start win to execute the reserved display notice performance and the winning flash performance, the previous winning flash performance will start as shown in Fig. 283-124(B).

As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, first, as shown in Fig. 283-124 (B), the speaker 8L, 8R starts outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at volume V1 (V1>V2), and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in Fig. 283-125 (C) and Fig. 283-125 (D), the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect image 135SG005E around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and starts blinking control at cycle T1 for the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, stick lamp 135SG00X, and button lamp 135SG009Y. In addition, with this blinking control, each lamp is lit at brightness C1, which is higher than brightness C2.

In addition, when the previous winning flash performance starts, as shown in Figures 283-125 (D), 283-126 (E), and 283-126 (F), an animation of character A appearing from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed as the specific display start performance B described above, along with an animation of character A moving to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an animation of character A attacking (acting) on the position in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D where the pending display is displayed (the position where the fourth pending display is displayed in the case of this feature part 135SG) is displayed.

After character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an appearance animation is displayed at the affected position, in which the pending display that is the subject of the ongoing winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) gradually appears from bottom to top (see Figures 283-20 (D-1) to 283-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display that has completed its appearance animation in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display like other pending displays, as a special display rotating display performance.

When the early winning flash performance ends, the late winning flash performance starts from the end timing. As shown in Fig. 283-127 (G) and Fig. 283-127 (H), the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2 > cycle T1), the game effect lamps 9 except for the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y start to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (flashing in the manner shown in Fig. 283-27 (A) to Fig. 283-27 (D)), and the image display device 5 starts to display the silhouette image 135SG005S of character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at regular intervals.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, at brightness C2 and cycle T2 is performed in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, a blue-based gradation if the background image is a daytime image, a red-based gradation if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The blinking period of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is the period T2, is longer than the previously mentioned period T1, but shorter than the previously mentioned period T0 (lamp blinking period length: T0>T2>T1). Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the later winning flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figures 283-128(I) and 283-128(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where a transparent black image 135SG005B is superimposed over the entire first display region 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 283-128(J), FIG. 283-129(K) and FIG. 283-129(L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the pattern determination command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a loss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash effect at the time of late winning in this modified example 135SG-7 is executed regardless of whether or not it is the pattern determination period. That is, as shown in FIG. 283-128(J), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

When the pattern determination period ends, a new variable display begins. At this time, in the image display device 5, the reserved display displayed at the top of the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one space to the right. In addition, output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 also begins.

Incidentally, in this variable display, as shown in Figures 283-129(K) and 283-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 may be displayed larger than in the previous variable display. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than in the previous variable display in this way, the silhouette image is displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIG. 283-130(M) and FIG. 283-130(N), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the pattern determination command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a loss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. The flash effect at the time of the later winning is executed even during the pattern determination period. That is, as shown in FIG. 283-130(N), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B overlapping on the image display device 5 even during the pattern determination period. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed overlapping with the active display area 135SG005A. In addition, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2.

In this modified example 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as the winning flash effect can be one of two silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes, and when the larger silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are displayed overlapping each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the larger silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A may be displayed overlapping each other only when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is executed. In this way, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the winning flash effect, and the silhouette image 135SG005S hides the active display area 135SG005A, i.e., the active display corresponding to the winning flash effect, so that a sense of surprise is given to the player and interest in the game is increased.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when a prize is won, and the overlapping manner between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A may or may not overlap depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a case where the overlapping area between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, a case where only a part of the active display area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire active display area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc.).

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A may overlap depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance is started, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed so as to overlap the reserved display that is the target of the winning flash performance displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, and during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed so as to overlap the active display that is the target of the winning flash performance displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. In this way, the player can easily recognize the reserved display and active display that correspond to the winning flash performance, and since the silhouette image 135SG005S hides not only the reserved display but also the active display, the player can be given an even greater sense of surprise and increase his interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, the display of silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when a prize is won is used to hide either the pending display or the active display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases where both the pending display and the active display are hidden by the display of silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when a prize is won.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, a form in which the silhouette image 135SG005S as the winning flash effect can be displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A or the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a pseudo consecutive effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the winning flash effect as exemplified in the characteristic part 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S as the winning flash effect can be displayed overlapping the special pattern (see FIG. 283-40, etc.) that stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C when the decorative pattern temporarily stops. By doing so, the special pattern for notifying the temporary stop is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S as the winning flash effect, which gives the player an element of surprise and increases his interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, as an example of a reversible display effect in the present invention, a form in which the special pattern stops in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a reversible display effect, an image different from the special pattern can be displayed on the image display device 5, and a silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when a prize is won can be displayed overlapping with that image.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, if a start winning occurs in the first start port during the execution of the reach performance of the Super Reach, the execution of the winning flash performance based on the start winning is not decided (determined not to be executed), but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 135SG-8, if a start winning occurs in the first start port during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display may be specified, and if the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the previous winning flash performance, the execution of the winning flash performance is not decided (determined not to be executed). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific display (hold display or active display) of the target of the winning flash performance from becoming difficult to understand by executing the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) when the remaining period of the variable display is short, such as less than or equal to the execution period of the previous winning flash performance.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-8, an example is given of a form in which the decision as to whether or not to execute the winning flash effect is based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decision as to whether or not to execute the winning flash effect may also be based on the remaining period of the variable display and a period other than the execution period of the previous winning flash effect (for example, a period of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.).

Furthermore, in this modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning occurs in the first start port while the variable display is being executed, the remaining period of the variable display is identified, and if the identified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the previous winning flash effect, the execution of the winning flash effect is not decided; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the identified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the previous winning flash effect, the winning flash effect may be executed from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a miss. In this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the Super Reach Reach effect and the winning flash effect due to the overlapping execution of the Super Reach Reach effect and the winning flash effect.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance are two light emission modes: blinking at brightness C1 and cycle T1 (light emission mode in the early winning flash performance) and blinking at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (light emission mode in the late winning flash performance). On the other hand, the light emission modes of the starting port lamp 135SG009S in the starting port lamp light emission performance are blue light emission at brightness C2 corresponding to the display pattern β and red light emission at brightness C2 corresponding to the display pattern γ. In other words, the characteristic part 135SG exemplifies a form in which the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance is the same as the number of light emission modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-9, the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance may be different from the number of light emission modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission performance.

In particular, as shown in modified example 135SG-5, by providing display pattern δ and display pattern ε as display patterns for the pending display and active display, and providing light emission modes corresponding to display pattern δ and display pattern ε as the light emission modes of the start gate lamp 135SG009S in the start gate lamp light emission performance, the number of light emission modes of the start gate lamp 135SG009S in the start gate lamp light emission performance may be made greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance. In this way, the variation in the light emission of the start gate lamp 135SG009S is increased, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is illuminated as a winning flash effect, and the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is illuminated as a starting gate lamp illumination effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-10, the illumination area where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is illuminated as a winning flash effect may be set larger than the illumination area where the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is illuminated as a starting gate lamp illumination effect.

As shown in FIG. 283-28, in the case where it is decided to execute both the winning flash effect and the pending display notice effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light from the time the starting winning occurs until the start of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect, while the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light from the time the starting winning occurs until the end of the variable display that is the target of the pending display notice effect (the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect). Therefore, by applying the modified example 135SG-10, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emitting light in response to the winning flash effect for an excessively long period of time, while maintaining the player's anticipation that the light emission mode of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S will control the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the start gate lamp 135SG009S is lit without blinking as the start gate lamp light-emitting effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the start gate lamp 135SG009S may be blinked as the start gate lamp light-emitting effect. Furthermore, when the start gate lamp 135SG009S is blinked as the start gate lamp light-emitting effect in this way, the blinking cycle of the start gate lamp 135SG009S may be made different from the blinking cycle (cycle T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. By making the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking cycle of the start gate lamp 135SG009S different in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the start gate lamp 135SG009S, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 283-28, when a flash effect is executed when a prize is won, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, etc. are temporarily turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 135SG-11, when a flash effect is executed when a prize is won, the brightness of a backlight etc. built into the image display device 5 may be temporarily lowered to reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and then the flash effect when a prize is won may be started. In this way, when a flash effect is executed when a prize is won, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced, making it easier for the player to recognize the start of the flash effect when a prize is won.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight etc. built into the image display device 5, that is, the brightness of the image display device 5 is changed to change the image display device 5 to a low visibility state with lower visibility than the previous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other forms of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 may include, in addition to reducing the brightness (brightness) of the image display device 5, temporarily stopping the display of the image on the image display device 5, operating the movable body 32 in front of the image display device 5, repeatedly operating the image display device 5 itself in the up and down direction, and increasing the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 to relatively reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5.

In other words, the "low visibility state" in the present invention includes a state in which the visibility of the image display device 5 is reduced compared to the immediately preceding state, and includes a state in which the visibility of the image is reduced by a method other than a reduction in the brightness of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 283-28, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect in response to the start winning, the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to blink. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-12, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect in response to the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to blink, and then the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed. In this way, the player can be made to quickly recognize that the start winning has occurred and that the winning flash effect has been decided to be executed by the blinking (light emission) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-12, a form has been exemplified in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, and then the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to have the winning flash lamp 135SG009F start blinking, and then the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display start.

In addition, in the characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 283-28, during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V1, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E. During the execution period of the late winning flash performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E. The above example shows a form in which the display of the win-time flash effect is repeatedly executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the later winning flash effect, when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, the following may be temporarily executed: output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from speakers 8L, 8R at volume V1, flashing of winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and display of effect image 135SG005E on image display device 5, just as during the execution period of the earlier winning flash effect. By doing this, even during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, just like in the earlier winning flash effect, making it easier for the player to recognize that the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is about to begin, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution of the later winning flash performance, when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance starts, the speakers 8L and 8R output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V1, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E temporarily, just as during the execution of the earlier winning flash performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance starts during the execution of the later winning flash performance, only one or two of the following may be executed: the speakers 8L and 8R output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V1, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 of this specification is one in which the probability of winning varies depending on the set value (Figs. 274 to 282), one in which a pending display notice performance and a winning flash performance can be executed based on the initial winning, and the change in the light emission mode as the winning flash performance varies depending on the lamp (characteristic section 135SG, Figs. 283-1 to 283-68), one in which the winning flash performance is stopped during the period in which the variable display pattern is determined (variant example 135SG-1, Figs. 283-69 to 283-89), one in which a super reach reach performance with different jackpot expectations can be executed and a movable body operation performance can be executed before a reach performance with a high jackpot expectation, and when the movable body operation performance is executed, the movable body operation performance a step-up presentation capable of being executed during variable display, and when a step-up presentation is executed when the winning flash presentation is not being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to emit light in a manner corresponding to the step-up presentation, while when a step-up presentation is executed during the execution of the winning flash presentation, the light-emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not changed from the light-emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash presentation (modification 135SG-3, Figs. 283-108 to 283-1 18), a movable body operation presentation can be executed before the start of the reach presentation of the super reach, and the expectation of a big win differs between the case where the light emission mode of the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F changes from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning time flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation presentation from the start timing of the winning time flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation and the case where the light emission mode changes to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation (variation example 135SG-4, FIG. 283-119), display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes for the reserved display and active display, and in response to the execution of the winning time flash presentation being determined by the start winning, any of the display patterns is selected as the display pattern for the reserved display and active display. The present invention discloses a pachinko machine that has a different ratio of when the reserved display pattern is determined (Modification 135SG-5, Fig. 283-120), when display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern for the reserved display, the display pattern ε changes to one of display patterns α to γ in response to the execution of the action presentation (Modification 135SG-6, Figs. 283-121 to 283-123), and in which the display mode of silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on image display device 5 changes in response to the progress of the winning flash presentation (Modification 135SG-7, Figs. 283-124 to 283-130). However, the present invention may be implemented by combining two or more of these multiple characteristic parts and variations.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, a pachinko gaming machine 1 is given as an example of a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game may be a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, or a general game machine, as long as it at least performs a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative pattern display area, 6A Winning ball device, 6B Variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R Speaker, 9 Game effect lamp, 10 General winning port, 11 Main board, 12 Performance control board, 13 Sound control board, 15 Relay board, 20 Special pattern LED board, 21 Gate switch, 22A First start port switch, 22B Second start port switch, 23 Count switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 Ball hitting operation handle, 31A Stick controller, 31B Push button, 32 Movable body, 35A Controller sensor unit, 35B Push sensor, 41 Passing gate, 50 Fourth pattern unit, 81, 82, 83 Solenoid, 100 Game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means;
A display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
A performance execution means is provided for executing a specific display performance for displaying the specific display and a specific light emission performance for causing the light emission means to emit light based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The light emission control means
When the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for moving the movable body;
When an error occurs, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for errors;
when an error occurs while controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for errors, and time data set in the luminance data table for moving the movable body is updated;
the effect execution means causes the light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect before the display of the specific display is completed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition;
The rate at which the specific light-emitting performance is controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting performance is executed than when the specific light-emitting performance is not executed,
The specific light-emitting performance is a performance in which, during a first period from when the specific light-emitting performance is started to a predetermined timing, the light-emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that is a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance, and during a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of a variable display that is a target of the specific light-emitting performance, the light-emitting means emits light in a specific manner that is less emphasized than the predetermined manner,
The specific timing is a timing prior to a timing at which a variable display result in the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is derived.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images